JP7787403B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Slot machines have long been known as one type of gaming machine (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-016110 A

The problem this invention aims to solve is to improve the performance of gaming machines.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses).
The present invention provides
In the advantageous zone, a predetermined lottery can be executed regarding advantageous games (for example, AT) that are advantageous to the player,
During the normal period, a predetermined lottery regarding advantageous games that are advantageous to the player is not executed,
There are recommended and non-recommended orders for pressing the stop switches (in order).
If the stop switch is operated in a non-recommended pressing order during a predetermined game in an advantageous zone ("prescribed game" excludes advantageous games that are advantageous to the player. The same applies below), the predetermined processing (AT lottery, update of the ceiling game number and periodic game number) related to advantageous games that are advantageous to the player will not be executed,
When the stop switch is operated in a non-recommended pressing order in a predetermined game in an advantageous zone, a recommended image regarding the recommended pressing order of the stop switch can be displayed based on the first operation of the stop switch,
When the stop switch is operated in a non-recommended pressing order in a specific game in the normal section, a recommended image regarding the recommended pressing order of the stop switch can be displayed based on the first operation of the stop switch,
The recommended image regarding the recommended pressing order of the stop switches can be displayed from the time when the display starts based on the first operation of the stop switch until a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after all the reels have stopped,
In a situation where a recommended image regarding the recommended order of pressing the stop switches is displayed, the display of the recommended image regarding the recommended order of pressing the stop switches can be terminated based on the operation of the start switch of the next game of the game in which the recommended image regarding the recommended order of pressing the stop switches is displayed;
The recommended image for the recommended order of pressing the stop switches is an image displayed in a part of the display area of a predetermined display device.
It is characterized by:

This invention can improve the performance of gaming machines.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the display window and each reel, and the pay lines, and (B) is a diagram showing the names of the symbol positions. FIG. 1 is a diagram (1) showing the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (1) showing condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (2) showing the condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 shows the condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a table of numbers in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a transition diagram of the game state in the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the change conditions of the game state in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the first left stop when the small win A1 condition device is activated, at the first left stop when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and at the first left stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated, and (2) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the second left stop after the first middle stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated. This is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the small win A1 condition device to the small win C2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the small win D1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This figure shows the symbol combinations in which only the symbol on the middle reel is in the "PB=1" configuration, among the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This figure shows the symbol combinations in which only the symbol on the right reel is in the "PB=1" position, among the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This figure shows the symbol combinations in which only the symbol on the left reel is in the "PB=1" position, among the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 01 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 02 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 03 is won. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 04 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 05 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 06 is won. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels in the second embodiment. FIG. 1 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the second embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a table of numbers in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a transition diagram of the game state in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the change conditions of the game state in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the first left stop when the small win A1 condition device is activated, at the first left stop when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and at the first left stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated, and (2) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the second left stop after the first middle stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the arrangement of symbols on reels in the first embodiment and modified examples of the second embodiment. In a modified example of the first and second embodiments, (1) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the first left stop when the small win A1 condition device is activated, at the first left stop when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and at the first left stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated, and (2) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the second left stop after the first middle stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated. In a variant of the first and second embodiments, (1) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 01 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 02 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 03 is won. In a variant of the first and second embodiments, (1) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 04 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 05 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 06 is won. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a main CPU, a ROM, and an RWM in a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored in the used area of the RWM in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored outside the used area of the RWM in the third embodiment. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored outside the used area of the RWM in the third embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 34. 10A is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board in the third embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a management information display LED in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and P in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 3, (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 6, and (C) is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) according to the third embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) according to a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a blinking request flag generation process (S_LED_FLASH) according to the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a blinking/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a rate display timer update process (S_RATE_TIME) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a blinking bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 5 in a modified example of the third embodiment. A diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signals output from output ports 3 and 6 in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit and the like for executing interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 10A and 10B show examples of programs for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission in the fourth embodiment, where (A) and (B) show programs for main processing, and (C) shows a program for interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start (M_PRG_START) in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, showing an example in which there is no interrupt disabled period in the main processing. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, showing an example in which there is an interrupt disabled period in the main processing. 13 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (Example 2) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an interrupt period when there is no interrupt inhibit period in the main process in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an interrupt disabled period in the main process is set between interrupt process 1 and interrupt process 2 in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt disabled period in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (Example 2) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt disabled period in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (Example 3) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt disabled period in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship (example 1) between the rotation of the reels and the detection and notification of errors in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 76 (Example 1). 13 is a time chart (example 2) showing a case in which a setting is changed after an error is detected during rotation of the reels in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 78 (Example 2). 13 is a time chart showing a case (example 3) in which multiple errors are detected during setting confirmation in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 80 (Example 3). This is a time chart (Example 4) showing the case where the first error and the second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 have stopped and before the start switch is operated (game begins)) in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 82 (Example 4). FIG. 13 is an external perspective view showing a main control board, a socket, and a main chip not yet mounted in the socket in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a plan view (viewed vertically downward from above) showing in more detail the main chip mounted in the socket. This is a view (front view) taken along the arrow Z1 in FIG. 85 . This is a view (side view) taken along the arrow Z2 in Figure 85. 1A is an enlarged view of the product name and company name, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Z3-Z3 in FIG. 1A. 10A and 10B are cross-sectional views showing the relationship between three types of step portions. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a positional relationship (example 1) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in a seventh embodiment, in which (A) is a plan view and (B) is a front view. 90A is a view seen from the Z4 direction in FIG. 90A, and FIG. 90B is a view seen from the Z5 direction (bottom side of the connector) in FIG. 90B. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a positional relationship (example 2) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, in which (A) is a plan view and (B) is a side view (enlarged view). 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the positional relationship (Example 3) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, in which (A) shows a front view (the mounting surface of the predetermined electronic component), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view. 94A and 94B are diagrams showing a modified example of Example 3 of FIG. 93, in which (A) shows a front view (the surface on which a predetermined electronic component is mounted), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor according to an eighth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in ROM in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in RWM in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an interrupt initial setting address in the eighth embodiment, in which (A) is a diagram showing data details of the interrupt initial setting address, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt priority levels and interrupt priority setting values. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating vector address values and data values stored in the vector addresses in the eighth embodiment, where (A) shows the vector address values, (B) shows the relationship between interrupt causes and automatically assigned values, and (C) shows an example of the data values of the vector addresses. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a process from when the power is turned on until when the device transitions to a user mode in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a program that starts from "0000H" in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example in which the vector address is set to "00F4H" in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing called by a RST command in the eighth embodiment, where (A), (B), and (C) show example 1, example 2, and example 3, respectively. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing program code area setting addresses and their data values in the eighth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the type of role, the probability of winning, the number of coins paid out for each order in which the stop switch is pressed, etc., and (b) is a diagram showing the ball-out performance of biased roles. This figure shows the flow of presentation (Example 1) when the stop switch is operated in the recommended pressing order during a favorable zone and non-AT in the ninth embodiment. This figure shows the flow of presentation (Example 1) when the stop switch is operated in a non-recommended pressing order during a favorable zone and non-AT in the ninth embodiment. This figure shows the flow of presentation (Example 2) when the stop switch is operated in the recommended pressing order during a favorable zone and non-AT in the ninth embodiment. This figure shows the flow of presentation (Example 2) when the stop switch is operated in a non-recommended pressing order during a favorable zone and non-AT in the ninth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating the transition of (image) layers when a recommended image is displayed in the ninth embodiment. This is a continuation of Figure 110. In the ninth embodiment, this is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when a bet operation and start switch operation are performed after the demo display (when no replay is won), where (a) shows the recommended button press order and (b) shows the non-recommended button press order. This is a time chart showing the image display, push button lamp state, and menu display when the start switch is operated 60 seconds after a replay is won in the ninth embodiment, where (a) shows the recommended button press order and (b) shows the non-recommended button press order. This is a time chart showing the image display, push button lamp status, and menu display when, in the ninth embodiment, a bet operation is performed within 3 seconds after the full stop and a start operation is performed 60 seconds after the full stop, where (a) shows the recommended push order and (b) shows the non-recommended push order. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process in the ninth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process in step S181 of Figure 115. A flowchart showing the performance group number setting process in step S182 of Figure 115. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between winning combinations (biased combinations) and the indication monitor and image display in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a temporary storage process 1 in the ninth embodiment. This is a flowchart continuing from Figure 119. 121 is a flowchart illustrating another example of FIG. 120. 13 is a flowchart showing a temporary storage process 2 in the ninth embodiment. This is a flowchart continuing from Figure 122. FIG. 23 is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine according to the tenth embodiment. A block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine in the tenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (1) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (2) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (3) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (4) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (5) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (6) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (7) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (8) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (9) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment. 22 is a time chart (1) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart (2) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart (3) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart (4) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the tenth embodiment. 20 is a time chart (5) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the tenth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (6) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the tenth embodiment. 20 is a time chart (7) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the tenth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (8) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the tenth embodiment. 20 is a time chart (1) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during door opening notification in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart (2) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during door opening notification in the tenth embodiment. 20 is a time chart (3) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during door opening notification in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing an example 1 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing a second example of error notification in the eleventh embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing an example 3 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing an example (Example 4) in which a power outage occurs during the occurrence of a first error in the eleventh embodiment. This is a time cheat showing an example (R5) in which a power outage occurs during the occurrence of the first error in the eleventh embodiment, and is a modified example of Figure 149. 23 is a time chart showing Example 6 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing Example 7 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing an eighth example of error notification in the eleventh embodiment. 23 is a time chart showing Example 9 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is an external perspective view showing a slot machine in a twelfth embodiment. 12A and 12B are diagrams showing a door key and a door key cylinder in a twelfth embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing the door cylinder, and (b) is a side view showing the state in which the door key is inserted into the door key insertion port. FIG. 23 is a front view showing the positional relationship between the door key insertion slot and the door key in the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, (a) is a front view illustrating various dimensions of a door key cylinder, and (b) is a plan view and a side view illustrating the dimensions of a power plug. This is a schematic diagram explaining the locking device in the twelfth embodiment, and is a front view seen from the inside of the front door toward the outside (player's side). This figure shows the state in the twelfth embodiment when the cam is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state of Figure 159. This figure shows the state in the twelfth embodiment when the cam is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state of Figure 159. FIG. 23 is a front view showing a structure for locking the door key in position after the front door is opened in the twelfth embodiment. 12A and 12B are diagrams showing the setting key and setting key cylinder in a twelfth embodiment, in which (a) is a side view showing the state in which the setting key is inserted, and (b) is a side view showing the state in which the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the relationship between the rotation angles of the door key and the setting key and the rotation torque corresponding to the rotation angles in the twelfth embodiment. A diagram showing the production stage in the thirteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the types of effects in the thirteenth embodiment. This figure shows the event names, number of cuts, and number of branches for performance 01, performance 03, and performance 14 in the thirteenth embodiment. This figure shows the event names, number of cuts, and number of branches for effects 15, 16, and 17 in the thirteenth embodiment. This figure shows the event names, number of cuts, and number of branches for effects 18, 20, 21, and 22 in the thirteenth embodiment. This figure shows the event names, number of cuts, and number of branches for effects 23, 24, and 25 in the thirteenth embodiment.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows:
A "bet" refers to placing a bet on medals (game media) to play a game. To bet medals, the player inserts actual medals into the medal insertion slot 47, or operates the bet switch 40 to bet credited (stored) medals.
On the other hand, "credits (also called "reserves")" differs from the above-mentioned "bet" and refers to the retention of medals inside the slot machine 10. In this specification, the term "credits" is used in a sense that does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "to deposit" refers to betting or crediting medals.
In addition, the "prescribed number" refers to the number of bets that can be made to start (execute) a game in question. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3," the game can be started with either the number of bets "2" or "3," and the game cannot be started with the number of bets "1."
For ease of explanation, the "specified number" may also be referred to as the "number of bets."
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to something other than the "prescribed number." For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3," when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the number of bets is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Cleaning" refers to the player inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 47 (described later).
A "care bet" refers to a player betting medals by caressing medals through the medal insertion slot 47.
The term "care credit" refers to a player crediting medals (adding credits) by care of medals through the medal insertion slot 47.

"Bet medals" refers to medals that have been bet on.
"Stored medals" refers to medals that have been credited (stored).
A "reserved bet" means that a player operates the bet switch 40 (described below) to bet some or all of the credited medals to play a game within the range that can be bet on that game.
"Automatic bet" refers to the automatic betting of the number of medals bet in the previous game by the control process of the slot machine 10 when a replay wins.
Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to a small win is displayed in a stopped state (meaning that it has stopped on an effective line; the same applies below), this is called a "winning small win."
On the other hand, the "Rules Concerning the Certification and Model Inspection of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules")" interprets that when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is the activation of a conditional device related to replay, and not a "winning".
However, in this application (this specification, etc.), replays are also treated as one of the roles (replay roles), and the stopped display of a pattern combination corresponding to a replay may be referred to as a "winning replay."
"Settlement" refers to paying out bet medals and/or saved medals to a player. In this embodiment, settlement processing is executed when a settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" refers to the payment of medals to a player based on the winning combination, or the payment of medals as a result of the above-mentioned settlement. When medals are paid out to a player based on the winning combination, this includes both storing the medals as credits (adding stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)) and actually paying out medals from a payout port (not shown). When paying out medals, for example, "50" medals are credited as the limit, and any medals exceeding the "50" credits are controlled so that they are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "grantment." Therefore, the "number of payouts" may also be referred to as the "number of grants."

In this embodiment, the "game medium" is a medal, but in the case of an enclosed (ECO) game machine, for example, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the game medium. Note that "electronic information" means, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the amount of money, and part or all of that electronic information can be credited to the game machine as game medium for playing games on the game machine.
In addition, "gaming media" may also be referred to as "gaming value."

Furthermore, when the gaming medium is electronic information, "paying out medals" means crediting (adding) the amount to a gaming medium credit device installed in the gaming machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not only mean actually paying out medals from hopper 35 (described below), but also includes the process of crediting (adding) electronic information equivalent to the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination to the gaming medium credit device.

When a game progresses from the "N-1"th game, to the "N"th game, to the "N+1"th game, etc. ("N" is an integer of 2 or greater), and the current game is the "N"th game, the "N"th game is referred to as the "current game." The "N-1"th game is referred to as the "previous game." The "N+1"th game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, a number with "(B)" added to the end (especially 8-bit numbers) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with "(H)", "H", or "h" added to the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a number representing "16" in decimal is written as "00010000(B)" in binary, and as "10(H)", "10H", or "10h" in hexadecimal. Furthermore, a number representing a decimal number is written as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether the number is binary, decimal, or hexadecimal, the final symbol "(B)", "(D)", "(H)", "H" or "h" may be omitted.

In addition, the probability that a desired symbol to be displayed on an active line can be stopped on the active line during the period from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving frames) is called the "pulling rate (PB)."
Furthermore, unless the stop switch 42 is operated at an appropriate position on the reel 31 (at an operation timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on an effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), it is not possible to stop the target symbol on an effective line (pulling it in to the effective line), which is called "PB≠1".
In contrast, "PB=1" means that the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) on the valid line regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42).

Furthermore, the "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on the activated line).
Furthermore, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to an operation mode in which a symbol combination that has a payout or a large number of payouts stops, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that transitions (promotes) to an advantageous RT stops, or an operation mode in which a symbol combination that does not transition (fall) to an unfavorable RT stops, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 results in an advantage/disadvantage in the game result (symbol combination that stops on an active line). The "advantageous operation mode" is also called the correct operation mode or the correct push order.

"Games in which the manner in which the stop switch 42 is operated can have an advantage or disadvantage in the game outcome" refers to, for example, a game in which multiple types of minor winning combinations (bells) with different payout amounts are won (a game in which the so-called "push order bell" is won), in which the type of minor winning combination (bell) that is won (the payout amount is different) depends on the manner in which the stop switch 42 is operated. It also refers to, for example, a game in which multiple types of replays are won (when multiple replays are won, i.e., a game in which the so-called "push order replay" is won), in which the RT shifts depending on the type of replay that is won.

The "instruction function" means a function of instructing the player on how to operate the stop switch 42. In principle, the instruction function is a function of instructing the player on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "indicating function" refers to a device that facilitates winning a prize.
It should be noted that "display" refers to visibly showing the content of an "instruction," and "notification" refers to informing the player of the content of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and an "notification function."

Furthermore, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be referred to as "activation of the instruction function," but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may also be referred to as "activation of the instruction function."
For example, if the push order bell has six options, the payout when the push order bell is won will be one, three, four, ten, or no prize (no win), depending on the push order.
Here, notifying the order of pressing buttons to win a 10-coin winning combination is a notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and of course, this corresponds to the "activation of the instruction function."
On the other hand, announcing the order of pressing buttons to win a 1-coin, 3-coin, or 4-coin prize may be considered as "announcement of an advantageous operation mode (activation of the instruction function)" or may not be considered as "announcement of an advantageous operation mode."

The pressing order to win a 4-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation because it does not result in a 10-coin combination. However, since the payout amount is "4" for a bet of "3" and the difference in coins for the game is "+1", this is an operation that increases the difference in coins, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation.
Similarly, the pressing order to win a 3-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation because it does not result in a 10-coin combination. However, since the payout amount is "3" for a bet of "3" and the difference in number of coins is maintained (the difference in number of coins is not decreased), it is not necessarily an unfavorable operation.

Similarly, the button press sequence for winning a 1-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it will not result in a 10-coin combination. Furthermore, this operation mode results in a payout of 1 for a bet of 3, reducing the difference in coins. However, this can also be considered an operation mode that will not result in a missed combination, so it may not be considered a disadvantageous operation mode.

In this embodiment, when the push order bell is won, the instruction function is activated to notify the player of the operation mode (correct push order) that will result in the winning combination with the highest payout amount.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) in the advantageous zone approaches the upper limit value ("2400 (D)") but there is still room for the number of remaining plays in the advantageous zone (advantageous zone clear counter value described later), when the push order bell is won, it is possible to announce the push order that will result in winning, for example, a 3-coin or 4-coin role, as described above, and control the difference counter value so that it remains at its current state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the activation of the instruction function is limited to one specified number. For example, suppose the specified number for activating the instruction function is set to "3." In this case, when playing with the specified number of "2" or "3" during AT, if play begins with a bet of "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. In contrast, if play begins with a bet of "2," the instruction function cannot be activated even if the push order bell is won.

The "game zone" comprises a "normal zone (non-advantageous zone)" and a "advantageous zone." Note that, although the 5.9 machine had a "waiting zone" (a game zone in which the player has won the advantageous zone lottery but has not yet transitioned to the advantageous zone), the current rules for the 6th generation machine do not provide a "waiting zone." However, this is not limited to this, and game zones other than the normal zone and the advantageous zone may also be provided.
A "normal interval" refers to a game interval in which signals related to the instruction function, specifically the push order instruction number and winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described below, are prohibited from being sent to a peripheral board (for example, sub-control board 80), and which does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (no processing related to the instruction function is executed).In other words, the normal interval is a game interval in which the operation mode cannot be notified.However, in addition to drawing lots for roles, a decision (by drawing lots, etc.) can be made as to whether or not to move to an advantageous interval.

In the normal section, the instruction function must not be activated, so push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a specified display device (LED, etc.) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and because signals related to the instruction function are not transmitted to peripheral boards, advantageous operation modes cannot be displayed (announced) by the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80.

On the other hand, the "advantageous zone" is a game zone that has the capability related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated), and specifically refers to a game zone in which, when the instruction function is activated, a signal related to the instruction function can be sent to the sub-control board 80 only when push order instruction information is displayed so that the instruction content (the operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified on the main control board 60. In other words, the advantageous zone is a game zone in which the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a game zone in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output effects that contradict the instructions given by the main control board 60 or the signals related to the instruction functions that it has received.

Furthermore, even in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 results in an advantage/disadvantage in the advantageous zone, the indication function does not need to be activated.
On the other hand, during the advantageous period, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 determines whether the game result is advantageous or disadvantageous, the indication function may be always activated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
The AT (notification game state) is a game state that notifies the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a game in which the game result is advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the AT is always executed during an advantageous period, and is never executed during a non-advantageous period.

In addition, the AT may always (100%) report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in games in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome, but it may also not report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even in games in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome, for example, to keep the payout rate for a specified period within a range specified by the rules.
For example, if the difference counter approaches its upper limit during the AT but there are still AT games remaining, it may be possible to temporarily not notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (not activate the instruction function) in order to extend the life of the AT.

The relationship between the advantageous zone and the AT can be set in various ways. First, for example, it can be set as "advantageous zone = AT". In this case, winning the advantageous zone and winning the AT are equivalent. The AT then starts from the first play in the advantageous zone. The AT also ends when the advantageous zone ends.

Secondly, the AT can be set to "AT ≠ advantageous zone."
In this case, the conditions for starting (executing) the AT are not met simply by moving to the advantageous zone, and whether or not to execute the AT is decided by lottery or the like, provided that the player is in the advantageous zone, and when it is decided to execute the AT, the AT is executed until the predetermined termination conditions of the AT are met. Note that, when the player is not in the AT upon moving to the advantageous zone, the main gaming state may be set to, for example, a normal zone, a premonition, CZ (chance zone (a period in which it is easy to win the AT)), etc.

When transitioning to a premonition after transitioning to an advantageous zone, the game may always transition to the real premonition, and transition to the AT after a predetermined number of plays of the real premonition have ended. Alternatively, at the time of transition to an advantageous zone or after transitioning to an advantageous zone, whether the premonition will be real or a false premonition may be determined by lottery or the like, and if it is determined to be a real premonition, the game may transition to the AT after the end of the real premonition. Also, if it is determined to be a false premonition, the advantageous zone may be maintained after the end of the false premonition, or the game may transition to the normal zone.
Furthermore, when the AT termination conditions are met, both the AT and the advantageous zone may be terminated. Alternatively, the AT may be terminated, but when the advantageous zone termination conditions are not met, the advantageous zone may continue (non-AT and advantageous zone). The same applies when the AT is started at the same time as the advantageous zone.

In addition, the number of times to play the advantageous zone is determined when the advantageous zone starts, and no lottery or the like relating to the advantageous zone is conducted during the advantageous zone.
Furthermore, when the advantageous zone starts, the initial number of times to play the advantageous zone is determined, and during the advantageous zone, a decision is made (by lottery, etc.) as to whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of times to play the advantageous zone.
Furthermore, a predetermined termination condition can be set for the advantageous zone, and when the predetermined termination condition for the advantageous zone is met, the advantageous zone can be terminated at that point even if there are remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone (or remaining number of plays in the AT).

Here, the "predetermined end condition" for the advantageous zone is when the difference counter value, described below, exceeds "2400 (D)," or when the advantageous zone clear counter (remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone), described below, reaches "0." When either of these conditions is met, it is determined that the end condition for the advantageous zone has been met, and the next play will transition to the normal zone (non-advantageous zone). In this case, even if the final play is an AT, the AT will also end at the same time as the advantageous zone ends.

In the advantageous zone, a later-described advantageous zone display LED (also referred to as a "zone indicator") 77 is lit. The advantageous zone display LED 77 may be lit all the time during the advantageous zone, or may be lit when a predetermined lighting condition is met after transition to the advantageous zone.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" refers to, for example, when the instruction function is activated in a game state in which the advantageous zone and the zone Sim payout rate exceeds 1. Once the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous zone.

The "interval Sim (simulation) payout rate" is the payout rate assuming that a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role always stops (even when a "PB ≠ 1" role is won, a symbol combination corresponding to that role stops), and assuming that when there are multiple symbol combinations corresponding to a winning role, the symbol combination most advantageous to the player (when the push-order bell is won, a high-value bell with the maximum payout) stops. The calculation of the interval Sim payout rate does not include payouts (number of payouts) resulting from the activation of a special device (such as activation of a 1BB). In addition, in a game in which a replay is won, if the number of bets is "3," the number of payouts is counted as "0." In a replay based on a winning replay (the next game after the game in which the replay was won), the number of bets is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts is "x" (where "x" is the number of payouts for that game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for a game in which a replay is won and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, "a gaming state in which the interval Sim ball payout rate exceeds '1'" includes an RT or main gaming state in which the interval Sim ball payout rate is set to exceed '1'.
Here, an example of an RT in which the interval Sim payout rate exceeds "1" is an RT in which the probability of winning a replay is set high.
Furthermore, if the main gaming states are normally CZ (chance zone), AT, pull-back zone, etc., then the AT is an example of a main gaming state in which the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1".

When the advantageous zone ends, more specifically, during the final play of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, for example, during the play end check process described below, or during the play start set process for the next play after the final play of the advantageous zone. When the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met, the advantageous zone display LED flag initialization process described below is executed, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off during the subsequent interrupt process.

Examples of "processing related to advantageous zones" include the following processing.
1) Lottery for (transition to) advantageous zone 2) Update (subtract, clear) advantageous zone clear counter
3) Update the difference counter (calculate, clear)
4) Updating the advantageous zone type flag 5) Controlling the advantageous zone display LED 77 (updating the advantageous zone display LED flag)

Furthermore, examples of "processing related to instruction functions" include the following processing.
1) Display of push order instructions (activation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (the AT ends when the remaining number of games reaches "0"), the AT game number counter is updated (subtracted, added, cleared)
4) In the case of a difference number management type AT (the AT is terminated when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), the AT difference number counter is updated (subtracted, added, cleared)

The current rules stipulate that processing related to advantageous zones and processing related to instruction functions can be executed in one specified number in one game state (RT), except for the following: In this embodiment, processing related to advantageous zones and processing related to instruction functions can be executed when the specified number is "3", and processing related to advantageous zones and processing related to instruction functions cannot be executed when the specified number is "2".
However, during the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone clear counter and the difference number counter must be updated regardless of the specified number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the lottery is not a winning combination (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIG. 26 described later), in other words, when the condition device is not operating, the process related to the advantageous zone (lottery for transition to the advantageous zone) is not executed. However, this is not limited to this, and the process related to the advantageous zone may be executed even if the result of the lottery is not a winning combination.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the result of the role lottery is a non-winning result, if the probability of not winning is a predetermined value or higher (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, 1/17,500 or higher), processing related to the instruction function (AT lottery processing) can be executed.

Furthermore, if the result of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone will be entered from the next game. Therefore, in a game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is executed and the advantageous zone is won, it is not possible to execute notification of the correct button press order (processing related to the instruction function).
However, it is acceptable to perform the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific role lottery result is obtained, it may be determined to be an advantageous zone and an AT (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also called the "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display") 74 consists of, for example, four LEDs, each with a two-digit identification segment (an LED that displays which of the five items below it is, using a predetermined symbol, etc.) and a two-digit ratio segment (an LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) repeatedly at predetermined intervals.
1) Advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) (7U.) or instruction-included role ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous role ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Ratio of special features (6000 games) (7 years)
4) Continuous feature ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Ratio of special features (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the reel ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the reel ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Here, "cumulative total" refers to the sum of the values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting continues until the number of games reaches at least "175,000." When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" games, the ratio is displayed, for example, by flashing, and when the number of games reaches "175,000" or more, the ratio is displayed, for example, by lighting. The cumulative total continues to add up until it reaches the value (upper limit) that can be stored in a specified address of RWM 53, even after the number of games reaches "175,000."
In addition, "6000 games" refers to the total number of games played over 15 sets, each set consisting of "400" games.

The "advantageous zone ratio" refers to the ratio (proportion) of time spent in the advantageous zone to the total playing zone (non-advantageous zone + advantageous zone). Specifically, for example, if the number of plays in the total playing zone is "1000" and the number of plays in the advantageous zone therebetween is "700", the advantageous zone ratio is "70%".
The "ratio of special features with instructions" is the sum of the number of payouts when the special feature is activated and the number of payouts in games where the instruction function is activated, divided by the total number of payouts. In slot machines that do not have special features, the "ratio of special features with instructions" is the number of payouts in games where the instruction function is activated divided by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts when the device is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by an instruction-included device counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated" is determined based on the operation of the stop switch 42 in accordance with the pressing order displayed by the activation of the instruction function; for example, when 10 bells are won, "10" is added to the instruction-included device counter.
On the other hand, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different order from the order displayed, and, for example, one bell is won, "1" is added to the instruction-included device counter.
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is pressed in a different order from the displayed order and a winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won), the instruction-included combination counter will not be incremented. In other words, the count value from the previous game will remain the same.

When a common bell is won during the AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when a push order bell is won, and push order instruction information (dummy) is displayed on the number of wins display LED 78, or the instruction function is not activated. If the instruction function is activated when a common bell is won, the number of payouts for that game is added to the instruction-included device counter.

On the other hand, if you win the common bell and do not activate the instruction function, the payouts for that game will not be added to the instruction feature counter. However, the total payouts will be added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify you of the correct button press order using images or sound.

In addition, special roles (roles) include BB (first type of role continuous operation device; first type big bonus), RB (first type of special role; regular bonus), and MB (second type of role continuous operation device; second type big bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can continuously operate RB. In other words, RB games are executed continuously during BB games. Also, during RB games, the probability of winning a small prize increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during RB games exceeds a predetermined number, the RB game ends. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during BB games exceeds a predetermined number, the BB game ends.

The MB is also a device that can continuously activate CBs (second-class special roles). In other words, CB games are played continuously during MB play. Furthermore, during CB play, regardless of the results of the lottery by the role selection means 61, all minor roles are won in duplicate, and for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31), the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Furthermore, CB play ends after one play, and when the number of medals paid out during MB play exceeds a predetermined number, the MB game ends.

When a special role is won, the winning information of the special role is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the special role that has been won stops on an effective line.
A game in which a special role is not won is called a "non-internal game," and a game in which a special role is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the special role that has been won does not stop on an effective line, i.e., a game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over, is called an "internal game."

Furthermore, if BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on an active line (BB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but BB game will start from the next game. During BB game, RB game will be executed continuously, increasing the probability of winning a small prize. Then, if the number of medals paid out during BB game exceeds a predetermined number, BB game will end, and from the next game, the game will return to the state it was in before switching to BB game.

Furthermore, if BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to BB does not stop on an active line, the winning information of BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on an active line. The game state in which the winning information of BB is carried over is called "inside BB."
The timing of the transition into the BB state can be set as appropriate. For example, the transition into the BB state may be made after all reels 31 have stopped in a game in which the BB has been won, or the transition into the BB state may not be made in a game in which the BB has been won, but may be made in the next game.

Furthermore, if you win RB and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on a valid line (RB wins), no medals will be paid out for the current game, but RB game will begin from the next game. During RB game, the probability of winning a small prize increases. Then, if the number of medals paid out during RB game exceeds a predetermined number, RB game will end, and from the next game, the game will return to the state it was in before switching to RB game.

Furthermore, if the RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on an active line, the RB winning information is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on an active line. The game state in which the RB winning information is carried over is called "inside RB."
The timing of the transition into the RB can be set as appropriate, similar to the timing of the transition into the BB. For example, in a game in which the RB is won, the transition into the RB may be made after all the reels 31 have stopped, or the transition into the RB may not be made in the game in which the RB is won, but may be made in the next game.

Also, if you win MB and the symbol combination corresponding to MB stops on an active line (MB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but MB game will start from the next game. During MB game, CB game is executed continuously. Then, when the number of medals paid out during MB game exceeds a predetermined number, MB game ends and from the next game, the game state before transitioning to MB game is restored.
Furthermore, if a player wins MB but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on an active line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on an active line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is called "inside MB."

"RT" means that the type (number) of roles to be drawn and the probability of winning are in a unique lottery state, and "RT transition" means that by transitioning from one RT to another RT, the probability of winning at least one replay to be drawn changes.
Therefore, the type of replay and its winning probability in one RT are values specific to that RT, and the types of replays and their winning probabilities will not all be the same in one RT and another RT. However, it is acceptable for the total value of the winning probabilities of replays to be the same in one RT and another RT.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0." Therefore, when "RT" is used in this specification, it includes non-RT.

"Continuous feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first-class special feature (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to the "number of payouts during 1BB activation to the total number of payouts."
For example, if the total number of payouts for 6000 games is 2000, and of that, the number of payouts when the "Type 1 special feature (RB)" is activated is 500, the "consecutive feature ratio (6000 games)" will be 25 (%).

Furthermore, the "role ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when a role is activated to the total number of payouts. Here, "role" includes the above-mentioned first-class special role, as well as second-class special role (CB), MB (also called 2BB. Second-class role continuous operation device. CB operates continuously.), and SB (single bonus).
In addition, for gaming machines that do not have the function corresponding to the above five items, the ratio segment will be displayed as "--".
For example, if the machine is not equipped with an "RB (first-class special feature)," there is no consecutive feature ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is displayed as "--."
As described above, the management information display LED 74 displays five types of ratios, but also displays a test pattern at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is met.

The rules also stipulate that the ratio of advantageous zones and the ratio of instructed features must be 70% or less. The rules also state that the ratio of features must be 70% or less, and that the ratio of consecutive features must be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether the value is within the range stipulated by the regulations.

A gaming machine with a specification that sets the advantageous zone ratio at 70% or less is called a "7U" type, and a gaming machine with a specification that sets the instruction-included device ratio at 70% or less is called a "7P" type. Gaming machines with advantageous zones are either the "7U" type or the "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included device ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of the advantageous zone to the total playing zone must be "70"% or less, but in the "7P" type, the number of payouts paid out by the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the device only needs to be 70% or less of the total number of payouts, and for example, the entire period of the playing zone, or most of it, may be the advantageous zone.

For example, when moving to a non-favorable zone, the probability can be set to 100% to win the favorable zone lottery, the probability can be set to almost 100% (for example, about 98%) to win the favorable zone lottery, or the probability can be set to a high probability (for example, 70%) to win the favorable zone lottery.
The "7U" type cannot refer to the set value itself to perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery), but the "7P" type can refer to the set value itself to perform processing related to the instruction function.

In addition, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, similar to that of a slot machine (a reel-type gaming machine). It sequentially displays the real-time (currently being measured) base value for every 60,000 out balls (the "base value" indicates the number of safe balls per 100 out balls), as well as the base values for the previous, second, and third times before for every 60,000 out balls. For example, the identification segment for the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification segment for the base value one time before is displayed as "b1.", the identification segment for the base value two times before is displayed as "b2.", and the identification segment for the base value three times before is displayed as "b3."
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is not limited to slot machines among gaming machines, but is also applicable to pachinko gaming machines.

First Embodiment
The first embodiment is a slot machine in which, in a game in which multiple types of small prizes (bells) with different payout numbers are won (a game in which the so-called ``push order bell'' is won), the type of small prize that is won (the pattern combination that stops and displays on the valid line) differs depending on the operation mode (push order) of the stop switch 42, resulting in an advantage/disadvantage in the game result (the number of payout coins).
Hereinafter, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The slot machine 10 includes a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 as typical control boards.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (this does not mean that it is equipped with only the components shown in FIG. 1).

1, a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progression, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection part to which signals from the operation switches and the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection part to which signals are transmitted to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In Figure 1, input peripheral devices are indicated by arrows pointing from the signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 50, and output peripheral devices are indicated by arrows pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game, etc.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC with calculation functions) installed on the main control board 50, which executes programs and performs calculations necessary for the progress of the game, and specifically performs the drawing of winning roles, the drive control of the reels 31, and the payout when a prize is won.

An MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. The RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be mounted inside the MPU or may be provided externally.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85 is also mounted on a sub-control board 80, which will be described later. The RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be provided externally instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted through a medal insertion slot 47 are sent to the inside of the medal selector.
As shown in Figure 1, the medal selector is provided with (but is not limited to) a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44 (a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b), which are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
A medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is first detected by the passage sensor 46 .

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the path sensor 46. The blocker 45 is used to permit or prohibit the insertion of medals. When medal insertion is prohibited, the blocker 45 forms a medal path that returns medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. On the other hand, when medal insertion is permitted, the blocker 45 forms a medal path that guides medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 is composed of, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening (the opening leading to the medal return port) formed in part of the medal path within the medal selector to form a medal path for guiding medals toward the hopper 35, and an actuator for driving the switching member.

The blocker 45 does not allow medal insertion during play (from the time the reels 31 start to spin until all reels 31 stop, and, in the case of a winning combination, until the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination). In other words, the blocker 45 allows medal insertion at least when no game is being played.

In the medal selector, a throw-in sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the throw-in sensor 44 consists of a pair of throw-in sensors 44a and 44b arranged a predetermined distance apart, and is configured so that a medal is detected by one throw-in sensor 44a and then detected by the other throw-in sensor 44b a predetermined time later. Whether the correct medal has been thrown in is determined based on the timing at which the pair of throw-in sensors 44 turn on and off, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the operation switches operated by the player, namely, a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, center, right) stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 43.
Here, "operation switch (or simply "switch")" refers to a device (including an electrical circuit and/or electrical components) that switches an electrical signal on/off based on (receiving external force from) the operation of an operating body by a player (operator), and does not limit the shape of the operating body operated by the player.

When the operation switch is in the OFF state, for example, light from the light-emitting element continues to be incident on the light-receiving element (when the light-receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the OFF state). Then, when the operation switch (or its operating object) is operated by a player or other person, the light from the light-emitting element does not enter the light-receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has entered the ON state is sent to the main control board 50. Note that the opposite to the above may also be configured so that when the operation switch is in the OFF state, light from the light-emitting element does not enter the light-receiving element, and the switch enters the ON state when light from the light-emitting element enters the light-receiving element.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is lever-shaped (hence, it is also referred to as the "start lever (switch) 41"), and the operating bodies of the bet switch 40, stop switch 42, and settlement switch 43 are push-button-shaped (hence, they are also referred to as the "bet button (switch) 40," "stop button (switch) 42," and "settlement button (switch) 43").

In addition, although not shown in Figure 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation acceptance of that operation switch is in an permitted state, the LED corresponding to that operation switch, for example, emits blue light, and when the operation acceptance of that operation switch is in a prohibited state, the LED of that operation switch, for example, emits red light, thereby indicating to the player the permitted/prohibited state of that operation switch.

Specifically, for example, when all reels 31 are spinning and a stop switch 42 is ready to be operated, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 light up blue, indicating to the player that they are ready to be operated. When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. The remaining stop switches 42 then become operable after the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the stopped reel 31 ends and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 turns off. Therefore, during this time, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 light up red. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 turns off, the LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have already been operated continue to light up red, but the LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not yet been operated light up blue.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by a player when placing a bet on the accumulated medals for the current game. In this embodiment, the bet switch 40 includes a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (the maximum number, the specified number).
However, this is not limiting, and a bet switch for two coin bets may also be provided.

The specified number is predetermined depending on whether the reel is inactive or active, for example. Specifically, it is set to three medals when the reel is inactive, SB is active, or 1BB is active, and two medals when 2BB is active, etc. Operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice allows two medals to be inserted, and operating it three times allows three medals to be inserted. Also, when the specified number is three medals, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows three medals to be inserted at once, and when the specified number is two medals, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows two medals to be inserted at once. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when less than the specified number has already been bet, betting processing is performed so that the number of medals bet becomes three.

The start switch 41 is an operating switch that is operated by the player when starting all of the reels 31 (left, center, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three reels 31 (left, center, right), and are operation switches that are operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reel 31.
Furthermore, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when paying out medals bet and/or accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected to each other, but the relay board is not shown in FIG. 1. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not necessarily connected directly to each other by harnesses or the like, but may be connected via other separate boards (relay boards or the like). For example, one or more other separate boards (relay boards or the like) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquisition number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

In addition, the winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the number of winnings won by the player) when a winning combination is achieved, and like the credit number display LED 76, it is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but when an error occurs, it also functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, in a game in which the push order is notified during the AT, the winning number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (notifies an advantageous push order). Therefore, the winning number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the number of wins, error details, and push order instruction information. However, this is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED or the like that displays push order instruction information.
During the AT, notification of the advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (a stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 of the symbol display device and the like.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, motors 32 that drive each of the reels 31 , and a reel sensor 33 that detects the position of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65, which will be described later.
Here, the reels 31 consist of a left reel 31, a center reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, the stop switch 42 operated to stop the center reel 31 is the center stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.
The left reel 31 may be referred to as the first reel 31, the center reel 31 may be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 may be referred to as the third reel 31.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and has a reel tape attached to its outer periphery on which a plurality of types of symbols (symbols that make up symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed.
Each reel 31 is provided with one index (or two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape on the circumferential surface of the reel 31, for example, and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position or whether it has made one rotation. Each index is detected by a reel sensor 33. The signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When an index detects (breaks) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is sent to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

In addition, the symbol at the reference position at the moment the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in advance in ROM 54. This makes it possible to detect the symbol at the reference position at the moment the index is detected. Furthermore, from the moment the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, it becomes possible to determine how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 needs to be driven to stop the symbol on the pay line, counting from the symbol at the reference position.

The main control board 50 is also electrically connected to a medal payout device. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when medals in the hopper 35 are paid out through a payout opening, and a payout sensor 37 that detects medals paid out from the hopper motor 36.

The medals that are received through the medal insertion port 47 and accepted (determined to be normal) are configured to be stored in the hopper 35 .
In this embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 comprises a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged a predetermined distance apart. When a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member is moved by the medal. The movement of the predetermined moving member turns the payout sensors 37a and 37b on and off. Whether the medal has been paid out correctly is determined based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b have been turned on and off within a predetermined time range.

For example, if the pair of payout sensors 37 are not detected as being on even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an ON signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

When a player starts a game, they either insert pre-credited medals by operating the bet switch 40 (reserve bet) or deposit medals through the medal slot 47 (deposit bet). When the start switch 41 is operated after the specified number of medals for that game have been bet, a signal is generated and input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, described below) performs a lottery using the role selection means 61 and controls the drive of all motors 32 to rotate all reels 31. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motors 32 in this way, the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, the player presses a stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal is generated and input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, described below) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to that stop switch 42, and stops the reel 31 associated with that motor 32 in accordance with the lottery result of the role lottery means 61 (the result determined by the internal lottery means).

The game result for this game is displayed based on the symbol combinations that appear when all reels 31 stop. Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on an active line (when that winning combination is achieved), medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role selection means 61. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of winning numbers. Here, "lottery of winning numbers by the role lottery means 61" is the same as "internal lottery" in the Amusement and Entertainment Act Regulations (regulations regarding the certification and model inspection of gaming machines, etc.; hereinafter simply referred to as "the Regulations"). The lottery result by the role lottery means 61 is the same as "the result determined by internal lottery" in the Regulations. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the Regulations.
When the winning number is determined by the role lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the role condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition devices and role condition devices that will be operable in the game are determined. For this reason, the role lottery means 61 is also called a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning role determination (lottery or selection) means, etc.

The winning combination selection means 61 includes, for example, a random number generation means (such as a hardware random number generator) for the selection, a random number extraction means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and a winning number determination means for determining the winning number based on the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means.

The random number generating means generates random numbers within a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random numbers are generated by a counter that counts once every 200 n (nano) seconds, with the range of "0" to "65535" being counted as one cycle, and the counter continues to count random numbers while the slot machine 10 is powered on.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, which in this embodiment is when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means compares the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with the lottery table described below to determine the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs.

The winning flag control means 62 controls the on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each role based on the lottery results by the role lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When a role is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag for that role is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that winning roles can occur when there is one winning role (single win) or when there are multiple winning roles (multiple wins).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects (determines) the push order instruction number (the number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the result of the lottery for the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (when the push order bell or push order replay is won).
The "push order" of the selected push order instruction number means the push order that is advantageous to the player (correct push order). For example, when the push order bell is won, it refers to the push order that will result in a high bell (correct push order). Also, when a replay is won multiple times, it refers to the push order that will advance to an advantageous RT or will not cause the player to fall into an unfavorable RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with its own unique push order instruction number.
Then, when a push order bell or push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically information such as "= *"("*" = 1, 2, ...), on the above-mentioned winning number display LED 78. In this way, the function of displaying push order instruction information when a condition device with an advantageous push order is activated is also called an instruction function.
Also, when the push order bell or push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 sends a command corresponding to the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined).
When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it displays the correct button press order on the image display device 23.

Note that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can only be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous zone (AT). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 during the normal zone, that push order instruction number will not be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Note that it is not necessary to select a push order instruction number during the normal zone.

The effect group number selection means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number, and a number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
Here, the effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Then, when the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of that game, and the main control board 50 transmits the selected effect group number to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning role based on the received effect group number. Unlike the above-mentioned push order instruction number, the effect group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.

In addition, the main control board 50 does not send the winning number for that game to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number for that game. However, the sub-control board 80 receives an effect group number for each game, and is therefore able to output effects based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 will not announce the correct push order based on the effect group number. In contrast, during AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the main control board 50 sends a push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. This allows the sub-control board 80 to announce the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

When the reel control means 65 receives a command to start the rotation of the reels 31, particularly in this embodiment when it detects the operation of the start switch 41, it controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating.
Furthermore, after the winning number is determined by the role lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off state of the winning flag for the current game and selects a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off state of the winning flag, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, determines the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and drives and controls the motor 32 to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 controls the reels 31 to stop within the range of the reel 31 stop control so that a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role (a role for which the winning flag is on) can be stopped on an active line, and also controls the reels 31 to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to a role other than a winning role (a role for which the winning flag is off) cannot be stopped on an active line.

Here, "within the range of the stop control of the reel 31" means the range of the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops or the range of the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (number of moving symbols (frames)).
In this embodiment, the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed of approximately 80 rotations per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 are stopped is set to within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation (for example, the center reel 31). As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 are stopped is set to four symbols, except for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a specified reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to within 75 ms. As a result, for a specified reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

When any of the symbols within the range of stop control of the reel 31 is to be stopped on a predetermined effective line at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, the symbol is controlled to be stopped on the predetermined effective line when the stop switch 42 is operated.
That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 until the reel 31 is stopped, thereby controlling the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number to stop on the predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and a symbol combination of a winning combination not corresponding to the winning number stops on an effective line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 when the reel 31 stops, so that the symbol combination of a winning combination not corresponding to the winning number does not stop on an effective line (kick-off stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which multiple winning combinations are achieved (for example, when the push order bell is achieved), the priority of the winning combinations is predetermined according to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and the timing of operation of the stop switch 42, and the pulling-in stop control of the symbol associated with the most prioritized combination is performed according to the predetermined priority.

The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 that has stopped on the pay line corresponds to any winning combination when the reels 31 have stopped.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on an active line. Specifically, based on the condition device operated in the game and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the winning determination means 66 determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line before the reels 31 actually stop, or determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line after the reels 31 have stopped.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information (control commands) required for the performance to be output by the sub-control board 80 .
Control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, push order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number with the correct push order is won), performance group number, RT (game status) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning role, etc.

In FIG. 1, a sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during play and during game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) transmits the information (control commands) necessary for outputting the performance to the sub-control board 80 in one direction via parallel communication.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used together.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the following performance peripherals such as the performance lamps 21 shown in Fig. 1 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the performance peripherals are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data, etc., that the sub-CPU 85 acquires when controlling the presentation.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data, such as those used when drawing lots for effects, as performance data.

The effect lamps 21 are, for example, LEDs, and light up in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. The effect lamps 21 include back lamps that are located on the inner periphery of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reels 31 (three consecutive symbols visible through the display window) from behind, fluorescent lights that illuminate the symbols on the reels 31 from above, and frame lamps that are located in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and flash when a winning combination is achieved.

The speaker 22 also outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is met in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 consists of an LCD display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various presentation images during play (such as the correct button press sequence, presentations corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game), game information (such as the number of plays and number of coins won when the device is activated or during the advantageous zone (AT)), etc.

In this embodiment, the "special role (role)" includes "1BB (first type role continuous operation device; first type big bonus)" and "RB (first type special role; regular bonus)." Therefore, the "special game" includes "1BB game" and "RB game."
In this embodiment, "1BB" includes two types: "1BB-A" and "1BB-B." Hereinafter, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B" will be collectively referred to as "1BB."

During the 1BB game, the RB game is executed continuously.
In this embodiment, a symbol combination corresponding to RB is not set, so that during a 1BB game, the RB game is continuously executed without a symbol combination corresponding to RB being displayed statically.

During the RB game, a player wins "1-piece role ALL" or "small role ALL" in a lottery by the role lottery means 61. As a result, during the RB game, i.e., during the 1BB game, the probability of winning a small role is higher than during the non-internal and internal 1BB games.
Furthermore, during RB play, the specified number (the number of medals bet that can start the game) becomes "3", and the "1 medal role ALL" is won with a probability of "60535/65536", and "1" medal is paid out. Therefore, during RB play, that is, during 1BB play, the player's medals are decreasing.
Furthermore, the RB game ends when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end condition of the 1BB game is met. That is, the end condition of the RB game is set to "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end condition of the 1BB game is met.

The 1BB game continues until the total number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds 210, and ends when the total number of medals acquired exceeds 210. In other words, the end condition of the 1BB game is set to be when the total number of medals acquired exceeds 210.
When the RB game is finished, if the condition for finishing the 1BB game is not satisfied, the RB game is executed again. In this way, the RB game is executed continuously during the 1BB game.
Also, when the RB game ends and the end condition of the 1BB game is met, the 1BB game ends and the game moves to a non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the conditions for ending the 1BB game are met during the RB game, the RB game is ended, the 1BB game is ended, and the game is shifted to the non-internal state.

The role selection means 61 also determines a "winning number" by lottery. For this reason, the role selection means 61 is also referred to as a "winning number selection (determination, selection) means." Furthermore, once a winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to that winning number is generated. Once the condition device number is generated, the condition device corresponding to that condition device number is activated, and the symbol combination of the role corresponding to the activated condition device can be displayed stopped on the pay line (the role will win).

In addition, the "condition device number" includes a "gimmick condition device number" and a "small win and replay condition device number."
Furthermore, the "gimmick condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a special role (gimmick), and in this embodiment, includes "1" to "2" as shown in FIG. 9 described later.
Furthermore, the "small win and replay condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a small win or a replay, and in this embodiment, includes numbers "1" to "18" as shown in Figures 6 to 8 described later.

In addition, when a special role is won, a special role condition device corresponding to the winning of the special role becomes operable. For example, when 1BB is won, a 1BB condition device becomes operable.
Furthermore, when a small win is won, a small win condition device corresponding to the win of the small win becomes operable, and when a replay is won, a replay condition device corresponding to the win of the replay becomes operable. For example, when a small win A1 is won, a small win A1 condition device becomes operable.

When a special role that can carry over winning information to the next game or later is won, the winning information of the special role is carried over to the next game until a symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed on an effective line (the special role wins).
Furthermore, when a special combination is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line, this is called "inside". In other words, a game in which the winning information of the special combination is carried over is called "inside".

In contrast, a game in which the winning information of a special role that can be carried over to the next game or later is not won is referred to as a "non-internal game." In other words, a game in which the winning information of a special role is not carried over is referred to as a "non-internal game."
In this embodiment, the game in which the special role is won is included in the "non-internal" category, but the game in which the special role is won may also be included in the "internal" category.
"1BB" is a special role that allows winning information to be carried over to the next game or later, and when "1BB" is won but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the active line, it is called "inside 1BB."

In addition, a “special game” is also referred to as a “gimmick activation.” For example, a “1BB game” is also referred to as a “1BB activation,” and a “RB game” is also referred to as a “RB activation.”
Furthermore, "when the reel is not activated" includes a state in which the reel condition device is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to the activated reel condition device is not displayed stopped on the activated line.
For example, when the "1BB condition device" is not activated, or when the "1BB condition device" is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the active line, this is called "when 1BB is not activated." In other words, when "1BB" is not won, or when "1BB" is won but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the active line (inside 1BB), this is "when 1BB is not activated."

Also, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, "1BB" comes in two types, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B", and "gimmick condition device" comes in two types, "1BB-A condition device" and "1BB-B condition device".
Furthermore, the winning combination of the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B".

Furthermore, when the "1BB-A condition device" is not inside, a lottery is held only when two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2"), and no lottery is held when three medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3"). In other words, when the "1BB-A condition device" is not inside, it is subject to a lottery when two medals are inserted, but is not subject to a lottery when three medals are inserted.
In contrast, with the "1BB-B condition device," when not inside the device, a lottery is held only when three medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3"), and no lottery is held when two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2"). In other words, when not inside the device, the "1BB-B condition device" is subject to a lottery when three medals are inserted, but is not subject to a lottery when two medals are inserted.

Furthermore, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on an active line (a prize can be won).
Furthermore, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" stops and displays on an active line, it results in a "1BB-A win" and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game will transition to "1BB-A game" (when 1BB-A is activated) from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on the active line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-A internal".
When two medals are inserted "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on the valid line (can win a prize), but when three medals are inserted "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line.

Furthermore, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on an active line (a prize can be won).
Furthermore, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" stops and displays on an active line, it results in a "1BB-B win" and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game will transition to a "1BB-B game" (when 1BB-B is activated) from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed stopped on the active line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-B internal".
Furthermore, when three medals are inserted "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on the valid line (can win a prize), but when two medals are inserted "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line.

Furthermore, the "setting value" relates to the degree of advantage given to the player, and although not shown in the figure, in this embodiment, there are six levels, from setting 1 to setting 6. The higher the setting value, the higher the degree of advantage given to the player.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off, and then the power is turned on in this state, the device enters a setting change state (setting change mode) in which the setting values can be changed. At this time, an initialization process (RWM clear process) is executed to initialize a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the setting value cannot be changed, but the device enters a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start condition of the "advantageous zone" is set to be that in the non-advantageous zone, one of the winning numbers "1" (small win A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device) is won (determined) by lottery by the role lottery means 61.
In other words, in the non-advantageous zone, if the winning number selected by the role selection means 61 is any of the winning numbers "1" (small role A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device), the game will move to the advantageous zone.

In addition, in this embodiment, the conditions for ending the "advantageous zone" are set as follows: the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous zone clear counter (the remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone) reaches "0", or the notification game (AT) ends.
In other words, when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2,400 coins, the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches 1,500 plays, or the notification game (AT) ends, the advantageous zone ends and the game transitions to a non-advantageous zone.

In addition, in this embodiment, during non-internal play, the probability of winning any of the winning numbers "1" (small win A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device) in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is "50536/65536".
Therefore, even if the advantageous zone ends and the player moves to a non-advantageous zone, if the player subsequently plays "1" to "2" and wins one of the winning numbers "1" (small win A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device), the player will move to the advantageous zone.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an AT lottery is executed when the winning number "13" (small role G condition device) to winning number "15" (small role I condition device) is won (determined) in the lottery by the role lottery means 61. The "small role G condition device" to "small role I condition device" have a relatively low probability of activation (winning), and are called "rare roles" or "rare small roles". The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "small role G condition device" to "small role I condition device" are activated is set to "10"%.
Furthermore, if the player wins the AT lottery, he/she is granted the right to play the notification game. If the player has the right to play the notification game and the conditions for starting the notification game are met, the notification game starts.

In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of times the notification game can be played is set to 50. When the right to play the notification game is granted and the conditions for starting the notification game are satisfied, the notification game is played for 50 times.
Furthermore, if a player already has the right to play the notification game and wins the AT lottery, the number of rights to play the notification game will be increased (added). For example, if a player has "2" rights to play the notification game, the player will be able to play the notification game for "(50 games + 50 games =) 100 games."

Furthermore, if the AT lottery is won while the notification game is being played, the remaining number of times the notification game is played is increased (added). For example, if the AT lottery is won when the remaining number of times the notification game is played is "20," the remaining number of times the notification game is played becomes "(20 games + 50 games =) 70 games."
In addition, the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order can be performed only during the advantageous zone, and the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order cannot be performed in the non-advantageous zone. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order are performed, it is considered to be a advantageous zone.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 in this embodiment.
2, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is made up of 20 symbols. That is, each reel 31 has 20 symbols.
2 also shows the symbol numbers. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol number "0" is "Blue 7."

In this embodiment, the time from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reels 31 stop is set to within 190 ms. As a result, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reels 31 stop is four symbols.
For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the "replay" symbol "1" on the left reel 31 passes through the active line, the symbol can move up to a maximum of "4" from that symbol, and stop on the active line up to the "red 7" symbol "5".
Therefore, if "4" specific symbols are arranged at intervals of "5" symbols on one reel 31, the specific symbols can always be stopped on an effective line no matter when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replays" are arranged at numbers "1,""6,""11," and "16." That is, on the left reel 31, "Replays" are arranged at intervals of "4" symbols, with an interval of "5." Therefore, for the left reel 31, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, "Replays" can always be stopped on an active line.
In this way, a symbol arrangement that can always stop the target symbol on the pay line regardless of when the stop switch 42 is operated is called a "PB=1" arrangement.
In contrast, a pattern arrangement in which the target pattern cannot be stopped on the valid line unless the stop switch 42 is operated at the appropriate timing (within the range of the maximum number of moving patterns from the valid line) is called a ``PB≠1'' arrangement.

On the left reel 31, in addition to "Replay", "Bell" and "Watermelon" are also arranged as "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the left reel 31, "Replay,""Bell," and "Watermelon" are arranged consecutively (in order) in four positions. Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replay,""Bell," and "Watermelon" are arranged consecutively at numbers "1" to "3," consecutively at numbers "6" to "8," consecutively at numbers "11" to "13," and consecutively at numbers "16" to "18."

Furthermore, on the left reel 31, the "blue 7" at number "0," the "red 7" at number "5," the "black BAR" at number "10," and the "white BAR" at number "15" combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "blue 7," "red 7," "black BAR," or "white BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on a pay line.

Similarly, on the left reel 31, the "Cherry" symbols "4," "9," and "14," as well as the "Blank" symbol "19," combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "Cherry" or "Blank" symbol on the left reel 31 can be stopped on a pay line.

Furthermore, on the left reel 31, "Cherry/Blank" is arranged above "Watermelon", "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is arranged above "Cherry/Blank", and "Replay" is arranged above "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR". In other words, on the left reel 31, "Cherry/Blank" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged between "Watermelon" and "Replay".
As a result, on the left reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR,""Replay,""Bell,""Watermelon," and "Cherry/Blank" are arranged consecutively (in order) at four positions. Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR,""Replay,""Bell,""Watermelon," and "Cherry/Blank" are arranged consecutively (in order) at positions "0" to "4," as well as at positions "5" to "9,""10" to "14," and "15" to "19."

Also, on the center reel 31, "cherry", "bell", "replay" and "watermelon" are each in the "PB=1" configuration.
Furthermore, on the center reel 31, "Cherry,""Bell,""Replay," and "Watermelon" are arranged consecutively in four positions. Specifically, on the center reel 31, "Cherry,""Bell,""Replay," and "Watermelon" are arranged consecutively from number "0" to number "3," also from number "5" to number "8," also from number "10" to number "13," and also from number "15" to number "18."

Furthermore, on the center reel 31, the "blue 7" at number 4, the "red 7" at number 9, the "black BAR" at number 14, and the "white BAR" at number 19 combine to form a "PB=1" configuration of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the center stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "blue 7," "red 7," "black BAR," or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 can be stopped on an active line.

Also, on the center reel 31, the "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is arranged between the "Watermelon" and the "Cherry" (above the "Watermelon" and below the "Cherry").
As a result, "Cherry,""Bell,""Replay,""Watermelon," and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged consecutively (in order) at four positions on the center reel 31. Specifically, on the center reel 31, "Cherry,""Bell,""Replay,""Watermelon," and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged consecutively (in order) at positions "0" to "4," as well as at positions "5" to "9,""10" to "14," and "15" to "19."

Also, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry" are each in the "PB=1" configuration.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay,""Bell,""Watermelon," and "Cherry" are arranged consecutively (in order) in four positions. Specifically, on the right reel 31, "Replay,""Bell,""Watermelon," and "Cherry" are arranged consecutively (in order) at number 19, numbers 0 to 2, as well as consecutively at numbers 4 to 7, numbers 9 to 12, and numbers 14 to 17.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the "Blue 7" at number "3," "Red 7" at number "8," "Black BAR" at number "13," and "White BAR" at number "18" combine to form a "PB=1" configuration of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "Blue 7," "Red 7," "Black BAR," or "White BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on an active line.

Also, on the right reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is arranged between "Cherry" and "Replay" (above "Cherry" and below "Replay").
As a result, "Replay,""Bell,""Watermelon,""Cherry," and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged consecutively (in order) at four positions on the right reel 31. Specifically, on the right reel 31, "Replay,""Bell,""Watermelon,""Cherry," and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged consecutively (in order) at number 19, numbers 0 to 3, as well as consecutively at numbers 4 to 8, numbers 9 to 13, and numbers 14 to 18.

FIG. 3A is a diagram showing the display window 18, the relative positions of the reels 31, and the pay lines (display lines that display symbol combinations).
The reels 31 arranged inside can be seen through the display window 18.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, center reel 31, and right reel 31) are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 18.
As a result, when each reel 31 stops, three consecutive symbols on each reel 31 are seen stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window 18. Therefore, when all reels 31 stop, a total of nine symbols (frames) are visible through the display window 18.
In FIG. 3(A), the numbers at the bottom right of each symbol indicate the symbol number.

FIG. 3B illustrates the names of the symbol positions in this embodiment.
The positions of the "3" symbols stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when each reel 31 stops are referred to, from top to bottom, as the "top row,""middlerow," and "bottom row." Furthermore, the positions of the "3" symbols stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the left reel 31 stops are referred to, from top to bottom, as the "upper left row,""middle left row," and "lower left row." Similarly, the positions of the "3" symbols stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the center reel 31 stops are referred to, from top to bottom, as the "upper middle row,""middle middle row," and "lower middle row," and the positions of the "3" symbols stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the right reel 31 stops are referred to, from top to bottom, as the "upper right row,""middle right row," and "lower right row."

As shown in FIG. 3A, an active line is set for the "9" symbols visible through the display window 18.
Here, the "effective line" is a line of symbols arranged when the reel 31 stops, which is a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a symbol combination, and is also a line that will result in a winning combination when a symbol combination corresponding to any role stops on that line.
Furthermore, an "invalid line" refers to a symbol combination line that is not set as an effective line and is not a target for forming a symbol combination.
In this embodiment, the only valid line is the straight "middle line" that runs through "left middle" - "middle middle" - "right middle" as shown in Figure 3 (A), regardless of the game state or the number of bets, and all other lines are invalid lines.

For example, in this embodiment, the following lines are invalid: an "upper line" that runs straight through "upper left" - "upper middle" - "upper right"; an "upper line" that runs straight through "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right"; an "upward right line" that runs straight through "upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right"; an "upward right line" that runs straight through "lower left" - "middle middle" - "upper right"; a "small mountain line" that runs small mountain-shaped through "lower left" - "middle middle" - "lower right"; an "small V line" that runs small V-shaped through "upper left" - "middle middle" - "upper right"; and a "bent line" that runs bent through "upper left" - "middle middle" - "middle right".

The effective lines and ineffective lines are collectively called "symbol combination lines."
The position and number of active lines may be different for each game state or each bet amount. For example, in a specific game state, a line sloping downward to the right may be the active line. Also, for a specific bet amount, multiple active lines ("5" total: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an active line sloping upward to the right, and a active line sloping downward to the right) may be used.

4 and 5 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as winning combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the winning combination drawing means 61), symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in this embodiment.
The winning combinations are broadly divided into special winning combinations, replay winning combinations (replay winning combinations), and small winning combinations.
The symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination and the number of medals to be paid out when a winning combination is achieved are also determined. When all the reels 31 come to a stop, if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on an active line (the winning combination is achieved), the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out (a dividend (profit) is awarded).
However, the number of coins to be paid out when a special combination is achieved is set to 0. In addition, for replay, medals are automatically inserted, allowing the player to play again.

4 and 5, the game states in this embodiment include not in the internal state, in the 1BB state (in the 1BB-A state, in the 1BB-B state), and in the 1BB game state (in the 1BB-A game, in the 1BB-B game). In addition, when not in the internal state, the lottery objects differ depending on whether two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2") or three medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3").
4 and 5, "2 medals" indicates "when two medals are inserted," and "3 medals" indicates "when three medals are inserted." Also, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB (inside 1BB-A and inside 1BB-B)," and "in 1BB" indicates "during 1BB play (during 1BB-A play and 1BB-B play)."

4 and 5 correspond to small wins. In this embodiment, the small wins include 82 types of small wins, from small win 01 to small win 82.
As shown in Figures 4 and 5, "Small prize 01" to "Small prize 82" are subject to lottery when two medals are inserted outside the interior, when three medals are inserted outside the interior, when inside 1BB, and during 1BB play, and the corresponding pattern combination can be displayed stopped on the valid line (winning).

Also, as shown in Figure 4, for "Small Win 01" to "Small Win 06", the number of medals paid out (awarded) when winning is set to "10" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area, when three medals are inserted outside the internal area, when inside 1BB, and when playing 1BB.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 4 and 5, for "Small Win 07" to "Small Win 78", the number of medals paid out (awarded) when winning is set to "1" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area, when three medals are inserted outside the internal area, when inside 1BB, and when playing 1BB.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5, for "Small Win 79" to "Small Win 82", the number of medals paid out (awarded) when winning is set to "3" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area, when three medals are inserted outside the internal area, when inside 1BB, and when playing 1BB.

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 01" is only one type of symbol number "1", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all "3" reels 31 arranged in "PB=1" (symbols that can always be stopped and displayed on an active line regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42).
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 19 (1) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small Win 01" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "downward right line" (invalid line) passing through the "upper left"-"middle middle"-"lower right".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" is only one type, the role number "2", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" is only one type, the role number "3". Also, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" is only one type, the role number "4", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" is only one type, the role number "5". Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" is only one type, the role number "6".
Furthermore, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 02" to "small win 06", the symbols on each reel 31 are all in the "PB = 1" arrangement, just like "small win 01". In other words, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 02" to "small win 06", the symbols on all three reels 31 are all in the "PB = 1" arrangement, just like "small win 01".

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 19 (2) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small Win 02" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "top line" (invalid line) passing through the "top left"-"top middle"-"top right"
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 19 (3) described later, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" is "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell", and when "Small Win 03" is won, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" will be displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line).
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (1) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 04" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small win 04" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "right-sloping line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left"-"middle"-"upper right" line.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (2) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 05" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small win 05" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "Small hill line" (invalid line) that passes through the "lower left"-"middle middle"-"lower right".
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (3) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 06" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small win 06" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "lower line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left"-"lower middle"-"lower right".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 07" is only one type, the symbol number "7", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each arranged as "PB=1", but the symbol on the center reel 31 is arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 07" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on two reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are in the "PB=1" configuration (the symbols can always be displayed stopped on an active line regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switch 42), and the symbols on one other reel 31 (middle reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" configuration (the symbols can sometimes be displayed stopped on an active line and sometimes not depending on the timing of operation of the stop switch 42).

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 08" is only one type, which is the symbol number "8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 09" is only one type, which is the symbol number "9", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 10" is only one type, which is the symbol number "10".
In addition, in the pattern combinations corresponding to "Small Win 08" to "Small Win 10", the patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", as in "Small Win 07", but the pattern on the middle reel 31 is arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 08" to "Small Win 10" are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (middle reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" configuration, just like "Small Win 07".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 11" is only one type, the symbol number "11", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are each arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 11" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and center reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 12" is only one type, which is the symbol number "12", the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 13" is only one type, which is the symbol number "13", and the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 14" is only one type, which is the symbol number "14".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 12" to "Small Win 14" are all similar to "Small Win 11", in that the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 12" to "Small Win 14" are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and middle reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement, just like "Small Win 11".

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 15" is only one type, the symbol number "15", and the symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each arranged as "PB=1", but the symbol on the left reel 31 is arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 15" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 16" is only one type, which is the symbol number "16", the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 17" is only one type, which is the symbol number "17", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 18" is only one type, which is the symbol number "18".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 16" to "Small Win 18" are all similar to "Small Win 15", in that the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 16" to "Small Win 18" are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement, just like "Small Win 15".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 19" is only one type, the role number "11", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 20" is only one type, the role number "20". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 21" is only one type, the role number "21", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 22" is only one type, the role number "22".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 19" to "Small Win 22" are all the same as "Small Win 11" to "Small Win 14", in that the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 19" to "Small Win 22", like "Small Win 11" to "Small Win 14", are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and middle reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 23" is only one type of symbol number "23", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 24" is only one type of symbol number "24". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 25" is only one type of symbol number "25", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 26" is only one type of symbol number "26".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 23" to "Small Win 26" are all the same as "Small Win 15" to "Small Win 18", in that the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 23" to "Small Win 26", like "Small Win 15" to "Small Win 18", are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" is only one type, the role number "27", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 28" is only one type, the role number "28". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 29" is only one type, the role number "29", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 30" is only one type, the role number "30".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 27" to "Small Win 30" are all the same as "Small Win 07" to "Small Win 10", in that the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 27" to "Small Winning 30" are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (middle reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement, just like "Small Winning 07" to "Small Winning 10".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" is only one type, the symbol number "31", and the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" is a symbol combination in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (middle reel 31) is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 32" to "small prize 46" are each only one of the prize numbers "32" to "46".
In addition, in the pattern combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 32" to "Small Winning 46," the pattern on the center reel 31 is arranged as "PB=1," as with "Small Winning 31," but the patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1," respectively.
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 32" to "small win 46" are all symbol combinations in which, like "small win 31," the symbol on "one" reel 31 (middle reel 31) is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 47" is only one type, the symbol number "47", and the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 47" is a symbol combination in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (right reel 31) is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and center reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 48" to "small prize 62" are each only one of the prize numbers "48" to "62".
In addition, in the pattern combinations corresponding to "Small Win 48" to "Small Win 62," the pattern on the right reel 31 is arranged as "PB=1," as with "Small Win 47," but the patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1."
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 48" to "small win 62" are all symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (right reel 31) is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and center reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement, just like "small win 47".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" is only one type, the symbol number "63", and the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, but the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" is a symbol combination in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (left reel 31) is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 64" to "small prize 78" are each only one of the prize numbers "64" to "78".
In addition, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 64" to "Small Win 78," the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1," as with "Small Win 63," but the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1."
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 64" to "Small Win 78" are all symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (left reel 31) is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement, just like "Small Win 63".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 79" is only one type, the symbol number "79", and the symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each arranged as "PB=1", but the symbol on the left reel 31 is arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 79" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are arranged in "PB≠1" configuration.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 79" is displayed stopped on the valid line (middle line) (when "small win 79" is won), "cherry"-"cherry"-"cherry" are displayed stopped on the "right-sloping line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left"-"middle middle"-"upper right"

The only symbol combination that corresponds to "small win 80" is the symbol number "80", and like "small win 79", the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 80", like "small win 79", is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are arranged in "PB≠1" configuration.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 80" is displayed stopped on the valid line (middle line) (when "small win 80" is won), "cherry"-"cherry"-"cherry" will be displayed stopped on the "right-sloping line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left"-"middle"-"upper right" in the same way as "small win 79".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 81" is only one type, the symbol number "81", and the symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each arranged as "PB=1", but the symbol on the left reel 31 is arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 81" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are arranged in "PB≠1" configuration.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 81" is "cherry"-"cherry"-"cherry", and when the "small win 81" is won, "cherry"-"cherry"-"cherry" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line).

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 82" is only one type, the symbol number "82", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 82" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all three reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 82" is "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon", and when "small win 82" is won, "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line).

The symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is only one type, which is the combination number "83", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all three reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay" is "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay", and when "Replay" is won, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" will be displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line).

As shown in FIG. 5, "replay" is subject to a lottery when two medals are inserted outside the internal reel, when three medals are inserted outside the internal reel, and when the reel is inside the 1BB reel, and the corresponding symbol combination can stop and be displayed on an active line (winning a prize); however, it is not subject to a lottery during 1BB play, and therefore the corresponding symbol combination will not stop and be displayed on an active line (winning a prize).
Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is displayed (winning), a medal is automatically inserted, allowing the player to play again.

5 correspond to special roles (roles). In this embodiment, there are two types of special roles: "1BB-A" and "1BB-B."
As shown in Figure 5, "1BB-A" is only eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted during a non-internal period, and is not eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted. In contrast, "1BB-B" is only eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted during a non-internal period, and is not eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted.

In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is only one type, which is the role number "84", and the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
As described above, in this embodiment, the winning combination of the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on the active line (can win a prize).

When the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" stops and displays on an active line, it results in a "1BB-A win" and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game will transition to "1BB-A game" from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on the active line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-A internal".

In this embodiment, when two medals are inserted outside the internal state, the "1BB-A condition device" can be activated alone (single win), and in a game in which the "1BB-A condition device" is activated alone, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line, but if in a game in which the "1BB-A condition device" is activated alone, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on an active line, the game will transition to "1BB-A inside" from the next game.
Furthermore, if the winning combination is not won by the role selection means 61 when two medals are inserted "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on the valid line, but in this embodiment, the winning combination is not won by the role selection means 61 when "inside 1BB-A", so once the state transitions to "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line.

In addition, there is only one symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B", which is the winning combination number "85". As with "1BB-A", the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
As described above, in this embodiment, the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B", and when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on the active line (can win a prize).

When the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" stops and displays on an active line, it results in a "1BB-B win" and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game will transition to a "1BB-B game" from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed stopped on the active line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-B internal".

In this embodiment, when three medals are inserted outside the internal state, the "1BB-B condition device" can be activated alone (single win), and in the game in which the "1BB-B condition device" is activated alone, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on an active line, but if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed stopped on an active line in the game in which the "1BB-B condition device" is activated alone, the game will transition to "1BB-B internal state" from the next game.
Furthermore, if the winning combination is not won by the role selection means 61 when three medals are inserted "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on the valid line, but in this embodiment, since the winning combination is not won by the role selection means 61 when "inside 1BB-B", once the state transitions to "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line.

For each of the above-mentioned winning combinations, when a winning combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the active line in a game, the winning combinations are determined to be carried over to the next game and thereafter, and the winning combinations are determined not to be carried over to the next game and thereafter.
In this embodiment, the carried-over winning combination is 1BB ("1BB-A" and "1BB-B"). In this embodiment, all symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB are set to "PB≠1", so even if 1BB is won, there are cases where the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not displayed stopped on the activated line (1BB does not win). When 1BB is won, the winning information of 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later until 1BB is won.

On the other hand, if a minor win or replay is won, the winning combination is valid only for the current game, and the winning information will not be carried over to the next game or later. In other words, in a game in which such a combination is won, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be displayed on an active line, but regardless of whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on an active line, the right to the winning combination will expire at the end of that game.

6 to 9 are diagrams showing the condition device in this embodiment.
6 to 8 show the small winning combination and replay condition device in this embodiment.
In the notes section of Figures 6 and 7, "push order 123" indicates the push order of "left, center, right," and "push order 132" indicates the push order of "left, right, center." Also, "push order 213" indicates the push order of "center, left, right," and "push order 231" indicates the push order of "center, right, left." Furthermore, "push order 312" indicates the push order of "right, left, center," and "push order 321" indicates the push order of "right, center, left."

As shown in Figures 6 to 8, there are 17 types of small win condition devices, ranging from the "small win A1 condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "1" to the "small win ALL condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "17".
In addition, the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role I Condition Device" are subject to a lottery (a lottery is held) when two medals are inserted while not inside, when three medals are inserted while not inside, and when inside 1BB, but are not subject to a lottery (a lottery is not held) during 1BB play.

Furthermore, the "1-piece role ALL condition device" is subject to a lottery (a lottery is held) when two medals are inserted while not inside the reel, when three medals are inserted while not inside the reel, when inside the 1BB reel, and when playing with the 1BB reel.
Furthermore, the "small prize ALL condition device" is not subject to a lottery (a lottery is not held) when two medals are inserted while not inside the reel, when three medals are inserted while not inside the reel, or when inside 1BB, but is subject to a lottery (a lottery is held) only during 1BB play.

Here, the following methods can be used to control the stopping of the reel 31 when multiple types of small winning combinations with different payout numbers of medals are won.
As a first priority, when all of the symbols (on the reel 31) that make up the winning symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the pay line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.
Next, when all of the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the reels 31 are controlled to stop according to either "number priority" or "number priority" as the second priority.

In addition, "number of medals priority" means that, among the symbol combinations of the multiple winning roles, the symbol of the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination with the greatest number of medals to be paid out is given priority and stopped and displayed (pulled in) on the pay line.
On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols of the reel 31 are given priority in being stopped and displayed on the pay line so as to maximize the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the pay line.

In this embodiment, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" to "Small Win F2 Condition Device" are activated, the player will be in a state where they have won multiple types of small wins (bells) with different numbers of medals paid out (a state where they have won the so-called "push order bell").
When the push order bell is won, the reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority given to the number of coins if the push order is correct, and is controlled to stop with priority given to the number of coins if the push order is incorrect.
As a result, when the push order bell is won, the type of small winning combination (the symbol combination that stops and displays on the valid line) that is won will differ depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, which will result in an advantage/disadvantage in the game result (the number of medals paid out).

The "small win A1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG.
When the winning number "1" is drawn by the winning lottery means 61, a small win and a replay condition device number "1" are generated from this winning number "1". Then, a "small win A1 condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "1" is activated.
In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning combination column in FIG. 6 are won in duplicate.

Furthermore, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct button press sequence is "Left, Center, Right (123)," and any other button press sequence is an incorrect button press sequence.
When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 01" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs, priority is given to the number of coins, and "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row; when the second middle stop occurs, "Bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle middle row; and when the third right stop occurs, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle right row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" to be displayed as stopped on an active line when "PB=1" occurs.

In this way, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the left reel 31 is stopped first and the center reel 31 is stopped second, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" that pays out "10", which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win A1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the active line.
As shown in Figure 19 (1) described below, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" is displayed stopped on the valid line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" is displayed stopped on the line sloping downward to the right (invalid line).

Also, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line).
As a result, at the first left stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "replay" of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "bell" of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
That is, when the left reel first stops when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, "blue 7/red 7/black BAR/white BAR,""replay," and "bell" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 01" is one type, "Replay," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 01" is one type, "Bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 01" is one type, "Watermelon."
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that make up the symbol combination that stops and is displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can stop and be displayed on an active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Right, Middle (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 07" or "Small Win 08" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/2 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14 (described below), when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, at the first left stop, a "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed in the middle left row, and then at the second right stop, a "Bell" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed in the middle right row, based on the number of wins, to allow for either a "Small Win 07" or a "Small Win 08". Then, at the third middle stop, a "Red 7" or a "Blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the center reel 31 is displayed in the middle middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 is only located at number "4." Therefore, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "0" through "4" on the center reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle-middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle-middle row is 1/4.

Similarly, since the "red 7" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on the "9" symbol, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "5" through "9" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "red 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle-middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "red 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle-middle row is 1/4.
From the above, since the probability of having the "Blue 7" or "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/2", the probability of having the pattern combination corresponding to the "Small win 07" or "Small win 08" stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, if the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, quantity priority is given, and it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 07" or "Small Win 08" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the button press order is correct when the first reel stops on the left, but is incorrect when the second reel stops on the right, a "bell" will be displayed stopped on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "bell" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the effective line, thereby preventing the "small win 01" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 07" and "Small Win 08" is one type, "Replay", and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 07" and "Small Win 08" is one type, "Bell".
In this way, by limiting the number of types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center, left, right (213)", the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" or "small win 32" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 14 described below, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row based on the number of pieces, when the left second stop occurs, the "red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and when the right third stop occurs, the "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is located only at number "5." Therefore, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "1" through "5" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability of the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle left row is 1/4.

In addition, since the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is only located at number "8," unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "4" through "8" on the right reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle right row is 1/4.

Furthermore, since the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 is only located at number "3," unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when the "19" or any of the "0" through "3" symbols on the right reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed on the middle right row is 1/4.

From the above, the probability of the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle right row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 31" or "Small Win 32" stopping and displaying on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, quantity priority is given, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 31" or "Small Win 32" (both of which pay out 1 coin) can be stopped and displayed on the active line, which will pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first middle reel stops, a "watermelon" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the effective line, thereby preventing the "small win 01" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 31" and "small win 32" is one type, "red 7", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 31" and "small win 32" is one type, "watermelon".
In this way, by limiting the number of types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 31" or "Small Win 32" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order.

When the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right Left Middle (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 53" or "Small Win 54" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, when the right first stop occurs, a "Cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, based on number priority; when the left second stop occurs, a "White BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row; and when the middle third stop occurs, a "Black BAR" or "White BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row.

2, since the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 is positioned only at number 15, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "11" to "15" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle left). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle left line is 1/4.
Furthermore, since the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on number 14, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "10" to "14" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle-middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed on the middle-middle row is 1/4.

Similarly, since the "White BAR" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on number 19, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "15" through "19" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "White BAR" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle-middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "White BAR" on the center reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle-middle row is 1/4.

From the above, the probability of the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 stopping and displaying in the left-middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle-middle row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" or "small win 54" stopping and displaying on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, quantity priority is given, so that it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 53" or "Small Win 54" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first right button stops, a "cherry" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the effective line, thereby preventing the "small win 01" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 53" and "small win 54" is one type, "white BAR," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 53" and "small win 54" is one type, "cherry."
In this way, by limiting the number of types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Middle, Left (321)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 53" or "Small Win 54" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Left, Middle (312)" push order.

As shown in Figure 14 described below, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the valid line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 01", "Small Win 07", "Small Win 08", "Small Win 31", "Small Win 32", "Small Win 53" or "Small Win 54".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all three reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1" configuration.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 07" and "small win 08" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 31,""small win 32,""small win 53," and "small win 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 stop, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the valid line.
Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, "cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line, and when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line.

Also, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is "blank" - "red 7" - "replay", which is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of reel 31 with priority given to the number when the "small win A1 condition device" inside "1BB-A" is activated.
For example, since the symbol on the center reel 31 of "1BB-A" is "red 7," of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" inside "1BB-A" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is "red 7" is "2." Therefore, since the number is the same as the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is "watermelon," when the first center stop occurs (when the push order is incorrect) during play when the "small win A1 condition device" inside "1BB-A" is activated, the "watermelon" on the center reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line due to number priority.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 of "1BB-A" is a "blank" symbol, which is not used in the symbol combination that can be stopped when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. Therefore, the symbol on the left reel 31 of "1BB-A" does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority given to the number of symbols when the "small win A1 condition device" inside "1BB-A" is activated.
Similarly, the symbol on the right reel 31 of "1BB-A" is a "replay," which is a symbol that is not used in the symbol combination that can be stopped when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. Therefore, the symbol on the right reel 31 of "1BB-A" does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority given to the number of symbols when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated inside "1BB-A."

The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B", like the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A", is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority given to the number when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B".
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of reel 31 with priority given to the number when the "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" inside "1BB-A" are activated.
Similarly, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of reel 31 with priority given to the number when the "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" inside "1BB-B" are activated.

In this embodiment, there are two types of "1BB", "1BB-A" and "1BB-B". When two medals are inserted, a lottery for "1BB-A" is held, and a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed. When three medals are inserted, a lottery for "1BB-B" is held, and a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed.
However, it is not limited to this, and "1BB" may be one type, and the number of medals inserted may always be "3." In this case, it is preferable that the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority given to the number when the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" are activated "inside 1BB."

The "small win A2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of Figure 6, and when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of Figure 6 are overlappingly won.
When the "Small Win A2 Condition Device" is activated, the correct press order is "left, center, right (123)," just as when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, and any other press order is an incorrect press order.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 01" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, center (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 09" or "small win 10" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the priority of the number.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center, left, right (213)", the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 33" or "small win 34" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 33" or "small win 34" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left right (213)."

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 49" or "small win 50" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 49" or "small win 50" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)."

The "Small prize A2 condition device" replaces the "Small prize 07" and "Small prize 08" of the "Small prize A1 condition device" with "Small prize 09" and "Small prize 10", replaces the "Small prize 31" and "Small prize 32" of the "Small prize A1 condition device" with "Small prize 33" and "Small prize 34", and replaces the "Small prize 53" and "Small prize 54" of the "Small prize A1 condition device" with "Small prize 49" and "Small prize 50".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

The "small win B1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of Figure 6, and when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of Figure 6 are overlappingly won.
When the "Small Role B1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct button press sequence is "Left, Right, Middle (132)," and any other button press sequence is an incorrect button press sequence.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Right, Middle (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 02" (payout of 10 coins) on the active line with a 1/1 probability (always), based on the number of coins being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, when the left first stop occurs, "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, based on the number of coins being given priority; when the right second stop occurs, "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row; and when the middle third stop occurs, "Cherry" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" to be displayed stopped on an active line when "PB=1" occurs.

In this way, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, the number of medals is given priority, and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" that pays out "10", which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win B1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the active line.
As shown in Figure 19 (2) described below, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" is displayed stopped on the valid line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" is displayed stopped on the upper line (invalid line).

Also, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line).
As a result, at the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "replay" of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "bell" of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
That is, when the left reel first stops when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR", "Replay" and "Bell" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

Also, as shown in Figure 14 described below, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 02" is one type, "Replay," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 02" is one type, "Cherry," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 02" is one type, "Replay."
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that make up the symbol combination that will be displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 11" or "Small Win 12" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/2 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14 (described below), when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, at the first left stop, a "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed in the left middle row, and then at the second middle stop, a "Bell" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed in the middle middle row, based on the number of wins, to enable either a "Small Win 11" or a "Small Win 12." Then, at the third right stop, a "Black BAR" or "White BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the right reel 31 is displayed in the right middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at number 13. Therefore, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "9" through "13" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed on the middle right row is 1/4.

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at number 18, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/4.
From the above, since the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping to be displayed in the middle right row is "1/2", the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 11" or "small win 12" stopping to be displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, if the left reel 31 is stopped first and the center reel 31 is stopped second, quantity priority is given, and it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 11" or "Small Win 12" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the button press order is correct when the first button on the left stops, but is incorrect when the second button on the center stops, a "bell" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (cherry) on the center reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 02" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the center reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "cherry" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the effective line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "small winnings 02" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 11" and "Small Win 12" is one type, "Replay", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 11" and "Small Win 12" is one type, "Bell".
In this way, by limiting the number of types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "center, left, right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 35" or "Small Win 36" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, the "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the center middle row, based on the number of items being prioritized; when the left second stop occurs, the "Black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row; and when the right third stop occurs, the "Black BAR" or "White BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is positioned only at number 10. Therefore, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "6" through "10" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed on the active line (middle left). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed on the middle left line is 1/4.

In addition, since the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at number 13, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "9" through "13" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle right row is 1/4.

Furthermore, since the "White BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at number 18, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "14" through "18" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "White BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "White BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle right row is 1/4.

From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle right row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 35" or "small win 36" stopping and displaying on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated and the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, quantity priority is given, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 35" or "Small Win 36" (both of which pay out 1 coin) can be stopped and displayed on an active line, which will pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first middle reel stops, a "watermelon" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (cherry) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 02" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "cherry" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the effective line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "small winning combination 02" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 35" and "Small Win 36" is one type, "black BAR", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 35" and "Small Win 36" is one type, "watermelon".
In this way, by limiting the number of types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 35" or "Small Win 36" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right Left Middle (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 47" or "Small Win 48" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14 below, when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, when the right first stop occurs, a "Cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, based on number priority; when the left second stop occurs, a "Red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row; and when the middle third stop occurs, a "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both PB ≠ 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".
Furthermore, the probability of having the "red 7" on the middle reel 31 stop and displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/4", and the probability of having the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 stop and displayed in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of having either the "red 7" or the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 stop and displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/2".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 47" or "small win 48" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, quantity priority is given, so that it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 47" or "Small Win 48" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first right reel stops, a "cherry" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (replay) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 02" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "replay" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby preventing the "small win 02" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 47" and "small win 48" is one type, "red 7", and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 47" and "small win 48" is one type, "cherry".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Middle, Left (321)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 47" or "Small Win 48" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Left, Middle (312)" push order.

As shown in Figure 14 described below, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the valid line when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 02,""small prize 11,""small prize 12,""small prize 35,""small prize 36,""small prize 47," or "small prize 48."
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all three reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1" configuration.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 11" and "small win 12" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 35,""Small win 36,""Small win 47," and "Small win 48" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 stop, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the valid line.
Furthermore, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged in "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

Furthermore, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, "cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line, and when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line.

The "small win B2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of Figure 6, and when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of Figure 6 are overlappingly won.
When the "Small Win B2 Condition Device" is activated, the correct press order is "left, right, center (132)," just as when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, and any other press order is an incorrect press order.

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, center (132)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 02" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 13" or "small win 14" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the priority of the number of symbols.

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center left right (213)", the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 37" or "small win 38" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 37" or "small win 38" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left right (213)."

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 57" or "small win 58" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 57" or "small win 58" (both pay out one coin) on the activated line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)."

The "Small win B2 condition device" replaces the "Small win 11" and "Small win 12" of the "Small win B1 condition device" with "Small win 13" and "Small win 14", replaces the "Small win 35" and "Small win 36" of the "Small win B1 condition device" with "Small win 37" and "Small win 38", and replaces the "Small win 47" and "Small win 48" of the "Small win B1 condition device" with "Small win 57" and "Small win 58".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

The "small win C1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of Figure 6, and when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of Figure 6 are overlappingly won.
When the "Small Role C1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "middle left right (213)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Centre Left Right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 03" (payout of 10 coins) on the active line with a 1/1 probability (always), based on the number of coins being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, a "Bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row due to number priority; when the left second stop occurs, a "Bell" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row; and when the right third stop occurs, a "Bell" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" to be displayed stopped on an active line when "PB=1" occurs.

In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" that pays out "10", which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win C1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the active line.
As shown in FIG. 19(3) described later, when "small win 03" is won, "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are displayed stopped on the middle line (effective line).

Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the center reel 31 is stopped first, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row (effective line), and then when the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "bell" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row (effective line).
As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "replay" on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
That is, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "replay", "bell" and "watermelon" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

Also, as shown in Figure 4, the pattern on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 03" is one type of "bell", the pattern on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 03" is also one type of "bell", and the pattern on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 03" is also one type of "bell".
In this way, by limiting the type of patterns on each reel 31 that make up the pattern combination that will be displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 15" or "Small Win 16" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/2 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14 (described below), when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, at the first center stop, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle center row, and then at the second right stop, a "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row, based on the number of wins, to enable either a "Small Win 15" or a "Small Win 16." Then, at the third left stop, a "red 7" or a "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is located only at number "5." Therefore, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "1" through "5" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability of the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle left row is 1/4.

Similarly, since the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is positioned only on the "0" symbol, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "16" to "19" or "0" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed on the active line (middle left). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed on the middle left line is 1/4.
From the above, since the probability of having the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the left reel 31 stop and display in the middle left row is "1/2", the probability of having the pattern combination corresponding to the "small win 15" or "small win 16" stop and display on the active line is also "1/2".

In this way, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, quantity priority is given, and it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 15" or "Small Win 16" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the button press order is correct when the first button stops in the middle, but is incorrect when the second button stops on the right, a "watermelon" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 03" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the effective line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "small win 03" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol on the center reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 15" and "small win 16" is one type, "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 15" and "small win 16" is one type, "watermelon."
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, by limiting the type of patterns on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is correct when the middle first reel stops but the push order is incorrect when the right second reel stops, the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, based on number priority; when the second middle stop occurs, a "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row; and when the third right stop occurs, a "red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Red 7" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on the "9" symbol. Therefore, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "5" through "9" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "Red 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle-middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "Red 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle-middle row is 1/4.

In addition, since the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 is only positioned at number "4," unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "0" through "4" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle-middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle-middle row is 1/4.

Furthermore, since the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is only located at number "8," unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "4" through "8" on the right reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed on the middle right row is 1/4.

From the above, the probability of having a "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is "1/2," and the probability of having a "Red 7" on the right reel 31 stop and display in the right-middle row is "1/4," so the probability of having a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64" stop and display on an active line is "1/8."

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, quantity priority is given, so that it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel on the left stops, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 03" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby preventing the "small win 03" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and the "small win 64" is one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and the "small win 64" is one type, "red 7."
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the first left stop is incorrect in the push order, the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Right, Middle (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right Left Middle (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 51" or "Small Win 52" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14 below, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the right first stop occurs, a "cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, based on number priority; when the left second stop occurs, a "black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row; and when the middle third stop occurs, a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is positioned only at number 10. Therefore, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "6" through "10" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed on the active line (middle left). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed on the middle left line is 1/4.

As mentioned above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the middle reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 will stop and be displayed in the left middle row is "1/4", and the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 will stop and be displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", so the probability that the pattern combination corresponding to "small win 51" or "small win 52" will stop and be displayed on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, quantity priority is given, so that it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 51" or "Small Win 52" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first right reel stops, a "cherry" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 03" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby preventing the "small win 03" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 51" and "small win 52" is one type, "black BAR," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 51" and "small win 52" is one type, "cherry."
In this way, by limiting the number of types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Middle, Left (321)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 51" or "Small Win 52" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Left, Middle (312)" push order.

As shown in Figure 14 described below, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the valid line when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 03,""small prize 15,""small prize 16,""small prize 51,""small prize 52,""small prize 63," or "small prize 64."
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all three reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1" configuration.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 15" and "small win 16" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 51,""small win 52,""small win 63," and "small win 64" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 stop, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the valid line.
Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the valid line at the first stop, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the valid line at the second and third stops.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, the left reel 31 will have a "replay" (PB = 1) displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, the middle reel 31 will have a "bell" (PB = 1) displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, the right reel 31 will have a "cherry" (PB = 1) displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line, and when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line.

The "small win C2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of Figure 6, and when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of Figure 6 are overlappingly won.
When the "Small Win C2 Condition Device" is activated, the correct press order is "middle left right (213)", just as when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, and any other press order is an incorrect press order.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center left right (213)", the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 03" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle, right, left (231)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 17" or "small win 18" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the priority of the number.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 65" or "small win 66" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 65" or "small win 66" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)."

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 55" or "small win 56" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 55" or "small win 56" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)."

The "small prize C2 condition device" replaces the "small prize 15" and "small prize 16" of the "small prize C1 condition device" with "small prize 17" and "small prize 18", replaces the "small prize 51" and "small prize 52" of the "small prize C1 condition device" with "small prize 55" and "small prize 56", and replaces the "small prize 63" and "small prize 64" of the "small prize C1 condition device" with "small prize 65" and "small prize 66".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

The "small win D1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of Figure 7, and when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of Figure 7 are won in duplicate.
When the "Small Role D1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct button press sequence is "middle, right, left (231)," and any other button press sequence is an incorrect button press sequence.

When the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 04" (payout of 10 coins) on the active line with a 1/1 probability (always), based on the number of coins being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15, which will be described later, when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, a "Bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row due to the number of coins being prioritized; when the right second stop occurs, a "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row on the right; and when the left third stop occurs, a "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row on the left. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" to be displayed stopped on an active line when "PB=1" occurs.

In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the center reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" that pays out "10", which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win D1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the active line.
As shown in Figure 20 (1) described below, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 04" is displayed stopped on the valid line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" is displayed stopped on the line sloping to the right (invalid line).

Furthermore, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the center reel 31 is stopped first, a "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle middle row (active line); when the right reel 31 is stopped second, a "replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle right row (active line); and when the left reel 31 is stopped third, a "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row (active line).

As a result, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first, the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, the "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "cherry" or "blank" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
That is, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first, the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, then the "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry/blank" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small win 04" is one type, "watermelon," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small win 04" is one type, "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small win 04" is one type, "replay."
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that make up the symbol combination that will be displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center, left, right (213)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 19" or "small win 20" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, at the first center stop, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row, and then at the second left stop, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, so that either a "small win 19" or a "small win 20" can be won, based on the number of wins. After that, at the third right stop, a "black BAR" or a "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at number 13. Therefore, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "9" through "13" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed on the middle right row is 1/4.

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at number 18, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/4.
From the above, since the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping to be displayed in the middle right row is "1/2", the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 19" or "small win 20" stopping to be displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, quantity priority is given, and it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 19" or "Small Win 20" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the button press order is correct when the first button stops in the middle, but is incorrect when the second button stops on the left, a "bell" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 04" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the effective line, thereby preventing the "small win 04" from being won.

Furthermore, the pattern on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 19" and "Small Win 20" is only one type of "bell", and the pattern on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 19" and "Small Win 20" is also only one type of "bell".
In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, by limiting the type of patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is correct when the center first stops but the push order is incorrect when the left second stops, the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 67" or "small win 68" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 15 described below, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second middle stop, "Black BAR" or "White BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row, and at the third right stop, "Black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/4", the probability of the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the right-middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 will stop and be displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/2", and the probability that the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 will stop and be displayed in the right-middle row is "1/4", so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 67" or "small win 68" will stop and be displayed on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win D1 condition device," it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 67" or "small win 68" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line, due to the priority of the number of coins.
Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel on the left stops, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 04" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby preventing the "small win 04" from being won.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 67" and "small win 68" is one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 67" and "small win 68" is one type, "black BAR."
In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the first left stop is incorrect in the push order, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Right, Middle (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 67" or "Small Win 68" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order.

When the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right Left Middle (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 59" or "Small Win 60" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15, which will be described later, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the right first stop occurs, a "cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, based on number priority; when the left second stop occurs, a "black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row; and when the middle third stop occurs, a "red 7" or "blue 7" (both PB ≠ 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row.

As described above, the probability of having the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 stop and display in the left middle row is "1/4", the probability of having the "red 7" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle middle row is also "1/4", and the probability of having the "blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability of having the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 stop and display in the left middle row is "1/4", and the probability of having the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 stop and display in the middle middle row is "1/2", so the probability of having the pattern combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" stop and display on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win D1 condition device," it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pays out fewer medals than when a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line, due to the priority of the number of coins.
Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first right reel stops, a "cherry" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (replay) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 04" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "replay" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby preventing the "small win 04" from being won.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 59" and "small win 60" is one type, "black BAR," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 59" and "small win 60" is one type, "cherry."
In this way, by limiting the number of types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Middle, Left (321)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 59" or "Small Win 60" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a 1/8 probability, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Left, Middle (312)" push order.

As shown in Figure 15 described below, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the valid line when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 04,""small prize 19,""small prize 20,""small prize 59,""small prize 60,""small prize 67," or "small prize 68."
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all three reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1" configuration.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 19" and "small win 20" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 59,""small win 60,""small win 67," and "small win 68" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

In addition, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 stop, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the valid line.
Furthermore, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the valid line at the first stop, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the valid line at the second and third stops.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, the left reel 31 will have a "replay" (PB = 1) displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, the middle reel 31 will have a "bell" (PB = 1) displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, the right reel 31 will have a "cherry" (PB = 1) displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line, and when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line.

The "small win D2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of Figure 7, and when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of Figure 7 are overlappingly won.
When the "Small Win D2 Condition Device" is activated, the correct press order is "middle, right, left (231)," just as when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated, and any other press order is an incorrect press order.

When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle, right, left (231)", the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 04" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center left center (213)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 21" or "small win 22" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the priority of the number of symbols.

When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 69" or "small win 70" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 69" or "small win 70" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)."

When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)."

The "small prize D2 condition device" replaces the "small prize 19" and "small prize 20" of the "small prize D1 condition device" with "small prize 21" and "small prize 22", replaces the "small prize 59" and "small prize 60" of the "small prize D1 condition device" with "small prize 61" and "small prize 62", and replaces the "small prize 67" and "small prize 68" of the "small prize D1 condition device" with "small prize 69" and "small prize 70".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

The "small win E1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of Figure 7, and when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of Figure 7 are won in duplicate.
When the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct button press order is "Right Left Middle (312)", and any other button press order is an incorrect button press order.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)", the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 05" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 15, which will be described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the first right stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, based on the number of coins being given priority, when the second left stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, and when the third middle stop occurs, the "bell" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" with "PB = 1" to be displayed stopped on the active line.

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the number of medals is given priority, and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" that pays out "10", which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win E1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the active line.
As shown in Figure 20 (2) described below, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 05" is displayed stopped on the valid line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" is displayed stopped on the small hill line (invalid line).

Furthermore, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle right row (effective line), and when the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row (effective line).
As a result, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "bell" of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "watermelon" of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "cherry" or "blank" of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
That is, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first, and the left reel 31 is stopped second, and then the "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry/blank" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 05" is one type, "watermelon," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 05" is one type, "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 05" is one type, "watermelon."
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that make up the symbol combination that will be displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 23" or "small win 24" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the priority of the number.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, and at the second middle stop, "replay" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row to enable the winning of either "small win 23" or "small win 24" based on the number of wins. After that, at the third left stop, "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the middle left row is also "1/4".
From the above, since the probability of having the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the left reel 31 stop and display in the middle left row is "1/2", the probability of having the pattern combination corresponding to the "small win 23" or "small win 24" stop and display on the active line is also "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the middle reel 31 is stopped second, then, due to the priority of quantity, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 23" or "small win 24" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
Furthermore, if the push order is correct when the first reel stops on the right, but is incorrect when the second reel stops in the middle, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 05" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, will be displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" of the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" of the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the effective line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "small win 05" from being won.

Furthermore, the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 23" and "small win 24" is one type, "watermelon," and the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 23" and "small win 24" is one type, "replay."
In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, by limiting the type of patterns on the right reel 31 and the center reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is correct when the right first stops but the push order is incorrect when the center second stops, the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 71" or "small win 72" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 15 described below, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second middle stop, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row, and at the third right stop, "Black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "red 7" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/4", the probability of the "blue 7" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the right-middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability of having the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle middle row is "1/2", and the probability of having the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 stop and display in the right middle row is "1/4", so the probability of having the pattern combination corresponding to "small win 71" or "small win 72" stop and display on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win E1 condition device," it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 71" or "small win 72" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pays out fewer medals than when a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line, due to the priority of the number of coins.
Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel on the left stops, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 05" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby preventing the "small win 05" from being won.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 71" and "small win 72" is one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 71" and "small win 72" is one type, "black BAR."
In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the first left stop is incorrect in the push order, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Right, Middle (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 71" or "Small Win 72" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center, left, right (213)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 43" or "small win 46" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the center middle row, with priority given to the number of pieces, when the left second stop occurs, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, and when the right third stop occurs, the "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB≠1") on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As described above, the probability that the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 will stop and be displayed in the left middle row is 1/4, and the probability that the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 will stop and be displayed in the left middle row is also 1/4. In addition, the probability that the "red 7" on the right reel 31 will stop and be displayed in the right middle row is also 1/4, and the probability that the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 will stop and be displayed in the right middle row is also 1/4.
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the left reel 31 will stop and be displayed in the left middle row is "1/2." The probability that the "red 7" on the right reel 31 will stop and be displayed in the right middle row is "1/4," and the probability that the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 will stop and be displayed in the right middle row is also "1/4." Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 43" or "small win 46" will stop and be displayed on an active line is "1/8."

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the middle reel 31 is stopped first, the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 43" or "small win 46" (both of which pay out 1 medal) which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (pays out 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on the active line can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first middle reel stops, a "watermelon" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 05" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the effective line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "small win 05" from being won.

Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up the "small win 43" and "small win 46" are of two types, "black BAR" or "white BAR", the symbols on the right reel 31 that make up the "small win 43" and "small win 46" are of two types, "red 7" or "blue 7", but the symbol on the middle reel 31 that makes up the "small win 43" and "small win 46" is of one type, "watermelon".
In this way, by limiting the type of pattern on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the pattern combination that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated to one type, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 43" or "small win 46" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order.

As shown in Figure 15 described below, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the valid line when the "small prize E1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 05,""small prize 23,""small prize 24,""small prize 43,""small prize 46,""small prize 71," or "small prize 72."
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all three reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1" configuration.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 23" and "small win 24" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 43", "small win 46", "small win 71" and "small win 72" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

In addition, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all three reels 31 stop, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the active line.
Furthermore, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, the "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line, and when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line.

The "small win E2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of Figure 7, and when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of Figure 7 are overlappingly won.
When the "Small Win E2 Condition Device" is activated, the correct press order is "Right Left Middle (312)", just as when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, and any other press order is an incorrect press order.

When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 05" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 25" or "small win 26" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the priority of the number.

When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 77" or "small win 78" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 77" or "small win 78" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)."

When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center left right (213)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 44" or "small win 45" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 44" or "small win 45" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left right (213)."

The "small prize E2 condition device" replaces the "small prize 23" and "small prize 24" of the "small prize E1 condition device" with "small prize 25" and "small prize 26", replaces the "small prize 43" and "small prize 46" of the "small prize E1 condition device" with "small prize 44" and "small prize 45", and replaces the "small prize 71" and "small prize 72" of the "small prize E1 condition device" with "small prize 77" and "small prize 78".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

The "small win F1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of Figure 7, and when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of Figure 7 are overlappingly won.
When the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct button press sequence is "Right, Middle, Left (321)," and any other button press sequence is an incorrect button press sequence.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 06" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 15 (described later), when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the first right stop occurs, the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed with a "watermelon" (PB = 1) in the middle right row, and when the second middle stop occurs, the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed with a "replay" (PB = 1) in the middle middle row, and when the third left stop occurs, the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed with a "watermelon" (PB = 1) in the middle left row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" to be stopped and displayed on the active line with "PB = 1."

In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" that pays out "10", which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win F1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the active line.
As shown in Figure 20 (3) described below, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" is displayed stopped on the valid line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" is displayed stopped on the lower line (invalid line).

Furthermore, when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time, a "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle right row (active line); when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the second time, a "Replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle middle row (active line); and when the left reel 31 is stopped for the third time, a "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row (active line).

As a result, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, the "bell" of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "watermelon" of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "cherry" or "blank" of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
That is, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, and then the "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry/blank" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 06" is one type, "watermelon," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 06" is one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 06" is one type, "watermelon."
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that make up the symbol combination that stops and is displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can stop and be displayed on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" or "small win 28" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, the right reel 31 displays a "watermelon" (PB = 1) in the middle right row, and at the second left stop, the left reel 31 displays a "bell" (PB = 1) in the middle left row, based on the number of wins, so that either a "small win 27" or a "small win 28" can be won. After that, at the third middle stop, the center reel 31 displays a "red 7" or a "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") in the middle middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "red 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed stopped in the middle-middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "blue 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed stopped in the middle-middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, since the probability of having the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/2", the probability of having the pattern combination corresponding to the "small win 27" or "small win 28" stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, then, due to the priority given to the number of medals, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" or "small win 28" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (pays out 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
Furthermore, if the button press order is correct when the first reel stops on the right, but is incorrect when the second reel stops on the left, a "bell" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 06" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the effective line, thereby preventing the "small win 06" from being won.

Furthermore, the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 27" and "small win 28" is one type, "watermelon," and the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 27" and "small win 28" is one type, "bell."
In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct when the first right stop occurs but the push order is incorrect when the second left stop occurs, by limiting the type of patterns on the right reel 31 and the left reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed as stopped when the first right stop occurs to one type each, the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed as stopped on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

When the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 75" or "Small Win 76" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15, which will be described later, when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated, when the left first stop occurs, a "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed in the left middle row, based on number priority; when the middle second stop occurs, a "Black BAR" or "White BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the middle reel 31 is displayed in the middle middle row; and when the right third stop occurs, a "Red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed in the right middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/4", the probability of the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", and the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the right-middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability of having the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is "1/2", and the probability of having the "red 7" on the right reel 31 stop and display in the right-middle row is "1/4", so the probability of having the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 75" or "small win 76" stop and display on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win F1 condition device," it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 75" or "small win 76" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pays out fewer medals than when a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line, due to the priority of the number of coins.
Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel on the left stops, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 06" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" of the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" of the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby preventing the "small win 06" from being won.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 75" and "Small Win 76" is one type, "Replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 75" and "Small Win 76" is one type, "Red 7."
In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the first left stop is incorrect in the push order, the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

When the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Right, Middle (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 75" or "Small Win 76" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center left right (213)", the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" or "small win 40" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the center middle row, with priority given to the number of pieces, when the left second stop occurs, the "red 7" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, and when the right third stop occurs, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed in the middle right row is also "1/4", and the probability of the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" or "small win 40" being stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the middle reel 31 is stopped first, the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" or "small win 40" (both of which pay out 1 medal) which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (pays out 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on the active line can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, if the push order is incorrect when the first middle reel stops, a "watermelon" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different pattern from the pattern (replay) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 06" and is also the pattern for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "replay" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the effective line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "small win 06" from being won.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 39" and "Small Win 40" is one type, "Red 7", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 39" and "Small Win 40" is one type, "Watermelon".
In this way, by limiting the number of types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 39" or "Small Win 40" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order.

As shown in Figure 15 described below, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the valid line when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 06,""small prize 27,""small prize 28,""small prize 39,""small prize 40,""small prize 75," or "small prize 76."
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all three reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1" configuration.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 27" and "small win 28" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 39", "Small Win 40", "Small Win 75" and "Small Win 76" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

In addition, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 stop, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the valid line.
Furthermore, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, the "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line, and when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line.

The "small win F2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of Figure 7, and when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of Figure 7 are overlappingly won.
When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the correct press order is "right, center, left (321)," just as when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, and any other press order is an incorrect press order.

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 06" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 29" or "small win 30" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the priority of the number.

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 73" or "small win 74" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 73" or "small win 74" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)."

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center, left, right (213)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 41" or "small win 42" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 41" or "small win 42" (both pay out one coin) on the activated line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left right (213)."

The "small prize F2 condition device" replaces the "small prize 27" and "small prize 28" of the "small prize F1 condition device" with "small prize 29" and "small prize 30", replaces the "small prize 39" and "small prize 40" of the "small prize F1 condition device" with "small prize 41" and "small prize 42", and replaces the "small prize 75" and "small prize 76" of the "small prize F1 condition device" with "small prize 73" and "small prize 74".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

As shown in FIG. 8, the "small prize G condition device" includes "small prize 79" and "small prize 80" as winning prizes, and when the "small prize G condition device" is activated, the "small prize 79" and "small prize 80" are won in duplicate.
When the "small win G condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 79" or "small win 80" (both "PB≠1") is displayed on the activated line, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when the reel stops on the left, a "black BAR" or a "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (active line), when the reel stops in the middle row, a "cherry" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row (active line), and when the reel stops on the right, a "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row (active line).
As described above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle left row is also "1/4".

Therefore, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the left middle row is "1/2", and therefore the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 79" or "small win 80" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".
However, if the left stop switch 42 is operated (aiming for the "black BAR") at the timing when the "black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed in the display window 18, the "black BAR" (No. 10) or "white BAR" (No. 15) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row (active line). In this case, since the "cherry" on the center reel 31 and the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 are both in the "PB=1" configuration, it is possible to always win "small win 79" or "small win 80".
When the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 79" or "small win 80" is displayed stopped on the valid line, "cherry"-"cherry"-"cherry" is displayed stopped on the line sloping upward to the right (invalid line).

As shown in FIG. 8, the "small win H condition device" includes the "small win 81" as a winning combination, and when the "small win H condition device" is activated, the "small win 81" is won.
When the "small win H condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination (PB≠1) corresponding to the "small win 81" is displayed on the activated line regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when the reel is stopped on the left, a "cherry" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line), when the reel is stopped in the middle row, a "cherry" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row (effective line), and when the reel is stopped on the right, a "cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row (effective line).
2, the "Cherry" symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in three positions: number 4, number 9, and number 14. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "0" to "14" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left), but if the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "15" to "19" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left).

Therefore, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability that the "cherry" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row) is "3/4", and therefore the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 81" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "3/4".
However, if the left stop switch 42 is operated (aiming for the black BAR) at the timing when the black BAR (number 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed in the display window 18, the number 9 or number 14 cherry on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row (active line). In this case, since the cherry on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are both in the "PB=1" configuration, the "minor win 81" can always be won.
When "small win 81" is won, "cherry"-"cherry"-"cherry" are displayed stopped on the middle line (effective line).

As shown in FIG. 8, the "small win I condition device" includes the "small win 82" as a winning combination, and when the "small win I condition device" is activated, the "small win 82" is won.
When the "small win I condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small win 82" is (always) displayed on the effective line with a probability of 1/1, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when the reel stops on the left, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (active line), when the reel stops in the middle row, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row (active line), and when the reel stops on the right, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row (active line).
When "small win 82" is won, "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon" are displayed stopped on the middle line (effective line).

The "1-piece role ALL condition device" includes all 1-piece roles ("small role 07" to "small role 78") as winning roles, and when the "1-piece role ALL condition device" is activated, all 1-piece roles are won in duplicate.
When the "1-piece winning combination ALL condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "small winning combination 07" to "small winning combination 78" on an active line according to the order of pressing the stop switch 42 and the operation timing.
When the "1-coin role ALL condition device" is activated, one of the "small role 07" to "small role 78" (all of which "pay out 1 coin") will win, and there will be no non-winning results.

The "small prize ALL condition device" includes all small prizes ("small prize 01" to "small prize 82") as winning prizes, and when the "small prize ALL condition device" is activated, all small prizes are won in duplicate.
When the "small win ALL condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to one of "small win 01" to "small win 06" is displayed on the activated line according to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and the timing of operation.
When the "small prize ALL condition device" is activated, one of the "small prize 01" to "small prize 06" (all of which "pay out 10 coins") will win, and there will be no non-winning combinations.

As shown in FIG. 8, there is only one type of "replay condition device": small win and replay condition device number "18".
As shown in FIG. 8, the "replay condition device" includes a "replay" as a winning combination, and when the "replay condition device" is activated, a state in which "replay" is won is achieved.
When the "replay condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "replay" on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always), regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when the reel stops on the left, the left reel 31 displays "Replay" (PB=1) in the middle left row (effective line), when the reel stops on the middle row, the middle reel 31 displays "Replay" (PB=1) in the middle middle row (effective line), and when the reel stops on the right, the right reel 31 displays "Replay" (PB=1) in the middle right row (effective line).
When a symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is displayed stopped on an active line, a medal is automatically inserted and the game can be played again.
When a "Replay" wins, the following will be displayed on the middle line (active line): "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay".

9 shows a reel condition device. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, the reel condition device is provided with two types: a "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to the reel condition device number "1", and a "1BB-B condition device" corresponding to the reel condition device number "2".
As shown in FIG. 10, the "1BB-A condition device" is only eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted into the non-internal area, and is not eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted into the non-internal area.
In contrast, the "1BB-B condition device" is only eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted into the non-internal area, and is not eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted into the non-internal area.

Furthermore, when two non-internal medals are inserted and the winning number "19" is drawn by the role drawing means 61, a role condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "19", and the "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to the role condition device number "1" is activated.
On the other hand, when three medals are inserted into the non-internal space and the winning number "20" is drawn by the role drawing means 61, the role condition device number "2" is generated from this winning number "20", and the "1BB-B condition device" corresponding to the role condition device number "2" is activated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination of the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line.
When the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" stops and displays on an active line, it results in a "1BB-A win" and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game will transition to "1BB-A game" from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on the active line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-A internal".

If the winning combination is not won by the winning combination selection means 61 when two medals are inserted "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line. However, in this embodiment, the winning combination selection means 61 will not result in a non-winning combination while "inside 1BB-A", so once the state transitions to "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on an active line.

Also, during "1BB-A game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
In this embodiment, a symbol combination corresponding to "RB" is not set, and during "1BB-A game", "RB game" is continuously executed without the symbol combination corresponding to "RB" being displayed in a stopped state.
Also, during "RB play", only two types of "1-piece role ALL condition device" and "small role ALL condition device" become the objects of lottery by the role lottery means 61, and either the "1-piece role ALL condition device" or the "small role ALL condition device" is activated for each game. For this reason, during "RB play", that is, during "1BB-A play", the probability of winning a small role is higher than during non-internal play and during "1BB-A internal play".

Furthermore, during "RB play", the prescribed number (the number of medals bet that can start the game) becomes "3", and the "1 medal role ALL condition device" is activated with a probability of "60535/65536", and "1" medal is paid out. Therefore, during "RB play", that is, during "1BB-A play", the player's medals are decreasing.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is met. That is, the end condition of the "RB game" is set to when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is met.

Furthermore, the "1BB-A game" continues until the total number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210," and ends when the total number of medals acquired exceeds "210." In other words, the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is set to be when the total number of medals acquired exceeds "210."
When the "RB game" is finished, if the condition for finishing the "1BB-A game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again. In this way, the "RB game" is executed continuously during the "1BB-A game".
Also, when the "RB game" is finished, if the finishing condition of the "1BB-A game" is met, the "1BB-A game" is finished and the game moves to the non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the termination condition for the "1BB-A game" is met during the "RB game", the "RB game" is terminated, and the "1BB-A game" is terminated, and the game transitions to a non-internal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B", and when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on the activated line.
When the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" stops and displays on an active line, it results in a "1BB-B win" and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game will transition to a "1BB-B game" from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed stopped on the active line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-B internal".

If the winning combination is not won by the winning combination selection means 61 when three medals are inserted "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on the active line. However, in this embodiment, the winning combination selection means 61 will not result in a non-winning combination while "inside 1BB-B", so once the state transitions to "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

Also, during "1BB-B game", "RB game" is executed continuously, just like during "1BB-A game".
Furthermore, like the "1BB-A game," the "1BB-B game" continues until the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210," and ends when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds "210."
When the "RB game" is finished, if the finishing condition of the "1BB-B game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Also, when the "RB game" is finished, if the finishing condition of the "1BB-B game" is met, the "1BB-B game" is finished and the game moves to the non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the termination condition for the "1BB-B game" is met during the "RB game", the "RB game" is terminated, and the "1BB-B game" is terminated, and the game transitions to a non-internal state.

FIG. 10 is a diagram (number table) showing the number of winning numbers to be placed for each game state in this embodiment.
In Figure 10, "2" indicates "when two medals are inserted," and "3" indicates "when three medals are inserted." Also, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB-A" and "inside 1BB-B," and "in 1BB" indicates "in 1BB-A play" and "in 1BB-B play."

Dividing the numbers shown in FIG. 10 by "65536" gives the probability of winning for each winning number.
For example, in Figure 10, the number of places for the winning number "1" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area is "2500", so the probability of winning the winning number "1" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area is "2500/65536".
Also, for example, if the winning number "1" is drawn by the role drawing means 61, a small role and replay condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "1", and the "small role A1 condition device" corresponding to the small role and replay condition device number "1" is activated.

As shown in Figure 10, the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win I condition device" are subject to lottery when they are not inside or inside (when inside 1BB-A, when inside 1BB-B), but are not subject to lottery when they are inside 1BB (when playing 1BB-A, when playing 1BB-B).
In addition, the "1-piece role ALL condition device" is subject to lottery in all game states.
Furthermore, unlike the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Winning I Condition Device", the "Small Winning ALL Condition Device" is only eligible for lottery during 1BB (during 1BB-A play, during 1BB-B play), and is not eligible for lottery during non-internal and internal play (during 1BB-A internal, during 1BB-B internal).

Furthermore, like the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win I condition device," the "replay condition device" is subject to lottery when it is not inside or inside (when it is inside 1BB-A, when it is inside 1BB-B), but is not subject to lottery when it is inside 1BB (when 1BB-A is being played, when 1BB-B is being played).
In addition, the "1BB-A condition device" is only eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted outside the internal state, and is not eligible for the lottery in any other game state.
In contrast, the "1BB-B condition device" is only eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted outside the internal state, and is not eligible for the lottery in any other game state.

In other words, when two medals are inserted into the non-internal space, the "1BB-A condition device" is subject to the lottery, but the "1BB-B condition device" is not subject to the lottery.
In contrast, when three medals are inserted into the non-internal area, the "1BB-B condition device" is the subject of the lottery, but the "1BB-A condition device" is not the subject of the lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, in any game state, the winning numbers "1" to "20" are selected by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61, and there is no chance of a non-winning number.

Next, the transition of the game state in this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state in this embodiment, and FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the change conditions of the game state in this embodiment.
In Figure 12, "∞" (infinite) in the number of times column means that there is no upper limit to the number of times that a game can be played for each game state, and that game state will be maintained (continued) until the transition condition described in the change trigger column is met.

The main control means 50 judges whether or not a transition condition for the game state is satisfied when all the reels 31 are stopped in each game, and when it judges that the transition condition for the game state is satisfied, controls to transition the game state.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to the non-internal state. At the time of shipment from the factory, it transitions to the non-internal state. Also, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on with the power off and then the power is turned on in this state, it transitions to the setting change state. At this time, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and it transitions to the non-internal state.

The non-internal state is maintained until the "1BB-A condition device" or "1BB-B condition device" is activated. As mentioned above, when two medals are inserted into the non-internal state, the "1BB-A condition device" becomes the subject of the lottery, and when three medals are inserted into the non-internal state, the "1BB-B condition device" becomes the subject of the lottery.
When two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" is activated (1BB-A win), and when the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" stops and displays on the valid line (1BB-A win), the game transitions to "1BB-A game" (1BB-A activated).
In contrast, when two medals are inserted outside the internal area, the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, but if the pattern combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop and display on the valid line, the state will change to "1BB-A inside the internal area."

In addition, in the case of "inside 1BB-A", if two medals are inserted and the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the valid line, but if three medals are inserted and the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the valid line.
However, as described above, in this embodiment, the winning combination will not be a non-winning combination in the "1BB-A interior" by the winning combination lottery means 61, and therefore once the state has shifted to "1BB-A interior", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line, and the state will continue to be "1BB-A interior".

In addition, when three medals are inserted outside the internal area, the "1BB-B condition device" is activated (1BB-B win), and when the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" stops and displays on the valid line (1BB-B win), the game transitions to "1BB-B game" (1BB-B activated).
In contrast, when three medals are inserted outside the internal area, the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, but if the pattern combination corresponding to "1BB-B" does not stop and display on the valid line, the state will change to "1BB-B inside the internal area."

In addition, in the case of "inside 1BB-B", if three medals are inserted and the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the valid line, but if two medals are inserted and the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be stopped and displayed on the valid line.
However, as described above, in this embodiment, the winning combination will not be a non-winning combination in the "1BB-B inside" state in the role selection means 61, and therefore once the state has shifted to "1BB-B inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line thereafter, and the state will continue to be "1BB-B inside".

Also, during "1BB-A game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is met.
Furthermore, the "1BB-A game" continues until the total number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210", and ends when the total number of medals won exceeds "210".

When the "RB game" is finished, if the finishing condition of the "1BB-A game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Also, when the "RB game" is finished, if the finishing condition of the "1BB-A game" is met, the "1BB-A game" is finished and the game moves to the non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is met during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, and the "1BB-A game" is ended, and the game transitions to the non-internal state.

Also, during "1BB-B game", "RB game" is executed continuously, just like during "1BB-A game".
Furthermore, like the "1BB-A game," the "1BB-B game" continues until the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210," and ends when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds "210."

When the "RB game" is finished, if the finishing condition of the "1BB-B game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Also, when the "RB game" is finished, if the finishing condition of the "1BB-B game" is met, the "1BB-B game" is finished and the game moves to the non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is met during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, and the "1BB-B game" is ended, and the game transitions to a non-internal state.

Next, using Figures 13 to 20, we will explain the characteristics of the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the ``small role A1 condition device'' to ``small role F2 condition device'' in this embodiment are activated, and the characteristics of the stop control of reel 31 when the ``small role A1 condition device'' to ``small role F2 condition device'' are activated.
Figure 13 (1) is a diagram showing the patterns on the left reel 31 that can be displayed stopped in the display window 18 when the first left stop occurs when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and when the first left stop occurs when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.
Figure 13 (2) shows the pattern of the left reel 31 that can be displayed in the display window 18 when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left second stop occurs after the middle first stop occurs.
Figure 14 is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win C2 condition device" are activated, and Figure 15 is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the "small win D1 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" are activated.

Figure 16 shows the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated, in which only the symbol on the middle reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration.
Figure 17 shows the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated, in which only the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration.
Figure 18 shows the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated, in which only the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration.

Figure 19 (1) is a diagram showing the winning combination when "Small win 01" is won, Figure 19 (2) is a diagram showing the winning combination when "Small win 02" is won, and Figure 19 (3) is a diagram showing the winning combination when "Small win 03" is won.
Figure 20 (1) is a diagram showing the winning combination when "Small win 04" is won, Figure 20 (2) is a diagram showing the winning combination when "Small win 05" is won, and Figure 20 (3) is a diagram showing the winning combination when "Small win 06" is won.

As shown in Figure 14, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order, the number of coins is prioritized, and the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 01" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1.

In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win the "small win 01".
As a result, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown in Figure 13 (1), the "black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row.
That is, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay" (number 11) and "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18.

As shown in Figure 14, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, center (132)", the number of coins is given priority, and the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 02" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1.
In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, the "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win the "small win 02".

As a result, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown in Figure 13 (1), the "black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row.
That is, the "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay" (No. 11) and "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18.

As shown in Figure 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center left right (213)", the number of coins is given priority, and the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 03" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1.
Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row (valid line) to win "small win 03", and then at the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row (valid line) to win "small win 03".

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the left second stop occurs after the middle first stop, as shown in Figure 13 (2), there are cases where "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
That is, the "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped symbols within the display window 18. Also, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is not displayed as stopped symbols within the display window 18.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left, middle, right (123)", the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both pay out one coin) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row to make it possible to win "small win 63" or "small win 64".

As a result, when the left first stop occurs during operation of the "small win C1 condition device," as shown in Figure 13 (1), there are cases where the "black BAR" (number 10) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (number 11) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (12) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
That is, the "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay" (No. 11) and "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18.

In this way, when the first left stop occurs when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and when the first left stop occurs when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay" (No. 11), and "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18, as shown in Figure 13 (1).
This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the lottery result of the role lottery means 61) from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop.

Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the left second stop occurs after the center first stop, as shown in Figure 13 (2), "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12) and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped in the display window 18, but "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is not displayed as stopped in the display window 18.
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, different symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed in the display window 18 when the first left reel stops (when the pressing order is incorrect) and when the second left reel stops after the first middle reel stops (when the pressing order is correct).

Then, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left button stops (when the push order is incorrect), a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 03" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby preventing the "small win 03" from being won.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" is one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" is one type, "red 7."
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the first left reel stops (when the push order is incorrect) when the ``small win C1 condition device'' is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the ``small win C1 condition device'' is activated.

Furthermore, the probability that the "red 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" will be displayed stopped on an active line is "1/4", the probability that the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" will be displayed stopped on an active line is also "1/4", and the probability that the "red 7" on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" will be displayed stopped on an active line is also "1/4".
This allows the probability of winning (acquisition rate) of a 1-coin role when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated to be reduced to 1/8, which in turn reduces the payout rate per game, thereby improving the degree of freedom in design.

Also, as shown in Figure 14, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of "left, middle, right," that is, when the left reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the right reel 31 is stopped third, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01," which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win A1 condition device," is displayed stopped on the active line.
Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 01" is one type, "Replay," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 01" is one type, "Bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 01" is one type, "Watermelon."

Furthermore, the "replay" on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" is in the "PB=1" position, the "bell" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" is also in the "PB=1" position, and the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" is also in the "PB=1" position.
In this way, the patterns on each reel 31 that make up the pattern combination that will be displayed when the button press order is correct when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated are each arranged as "PB=1", and by limiting the type of pattern on each reel 31 that makes up the pattern combination that will be displayed when the button press order is correct when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

The "small win A2 condition device" is the same as the "small win A1 condition device."
As shown in Figure 14, when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of "left, middle, right," that is, when the left reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the right reel 31 is stopped third, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01," which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win A2 condition device," is displayed stopped on the active line.
As described above, the symbols on each reel 31 that make up the "small win 01" are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration, and there is only one type of symbol on each reel 31 that makes up the "small win 01". This reduces the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated.

As mentioned above, the straight line that passes through the "upper left" - "upper middle" - "upper right" is the "upper line," the straight line that passes through the "middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right" is the "middle line," and the straight line that passes through the "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right" is the "lower line." Furthermore, the straight line that passes through the "upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right" is the "downward-right line," the straight line that passes through the "lower left" - "middle middle" - "upper right" is the "upward-right line," and the small mountain-shaped line that passes through the "lower left" - "middle middle" - "lower right" is the "small mountain line." In this embodiment, only the "middle line" is a "valid line," and all others are "invalid lines."

As shown in Figure 19 (1), when the symbol combination ("replay" - "bell" - "watermelon") corresponding to "small win 01" is displayed stopped on the valid line (when "small win 01" is won), "bell" - "bell" - "bell" are displayed stopped on the "downward-right line" (invalid line) passing through the "upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "lower right row".
Also, as shown in Figure 19 (2), when the symbol combination ("Replay" - "Cherry" - "Replay") corresponding to "Small Win 02" is displayed stopped on an active line (when "Small Win 02" is won), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are displayed stopped on the "upper line" (invalid line) passing through the "upper left" - "upper middle" - "upper right".

Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 03" is "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell", and when "Small win 03" is won, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line) as shown in Figure 19 (3).
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (1), when the symbol combination ("watermelon" - "bell" - "replay") corresponding to "small win 04" is displayed stopped on an active line (when "small win 04" is won), "bell" - "bell" - "bell" are displayed stopped on the "right-sloping line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row".

Also, as shown in Figure 20 (2), when the symbol combination ("watermelon" - "bell" - "watermelon") corresponding to "small win 05" is displayed stopped on the valid line (when "small win 05" is won), "bell" - "bell" - "bell" are displayed stopped on the "small hill line" (invalid line) that passes through the "lower left row" - "middle middle row" - "lower right row".
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (3), when the symbol combination ("Watermelon" - "Replay" - "Watermelon") corresponding to "Small Win 06" is displayed stopped on the valid line (when "Small Win 06" is won), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are displayed stopped on the "lower line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right".

Also, as shown in Figure 20 (1), when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" is displayed stopped on the active line (when "Small Win 04" is won), "Cherry" on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the display window 18 (upper left row).
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (2), when a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 05" is displayed stopped on an active line (when "Small Win 05" is won), "Cherry" on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the display window 18 (upper left row).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (3), when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" is displayed stopped on the active line (when "Small Win 06" is won), "Cherry" on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the display window 18 (upper left row).
In this embodiment, when the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the display window 18, the symbol combination that can be displayed stopped on the active line is not a winning symbol combination, regardless of the symbol that is displayed stopped on the active line of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on an active line, there is no symbol combination that will result in a winning win, regardless of the symbols stopped and displayed on the active lines of the center reel 31 and the right reel 31. In other words, when a predetermined symbol on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on an active line, there is no so-called single drum winning combination that will result in a winning win, regardless of the symbols stopped and displayed on the active lines of the center reel 31 and the right reel 31.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" to "Small Win F2 Condition Device" are activated, there is no case where the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the display window 18 when the first left button is stopped, but there is a case where the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the display window 18 when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" to "Small Win F2 Condition Device" are activated and the pressing order is correct.

In this embodiment, an AT lottery is executed for games in which the winning number "13" or "14" is drawn by the winning combination drawing means 61. Furthermore, in games in which the winning number "13" is drawn, the "small combination G condition device" is activated, making it possible to win "small combination 79" or "small combination 80" (when "cherry" is lined up on the upward-sloping line (invalid line)), and in games in which the winning number "14" is drawn, the "small combination H condition device" is activated, making it possible to win "small combination 81" (when "cherry" is lined up on the middle line (valid line)). Therefore, when "cherry" is lined up on the upward-sloping line (invalid line) or the middle line (valid line), the player hopes to win the AT lottery.

In addition, in conventional slot machines 10, it is known that when a cherry-related role and a special role (bonus) are simultaneously won (double win) in the role lottery, or when a cherry-related role is won, an AT lottery is held, and when a cherry-related role is won, if a "cherry" on the left reel 31 stops and appears in the display window 18 (upper left, middle left, or lower left) in a game in which a cherry-related role is won, the cherry-related role will win regardless of the stopped symbols on the pay lines of the center reel 31 and right reel 31. In such slot machines 10, when a "cherry" on the left reel 31 stops and appears in the display window 18 and a cherry-related role wins, the player hopes to win a special role or the AT lottery.

However, in this embodiment, even when the pressing order is correct when the "Small Winning D1 Condition Device" to the "Small Winning F2 Condition Device" are activated, there are cases where the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped within the display window 18, but in this case the left reel 31 is stopped for the second or third time, and at that time two or three "Bells" are lined up on the invalid line.
This allows the player to recognize that a winning combination related to bells has been achieved, and prevents the player from having excessive expectations of winning the AT lottery, etc., even if the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

As mentioned above, in the example shown in Figure 20(1), the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed in the display window 18 (upper left), but the symbol combination displayed on the pay line at this time is the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" is "Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Replay," which is not a winning symbol combination regardless of the symbols displayed on the pay lines of the center reel 31 and right reel 31. In other words, the symbol combination shown in Figure 20(1) is not a winning symbol combination for a cherry, nor is it a winning symbol combination for a single-reel win. The symbol combinations shown in Figures 20(2) and (3) are the same as those shown in Figure 20(1).

Also, as shown in Figure 14, the pattern combinations that can be displayed stopped on the valid line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated are the pattern combinations corresponding to "small win 01", "small win 07", "small win 08", "small win 31", "small win 32", "small win 53" or "small win 54".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement on all "3" reels 31. The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is correct.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 07" and "small win 08" are symbol combinations consisting of symbols on "two" reels 31 in a "PB = 1" arrangement and symbols on the other "one" reel 31 in a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement. The symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 07" and "small win 08" are correct in the push order at the first stop, but can be displayed as stops when the push order is incorrect at the second stop.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 31", "small win 32", "small win 53" and "small win 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "1" reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" arrangement. The symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 31", "small win 32", "small win 53" and "small win 54" can be displayed as stopped when the push order is incorrect on the first stop.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 stop, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the valid line.
Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged as "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols arranged as "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

The symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the valid line when each of the condition devices of the "small win A2 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" is activated are the same as those of the "small win A1 condition device."
The symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when each of the condition devices "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" is activated include a symbol combination where the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, a symbol combination where the symbol on "two" reels 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and a symbol combination where the symbol on "three" reels 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when each of the condition devices, "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device," is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" configuration is "4."
Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when each of the condition devices, "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device," is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "2."

Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when each of the condition devices, "Small win A2 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device," is activated, the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols on "3" reels 31 in the "PB=1" arrangement is "1."
The number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbol on two other reels 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement is greater than the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on two reels 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbol on one other reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on three reels 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Also, as shown in Figure 14, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time, depending on the subsequent stopping operation, a pattern combination corresponding to "small win 01" which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win A1 condition device", can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first, depending on the subsequent stopping operation, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a pattern combination corresponding to "small win 31" or "small win 32", which pays out "1" medal less than when the pattern combination corresponding to "small win 01" is stopped and displayed on an active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time, depending on the subsequent stopping operation, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a pattern combination corresponding to "small win 53" or "small win 54", which pays out "1" medal less than when the pattern combination corresponding to "small win 01" is stopped and displayed on an active line.

14, the symbol on the center reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" and "small win 32" is "watermelon." The "watermelon" on the center reel 31 is a symbol that is different from the symbol (bell) on the center reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01," and is a symbol that is arranged in "PB=1" on the center reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed when the first middle reel stops and the push order is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, and to prevent the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from stopping on an effective line, thereby preventing the "small win 01" from being won.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" and "small win 32" is one type, "red 7", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" and "small win 32" is one type, "watermelon".
In this way, by limiting the number of types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

14, the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" and "small win 54" is "cherry." The "cherry" on the right reel 31 is a symbol that is different from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01," and is a symbol that is arranged as "PB=1" on the right reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed when the first right reel stops and the push order is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from stopping on an effective line, thereby preventing the "small win 01" from being won.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" and "small win 54" is one type, "white BAR," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" and "small win 54" is one type, "cherry."
In this way, by limiting the number of types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, depending on the subsequent stopping operation, a pattern combination corresponding to "small win 03" that pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win C1 condition device", can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time, depending on the subsequent stopping operation, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a pattern combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64", which will pay out "1" medal less than when the pattern combination corresponding to "small win 03" is stopped and displayed on an active line.

14, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is a "replay." This "replay" on the left reel 31 is a symbol that is different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03," and is a symbol that is arranged in "PB=1" on the left reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed when the first left reel stops and the push order is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from stopping on an effective line, thereby preventing the "small win 03" from being won.

14, the symbol on the center reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is "red 7" or "blue 7." The "red 7" or "blue 7" on the center reel 31 is a symbol that is different from the symbol (bell) on the center reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03," and is a symbol that is arranged in "PB≠1" on the center reel 31.
14, the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is "red 7." The "red 7" on the right reel 31 is a symbol that is different from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03," and is a symbol that is arranged in a "PB≠1" configuration on the right reel 31.

The symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is one type, "red 7."
In this way, by limiting the number of types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the left reel 31 has a portion where a "black BAR" (number 10), a "replay" (number 11), and a "bell" (number 12) are arranged in this order.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 13 (1), when the left first stop occurs during operation of the "small win C1 condition device," the "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay" (No. 11), and "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.
Furthermore, of the "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay" (No. 11) and "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, "replay" which is stopped and displayed in the middle left row is the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small symbol 63" and "small symbol 64".

As shown in Figure 13 (1), when the left reel stops first when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, and when the left reel stops first when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay" (number 11), and "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18, just as when the left reel stops first when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.
This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the lottery result of the role lottery means 61) from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop.

Also, as shown in Figure 14, the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role B2 condition device" are "left, center, right" or "left, right, center" in the correct push order. That is, the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role B2 condition device" are in the correct push order at the time of the first left stop.
Here, the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win B2 condition device" are referred to as the "correct answer group at the first stop on the left."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 31,""small win 32,""small win 53," and "small win 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 33,""small win 34,""small win 49," and "small win 50" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 35,""small win 36,""small win 47," and "small win 48" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 37,""small win 38,""small win 57," and "small win 58" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" configuration.

From the above, of the symbol combinations included in the "correct group when the left first stop occurs" that can be displayed stopped on an active line when the condition device is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB = 1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration is "16".

Also, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the "small role C1 condition device" to the "small role D2 condition device" are "middle left and right" or "middle right and left" in the correct push order. That is, the "small role C1 condition device" to the "small role D2 condition device" are in the correct push order at the time of the first middle stop.
Here, the "small win C1 condition device" to the "small win D2 condition device" are referred to as the "correct answer group at the time of the first middle stop."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 51,""small win 52,""small win 63," and "small win 64" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 55,""small win 56,""small win 65," and "small win 66" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 59,""small win 60,""small win 67," and "small win 68" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" configuration.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 61,""small win 62,""small win 69," and "small win 70" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, of the symbol combinations included in the "middle first stop correct group" that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the condition device is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB = 1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration is "16".

Also, as shown in Figure 15, the "small role E1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" are "right left center" or "right center left" in the correct push order. That is, the "small role E1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" are in the correct push order at the time of the first right stop.
Here, the "small win E1 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" are referred to as the "right first stop correct answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 43,""small win 46,""small win 71," and "small win 72" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" configuration.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 44,""small win 45,""small win 77," and "small win 78" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 39,""small win 40,""small win 75," and "small win 76" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 41,""small win 42,""small win 73," and "small win 74" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, of the symbol combinations included in the "Right First Stop Correct Group" that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the condition device is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB = 1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration is "16".

Also, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the "small role C1 condition device" to "small role F2 condition device" are "center left and right", "center right left", "right left center" or "right center left" as the correct push order. That is, the "small role C1 condition device" to "small role F2 condition device" are incorrect in the push order at the time of the first left stop.
Here, the "small win C1 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" are referred to as the "incorrect answer group at the time of the first stop on the left."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 65" and "small win 66" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 67" and "small win 68" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 69" and "small win 70" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 71" and "small win 72" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 77" and "small win 78" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 75" and "small win 76" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 73" and "small win 74" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "incorrect group when the left first reel stops" that can be displayed stopped on an active line when the condition device is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "16".
18, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 63" to "small win 78" are symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when a condition device included in the "left first incorrect solution group" is activated, and are symbol combinations in which the symbol (replay) on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

Also, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the "small role A1 condition device" to "small role B2 condition device" and "small role E1 condition device" to "small role F2 condition device" are "left center right", "left left center", "right left center" or "right center left". In other words, the "small role A1 condition device" to "small role B2 condition device" and "small role E1 condition device" to "small role F2 condition device" are incorrect in the push order at the time of the first stop in the middle.
Here, the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win B2 condition device" and the "small win E1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are referred to as the "incorrect answer group at the time of the first stop in the middle."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 31" and "small win 32" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 33" and "small win 34" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 35" and "small win 36" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 37" and "small win 38" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 43" and "small win 46" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 44" and "small win 45" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 39" and "small win 40" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 41" and "small win 42" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "incorrect solution group when the middle first stop occurs" that can be displayed stopped on an active line when the condition device is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the middle reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "16".
16, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 31" to "small win 46" are symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when a condition device included in the "middle first incorrect solution group" is activated, and are symbol combinations in which the symbol (watermelon) on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

Also, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role D2 condition device" are "left center right", "left left center", "center left left" or "center right left" as the correct push order. In other words, the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role D2 condition device" are incorrect in the push order at the time of the first right stop.
Here, the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win D2 condition device" are referred to as the "incorrect answer group at the first stop on the right."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 53" and "small win 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 49" and "small win 50" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 47" and "small win 48" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 57" and "small win 58" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 51" and "small win 52" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on an effective line when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 55" and "small win 56" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 59" and "small win 60" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an effective line when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 61" and "small win 62" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbol on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "incorrect solution group when the right reel first stops" that can be displayed stopped on an active line when the condition device is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "16".
17, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 53" to "small win 62" are symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when a condition device included in the "right first incorrect solution group" is activated, and are symbol combinations in which the symbol (cherry) on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

As explained in the "correct group when stopped first on the left," "correct group when stopped first in the middle," "correct group when stopped first on the right," "incorrect group when stopped first on the left," "incorrect group when stopped first in the middle," and "incorrect group when stopped first on the right," by setting the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols on one reel 31 with a "PB = 1" arrangement and symbols on two other reels 31 with a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement to "16," it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated.

In other words, when playing with the condition devices included in the "incorrect solution group at first middle stop" (small win A1 condition device, small win A2 condition device, small win B1 condition device, small win B2 condition device, small win E1 condition device, small win E2 condition device, small win F1 condition device, small win F2 condition device) activated, the push order will be incorrect at the time of the first middle stop. Furthermore, for the symbol combinations that can be displayed at the first middle stop during play with the condition devices included in the "incorrect solution group at first middle stop" activated, the symbol on the middle reel 31 will be in a "PB = 1" configuration and one type (watermelon), and the symbols on both the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 will be in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Furthermore, in order to give priority to the number of symbol combinations (one symbol) that can be displayed when the push order is correct in a game when a conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group when the middle first stop occurs" is activated, the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed when the middle first stop occurs (when the push order is incorrect) in a game when a conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group when the middle first stop occurs" is set to "2" for each conditional device.
This makes it possible to minimize the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed when the condition device included in the "incorrect solution group when the first middle stop occurs" is activated.
The "incorrect answer group when first stopping on the left" and the "incorrect answer group when first stopping on the right" are similar to the "incorrect answer group when first stopping on the center."

Here, a specification called Accelerator AT is known in conventional slot machines. A slot machine equipped with this Accelerator AT has multiple types of push-order bells, and each push-order bell has high-price bells and low-price bells with different symbol combinations.
The "high-value bell" refers to a bell with a large payout number that can be won if you press the buttons correctly when you win the push order bell. The "low-value bell" refers to a bell with a small payout number that can be won if you press the buttons incorrectly when you win the push order bell.
In addition, during non-internal and internal play, a lottery is held for roles that include all push-order bells, and in a game in which each push-order bell is won, if the push-order is correct, the corresponding high-order bell will win, and if the push-order is incorrect, the high-order bell will not win, and one of the corresponding low-order bells can win.

In contrast, during special games, the push order bells are not drawn, and instead, a lottery is held for the small prize ALL, which is won simultaneously by all high-value bells and all low-value bells (double win), and in games where the small prize ALL is won, any of the high-value bells will win the prize.
The probability of winning all small roles during the special game is set to be equal to or higher than the probability of winning each push order bell during non-internal and internal play, and the lottery results other than the winning of all small roles are either treated as non-wins or as winning of all one-piece roles which are overlapping wins.
This makes the probability of winning each high-value bell and each low-value bell during the special game equal to or greater than the probability of winning each high-value bell and each low-value bell while not inside or inside the game, while the player's medals decrease during the special game.

In this embodiment, the winning probability of each push order bell (small prize A1 condition device to small prize F2 condition device) during non-internal and internal play is set to "2500/65536", and the winning probability of each high-ranking bell (small prize 01 to small prize 06) is set to "5000/65536".
In addition, by setting the probability of winning the small prize ALL (small prize ALL condition device) during special play to "5001/65536", the probability of winning each high-value bell (small prize 01 to small prize 06) during special play is set to "5001/65536".
However, since the probability of winning each small win during special play should be set to be equal to or greater than the probability of winning each small win during non-internal and internal play, the probability of winning all small wins during special play may be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

However, in slot machines equipped with the conventional accelerator AT described above, there are multiple types of push-order bells, and each push-order bell has a high-number bell and a low-number bell with a different pattern combination, which causes problems such as a large total number of pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push-order bell is won, and it becomes difficult for players to understand the pattern combinations that correspond to the high-number bells.
Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, by appropriately setting each of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed during play when the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" are activated, the total number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed during play when the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" are activated is minimized, and the player can easily understand the winning combinations when the symbol combinations corresponding to "small role 01" to "small role 06" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment is a slot machine in which, in a game in which multiple types of small prizes with different payout numbers are won, the type of small prize that is won varies depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, resulting in an advantage/disadvantage in the game result (payout number), and the pattern arrangement is different from that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 in the second embodiment.
The symbol arrangement on the reel 31 in the second embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment shown in Fig. 2, except that the "bells" at numbers "12" and "17" on the left reel 31 are replaced with "bell A," the "bells" at numbers "2" and "7" on the left reel 31 are replaced with "bell B," and all of the "bells" on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 are replaced with "bell A." Otherwise, the symbol arrangement is the same as that of the reel 31 in the first embodiment shown in Fig. 2.
In the first embodiment, the "Bell" on the left reel 31 was in the "PB=1" arrangement, but in the second embodiment, the "Bell A" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and the "Bell B" on the left reel 31 is also in the "PB≠1" arrangement. However, in the second embodiment, the two symbols of the "Bell A" and "Bell B" on the left reel 31 are combined to form the "PB=1" arrangement.

22 and 23 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as winning combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the winning combination drawing means 61), symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in this embodiment.
22 and 23, the game states in this embodiment include non-internal, 1BB internal, and 1BB game. In addition, in this embodiment, there is only one type of special combination, “1BB.”
In Figures 22 and 23, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB", and "in 1BB" indicates "in 1BB game".

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 01", "Small win 04" and "Small win 05" are obtained by replacing the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 02" and "small prize 06" are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" is obtained by replacing the "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A/Bell B", and by replacing the "Bell" on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A".

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 07" to "small win 10" are obtained by replacing the "bell" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A."
The symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 11" to "small win 14" are obtained by replacing the "bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 15" is obtained by replacing the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A" and by replacing the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 16" is obtained by replacing the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "White BAR" and by replacing the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 17" is obtained by replacing the "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell B" and by replacing the "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 18" is obtained by replacing the "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Red 7" and by replacing the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A."

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 19" to "Small Win 22" are obtained by replacing the "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A/Bell B" and by replacing the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 23" is the same as that in the first embodiment, except that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is replaced with "Bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 24" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR."
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 25" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell B."
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 26" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" is obtained by replacing the "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 28" is obtained by replacing the "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "blue 7."
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 29" is obtained by replacing the "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "black BAR."
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 30" is obtained by replacing the "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR."

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 32" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "white BAR."
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 33" is obtained by replacing the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell B."
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 34" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 35" is obtained by replacing the "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A" and by replacing the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Blue 7".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 36" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR" and by replacing the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "blue 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 37" is obtained by replacing the "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell B" and by replacing the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Red 7".
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 38" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7", and by replacing the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 40" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR" and by replacing the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "black BAR."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 41" is obtained by replacing the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Bell B" and by replacing the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "White BAR."
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 42" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 43" is obtained by replacing the "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A" and replacing the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "White BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 44" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR" and by replacing the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR".

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 45" is obtained by replacing the "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Bell B" and replacing the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Black BAR."
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 46" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7" and by replacing the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "black BAR."

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 47" to "small prize 82" and "replay" are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is the same as the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" in the first embodiment.

In addition, the "small win condition device" and "replay condition device" are the same as in the first embodiment, and the "1BB condition device" is the same as the "1BB-A condition device" in the first embodiment.

FIG. 24 is a diagram (number table) showing the number of winning numbers to be placed for each game state in the second embodiment.
In FIG. 24, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB" and "in 1BB" indicates "in 1BB game".
As in the first embodiment, when the numbers shown in FIG. 24 are divided by "65536", the winning probability of each winning number is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 24, the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win I condition device" are subject to lottery when not inside and when inside (within 1BB), but are not subject to lottery when inside 1BB (during 1BB play).
In addition, the "1-piece role ALL condition device" is subject to lottery in all game states.
Furthermore, unlike the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win I condition device," the "small win ALL condition device" is only eligible for lottery during 1BB (during 1BB play), and is not eligible for lottery during non-internal and internal play (during 1BB).

Furthermore, like the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win I condition device," the "replay condition device" is subject to lottery when it is not inside or inside (when it is inside 1BB), but is not subject to lottery when it is inside 1BB (when playing 1BB).
In addition, the "1BB condition device" is only subject to the lottery when not inside the game, and is not subject to the lottery in other game states.
In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in any game state, the winning numbers "1" to "20" will be drawn by the lottery means 61, and there will be no non-winning numbers.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state in the second embodiment, and FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the change conditions of the game state in this embodiment.
In Figure 26, "∞" (infinite) in the number of times column means that there is no upper limit to the number of times that a game can be played for each game state, and that game state will be maintained (continued) until the transition condition described in the change trigger column is met.

The main control means 50 judges whether or not a transition condition for the game state is satisfied when all the reels 31 are stopped in each game, and when it judges that the transition condition for the game state is satisfied, controls to transition the game state.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to the non-internal state. At the time of shipment from the factory, it transitions to the non-internal state. Also, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on with the power off and then the power is turned on in this state, it transitions to the setting change state. At this time, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and it transitions to the non-internal state.

The non-internal state is maintained until the "1BB condition device" is activated.
Then, when the "1BB condition device" is activated (1BB win) during non-internal play, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is displayed stopped on the valid line (1BB win), the game transitions to "1BB game" (1BB activated).
On the other hand, if the "1BB condition device" is activated during the non-internal period, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the active line, the state will transition to "1BB internal period."

In addition, in the case of "inside 1BB", if the winning combination is not obtained by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" can be displayed stopped on the active line.
However, in this embodiment, since the winning combination will not be a non-winning combination in the "1BB" state, once the state has shifted to "1BB", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" will not be displayed stopped on the valid line, and the state will continue to be "1BB".

Also, during "1BB game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the ending condition of the "1BB-A game" is met.
Furthermore, the "1BB game" continues until the total number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210", and ends when the total number of medals won exceeds "210".

When the "RB game" is finished, if the finishing condition of the "1BB game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Also, when the "RB game" is finished, if the finishing condition of the "1BB game" is met, the "1BB game" is finished and the game moves to a non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the "1BB game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, and the "1BB game" is ended, and the game shifts to the non-internal state.

Next, using Figure 27, we will explain the characteristics of the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the ``small win A1 condition device'' etc. is activated in the second embodiment, and the characteristics of the stop control of the reel 31 when the ``small win A1 condition device'' etc. is activated.
Figure 27 (1) shows the pattern on the left reel that can be displayed in the display window when the small win A1 condition device is activated and the left first stop occurs, when the small win B1 condition device is activated and the left first stop occurs, and when the small win C1 condition device is activated and the left first stop occurs.
Figure 27 (2) shows the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed in the display window when the small win C1 condition device is activated and the left second stop occurs after the middle first stop occurs.
In Figure 27, the two-dot chain line passing through the left middle, middle middle, and right middle indicates the effective line. This also applies to Figure 29 described later.
In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, the number of medals is prioritized, and with a probability of 1/1, the pattern combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small prize 01" that pays out "10", which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small prize A1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the valid line.
In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win the "small win 01".

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 27(1), there are cases where "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 27(1), there are cases where "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 6) and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, center (132)" when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small win 02" that pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "small win B1 condition device", is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of "1/1" based on the number of medals being given priority.
In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, the "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win the "small win 02".

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 27(1), there are cases where "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 27(1), there are cases where "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 6) and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center, left, right (213)", the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 03" which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "small win C1 condition device", is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of "1/1" based on the number of medals being given priority.
Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, "Bell A" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row (valid line) in order to win "small win 03", and then at the second stop on the left, "Bell A" or "Bell B" (two symbols combined to form "PB=1") on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row (valid line) in order to win "small win 03".

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the left second stop occurs after the middle first stop, as shown on the left side of Figure 27(2), "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row, as shown on the right side of Figure 27(2), and "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row.

That is, "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell A" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay" (No. 6), "Bell B" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18. Furthermore, "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18 either.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)", the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both pay out one coin) is stopped and displayed on the effective line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number.
In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row to make it possible to win "small win 63" or "small win 64".

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 27(1), there are cases where "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 27(1), there are cases where "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 6) and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

In this way, when the first left stop occurs when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and when the first left stop occurs when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, as shown in Figure 27 (1), "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay" (No. 11) and "bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "red 7" (No. 5), "replay" (No. 6) and "bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18.
This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the lottery result of the role lottery means 61) from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop.

27(2), when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the second left stop after the first center stop, "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell A" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay" (No. 6), "Bell B" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18. In this case, "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18 either.
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, different symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed in the display window 18 when the first left reel stops (when the pressing order is incorrect) and when the second left reel stops after the first middle reel stops (when the pressing order is correct).

Then, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left button stops (when the push order is incorrect), a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 03" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell A" or "bell B" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an effective line, thereby preventing the "small win 03" from being won.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" is one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" is one type, "red 7."
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the first left reel stops (when the push order is incorrect) when the ``small win C1 condition device'' is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the ``small win C1 condition device'' is activated.

Furthermore, the probability that the "red 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" will be displayed stopped on an active line is "1/4", the probability that the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" will be displayed stopped on an active line is also "1/4", and the probability that the "red 7" on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" will be displayed stopped on an active line is also "1/4".
This reduces the probability of winning (acquisition rate) of a 1-coin role when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated to 1/8, which in turn reduces the payout rate per game, thereby improving the degree of freedom in design.

In addition, the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is not displayed in the display window 18 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, or when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and then the "second left stop" after the first middle stop, is activated. This prevents players from getting their hopes up too high.

Although the first and second embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the second embodiment, the "bells" at numbers "12" and "17" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell A," the "bells" at numbers "2" and "7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell B," and all of the "bells" on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell A," but the replacement of symbols is not limited to this.

For example, as shown in Figure 28, the "replays" for numbers "11" and "16" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "replay A," and the "replays" for numbers "1" and "6" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "replay B."
In addition, the "Cherry" numbers "9" and "14" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Cherry A", and the "Cherry" number "4" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Cherry B".

Furthermore, all of the "Replays" on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Replay A", and all of the "Cherry" on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Cherry A".
Other than that, the arrangement of symbols is the same as that of the reel 31 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.
In the first embodiment, the "Replay" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, but in the modified example shown in Fig. 28, the "Replay A" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and the "Replay B" on the left reel 31 is also in the "PB≠1" arrangement. However, in the modified example shown in Fig. 28, the two symbols of the "Replay A" and "Replay B" on the left reel 31 combine to form the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, by replacing the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 as shown in FIG. 28, the symbols constituting the symbol combinations of the winning combinations in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 can be replaced as appropriate.
For example, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 01" can be "Replay A/Replay B" - "Bell" - "Watermelon", and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 02" can be "Replay A/Replay B" - "Cherry" - "Replay A".
Furthermore, even if the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 is replaced as shown in FIG. 28, the small win condition device, replay condition device, and 1BB condition device can be the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left, middle, right (123)" when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 01" which pays out "10" medals, the maximum number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "small win A1 condition device", with a probability of "1/1" is displayed stopped on the active line, based on the number of medals being given priority.
In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "Replay A" or "Replay B" (the two symbols combined form a "PB=1" arrangement) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win "small win 01".

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay A" (number 11) and "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31, or the "red 7" (number 5), "replay B" (number 6) and "bell" (number 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

Furthermore, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, middle (132)", the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 02" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "small win B1 condition device", is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" based on the number of medals being given priority.
In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "Replay A" or "Replay B" (the two symbols combined form a "PB=1" arrangement) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win "small win 02".

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay A" (number 11) and "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31, or the "red 7" (number 5), "replay B" (number 6) and "bell" (number 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center, left, right (213)", the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 03" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "small win C1 condition device", is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" based on the number of medals being given priority.
Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row (valid line) to win "small win 03", and then at the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row (valid line) to win "small win 03".

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the left second stop occurs after the middle first stop, as shown on the left side of Figure 29 (2), "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row, as shown on the right side of Figure 29 (2), and "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row.

That is, "Replay A" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay B" (No. 6), "Bell" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18. Furthermore, "Cherry A" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18, and "Cherry B" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18 either.

In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)", the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both of which pay out one coin) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "Replay A" or "Replay B" (the two symbols combined form a "PB=1" arrangement) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, making it possible to win "small win 63" or "small win 64".

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay A" (number 11) and "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31, or the "red 7" (number 5), "replay B" (number 6) and "bell" (number 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

In this way, at the first left stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and at the first left stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, as shown in Figure 29 (1), "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay A" (No. 11) and "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "red 7" (No. 5), "replay B" (No. 6) and "bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18.
This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the lottery result of the role lottery means 61) from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop.

29(2), when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the second left stop after the first center stop, "Replay A" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay B" (No. 6), "Bell" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18. In this case, "Cherry A" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18, and "Cherry B" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18 either.
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, different symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed in the display window 18 when the first left reel stops (when the pressing order is incorrect) and when the second left reel stops after the first middle reel stops (when the pressing order is correct).

Then, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left button stops (when the push order is incorrect), "Replay A" or "Replay B" is displayed stopped on the active line, which is a different pattern from the pattern (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 03" and in which the two patterns combined on the left reel 31 form a "PB=1" arrangement.
This makes it possible to prevent the "Replay A" or "Replay B" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "Bell" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an effective line, thereby preventing the "Small Win 03" from being won.

Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the "small win C ...

(2) In the first and second embodiments, the middle line is the pay line, but the pay line is not limited to the middle line, and the number of pay lines is not limited to "1".
For example, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the top line can be set as an effective line, and the other lines can be set as ineffective lines.
Also, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" can be "bell"-"replay"-"cherry". In this case, when "small win 01" is won, as shown in Figure 30 (1), "bell"-"replay"-"cherry" is stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and "bell"-"bell"-"bell" is stopped and displayed on the line sloping to the right (invalid line), so the stop result can be the same as when "small win 01" is won in the first embodiment.

Similarly, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" can be "bell" - "bell" - "bell". In this case, when "small win 02" is won, as shown in Figure 30 (2), "bell" - "bell" - "bell" is stopped and displayed on the upper line (effective line), so that the stop result can be the same as when "small win 02" is won in the first embodiment.
Also, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" can be "watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon". In this case, when "small win 03" is won, as shown in Figure 30 (3), "watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are stopped and displayed on the middle line (invalid line), so the stop results can be the same as when "small win 03" is won in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" can be "cherry" - "replay" - "bell". In this case, when "small win 04" is won, as shown in Figure 31 (1), "cherry" - "replay" - "bell" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and "bell" - "bell" - "bell" are stopped and displayed on the right-sloping line (invalid line), so the stop result can be the same as when "small win 04" is won in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" can be "cherry" - "replay" - "cherry". In this case, when "small win 05" is won, as shown in Figure 31 (2), "cherry" - "replay" - "cherry" is stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and "bell" - "bell" - "bell" is stopped and displayed on the small hill line (invalid line), so the stop result can be the same as when "small win 05" is won in the first embodiment.

Also, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" can be "Cherry"-"Watermelon"-"Cherry." In this case, when "Small Win 06" is won, as shown in FIG. 31 (3), "Cherry"-"Watermelon"-"Cherry" will be displayed on the upper line (valid line), and "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" will be displayed on the lower line (invalid line), so the winning combination will be the same as when "Small Win 06" is won in the first embodiment.

Also, for example, the bottom line or the line sloping downward to the right can be made the active line.
Furthermore, for example, five lines, namely the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the upward-sloping line, and the downward-sloping line, can be set as active lines.

(3) In the first and second embodiments, three reels 31 are provided, namely, the left reel 31, the center reel 31, and the right reel 31. However, the number of reels 31 is not limited to three.
For example, four reels 31, namely, a first reel 31, a second reel 31, a third reel 31, and a fourth reel 31, may be arranged side by side. In this case, four stop switches 42, namely, a first stop switch 42 to a fourth stop switch 42, may be provided corresponding to the four reels 31, respectively.

(4) In the first and second embodiments, the number of coins paid out for the small prize that is won when the pressing order is correct when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize F2 condition device" are activated is set to "10," but this is not limited to this, and it may be set to, for example, "8," or "15."
(5) In the first and second embodiments, the number of coins to be paid out for the small prize that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize F2 condition device" are activated is set to "1", but this is not limited to this, and it may be set to, for example, "2" or "3".

(6) In the first and second embodiments, 12 types of condition devices, namely, "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device," are provided as condition devices that result in an advantage/disadvantage in the game result depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. However, this is not limited to this, and it may also be possible to provide six types, for example, "small win A condition device" to "small win F condition device."
(7) In the first and second embodiments, the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed when the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" are activated is set to six options: "left center right,""left left center,""center left left,""center right left,""right left center," and "right center left." However, this is not limited to this, and the options may be three, for example, "the first stop is on the left and the second and third stops are optional,""the first stop is in the middle and the second and third stops are optional," and "the first stop is on the right and the second and third stops are optional."

(8) In the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of the winning number “1” (small prize A1 condition device) and the winning number “2” (small prize A2 condition device) during non-internal and internal periods is set to “2500/65536”, respectively, thereby setting the winning probability of “small prize 01” during non-internal and internal periods to “5000/65536”.
Similarly, by setting the winning probability of winning numbers "3" (small win B1 condition device) to "12" (small win F2 condition device) during non-internal and internal periods to "2500/65536", respectively, the winning probability of "small win 02" to "small win 06" during non-internal and internal periods is set to "5000/65536".
In addition, by setting the winning probability of the winning number "17" (small win ALL condition device) during the special game to "5001/65536", the winning probability of "small win 01" to "small win 06" during the special game is set to "5001/65536" respectively.

However, since the probability of winning each small win during special play can be set to be equal to or greater than the probability of winning each small win during non-internal and internal play, the probability of winning the winning number "17" (small win ALL condition device) during special play, i.e., the probability of winning "small win 01" to "small win 06" during special play, can be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

(9) In the first and second embodiments, when the push order bell is won (when the “small prize A1 condition device” to “small prize F2 condition device” are activated), the correct push order is one of six options: “left center right,” “left left center,” “center left left,” “center right left,” “center right left,” “right left center,” and “right center left,” and a different high bell (a role that is won when the push order bell is won in the correct order; in the above embodiments, “small prize 01” to “small prize 06”) is won for each correct push order.
However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the high-level bell may be of three types: "small prize 01" to "small prize 03." Furthermore, when the pressing order is correct ("left-center-right" or "left-center-center") when the "small prize A1 condition device,""small prize A2 condition device,""small prize B1 condition device," and "small prize B2 condition device" are activated, "small prize 01" may be awarded. Similarly, when the pressing order is correct ("center-left-right" or "center-right-left") when the "small prize C1 condition device,""small prize C2 condition device,""small prize D1 condition device," and "small prize D2 condition device" are activated, "small prize 02" may be awarded. Furthermore, when the pressing order is correct ("right-left-center" or "right-center-left") when the "small prize E1 condition device,""small prize E2 condition device,""small prize F1 condition device," and "small prize F2 condition device" are activated, "small prize 03" may be awarded.

In this case, the winning probability of each small win during special play should be set to equal or exceed the winning probability of each small win during non-internal and internal play. Therefore, if the winning probabilities of winning numbers "1" (small win A1 condition device) through "12" (small win F2 condition device) during non-internal and internal play are set to "2500/65536," the winning probability of winning number "17" (small win ALL condition device) during special play can be set to, for example, "10000/65536."

(10) In the first and second embodiments, the correct push order when the push order bell is won (when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" to "Small Win F2 Condition Device" are activated) is one of six options: "Left Center Right," "Left Left Center," "Center Left Right," "Center Right Left," "Center Right Left," "Right Left Center," and "Right Center Left." However, this is not limited to this, and the options may be three, for example, "First stop is on the left, and the second and third stops are optional" (left --), "First stop is in the center, and the second and third stops are optional" (center --), or "First stop is on the right, and the second and third stops are optional" (right --).

In this case, three types of bells can be provided as the correct order to press: a "left correct bell condition device" where "left --" is the correct order to press; a "middle correct bell condition device" where "middle --" is the correct order to press; and a "right correct bell condition device" where "right --" is the correct order to press.
Then, when the button presses are pressed in the correct order when the "left correct bell condition device" is activated, "small prize 01" is awarded, when the button presses are pressed in the correct order when the "middle correct bell condition device" is activated, "small prize 02" is awarded, and when the button presses are pressed in the correct order when the "right correct bell condition device" is activated, "small prize 03" is awarded.
In this case, when the winning probability of the winning number corresponding to the "left correct bell condition device,""middle correct bell condition device," and "right correct bell condition device" during non-internal and internal play is set to "5000/65536," the winning probability of the winning number corresponding to the "small prize ALL condition device" during special play can be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

(11) In the first and second embodiments, a slot machine is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines).
Here, an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) can, for example, eliminate the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, hopper motor 36, and payout sensor 37). It can also eliminate the need for the medal insertion slot 43 and medal selector. All electronic medals (electronic gaming media) awarded as a result of winning combinations are stored in the stored number display LED 76. In this case, the stored number display LED 76 can be configured with, for example, five digits (allowing for a maximum of 99,999 electronic medals to be stored).

Third Embodiment
In the third embodiment, a power switch 11, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided.
In addition, the door switch 17 , the setting key switch 152 , and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 .

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated to turn the power on and off.
In the following description, turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "powering on,""turning on the power," or "resuming power supply."
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the power supply."

The door switch 17 is a switch that detects the opening of the front door 12 and is attached to the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 .
The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened when, for example, the power is turned on, settings are changed, settings are checked, an error occurs, medals are replenished, etc.

The door switch 17 is set to be turned off when the front door 12 is closed, and to be turned on when the front door 12 is open, thereby making it possible to detect when the front door 12 is open.
In addition, the opening of the front door 12 may be detected by setting the door switch 17 to be on when the front door 12 is closed and to be off when the front door 12 is open.

The setting key switch 152 is a switch used to transition to a setting change state (also called "setting change mode" or "setting change in progress") in which the setting value can be changed, or to a setting confirmation state (also called "setting confirmation mode" or "setting confirmation in progress") in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed.
By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 turns on (also referred to as the "first state"), and by rotating the setting key 90 degrees counterclockwise from this state, the setting key switch 152 turns off (also referred to as the "second state").

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves as a setting change switch 153 , a reset switch 153 , and an RWM clear switch 153 .
The setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing a setting value in the setting change state.
The reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to restore the state before the error occurred (to release the error state) after the error that occurred has been removed.
Furthermore, the RWM clear switch 153 is a switch that is operated when a predetermined storage area in the RWM 53 is initialized (cleared).

In the following description, it may be referred to as the "setting change (reset) switch 153," the "setting change switch 153," the "reset switch 153," or the "RWM clear switch 153."
In addition, various switches such as the setting key switch 152 and the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 may be referred to as being "operated" when they are in the on state, and as being "not operated" when they are in the off state.
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are integrated, but this is not limiting, and the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 may be provided separately.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the "game zone" includes a "normal zone" and a "favourable zone".
The "normal section" is a game section in which signals related to the instruction function are prohibited from being sent to a peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80), and which does not affect the performance of the instruction function at all (the instruction function is not activated). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which advantageous operation modes of the stop switch 42 are not notified. Note that the normal section may also be referred to as a "non-advantageous section."
The "advantageous zone" is a game zone that has the capability related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). In other words, the advantageous zone is a game zone that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (for example, the correct pressing order).

Furthermore, the third embodiment is provided with an advantageous zone display LED 77 that can indicate to the player that the zone is advantageous. In the normal zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, and in the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on. In other words, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, it indicates that the zone is a normal zone, and when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it indicates that the zone is advantageous. In this way, in the third embodiment, the display mode (off or on) of the advantageous zone display LED 77 and the game zone (normal zone or advantageous zone) correspond one-to-one.
31, the segment P of the digit 4a of the acquired number display LED 78 can be used as the advantageous zone display LED 77. Also, the advantageous zone display LED 77 can be provided separately from the acquired number display LED 78.

In addition, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may not be lit immediately after transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, but may be lit when a predetermined condition is met after transitioning to the advantageous zone (for example, when notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 begins). In this case, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, it indicates that the zone is advantageous, but when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is off, it may indicate either a normal zone or an advantageous zone.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the main CPU 55, ROM 54, and RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
The main control board 50 is provided with a main CPU 55, an RWM 53, and a ROM 54.
32, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and this chip contains a main CPU 55. The main CPU 55 also has built-in memory, which includes a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. The addresses of the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 are consecutive.

The storage area of the ROM 54 includes a used area and an outside used area, and each of the used area and the outside used area includes a control area and a data area.
Here, the "usage area" is a storage area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
The "control area" is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored, and is also called the "program area."
Furthermore, a "data area" is a storage area in which information other than programs is stored, and in which data used when a program is executed is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside of use area" is a memory area in which information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored, such as a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 described below, a program used during testing, and a program for preventing cheating.
Similarly to the usage area, the "outside the usage area" has a control area and a data area. The control area of the usage area is sometimes called the "first control area" or "first program area," and the control area outside the usage area is sometimes called the "second control area" or "second program area."
Furthermore, a program stored in the control area of the usage area (first control area, first program area) may be referred to as the "first program," and a program stored in the control area outside the usage area (second control area, second program area) may be referred to as the "second program."

During execution of a program (first program) stored in the control area of the use area of ROM 54, reference (access) to data stored in the data area of the use area of ROM 54 is permitted, but reference to data stored in a data area outside the use area of ROM 54 is prohibited.
Similarly, during execution of a program (second program) stored in a control area outside the use area of ROM 54, reference to data stored in a data area outside the use area of ROM 54 is permitted, but reference to data stored in the data area of the use area of ROM 54 is prohibited.

The storage area of the RWM 53, like the ROM 54, has a used area and an outside used area, and each of the used area and the outside used area has a work area and a stack area.
As shown in FIG. 32, addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are used areas, addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are unused areas, and addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" are outside the used areas.

During execution of a program (first program) stored in the control area of the usage area of ROM 54, reference (access) and rewriting (overwriting) of data stored in the usage area of RWM 53 are permitted, but reference to data stored outside the usage area of RWM 53 is permitted but rewriting is prohibited.
Similarly, while a program (second program) stored in a control area outside the use area of ROM 54 is being executed, data stored outside the use area of RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced and rewritten, but data in the use area of RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced but not rewritten, in order to avoid complicating the processing.

In addition, in order to prevent data in the used area of RWM53 from being rewritten (overwritten) due to a program runaway or the like while a program outside the used area (second program) is being executed, an unused area is provided between the used area of RWM53 and the area outside the used area.
Furthermore, if an interrupt process occurs during the execution of a program outside the usage area (second program), there is a possibility that the interrupt process will rewrite (overwrite) data in the usage area of RWM53. Therefore, interrupt process is prohibited during the execution of a program outside the usage area (second program).

As shown in FIG. 32, the ROM 54 has a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 32, the RWM 53 has unused areas and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.

Furthermore, the entire storage area of the built-in memory includes an internal register area, an unused area, and the like, in addition to the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 .
The built-in register area includes, for example, A registers to L registers, a transmission register, and the like.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
The addresses of the used area are set in the range of "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" as shown in FIG.
The data shown in FIG. 33 is used for explaining the third embodiment, and the data stored in the use area of the RWM 53 is not limited to this.

Address "F000(H)" is the storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value between "0(H)" and "5(H)" is stored as the setting value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N" as the set value, which is the set value data plus "1".

Address "F001(H)" is a 1-byte storage area where the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is stored. When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored in address "F000(H)" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). Then, "N", which is the setting value data (_NB_RANK) plus "1", is stored in address "F001(H)" as the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).

In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6", and address "F000(H)" stores one of the values "0(D)" to "5(D)" as setting value data (_NB_RANK), and address "F001(H)" stores one of the values "1(D)" to "6(D)" as setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).The value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is then displayed on the setting value display LED 73 as the setting value.

Address "F010(H)" is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In this embodiment, any value between "0" and "50(D)" is stored as the credit number data.
In this embodiment, the credit number data is a value obtained by converting the credit number into a decimal number and storing the converted value. For example, when the credit number to be displayed is "29," the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in address "F010(H)." As a result, the lower four bits D0 to D3 of address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digits of the credit number ("9" in this example), and the upper four bits D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digits of the credit number ("2" in this example). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the credit number is "50(D)," so the stored data value is in the range of "0" to "50."
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as display data for the credit number display LED 76 .

Address "F011(H)" is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the acquisition number data, similar to the above-mentioned credit number data, the lowest four bits D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the highest four bits D4 to D7 are data for displaying the higher digits.
In this embodiment, when a small win is won, the payout number corresponding to the small win is displayed on the win number display LED 78, and therefore the payout number data corresponding to the small win is stored as the win number data. Specifically, when a small win is won and medals are paid out, the win number data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display on the win number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the win number data, "01" is displayed on the win number display LED 78.

Here, the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F040(H)" described below stores "8(H)" when an 8-coin winning combination is achieved, and the payout number data is decremented by "1" according to the payout number when medals are paid out (including addition to credits), such as "8" → "7" → ... → "0".
In contrast, the winning number data stored in address "F011(H)" is incremented by "1" each time one medal is paid out, for example, when an 8-coin combination is won, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8". Therefore, the display on the winning number display LED 78 also counts up, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, while the setting is being changed, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88." Therefore, during the setting change, display data for displaying "88" as acquired number data is stored. By displaying "88" on the acquired number display LED 78, it is possible to identify from the front side of the gaming machine that the setting is being changed. Furthermore, by lighting up "88" and all segments, it is possible to confirm that there are no defective segments (that there are no segments that cannot be lit).
The upper limit of the number of medals that can be paid out is 15, so when the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88," it can be understood that this is not a display of the number of medals that can be paid out.

Furthermore, when the conditions for indicating the specified number (the number of medals to be bet in the current game) are met, the specified number is indicated (displayed, notified) on the winning number display LED 78 before the game begins (before betting becomes possible or before the start switch 41 is operated).
In this embodiment, to indicate the specified number "2,""0A" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when indicating the specified number, specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquisition number data.

Furthermore, when a push order bell or the like is won during the AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Therefore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the winning number data.
For example, when the winning number "3" is won and the push order instruction information is displayed, the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

Furthermore, when a predetermined error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition number data.
For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP," the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquired number data.

Address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replay and reel operations are being performed.
For example, when 1BB is activated, the D2 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1." Also, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and been displayed, the D0 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1."

Address "F040(H)" is the storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). When a small win is won in the game and the payout number is determined, the payout number data indicates a value corresponding to that payout number. When a small win is won, the payout number data corresponding to the won small win is stored and the medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out ("1" is added to the credit count, or one actual medal is paid out (from the hopper 35)), "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. In other words, it serves as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

Address "F041 (H)" is the storage area for the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Like the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data that indicates a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is achieved in the relevant game and the payout number is determined. Unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not decremented each time a medal is paid out; instead, the initially stored value is maintained. This value is then maintained until the medal payout number update process is performed for the next game. For example, if a small winning combination that pays out 8 medals is achieved in the relevant game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and if no winning combination is achieved in the next game, "0" is overwritten as the payout number data buffer.

Address "F042(H)" is a storage area for the automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet when a replay wins, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
Address "F043(H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored.

Address "F044(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which status display LED lighting data is stored.
As shown in Figure 36 (A) described later, in the third embodiment, the display board 75 is provided with six LEDs as status display LEDs 79: a 1 bet display LED 79a, a 2 bet display LED 79b, a 3 bet display LED 79c, a start of game display LED 79d, a deposit display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f.
The status display LED lighting data is data indicating whether or not three of the six LEDs mentioned above, namely, the game start display LED 79d, the coin insertion display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f, are to be turned on.

As shown in Fig. 33, the D0 bit of the status LED lighting data is assigned to the game start indicator LED 79d, the D1 bit is assigned to the insert indicator LED 79e, and the D2 bit is assigned to the replay indicator LED 79f. Each bit of this status LED lighting data corresponds to each bit of the LED indicator counter 1 in Fig. 40(A) described later.
Then, a "1" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on, and a "0" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off.
For example, when the game start indicator LED 79d is turned on and the insertion indicator LED 79e and replay indicator LED 79f are turned off, "00000001(B)" is stored as the status indicator LED lighting data.

Address "F051(H)" is a 1-byte storage area where LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which of the digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated with each interrupt.
Here, "digit" refers to a display unit (display), which in this embodiment is configured with one 7-segment display. Of the digits in this embodiment, digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit number (accumulated number) display LED 76, and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76. Furthermore, digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78, digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78, and digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73.
Furthermore, the bits of the LED display counter 1 are assigned such that bit D0 is the digit 1 signal, bit D1 is the digit 2 signal, ..., bit D4 is the digit 5 signal. In one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 1 is turned on.

In the third embodiment, LED display counter 1 has an initial value of "00010000(B)." Then, as interrupts "1" → "2" → ... progress (at each interrupt), LED display counter 1 updates its bit "1" by shifting it one digit to the right. Furthermore, at the interrupt following interrupt "5," LED display counter 1 shifts one digit to the right, becoming "00000000(B)." At that interrupt, LED display counter 1 is initialized, setting LED display counter 1 to "00010000(B)." As a result, with each interrupt, LED display counter 1 cycles through the following values: "5" → "4" → ... → "1" → "5" → "4" → ... In other words, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is
"N" Interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interruption: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interruption: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interruption: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+6" interruption: 00001000 (B)
:
This becomes:

In the third embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, dynamically lighting up digits 1 to 5. Specifically, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)," a digit 5 signal is output. The output of the digit 5 signal enables digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) to light up (digits 1 to 4 are turned off). At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)," outputs a digit 4 signal, and enables digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED D78) to light up (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are turned off).

Address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag takes a value according to whether the device is in normal mode, changing settings, or checking settings.
In the third embodiment, during normal operation, digits 1 to 4 are lit and digit 5 is not lit, so the value is "00001111(B)". During setting change and setting confirmation, digit 5 is lit and digits 1 to 4 are not lit, so the value is "00010000(B)".

Address "F061(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous zone type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous zone type flag is a flag that indicates whether the current game zone is a normal zone or an advantageous zone.
The advantageous zone type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when in a normal zone, and when transitioning from a normal zone to an advantageous zone, the D0 bit becomes "1".
The timing at which the advantageous zone type flag is updated will be described later.

Address "F062 (H)" is a storage area for the advantageous zone display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous zone display LED flag is a flag that indicates whether the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit or not. When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is off, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "1".
In addition, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after transition to the advantageous zone (for example, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as transition to the advantageous zone).

On the other hand, even after moving to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 does not have to be turned on.
Specifically, first, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is not turned on when transitioning to the advantageous zone, but may be turned on later (during the advantageous zone).
Secondly, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may not be turned on when transitioning to the advantageous zone, and if the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met before the conditions for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 are met, the advantageous zone may be ended without ever turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct button press sequence is notified) in a game state in which the zone is advantageous and the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1", the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit up.
Furthermore, once the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous zone.
Furthermore, when the game end check process is performed for the final game in the advantageous zone, a process is executed to turn off the advantageous zone display LED 77. Specifically, when the end condition of the advantageous zone is met, an initialization process of the advantageous zone display LED flag storage area (a process to clear the advantageous zone display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt process.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on in a game that activates the indication function, the timing for turning it on is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the rotation of the reel 31 begins, until the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state).
However, the timing is not limited to this, and other lighting timings are possible, for example:
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated. 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the stop switch 42 can be operated,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is spinning,
4) When all reels 31 stop,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended) and before the settlement switch 43 becomes operable before the start of the next game.

However, when lighting up the advantageous zone display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning role for that game must be determined, so this does not apply before the start switch 41 is operated (before the role is drawn).
When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on in a game in which the instruction function is activated, this is after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination is drawn, so the shortest timing for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state is.

Address "F063 (H)" is the storage area for the advantageous zone clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous zone clear counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of plays during an advantageous zone. The advantageous zone clear counter is set to "0" during the normal zone and is initialized to "1500 (D)" when the game transitions to an advantageous zone. The advantageous zone clear counter is also set to decrement by "1" per play during both the advantageous zone and the normal zone. However, the minimum value is "0." For this reason, when the advantageous zone clear counter (before decrement) is "0" during the normal zone, even if "1" is decremented, the counter used will return a value of "0" after decrement. Therefore, during the normal zone, although "1" is decremented for each play, "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, the game is in the normal zone (non-advantageous zone).

Also, when the game moves to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone clear counter is set to an initial value of "1500 (D)", so that the advantageous zone clear counter will become "1499 (D)" in the next game.
The advantageous zone clear counter stores a maximum initial value of "1500 (D)" and is therefore composed of two bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, it is an advantageous zone.

Address "F065(H)" is a storage area for the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in number of coins during the advantageous period, and is also called the "MY counter."
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores a "value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to a negative number, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, the "cumulative value of the difference number ≠ the difference number counter value."
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in number of coins during the advantageous period exceeds "2400 (D)." For this reason, the difference counter is configured with a memory area of 2 bytes.

The difference number counter is required to count the cumulative value of the difference number of coins at least during the advantageous period, and does not need to count during the non-advantageous period (normal period).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that it is in an advantageous zone, it is necessary to perform a process for determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone for each game. For this reason, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated even during a non-advantageous zone (normal zone). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated for each game without determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone, thereby simplifying the process.

Furthermore, even if the difference in number of coins becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in number of coins becomes carry-down data, the difference counter value is updated. However, if the result of this calculation is that the difference counter is carry-down data, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example (assuming the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
First game: When the bet number is "3" and the payout number is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)".
Second game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "9", difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (no correction)
Third game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
5th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
It will be updated as follows.
Furthermore, even if the difference number counter for the previous game was "0 (H)" and the difference number counter for the current game is "0 (H)", this is the result of a new calculation of the difference number counter value that reflects the difference number for that game, so this also constitutes an "update" of the difference number counter.

As described above, if the difference counter value after the calculation is a value in which borrowing has occurred, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (initial value "0" is set). The method for determining whether borrowing has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the payout number is large compared to the bet number, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the payout number is less than the bet number, for example, during a game in the normal section, the difference counter value increases by the number of payouts when a payout is made based on a small winning combination, but if the payout number falls below the bet number after that, it will eventually become "0".

Address "F067(H)" is the storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag used to determine whether or not an AT is in progress; it is set to "0" when not in an AT and to "1" when in an AT. The AT flag is set to "1" when the AT lottery is won, which is executed in step S364 of Figure 46, which will be described later. The AT flag is also turned off when play ends in the final AT play, which is executed, for example, in the play end check process (step S415 of Figure 50), which will be described later. The AT flag is also included in the data that is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous period ends.

Address "F068 (H)" is the storage area for the AT game count counter (_CT_ART). The AT game count counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games played during the AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous zone clear counter, when the AT game count counter reaches "0", subsequent counting (subtraction) stops.
The AT game count counter is updated (decremented) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated (step S281 in FIG. 46) during the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46).

In addition, in this embodiment, the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", so the AT game number counter is configured as a 2-byte counter. When the maximum number of AT games is "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be configured as a 1-byte counter.
When the AT is started (or when the state transitions to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game count counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when the AT is won. Also, after the initial value is determined, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is met during the AT, the number of AT games may be increased, and when a lottery for adding more is won, the number of AT games may be increased. In this case, the increase is added to the AT game count counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous period.

In this embodiment, a game count management type AT is exemplified, so an AT play count counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of a difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of an AT play count counter. Then, when the AT starts, an initial value for the difference number of coins that can be obtained is set. Also, when an additional win is won, the additional difference number of coins is added. Then, each time a payout is made, the difference number of coins for that play is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter reaches "0", the AT ends.

The 48-byte memory area from addresses "F1D0(H)" to "F1FF(H)" is the stack area for use.

Here, the management information display LED 74 is also called a "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display" and is composed of four LEDs (digits 6 to 9 from the left).
Furthermore, of the four LEDs that make up the management information display LED 74, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are also called "identification segments" and display the type of information, and the two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are also called "ratio segments" and display the calculated ratio.

Furthermore,
Digit 6: upper digit of identification segment Digit 7: lower digit of identification segment Digit 8: upper digit of ratio segment Digit 9: lower digit of ratio segment These are also sometimes called.

In the third embodiment, the management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the following six items of information 1) to 6) as management information at predetermined time intervals.
1) Ratio of accessories including instructions (cumulative total) (7 pages)
2) Continuous feature ratio (6000 games) (6 years)
3) Ratio of special features (6000 games) (7 years)
4) Continuous feature ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Ratio of special features (cumulative) (7A.)
6) Ratio of features, etc. (cumulative) (5H.)

For example, when displaying the reel ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the reel ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Here, "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of the values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting continues until the number of games reaches at least "175,000."
When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" times of play, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment by, for example, blinking, and when the cumulative total is "175,000" times of play or more, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment by, for example, lighting.
Even after the cumulative total reaches 175,000 games played, it continues to be added until it reaches the value (upper limit) that can be stored in a specified address of the RWM 53.
In addition, "6000 games" refers to the total number of games played over 15 sets, each set consisting of "400" games.

The "ratio of devices with instructions" is the sum of the number of payouts when the device is activated and the number of payouts in games in which the instruction function is activated, divided by the total number of payouts.
In addition, for slot machines that do not have special features, the "special feature ratio" is the number of payouts in games in which the special feature is activated divided by the total number of payouts.
In addition, the total number of payouts when the device is activated and the total number of payouts in games in which the instruction function is activated are counted by an instruction-included device counter.

Regarding the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated," when the stop switch 42 is operated in the displayed pressing order in a game in which the instruction function is activated, for example, if a 15-coin winning combination is achieved, the number of payouts, "15," is added to the instruction-included role counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.
For example, in a game in which the small win condition devices A1 to A6 are activated during 1BB play and the instruction function is activated (the correct push order (the push order that will result in a 15-coin win) is displayed), when the stop switch 42 is operated in the displayed push order (the correct push order) and a 15-coin win (any of small wins 01 to 06) is won, the number of payouts "15" is added to the instruction-included role counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.

On the other hand, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from the displayed pressing order, and a three-coin winning combination is achieved, the number of coins paid out, "3", is added to the instruction-included role counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.
For example, during a 1BB game, when the small win condition devices A1 to A6 condition devices are activated and the instruction function is activated (the correct button press sequence is displayed), if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different button press sequence (incorrect button press sequence) from the displayed button press sequence, resulting in a 3-coin win (any of small wins 13 to 24), the number of payouts "3" will be added to the instruction-included role counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.

In addition, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from the displayed pressing order and a winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won), the instruction combination counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter will have the same values as in the previous game.
For example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect button press sequence, the combination will not win (no combination will win). Then, in a game in which the small combination condition devices A1 to A6 condition devices are activated during a 1BB game and the instruction function is activated (the correct button press sequence is displayed), if the stop switch 42 is operated in a button press sequence different from the displayed button press sequence (incorrect button press sequence), and the winning combination is missed (when the combination does not win), the values of the instruction combination counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter will be the same as those of the previous game.

In this embodiment, when a winning combination is missed during a game in which the instruction function is activated because the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from the displayed order, the number of payouts "0" is added to the instruction function counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter, so that the values of both counters become the same as in the previous game.
It is also possible to configure the program so that when a winning combination is missed, the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out is skipped. In this case, however, it is necessary to include a process of determining whether or not the winning combination has been missed before the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out, and to configure the program so that when it is determined that the winning combination has been missed, the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out is skipped. This increases the amount of ROM 54 used and the processing load on the main CPU 55.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when a winning combination is missed, a process is executed to add the payout number "0" to both counters. This makes it possible to set the values of both counters to the same values as in the previous game without performing a process to determine whether or not a winning combination has been missed, thereby reducing the amount of ROM 54 used and the processing load on the main CPU 55.

"Continuous feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when a first-class special feature (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts.
For example, if the total number of payouts for 6000 games is 2000, and of that, the number of payouts when the "Type 1 special feature (RB)" is activated is 500, the "consecutive feature ratio (6000 games)" will be 25 (%).

"Feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when a feature is activated to the total number of payouts.
Here, "role" includes the above-mentioned first-class special role (RB), as well as second-class special role (CB), MB (also called 2BB. Second-class role continuous operation device. CB operates continuously.), and SB (single bonus).

The "ratio of the state of the reels, etc." is the sum of the number of times played when the reels are activated and the number of times played when the reels continuous operating device is activated, divided by the total number of times played.
In addition, the sum of the number of times a game is played when the special device is activated and the number of times a game is played when the special device continuous operating device is activated is counted by a special device state counter.
In addition, for gaming machines that do not have the function corresponding to the above six items, the ratio segment will be displayed as "--".
For example, if the machine is not equipped with an "RB (first-class special feature)," there is no consecutive feature ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is displayed as "--."

According to the regulations, the ratio of instructed devices should be set to less than 70%, the device ratio should also be set to less than 70%, the continuous device ratio should be set to less than 60%, and the device etc. state ratio should be set to less than 50%.
By looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether the value is within the range stipulated by the regulations.

In addition, in order to enable various ratio information to be grasped by devices external to the slot machine 10, such as the hall computer 200, the various ratio information may be configured to be output as an external signal.
For example, the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) may be configured to output, as an external signal, the command-indicated role ratio data, consecutive role ratio (cumulative) data, role ratio (cumulative) data, role etc. state ratio data, etc. In this case, if a predetermined number of games is not met (for example, "17,500 times" for consecutive role ratio (cumulative) data and role ratio (cumulative) data, and "175,000 times" for command-indicated role ratio data and role etc. state ratio data), predetermined information (for example, "FF(H)") different from the current ratio information may be output as an external signal, and if the predetermined number of games is met, various ratio information may be output as an external signal.
Furthermore, advantageous zone ratio data that is not displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) may also be configured to be output as an external signal. In this case, a storage area for an advantageous zone play count counter that counts the number of plays in the advantageous zone and advantageous zone ratio data that indicates the ratio of the number of plays in the advantageous zone to the total number of plays may be provided outside the usage area of the RWM 53.

34 and 35 are diagrams showing the addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
Addresses outside the area of use are set in the range of "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" as shown in FIG.
The data shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 are used for explaining the third embodiment, and the data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The 400-game counter at address "F210(H)" increments the number of games played, with every 400 games being a division. This 400-game counter cycles between "0" and "399(D)," and is incremented by "1" with each game. If "1" is added when the 400-game counter's value is "399(D)," the value of the 400-game counter will become "0."

In addition, the 400 game counter may be set to an initial value of "399 (D)" and decremented by "1" for each game played, in the opposite manner to the above. In this case, when the value of the 400 game counter reaches "0," it is determined that 400 games have been played. If the value of the 400 game counter is decremented by "1" when it is "0," the 400 game counter is set to its initial value of "399 (D)."

The ring buffer number at address "F212(H)" is used to specify which ring buffer the number of medals paid out in a given game should be added to.
Specifically, at address "F212(H)", one of "0" to "14(D)" is stored as the ring buffer number.

Addresses "F213(H)" to "F230(H)" are the storage areas for total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. Total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are made up of 15 ring buffers. Each total payout ring buffer consists of 2 bytes. For example, total payout ring buffer 0 consists of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", with address "F213(H)" being the low-order digit and address "F214(H)" being the high-order digit. In Figures 34 and 35, for storage areas with a byte count of 2 or more, the lowest address number is displayed.

One ring buffer stores the total number of payouts over 400 games. For example, the payouts for the first to 400th games are stored in addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)," and the payouts for the next 401st to 800th games are stored in addresses "F215(H)" and "F216(H)."
Here, whether or not the 400th game has been played is determined by referring to the 400-game counter at address "F210(H)" described above. Also, which ring buffer value to add (update) the number of medals paid out in that game to is determined by referring to the ring buffer number at address "F212(H)."

Then, when the total payout numbers for the first through 400th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)," the total payout numbers for the 5601st through 6000th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)." Next, at the end of the 6000th game, the data stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the payout numbers for the 6001st through 6400th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)."

Each of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 consists of 2 bytes. If the maximum payout number in one game is 15, the maximum number of coins that can be paid out over 400 games is 6,000, so this can be stored in a memory capacity of 2 bytes.
This also applies to the continuous payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the payout ring buffers 0 to 14 described later.

In addition, addresses "F231(H)" to "F24E(H)" are storage areas for consecutive payout ring buffers 0 to 14.
Furthermore, addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are storage areas for the payout ring buffers 0 to 14.

The total number of games counter at addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter that stores the number of games (cumulative) and is composed of 3 bytes. Since it is necessary to count "175,000(D)" games as the cumulative number of games, the total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes.
The total number of games counter continues counting even if the number of games exceeds "175,000 (D)" games, and stops counting when it reaches 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF (H)").

The instruction-included reel counter at addresses "F270(H)" to "F272(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the reel is activated and the number of payouts in games in which the instruction function is activated, and is composed of 3 bytes.
The total payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of medals paid out over 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out per game over 6000 games, the total comes to 90,000 medals, so it can be counted in 3 bytes (the same applies to the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter and the feature payout (6000 times) counter, which will be described later).

The consecutive feature payout (6000 times) counters at addresses "F276(H)" to "F278(H)" are counters that count the number of payouts when consecutive feature operations are performed during 6000 games.
The payout counters (6000 times) at addresses "F279(H)" to "F27B(H)" are counters that count the number of payouts when the reel is activated during 6000 games.

When a payout occurs when the consecutive reels are not in operation and the reels are not in operation, only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (added), and the consecutive reels payout (6000 times) counter and the reels payout (6000 times) counter are not updated.
In addition, when a payout occurs when the consecutive feature is not in operation and the feature is in operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the feature payout (6000 times) counter are updated, but the consecutive feature payout (6000 times) counter is not updated.
Furthermore, when a payout occurs during the operation of a continuous reel, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the reel payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous reel payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter, and the bonus payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
First, when medals are paid out from the first game to the 6000th game, they are stored (added) in the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter, and the feature payout (6000 times) counter depending on whether the continuous feature is activated/not activated and whether the feature is activated/not activated, respectively.
At the end of the 6000th game, the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times) are calculated. After this calculation, the payout numbers for the 400 games from the game in question to the game before "400 x 15 - 1" (5999 games) to the game before "400 x 15 - 400" (5600 games) are subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value, the consecutive feature payout (6000 times) counter value, and the feature payout (6000 times) counter value, respectively.

For example, when it is the 6000th game, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is subtracted from the total payout (6000th) counter value. The value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000th) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th play is reached, the value of the continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 (F231(H) to F232(H)) is subtracted from the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter value. The value of continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts during continuous feature operation from the 6001st play to the 6400th play is added to the continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter.

Furthermore, when the 6000th play is reached, the value of the reel payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the reel payout (6000 times) counter value. The value of the reel payout ring buffer 0 is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts when the reel is activated from the 6001st play to the 6400th play is added to the reel payout ring buffer 0 and the reel payout (6000 times) counter.

More specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the payout numbers for the following number of games:
Total payout ring buffer 0: "1st play" to "400th play" Total payout ring buffer 1: "401st play" to "800th play" Total payout ring buffer 2: "801st play" to "1200th play" Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201st play" to "1600th play" Total payout ring buffer 4: "1601st play" to "2000th play" Total payout ring buffer 5: "2001st play" to "2400th play" Total payout ring buffer 6: "2401st play" to "2800th play" Total payout ring buffer 7: "2801st play" to "3200th play" Total payout ring buffer 8: "3201st play" to "3600th play" Total payout ring buffer 9: "3601" game point to "4000" game point Total payout ring buffer 10: "4001" game point to "4400" game point Total payout ring buffer 11: "4401" game point to "4800" game point Total payout ring buffer 12: "4801" game point to "5200" game point Total payout ring buffer 13: "5201" game point to "5600" game point Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game point to "6000" game point Total payout (6000 times) counter: "1" game point to "6000" game point

Then, assuming that the 6000th game has been played, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the payout numbers for each game.
In addition, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter and the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 match.
Here, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time is Σ1 and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 is Z1, then:
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ1 - Z1
Calculation is performed.
Also,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
Calculation is performed.
That is, the process is executed to subtract the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 games from 5999 (400 x 15 - 1) games ago to 5600 (400 x 15 - 400) games ago, from the value "Σ1" stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, the process is executed to clear the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 games from 5999 (400 x 15 - 1) games ago to 5600 (400 x 15 - 400) games ago.
After this calculation, the 6001st game is started. If there is a payout from the 6001st game to the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that no special device was activated from the 6001st game to the 6400th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and also added to the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, assuming that the 6,400th game has been completed, the total payout ring buffer stores the payout numbers for the following number of games:
Total payout ring buffer 0: "6001" game points to "6400" game points Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game points to "800" game points:
Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game points to "6000" game points Total payout (6000 times) counter: "401" game points to "6000" game points, and "6001" game points to "6400" game points

Similarly to the above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ2 and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2, then:
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ2 - Z2
Let's say.
and,
Total payout ring buffer 1 = 0
Let's say.
After this calculation, the 6401st game is started. If there is a payout from the 6401st game to the 6800th game (here, it is assumed that no special device was activated from the 6401st game to the 6800th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 1 and also to the total payout (6000 times) counter. The above process is repeated.

Also, the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been explained, but the same processing as above is performed when a special feature is activated or when a continuous special feature is activated.
Specifically, when the bonus feature is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with bonus feature payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with a bonus feature payout (6000 times) counter. When the bonus feature is activated, as described above, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

Similarly, when a continuous feature is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0-14 are replaced with continuous feature payout ring buffers 0-14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter. When a continuous feature is activated, one of the total payout ring buffers 0-14, one of the feature payout ring buffers 0-14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the feature payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

The total payout (cumulative) counters at addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts, and count the total number of payouts over at least "175000(D)" games.
Similarly, the consecutive feature payout (cumulative) counters at addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts when consecutive features are activated, and similarly to the above, they count the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated over at least "175,000 (D)" games.

Similarly, the reel payout (cumulative) counters at addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts when the reel is activated, and similarly to the above, they count the number of payouts when the reel is activated for at least "175,000 (D)" games.
It should be noted that the three types of payout (6000 times) counters mentioned above subtract the number of payouts from 5999 games to 5600 games ago every 400 games, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters do not subtract values.

The three types of payout (cumulative) counters each consist of three bytes. For example, if 15 coins are paid out per 175,000 games, the value becomes "175,000 x 15 = 2,625,000," which is smaller than the value that can be stored in three bytes. Therefore, it can be stored in a memory capacity of three bytes.

The reel status counter at addresses "F285(H)" to "F287(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of times the reel is played when it is activated and the total number of times the reel continuous operating device is activated, and is composed of 3 bytes.
The instruction-inclusive feature ratio data at address "F288 (H)" is a memory area that stores the instruction-inclusive feature ratio, which is the ratio of the sum of the number of payouts when the feature is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated, to the total number of payouts.

The consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) data at address "F289 (H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated to the total number of payouts over 6000 games.
The bonus feature ratio (6000 times) data at address "F28A(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when the bonus feature is activated to the total number of payouts over 6000 games.

The consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) data at address "F28B(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated to the total number of payouts over the total number of games played.
The bonus feature ratio (cumulative) data at address "F28C(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when a bonus feature is activated to the total number of payouts over the total number of games played.

The reel state ratio data at address "F28D(H)" is a memory area that stores the reel state ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of games played when the reel is activated and the total number of games played when the reel continuous operating device is activated, to the total number of games played.
The calculation result buffer at address "F28E(H)" is a storage area that temporarily stores the calculation results during ratio calculation processing.

The count upper limit flag at address "F28F(H)" is a flag that is turned on when the memory capacity of the total number of games played counter (addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)") or the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)") reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full, i.e., "FFFFFF(H)").
Of the 1-byte (8-bit) data, bit "D0" is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of games played, and bit "D1" is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of coins paid out. Bits "D2" to "D7" are unused in the third embodiment.
For example, when the total number of games counter reaches the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag becomes "00000001 (B)."

The payout number upper limit buffer at address "F290 (H)" is a memory area that stores a value that will make the value after addition 3 bytes full if the number of payouts in the game exceeds 3 bytes full when added to the total payout (cumulative) counter.
For example, if the total payout (cumulative) counter value before payout in the game is "FFFFFE (H)" and the payout number in the game is "8 (H)", adding "8 (H)" to the counter value will cause an overflow. Therefore, to prevent the total payout (cumulative) counter value from overflowing, a value is calculated to make it 3 bytes full, and the result of this calculation is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, "FFFFFE(H)" + "1(H)" = "FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

The blinking request flag at address "F291(H)" is a flag for specifying an object that satisfies the blinking display condition when displaying the discrimination segment and ratio segment.
For the instructed role ratio, continuous role ratio (cumulative), role ratio (cumulative), and role etc. state ratio, when the total number of games played (value stored in the total number of games played counter) is less than "175,000", the identification segment is controlled to flash.
For the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times), when the total number of games (the value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "6000", the identification segment is controlled to flash.

The indicated feature ratio, consecutive feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature state ratio are preferably ratios over 175,000 games (to reduce variation), but if the ratios are calculated based on the number of games played over less than 175,000 games, the identification segment will flash to indicate this.
Similarly, the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times) are originally ratios over 6000 times, but when they are ratios calculated based on the number of plays less than 6000 times, the identification segment is displayed flashing to indicate this.

In addition, for the instructed role ratio, role ratio (cumulative), and role ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "70" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to flash.
Furthermore, for the consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) and consecutive feature ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to flash.
Furthermore, when the displayed value of the status ratio of the reels, etc. is "50" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to flash.

The above settings are made because the slot machine of this embodiment is designed so that the instructed feature ratio and feature ratio are less than 70%, the continuous feature ratio is less than 60%, and the feature state ratio is less than 50%. If the actual measured values are not within the range of the designed values, the ratio segment will flash to notify you.

In addition, in the blinking request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the instruction-included role ratio blinking flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous role ratio (6000 times) blinking flag, ..., the D7 bit corresponds to the 175000 times blinking flag.
For example, if the calculated ratio of instructed reels is less than "70", the D0 bit of the blinking request flag will be "0", and if it is "70" or more, the D0 bit of the blinking request flag will be "1".
Similarly, if the calculated consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) is less than "70", the D1 bit of the flashing request flag will be "0", and if it is "70" or more, the D1 bit of the flashing request flag will be "1".

Furthermore, when the calculated reel state ratio is less than "50", the D5 bit of the flashing request flag becomes "0", and when it is "50" or more, the D5 bit of the flashing request flag becomes "1".
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "6000", the D6 bit of the blinking request flag is "1", and when it is "6000" or more, the D6 bit of the blinking request flag is "0".
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "175000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag is "1", and when it is "175000" or more, the D7 bit of the blinking request flag is "0".

The ratio display number at address "F292(H)" is a storage area for storing a number corresponding to the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process.
When the ratio displayed in the interrupt process is the instructed role ratio, "1" is stored in the ratio display number of address "F292 (H)". Similarly, when it is the continuous role ratio (6000 times), "2" is stored, when it is the role ratio (6000 times), "3" is stored, when it is the continuous role ratio (cumulative), "4" is stored, when it is the role ratio (cumulative), "5" is stored, and when it is the role etc. state ratio, "6" is stored.

The blinking switch flag at address "F293(H)" is a flag for determining whether the identification segment or ratio segment is to be turned on or off when blinking during the interrupt process.
In this embodiment, when the indicator flashes, it is set to alternate between turning on and off approximately every 0.3 seconds. The flashing switch flag is set to "0" (a value indicating that the indicator is on) for approximately 0.3 seconds while the indicator is on, and to "1" (a value indicating that the indicator is off) for approximately 0.3 seconds while the indicator is off.

The display switching time at address "F294(H)" is a counter that counts the time it takes to display one ratio, approximately 5 seconds, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed.
In this embodiment, the following is repeatedly displayed: display of the reel ratio with instructions (for about 5 seconds) → display of the reel continuous ratio (6000 times) (for about 5 seconds) → ... → display of the reel ratio (cumulative) (for about 5 seconds) → display of the reel etc. status ratio (for about 5 seconds) → reel ratio with instructions (for about 5 seconds) → ...
Therefore, the display switching time is stored to determine whether or not approximately 5 seconds have elapsed, that is, whether or not the display ratio switching time has been reached.

As mentioned above, the blinking switching time at address "F296(H)" is a counter that counts approximately 0.3 seconds when the identification segment or ratio segment is blinking, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed.

Address "F297(H)" is a 1-byte storage area where LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is stored.
The LED display counter 2 is a counter that determines which of digits 6 to 9 should be lit, and is continually updated with each interrupt. The bits of the LED display counter 2 are assigned as follows: bit D0 is the digit 6 signal, bit D1 is the digit 7 signal, bit D2 is the digit 8 signal, and bit D3 is the digit 4 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 6 to 9 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 2 is lit.

In the third embodiment, the LED display counter 2 has an initial value of "00001000(B)." Then, as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to ... (for each interrupt), the LED display counter 2 updates its bit "1" by shifting it one digit to the right. Furthermore, at the interrupt following interrupt "4," the LED display counter 2 shifts one digit to the right to become "00000000(B)." However, at the time of this interrupt, the LED display counter 2 is initialized to "00001000(B)." As a result, the LED display counter 2 cycles through the following values for each interrupt: "4" → "3" → "2" → "1" → "4" → ... In other words, four interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 2 is
"N" Interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+2" interruption: 00000010 (B)
"N+3" interruption: 00000001 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00001000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+5" interruption: 00000100 (B)
:
This becomes:

In the third embodiment, four interrupts constitute one cycle, dynamically lighting digits 6 to 9. Specifically, when the value of LED display counter 2 is "00001000 (B)," the digit 9 signal is output. The output of the digit 9 signal enables digit 9 (the lower digit of the ratio segment) to light up. At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00000100 (B)," the digit 8 signal is output, and digit 8 (the upper digit of the ratio segment) can be lighted up. Furthermore, when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)," the digit 7 signal is output, enabling digit 7 (the lower digit of the identification segment) to light up, and when the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)," the digit 6 signal is output, enabling digit 6 (the upper digit of the identification segment) to light up.

The RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" is a storage area where the RWM checksum data calculated in the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) during the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is stored.
Here, "RWM checksum data" is also called "complement data,""error detection data," or "error detection information," and is a value that becomes "0" when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area.
That is, when the "RWM checksum data (complement data)" of "F2A0(H)" is added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area, the result is "0". In other words, the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is "0".

The power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" is a flag for determining whether the power-off processing has been executed normally, and is stored when the power-off processing is executed.
When the power-off process is executed normally, "55(H)" is stored as the power-off process completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF), and when the power-off process is not executed normally, a value other than "55(H)" is stored as the power-off process completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).

The power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" is a flag for determining whether the checksum calculation result of RWM53 and the power failure processing completion flag are normal, and is stored during program start processing.
When the calculation result of the checksum of RWM53 is normal (the result of adding the sum of the data in the used area of RWM35 and outside the used area (excluding "F2A0(H)") to the RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)" is "0") and the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value ("55(H)"), "55(H)" is stored as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).
On the other hand, if at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is abnormal (abnormal), "00(H)" is stored as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).

The stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (_SB_STACK2) at address "F2A3(H)" is a memory area (buffer) where the stack pointer of the used area is stored (saved) when a program (second program) outside the used area is executed.
Here, the "stack area" refers to a storage area of the RWM 53 where data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).
Also, a "stack pointer" is used to hold an address indicating the destination of data to be saved (stored) in the stack area.

When a program outside the used area (second program) is executed, the stack pointer of the used area is stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, and when the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and the program in the used area (first program) is returned to, the stack pointer of the used area is restored from stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2.

The 24-byte memory area from addresses "F3E8(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is a stack area outside the used area.

Next, initialization of data in the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area will be described.
The data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized simply by cutting off/restarting the power supply (turning the power on/off, turning the power switch 11 on/off).
Furthermore, even when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized.

Furthermore, suppose that an operation to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 on) is performed, and a power failure recovery abnormality is determined. In this case, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 (described later) becomes "Yes," and the process proceeds to step S2711, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change in the event of a power failure recovery abnormality is set. Also, since a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred, step S2712 in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes," and the process proceeds to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.
For this reason, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 (to be described later), initialization is performed on the entire range (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") including the set value data (_NB_RANK) in the usage area of RWM 53, and the entire range outside the usage area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)").
When recovering from an unrecoverable error state, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed within the same range as when an operation to transition to a setting change state is performed and a power interruption recovery abnormality is determined.

Also, assume that an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal. In this case, the result is "Yes" in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41, the result is "No" in step S2712, and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power failure recovery is normal is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.

Therefore, when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power has been restored normally, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized.
In other words, the address "F292 (H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state, and when it is determined that the power has returned to normal, the control information display LED 74 starts displaying the role ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

Also, suppose that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal. In this case, the answer is "No" in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41, and the answer is "Yes" in step S2710, and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power recovery is normal is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.

In other words, address "F292 (H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, if the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power has returned to normal, the control information display LED 74 will begin displaying the role ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the initialization process of RWM 53 is executed within the same range as when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power recovery is normal.
Therefore, even if the setting key is not held or even if the state is not changed to the setting change state, the RWM 53 can be initialized to the same extent as when the operation for changing to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power has been restored normally after being turned off.

In addition, at the end of the favorable period, an initialization process is performed on a predetermined range of the usage area of RWM53 (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 33) where data related to the favorable period is stored.
Furthermore, even if the advantageous zone ends, the address "F292 (H)" of the RWM 53 is not initialized. For this reason, for example, even if the advantageous zone ends when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and an initialization process is executed for a predetermined range (for example, addresses "F061 (H)" to "F068 (H)" in FIG. 33) of the use area of the RWM 53 in which the data related to the advantageous zone is stored, the display item displayed on the control information display LED 74 will be the role ratio (cumulative) data followed by the role etc. state ratio data (ratio display number "6").

Also, suppose that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal. That is, suppose that normal power on/off is performed. In this case, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed, and therefore the data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 at the time of power off is maintained.
For this reason, for example, when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state. If it is determined that the power has returned to normal after being turned off, the state at the time of power failure will be restored, so that the control information display LED 74 will first display the role ratio (cumulative) data, and then display the role etc. status ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after the role ratio (cumulative) data.

Also, suppose the power is turned off, and then turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the OFF state, and a power failure recovery error is determined. In this case, step S2708 in FIG. 41 returns "Yes," and the process proceeds to step S2801, where unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed (a non-recoverable error state is entered), and therefore initialization processing of the RWM 53 is not executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the non-recoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 is executed, interrupt processing is prohibited (step S1490 in FIG. 43), and the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off (step S1495 in FIG. 43).
For this reason, for example, if the power is turned off when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the power failure recovery, interrupt processing is prohibited and the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off, so that the control information display LED 74 remains off.

For example, in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8." In this case, if the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, and a power failure recovery error is determined, "8888" will be displayed on the management information display LED 74.

Also, for example, even if the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, interrupt processing may not be prohibited, and the output of output ports 0 to 7 may be maintained without being turned off. In this case, for example, if the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, even if a power interruption recovery abnormality is determined, the control information display LED 74 will first display the role ratio (cumulative) data, and then display the role status ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the display item next to the role ratio (cumulative) data.

FIG. 36A is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board 75 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 36B is a diagram showing a management information display LED 74 in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 36A, in the third embodiment, a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are provided on a display board 75.
The credit number display LED 76 is made up of digit 1 (high-order digit) and digit 2 (low-order digit), and the acquired number display LED 78 is made up of digit 3 (high-order digit) and digit 4 (low-order digit). Digits 1 to 4 use a 7-segment display that does not have dot segments.
Digits 1 to 4 may be configured using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be lit.

The status display LEDs 79 include a 1 bet display LED 79a, a 2 bet display LED 79b, a 3 bet display LED 79c, a start of game display LED 79d, a deposit display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f, which are made up of six LEDs.
Furthermore, although not shown in Figure 36, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is constructed using a segment P of digit 4, as shown in Figure 37.
Furthermore, although not shown in Fig. 36, the set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50 as shown in Fig. 1 and is composed of digit 5. Digit 5 uses a 7-segment display that does not have dot segments.
Digit 5 may be configured using a seven-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

As shown in Figure 36 (B), the management information display LED 74 is composed of digit 6 (higher digit of identification segment), digit 7 (lower digit of identification segment), digit 8 (higher digit of ratio segment), and digit 9 (lower digit of ratio segment).
Digits 6 to 9 use a 7-segment display with dot segments (segment P).
Furthermore, the segment P of digit 7 (the lower digit of the identification segment) functions as a digit separator LED. The digit separator LED is used to clearly indicate the separation between the information type (identification segment) and the ratio (ratio segment).

FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating details of digits and segments in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, the 7-segment display of digits 1 to 5 itself is made up of segments A to G, and does not include a dot segment (segment P).
However, the segment P of digit 1 constitutes the game start indicator LED 79d, the segment P of digit 2 constitutes the insertion indicator LED 79e, the segment P of digit 3 constitutes the replay indicator LED 79f, and the segment P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous zone indicator LED 77.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment.
The third embodiment is characterized in that two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) are provided for outputting digit signals, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) are provided for outputting segment signals.
In the third embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided.
The segments of digits 1 to 5 are designated as segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segments of digits 6 to 9 are designated as segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).

In addition, in the third embodiment, output port 3 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals), and output port 6 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals).
Furthermore, in the third embodiment, output port 4 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals), and output port 7 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals).
When digits 1 to 5 are to be illuminated, a digit signal is output from output port 3 and a segment 1 signal is output from output port 4.
When digits 6 to 9 are to be illuminated, a digit signal is output from output port 6 and a segment 2 signal is output from output port 7.

Next, an external signal will be described. An "external signal" is a signal outputted to an external device (such as a hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in a hall) outside the slot machine 10 via the external terminal board 100.
As shown in Fig. 38, in the third embodiment, external signals 1 to 6 are output from output port 5. Specifically, a "setting change signal" is assigned to bit D0 (external signal 1) of output port 5, and a "setting confirmation signal" is assigned to bit D1 (external signal 2). The signals shown in Fig. 38 are also assigned to bits D2 to D5.

The "setting change signal" is an external signal that indicates that a setting change is in progress and that a setting change has been made. The setting change signal is output continuously during the setting change and until the end of one game after the setting change (when all reels 31 have stopped and the medal payout process (step S294 in Figure 46) has finished). This is to ensure that the outside world is notified that a setting change has been made. When the D0 bit of output port 5 is "1", this indicates that the setting change signal is on (the setting is being changed or one game after the setting change has not yet ended). When the D0 bit is "0", this indicates that the setting change signal is off (the setting is not being changed and one game after the setting change has not yet ended).

The "settings checking signal" is an external signal that indicates that settings are being checked. The settings checking signal is output while settings are being checked. When the D1 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the settings checking signal is on (settings are being checked), and when the D1 bit is "0", it indicates that the settings checking signal is off (settings are not being checked).

"Fraud detection signal 1" is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when door switch 17 is on (when the opening of front door 12 is detected), fraud detection signal 1 is output. When the D2 bit of output port 5 is "1," this indicates that fraud detection signal 1 is on (door switch 17 is on, front door 12 is open), and when the D2 bit is "0," this indicates that fraud detection signal 1 is off (door switch 17 is off, front door 12 is closed).

Like fraud detection signal 1, "fraud detection signal 2" is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when a recoverable error state occurs, fraud detection signal 2 is output. When the D3 bit of output port 5 is "1," this indicates that fraud detection signal 2 is on (a recoverable error state exists), and when the D3 bit is "0," this indicates that fraud detection signal 2 is off (no recoverable error state exists).

Similar to fraud detection signals 1 and 2, "fraud detection signal 3" is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when an irrecoverable error state occurs, fraud detection signal 3 is output. When the D4 bit of output port 5 is "1," this indicates that fraud detection signal 3 is on (an irrecoverable error state exists), and when the D4 bit is "0," this indicates that fraud detection signal 3 is off (no irrecoverable error state exists).

The "security signal" is an external signal that indicates that the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1-3 is on. When the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1-3 is being output, the security signal is also output at the same time. When the D5 bit of output port 5 is "1", this indicates that the security signal is on (the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1-3 is being output), and when the D5 bit is "0", this indicates that the security signal is off (none of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, or fraud detection signals 1-3 is being output).

As described above, the setting change signal continues to be output until the end of one game after the setting change. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal are output. Specifically, for example, assume that the setting change state is ended and a situation has arisen in which medals (gaming media, gaming value) can be bet. At this time, if the setting key switch 152 is turned on when the number of bets is "0," both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal are output.
Furthermore, when any of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is being output, a security signal is also output. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit of output port 5 are turned on ("1"). If the setting confirmation state is then ended before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 bit and D5 bit of output port 5 remain on ("1"), while the D1 bit is turned off ("0"). Then, when the first game after the setting change is ended, the D0 bit and D5 bit of output port 5 are also turned off ("0").

Next, the lighting control of digits 1 to 9 will be described.
The lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) is controlled by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in Fig. 50, which will be described later. The LED display control process (I_LED_OUT) is a process performed by the program in the use area (first program).

On the other hand, the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (control information display LED 74) is controlled by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) shown in Fig. 52, which will be described later. The ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program (second program) outside the use area.
In the third embodiment, the output ports used are divided between digits 1 to 5, whose lighting is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose lighting is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, there are digits 1 to 9, the segments of digits 1 to 5 are segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segments of digits 6 to 9 are segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).
The segments 1A to 1G of digit 1 constitute the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and the segment 1P of digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d.
Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 2 constitute the lower digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 2 constitutes the insertion display LED 79e.

Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 3 constitute the upper digits of the winning number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 3 constitutes the replay display LED 79f.
Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 4 constitute the lower digits of the winning number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous zone display LED 77.
The segments 1A to 1G of digit 5 constitute a set value display LED 73.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 6 form the upper digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

Furthermore, the segments 2A to 2G of the digit 7 constitute the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and the segment 2P of the digit 7 constitutes the digit division display LED.
The segments 2A to 2G of digit 8 form the upper digits of the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 9 form the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

40A is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 3. Also, FIG. 40B is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 6. Furthermore, FIG. 40C is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment.
In this example, LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (address "F051(H)" in Figure 33) is provided in the usage area of RWM53, and LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in Figure 35) is provided outside the usage area of RWM53.

LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is a counter that outputs digit 1 signals to digit 5 signals for each interrupt, and is a counter with 5 interrupts per cycle.
The LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is a counter for outputting the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal at each interruption, and is a counter with four interruptions per cycle.
In this way, in the third embodiment, an LED display counter for lighting up digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting up digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently.
Furthermore, since the cycles of the two LED display counters are different, the timing at which digits 1 to 5 light up differs from the timing at which digits 6 to 9 light up.

The LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) is data indicating the digits that are permitted to be lit, and is stored at address "F052 (H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 (see FIG. 33).
40(C), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which bit D0 corresponds to the digit 1 signal, bit D1 corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., bit D4 corresponds to the digit 5 signal. Each bit of the LED display request flag corresponds to a bit of output port 3 shown in FIG.
Also, as shown in Figure 40(C), digits 1 to 4 can be lit (digit 5 is off) during normal operation, and digit 5 can be lit (digits 1 to 4 are off) during setting changes and setting confirmations. Note that "normal operation" refers to game standby and game play.

In the interrupt process, the value of the LED display counter 1 in the used area is ANDed with the value of the LED display request flag, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that will be lit in the current interrupt process.
For example, if the value of the LED display counter 1 in the used area is "00001000 (B)" and the value of the LED display request flag is "00001111 (B) (normal)", then performing an AND operation on the two will result in "00001000 (B)" and only the digit 4 signal will be "1".
Also, while changing or checking the settings, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (LED display counter 1 in the used area is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4, enabling the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5) to light up.

Next, recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors will be described.
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered from without turning the power on and off. Examples of recoverable errors include:
"HP" error: medal jam (backup) error in hopper 35 "HE" error: medal empty error in hopper 35 "H0" error: abnormality in payout sensor 37 of hopper 35 "CE" error: medal backup error in medal selector "CP" error: medal illegal passage error in medal selector "CH" error: abnormality in passage sensor 46 located in medal selector "C0" error: abnormality in insertion sensor 44 located in medal selector "C1" error: medal abnormal insertion error "FE" error: subtank full "dE" error: front door 12 open, etc.
Note that recoverable errors are not limited to those mentioned above.

In step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Figure 47 (described below), a read process is performed on the input port 51, and input signals from various switches (such as the start switch 41) and various sensors (such as the input sensor 44) are read. Various data (level data, rising edge data, falling edge data) are then generated based on the read input signals and stored at a specified address in the RWM 53. Then, in step S463 of the interrupt process (I_INTR), an input error check process is performed, and the above data is referenced. If any recoverable error is detected, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is stored at a specified address in the RWM 53.

In addition, in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46), the error detection flag is checked before the operation of the start switch 41 is detected and after all the reels 31 have stopped, and if any bit of the error detection flag is "1", it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the progress of the game is stopped, and a recoverable error state is entered.
In addition, if a recoverable error occurs between the time the start switch 41 is operated and the time all the reels 31 have stopped when the specified number of medals have been bet, the game may continue to progress until all the reels 31 have stopped, and after all the reels 31 have stopped, the game may be stopped and a recoverable error state may be entered before the medal payout process is executed.
Furthermore, when it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, error information about the occurred recoverable error is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This display of error information (error display) is performed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG.

When a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error is eliminated by an administrator (a hall staff member) and the reset switch 153 is operated, which cancels the recoverable error state and resumes the game.
In this way, when a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error can be removed and the reset switch 153 can be operated without turning the power on/off or operating the setting key switch 152, thereby canceling the recoverable error state and restoring the game to a state in which it is possible to continue playing.

In contrast, an "irrecoverable error" is a serious error that cannot be recovered from unless the power is turned off and an operation to transition to the setting change state (turning the power on with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed.
"E1" error: When recovery from power failure is not normal (when there is a power failure recovery abnormality) (when "Yes" is returned in step S2712 in FIG. 41, which will be described later)
"E5" error: When the stopped symbol is not normal when reel 31 stops (when a display error occurs)
"E6" error: When the setting value is not within the normal range (when a setting value error occurs) (when "No" is returned in step S458 of FIG. 47)
"E7" error: When a random number error occurs ("Yes" in step S460 of FIG. 47)
etc.
It should be noted that the unrecoverable errors are not limited to those mentioned above.

When any irrecoverable error occurs, the error information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For example, when an "E1" error occurs, "E" is displayed in digit 3 and "1" is displayed in digit 4. The same display is also displayed when other irrecoverable errors occur.
Furthermore, it is the processing of step S2715 (processing by the program in the used area (first program)) during the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 that determines that the recovery from power outage is not normal (power outage recovery abnormality) and judges it to be an "E1" error.
Furthermore, it is the processing in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46) (processing by the program in the used area (first program)) that determines that the stopped pattern is abnormal (a display error has occurred) when the reel 31 stops, and judges it to be an "E5" error.

In contrast, it is the processing of step S458 in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 47 (processing by a program outside the use area (second program)) that determines that the set value is not within the normal range (a set value error has occurred) and judges it to be an "E6" error.
Similarly, the random number value is determined to be abnormal (a random number error has occurred) and an "E7" error is determined to have occurred in step S460 during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 47 (processing by a program outside the usage area (second program)).
If it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in the program in the used area (first program), the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) shown in FIG. 43, which will be described later, is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in a program (second program) outside the used area, an unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51, which will be described later, is executed.

When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is cut off (power supply turned off, power switch 11 turned off), and then, with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the power supply is resumed (power supply turned on, power switch 11 turned on). As a result, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "Yes", and processing proceeds to step S2711. Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power cut processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in Figure 48, which will be described later, is not executed, so step S2712 in Figure 41 becomes "Yes", and processing proceeds to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 (to be described later), initialization is performed on the entire range (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the used area of RWM 53, and the entire range (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") outside the used area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG. 44. If the setting value is reset here, the unrecoverable error state is released, and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 46).
In this way, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is turned off once, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and then the power supply is turned on again, thereby canceling the irrecoverable error state and restoring the state to one in which the game can be played.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in Fig. 50, but when an irrecoverable error occurs, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Fig. 47 is not executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is not executed either. When an irrecoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 43 or the irrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 51.
Furthermore, when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM53 is maintained without being initialized, but when recovering from an unrecoverable error state, the entire range of data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM53 is initialized.
When recovering from a recoverable error state, data such as an error detection flag stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53 may be initialized.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the program start process (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment.
When the power is turned on (the power switch 11 is turned on, and the power supply is resumed), the program starts from the program start process shown in FIG.
In FIG. 41, when the program is started in step S2701, in the next step S2702, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2703, where the main control board 50 executes the checksum calculation process for the RWM 53.
Specifically, in step S2703, the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added together.
That is, the data in the addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added together.
If the result is "0", it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum of RWM53 is normal, and if the result is not "0", it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum of RWM53 is not normal (abnormal).

In addition, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) of address "F2A1(H)" of RWM 53 is "55(H)" or not, and if it is "55(H)", it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is normal, and if it is not "55(H)", it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is abnormal (abnormal).
In this embodiment, during power-off processing, a power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is set at address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 (step S2784 of RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 49). Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing completion flag set during power-off processing is a normal value ("55(H)").

Also, in step S2703, if the calculation result of the checksum of RWM53 is normal (the result of adding the data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM35 is "0") and the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is the normal value ("55(H)"), "55(H)" is stored as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" of RWM53.
On the other hand, in step S2703, if at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is abnormal (abnormal), "00(H)" is stored as power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2704.

When processing proceeds to step S2704, the main control board 50 restores the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) that was saved in step S2702. Processing then proceeds to the next step, S2705.

Here, the program for the program start processing is stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the use area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the program start processing is the first program.
In contrast, the program for the checksum calculation process of the RWM 53 in step S2703 is stored in a control area (second control area, second program area) outside the use area of the ROM 54. In other words, the program for the checksum calculation process in step S2703 is the second program.

Therefore, in FIG. 41, in the program start processing, which is processing by the program in the used area (first program), when proceeding to step S2703, the checksum calculation processing of RWM53, which is processing by the program outside the used area (second program), is executed, and when this checksum calculation processing is completed, the processing returns to the program start processing, which is processing by the program in the used area (first program).
In addition, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the used area of RWM53, and when processing by the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and processing returns to processing by the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored.

When processing proceeds to step S2705, the main control board 50 obtains the power interruption recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) from address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in register A. Processing then proceeds to the next step, S2706.

In step S2706, the main control board 50 determines whether the door switch signal is on. As described above, when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is on and the door switch signal is on. If it is determined that the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is open), the process proceeds to the next step S2707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed), the process proceeds to step S2715.

In step S2707, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch signal is on. As described above, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the setting key switch signal is turned on. If it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2708.

In step S2708, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure recovery error has occurred. Specifically, if the value of register A (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) acquired in step S2705) is "55 (H)", it is determined that a power failure recovery error has not occurred, and the process proceeds to the next step, S2709. In contrast, if the value of register A is "00 (H)", it is determined that a power failure recovery error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S2801, where unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is performed. The specific contents of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.

In step S2709, the main control board 50 sets the reset determination data. Specifically, it stores "7" in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2710.
In step S2710, the main control board 50 determines whether the reset switch signal is on. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are configured as an integrated switch. When the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the reset switch signal is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S2713. On the other hand, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the reset switch signal is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S2721, which is a power restoration process (M_POWER_ON). The specific contents of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) will be described later.

In step S2711, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for use in the event of a power failure recovery abnormality. In this embodiment, when the power failure recovery is abnormal (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "00(H)"), the entire range of the used area and outside the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, is set as the initialization range. The initialization range is specified by the starting address and number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2712.

In step S2712, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure recovery error has occurred. Specifically, this is the same as step S2708. If it determines that a power failure recovery error has not occurred, the main control board 50 stores "7", which is data for determining that the setting has been changed, in the D register and proceeds to the next step, S2713. If it determines that a power failure recovery error has occurred, it proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.

In step S2713, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal power recovery. In this embodiment, when the power recovery is normal (power recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "55(H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared). Therefore, in step S2713, addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range. As described above, the initialization range is specified by the starting address and number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2714.

In step S2714, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting can be changed. In this embodiment, the setting is set to be unchangeable from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46), including while the reels 31 are spinning, and the setting unchangeable flag is turned on during this period. Then, in step S2714, it determines whether the setting can be changed by determining whether the setting unchangeable flag is on. If it is determined that the setting cannot be changed (the setting cannot be changed), the process proceeds to the next step S2715, and if it is determined that the setting can be changed, the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.
It is also possible to allow the settings to be changed at all times without providing a period during which the settings cannot be changed, and therefore without providing a setting change prohibition flag.

In step S2715, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure recovery error has occurred. Specifically, this is the same as step S2708. If it is determined that a power failure recovery error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2801, which performs unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP). If it is determined that a power failure recovery error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S2721, which performs power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON). The specific contents of the power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON) and unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. Processing according to this flowchart then ends.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721 in FIG.
First, in step S2722, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. In this embodiment, the stack pointer is saved during power-off processing (step S2774 of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48). Then, in step S2722, the stack pointer saved during power-off processing is restored.

Proceeding to the next step S2723, the main control board 50 executes a read process for the input port 51. This updates each piece of data in the input port 51 to the latest data.
In the next step S2724, the main control board 50 clears the power-off processing completion flag, and then proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 46), where the processing of this flowchart ends.
In this embodiment, after the processing of step S2724 is executed, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 47 is started at a timing before proceeding to the main processing (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 46).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
The program for unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) is stored in the used area of ROM 54, and the program for unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is stored outside the used area of ROM 54. In other words, the program for unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) is the first program, and the program for unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is the second program.

Furthermore, in the process of handling an unrecoverable error, interrupt processing is prohibited.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that would not normally occur, and in order to prevent the execution of processing based on abnormal data (such as updating data in RWM53 based on an input signal from input port 51, sending a control command to sub-control board 80, or control based on a signal output from an output port based on data from RWM53), interrupt processing is prohibited during unrecoverable error processing.

Here, the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the first program, and when the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) starts, first, execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited by the interrupt prohibition processing in step S1490.
In contrast, the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is a processing performed by the second program, and since the execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited while the second program is running, no interrupt prohibition processing is provided after the start of the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).

43, in step S1491, the main control board 50 sets the error display data for the lower digits of the unrecoverable error. This process stores the data ("00001000(B)") for lighting up digit 4 (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") in the H register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1492, where the main control board 50 sets the error display data for the upper digits of the unrecoverable error. This process stores the data ("00000100(B)") for lighting up digit 3 (data in which only the digit 3 signal is set to "1") in the D register.

Furthermore, in step S1492, the main control board 50 stores in the E register segment data ("01111001B") for displaying "E" in the most significant digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error.
Before proceeding to the unrecoverable error processing, segment data for displaying the lower digit of the unrecoverable error is stored in the L register. For example, when the unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the lower digit (digit 4) is "1", so segment data for displaying "1"("00000110B") is stored in the L register.
In the following example, it is assumed that the current unrecoverable error 1 is an "E1" error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values at this point are as follows:
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: Segment data ("01111001(B)") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error.
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
L register value: Segment data ("00000110(B)") for displaying "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
This becomes:

In the next step S1493, the main control board 50 sets the addresses of the output ports to be cleared and the number of output ports. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) are output ports 0 to 7, and since an address is set for each output port, the main control board 50 sets the addresses and the number of output ports (8).
In the next step S1494, the main control board 50 sequentially turns off the output of output ports 0 to 7. Specifically, for output ports 0 to 7, the output is turned off ("00000000(B)") one by one.

In the next step S1495, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next output port. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1." For example, if the address of output port 0 is "00F1(H)," the address of output port 1, "00F2(H)," is set as the next address.
Next, proceeding to step S1496, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the output of all output ports has been turned off, i.e., whether or not the output has been turned off up to output port 7. If it is determined that the output has not been turned off, the process returns to step S1494, and if it is determined that the output of all output ports has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S1497. In this way, the process of steps S1494 to S1496 is repeated until the output of all output ports has been turned off, and if it is determined that the output of all output ports has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S1497.

In this way, by turning off all output ports, all active signals that were being output before this process was executed are turned off. This turns off all LEDs, including digits 1 to 9 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73, and management information display LED 74), preventing LED burn-in.

Furthermore, if an irrecoverable error occurs while an excitation signal for the motor 32 is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the excitation signal for the motor 32 will continue to be output until the irrecoverable error is resolved. However, by turning off all output ports, the excitation signal for the motor 32 is turned off, thereby preventing the motor 32 from burning out.
Furthermore, if an irrecoverable error occurs while a blocker signal is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the blocker 45 will remain on (in a state in which the medal is guided to the hopper 35) even though the medal detection process is not executed, and the medal will be swallowed. However, by turning off all output ports, the blocker 45 will be turned off and the inserted medal will be returned, thereby preventing the medal from being swallowed.

In the next step S1497, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from output ports 3 and 4 to display an error in the upper digits. Output port 3 outputs the data stored in the D register, and output port 4 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, proceeding to step S1498, the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LED from flickering. The length of the wait period depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to approximately 0.1 ms, for example. Here, for example, a predetermined value (e.g., 255) is stored in the B register, and this value is decremented by an internal system clock. When the B register value becomes 0, it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, and proceed to the next step, S1499.

In step S1499, the main control board 50 turns off ("0") the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4. This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, in step S1500, the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LEDs from flickering. This process ensures that the LEDs are turned off after the outputs of output ports 3 and 4 are turned off ("0").

Next, the process proceeds to step S1501, where the main control board 50 switches between the upper and lower digits.
Specifically, the DE register value and the HL register value are swapped.
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: Segment data ("01111001(B)") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error.
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
L register value: Segment data ("00000110(B)") for displaying "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
<After replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
E register value: Segment data ("00000110(B)") for displaying "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
L register value: Segment data ("01111001(B)") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error
This becomes:

Then, proceeding to step S1502, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from output ports 3 and 4 to display an error in the lower digits. As in step S1497, the D register value is output from output port 3, and the E register value is output from output port 4. As a result, "00001000(B)" (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1"), which lights up digit 4, is output from output port 3, and segment data "00000110(B)" to display "1" is output from output port 4.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1503, where the main control board 50 executes a standby process to prevent flickering. This process is similar to step S1498.
Next, proceeding to step S1504, the main control board 50 turns off the output of output ports 3 and 4 ("0"), as in step S1499.
In the next step S1505, the main control board 50 executes a standby process to prevent flickering. This process is the same as step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

By the above process, when an "E1" error occurs, for example, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately displayed repeatedly at predetermined time intervals.
The LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by the interrupt processing (I_INTR), but as described above, in the event of an irrecoverable error, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed (prohibited), and the irrecoverable error is displayed by calculation processing using registers and a hardware configuration, as shown in FIG.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 in FIG.
The main control board 50 first executes initialization of the specified address of the RWM 53 in step S2732, and then sets (specifies) the next address in the initialization range of the RWM 53 in the next step S2733. In the next step S2734, it determines whether initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53. If it determines that initialization has not been completed, it returns to step S2732, and if it determines that initialization has been completed, it proceeds to step S2735. Thus, the processing of steps S2732 to S2734 is repeated until initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53.

As described above, the initialization range of the RWM 53 (the start address and number of bytes of the initialization range) is set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG.
In steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is performed on the initialization range of the used area out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713.
The processing of steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by the program of the used area (first program). Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range of the used area out of the initialization range of RWM 53.

Then, if it is determined in step S2734 that initialization has been completed, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S2735, where it saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the RWM 53's usage area.
Proceeding to the next step S2736, the main control board 50 executes initialization of the initialization range outside the used area of the RWM 53 initialization range set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) of FIG.

As described above, in steps S2732 to S2734, the used area of the initialization range of the RWM 53 is initialized, but in step S2736, the area outside the used area of the initialization range of the RWM 53 is initialized.
The process of step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the area of use. Therefore, in step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range outside the area of use of the RWM 53.
Then, when initialization of the initialization range outside the used area is completed in step S2736, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S2737, where it restores the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) that was saved in step S2735, and then proceeds to the next step S2738.

In step S2738, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to reset. Specifically, it determines whether step S2710 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 is "Yes." In this embodiment, in step S2709 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41, "7" is stored in the D register as reset determination data. Furthermore, if step S2710 of Figure 41 is "Yes," the D register remains "7." If step S2710 of Figure 41 is "No," the D register is cleared ("0" is stored). Then, in step S2738 of Figure 44, it determines whether the D register is "7." If the D register is "7," it determines that it is time to reset ("Yes" in step S2710 of Figure 41), and proceeds to step S2739. On the other hand, if the D register is "0", it is determined that it is not reset ("No" in step S2710 of Figure 41), and step S2739 is skipped, proceeding to step S2740.

When processing proceeds to step S2739, the main control board 50 sets the display at the time of reset. Specifically, "70(H)" is stored in the acquisition count data (_NB_PAYOUT) at address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. This allows the acquisition count display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) to display "70" through interrupt processing executed after processing in step S2739, thereby notifying the manager (hall staff) that it is time to reset.

Proceeding to the next step S2740, the main control board 50 sets a setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2740 indicates whether it is a reset or a setting change. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2740, making it possible for the sub-control board 80 to determine whether it is a reset or a setting change.

In this embodiment, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 47 is started after the processing of step S2740 is executed and before proceeding to the processing of step S2741. In other words, before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) starts, the processing for initializing the initialization range of RWM53 (the processing of steps S2732 to S2734 and S2736 in Figure 44) is completed. This configuration prevents the interrupt processing (I_INTR) from being executed while RWM53 is being initialized. This makes it possible to prevent the contents of RWM53 from being changed (rewritten or overwritten) by the interrupt processing (I_INTR) while RWM53 is being initialized.

Proceeding to the next step S2741, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time to reset. Specifically, this is the same as step S2738. If it is determined that it is not time to reset, the main control board 50 proceeds to step S2742, and if it is determined that it is time to reset, the main control board 50 skips step S2742 and proceeds to step S2743.
When the process proceeds to step S2742, the main control board 50 executes the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). The specific contents of this process will be described later. Then, when the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S2743.

In step S2743, the main control board 50 determines whether the wait time has elapsed. This wait time is for waiting for the transmission of the setting command. If it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S2744, where it sets the initialization wait time, and in the next step S2745, it executes a 2-byte time wait process (wait process). The processes of steps S2744 and S2745 are intended to wait for the initialization of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 to be completed.

When the 2-byte wait process is complete, the process proceeds to the next step S2746, where the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2746 indicates that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has ended and the setting value. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2746, making it possible for the sub-control board 80 to determine that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has ended and the setting value.

Proceeding to the next step S2747, the main control board 50 clears (stores "0") the acquisition count data (_NB_PAYOUT) at address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2747.
Then, when the acquisition number data has been cleared in step S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 46), and the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG.
When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is started, first, in step S2751, the main control board 50 obtains the setting value data (_NB_RANK) from address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in register A. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2752.

In step S2752, the main control board 50 generates setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2752, the A register value is first stored in the C register, and then "1" is added to the A register value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2753.
As described above, in this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6" and the setting value data is managed as "0" to "5", and when the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. Therefore, "N", which is the setting value data "N-1" plus "1", is used as the setting value display data.

In step S2753, the main control board 50 saves the generated setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2753, the A register value is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2754.
In step S2754, the main control board 50 executes an interrupt wait process. This process waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. This is because the main control board 50 waits for the rising edge of the signal from the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 to become OFF ("0") by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once.

In other words, when the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is operated (turned on), the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 becomes on ("1"). After that, if the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed even once, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 becomes off ("0").
However, if the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 loops multiple times after the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 turns on ("1") and before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed, the processing of adding "1" to the setting value data will be executed repeatedly.
Therefore, by waiting for the interrupt processing (I_INTR) to be executed once in step S2754, the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is prevented from looping multiple times and the processing of adding "1" to the setting value data is prevented from being repeatedly executed.
Then, in step S2754, the process waits until one interrupt time has elapsed, and then proceeds to the next step S2755.

In addition, if the signal level data of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing and the signal level data of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 will be "1".
Furthermore, if the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 was "1" during the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 becomes "0".

Similarly, if the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 becomes "0".
Furthermore, if the level data of the signal from the reset switch 153 was "1" during the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal from the reset switch 153 is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the falling data of the signal from the reset switch 153 becomes "1".
The same applies to the other switches such as the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the setting key switch 152, and the reset switch (setting change switch) 153.

In step S2755, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start setting confirmation. This process is for determining whether it is time to confirm settings or time to change settings. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets before the start of a game is "0," the D register is set to store "1." In step S2755, the D register value is first stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether the A register value is "1." If the A register value is "1," it is determined that it is time to confirm settings, and the process proceeds to step S2760. If the A register value is not "1" (if the D register value is "0" or "7"), it is determined that it is not time to confirm settings (that it is time to change settings), and the process proceeds to step S2756. After determining whether the A register value is "1," the C register value is stored in the A register. As described above, since the A register value was stored in the C register in step S2752, setting value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes the set value data.
When the power is restored (when the power is turned on and the program start process (M_PRG_START) starts), the A register to L register are set to the initial value ("0").

In step S2756, the main control board 50 references the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal stored at a specific address in the RWM 53. If the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal is "1", i.e., if it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2759. On the other hand, if the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal is "0", i.e., if it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S2757.

In step S2757, the main control board 50 references the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53. If the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1", that is, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been operated, it proceeds to step S2758. On the other hand, if the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0", that is, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has not been operated, it returns to step S2752.

When processing proceeds to step S2758, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the setting value data. Specifically, it adds "1" to the A register value. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is the setting value data. If step S2757 returns "Yes," that is, if it is determined that the setting change (reset) switch 153 has been operated, it adds "1" to the setting value data. Note that if the A register value becomes "6" as a result of the addition, it rewrites the A register value to "0." Processing then returns to step S2752.

Furthermore, when processing proceeds to step S2759, the main control board 50 saves the setting value data. Specifically, the A register value is stored as setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" in the RWM 53. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is the setting value data. Then, when step S2756 returns "Yes" and processing proceeds to step S2759, the A register value remains the setting value data. Then, in step S2759, the A register value is stored at address "F000(H)" in the RWM 53. This allows the setting value data to be saved in the RWM 53.

Proceeding to the next step S2760, the main control board 50 references the falling edge data of the setting key switch 152 signal stored at a specified address in the RWM 53. The main control board 50 then repeats the processing of step S2760 until the falling edge data of the setting key switch 152 signal becomes "1", i.e., until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. Once the falling edge data of the setting key switch 152 signal becomes "1", i.e., once the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2761.

In step S2761, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Also, when the settings are changed, once the processing according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to step S2743 in FIG.

Here, the transition to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress) will be described.
In this embodiment, when the power is on, the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open), and the number of bets is "0," turning on the setting key switch 152 stores "1" in the D register and transitions to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (the setting value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current setting value is also displayed on the setting value display LED 73. When the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends and the system returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

More specifically, in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46), the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch 152 is on before detecting operation of the start switch 41. Then, when it determines that the setting key switch 152 is on while the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and the number of bets is "0," the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in Figure 45. Steps S2751 to S2754 of the setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in Figure 45 are as described above.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the number of bets before the start of play is "0," turning on the setting key switch 152 stores "1" in the D register. Then, when proceeding to step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start setting confirmation. Specifically, it first stores the D register value in the A register, and then determines whether the A register value is "1." If the A register value is "1," it determines that it is time to start setting confirmation ("Yes"), and proceeds to step S2760.

Thereafter, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. During this time, the current setting value continues to be displayed on the setting value display LED 73. If it is determined in step S2760 that the setting key switch 152 is off, the process proceeds to step S2761, where the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53. The process of this flowchart then ends.
Also, when the processing according to this flowchart is terminated during setting confirmation, the process proceeds to the next step in the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) in which it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is on (whether to transition to the setting confirmation state).

In this way, in the third embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process can be executed by the same module. That is, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are created by the same module. Then, based on the information stored in the D register, it is determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
In addition, the determination of whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be made based on information stored in another register rather than the D register, and the determination of whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be made based on information stored in RWM53.

46 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the third embodiment. The main processing is a process for one game. While a game is in progress, the main processing is repeated for each game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. The stack pointer refers to an area in the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power outage (e.g., register values, instruction processing of the main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) in the event of a power outage. Setting the stack pointer is a process of setting register values to their initial values in the area in the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, a game start setting process is performed, which includes generating, updating, and saving an operating status flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medals are read in. This is a process for reading the number of medals currently bet, and the bet number data or the automatic bet number data is read.
In the next step S274, it is determined whether or not there are any bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S273.

If it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and if it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform medal insertion waiting processing, and then proceeds to step S276. The medal insertion waiting processing in step S275 determines whether or not the setting key switch is on, and if it is on, performs processing such as transitioning to setting confirmation mode.
In step S276, the inserted medals are managed, which includes determining whether the medals have been maintained and whether the adjustment switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S277, a software random number update process is performed. This process updates (for example, by adding "1" at a time) the processing random number used for processing (calculation processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the role selection means 61. The software random number is a 16-bit random number ranging from "0" to "65535 (D)". As an update method, a process may be performed in which the interrupt count value (count value (variable) that is incremented at the time of an interrupt) is added to the value before the update.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279; if it determines that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Note that even if the start switch 41 has been operated, if the number of bets has not reached the specified number for the game, the determination in step S278 is "No."

In step S279, the process executed when the start switch is received is to set a setting change prohibition flag, set an output request when the reels 31 start spinning, and set the number of outputs to output a medal insertion signal as an external signal to the hall computer or the like.
In the next step S280, the acquired number data is cleared, causing the acquired number display LED 78 to display "00" (or to be turned off).

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes an update process for the number of AT games. This process is a process for subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is met during the AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
In addition, whether or not to add to the number of AT games during the AT is determined based on the result of the role lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare role is won, the number of additional AT games is determined. Therefore, when adding to the number of AT games and adding the added amount to the AT game count counter, this is executed after the processing of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 46).
After the start switch is accepted (step S279), the AT game count counter is updated in step S281, but this is not limited to this, and the AT game count counter may also be updated after the role lottery process in step S282 or after all reels 31 have stopped (step S290 or later).
In addition, in the specifications of a difference number management type AT, if it has an AT difference number counter, the AT difference number counter is updated after all reels 31 have stopped and the medal payout process due to a winning combination has been completed (after step S300).

In step S282, the role selection means 61 performs a role selection when the start switch 41 is operated, i.e., when an operation signal from the start switch 41 is received. The random number value used for role selection is obtained in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether the obtained random number value corresponds to one of the winning roles using the role selection table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes a lottery process for determining whether to move to an advantageous zone. In this embodiment, an AT lottery is also executed when the lottery for determining whether to move to an advantageous zone is executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284, where the push order instruction number is set. This process is a process of generating a push order instruction number and displaying push order instruction information when the instruction function is activated in the game during the AT (displaying the push order instruction number on the winning number display LED 78).

In the next step S285, a reel spin start preparation process is executed, which determines whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 has an area for storing the timer value of the minimum play time, and the initial value is "1834(D) (2.235 ms x 1834 ≒ 4099 ms)." If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum play time is "0," the initial value "1834(D)" is set as the minimum play time (timer value). Then, the minimum play time is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. When the process proceeds to step S285 for the next game, it is determined whether the minimum play time is "0," and if it is determined to be "0," the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 controls the driving of the motor 32 to start the rotation of the reel 31. Then, when the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted to be accepted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, the acceptance of stopping of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not an operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when an operation signal has been received, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 is determined based on the result of the lottery for the winning combination and the position of the reel 31, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all reels 31 have stopped and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether all reels 31 have stopped, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, it returns to step S287.

In step S290, the winning number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, during AT, the instruction function may be activated, causing the winning number display LED 78 to display push order instruction information (e.g., "=1"). In this case, the display on the winning number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
The number-of-acquired display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, "00010011(B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off the LED 78 may be provided as segment data and output.

In step S291, a symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has stopped on an active line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a display error has occurred in the pattern. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304; if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293.
Here, the reels 31 are stopped based on the stop position determination table, and therefore, normally, the reels 31 do not stop at a position other than that determined by the stop position determination table. However, if a symbol that should not be displayed (a kick symbol) is displayed on an active line as a result of the symbol display determination, it is determined to be abnormal, and an unrecoverable error process is executed.

If it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293, where an update process for the payout number is executed. This process stores the payout number for the game as payout number data and a payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. Next, the process proceeds to step S295, where an interrupt wait process is performed. In the next step S296, the interrupt process is prohibited. By the processes of steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is prohibited immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. Next, the process proceeds to step S298, where the ratio set process is executed. This "ratio set process" is a process that updates various counter values and performs ratio calculations, etc., in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, in step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and in the next step S300, interrupts are permitted (resumed). In this way, when the ratio set process is executed, the AF register is saved and interrupts are prohibited before it is executed.

Interrupt processing is prohibited while the ratio setting process is running because the ratio setting process uses a program stored outside the usage area. If an interrupt occurs while the main process is executing a program stored outside the usage area, the program stored inside the usage area and the program stored outside the usage area will be mixed together, complicating the process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301, where a game end check process is performed. This process clears the condition device (winning combination) flag, etc. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, where an output request is set at the end of the game, and in the next step S303, control command set 1 is performed. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 is completed, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment.
In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in Figure 47, after step S452, the main control board 50 proceeds to step S2770, where it determines whether a power outage has occurred. If it determines that a power outage has occurred, it proceeds to step S2771, where the main control board 50 executes power-down processing (I_POWER_DOWN). On the other hand, if it determines that a power outage has not occurred, it skips step S2771 and proceeds to step S454.

In this way, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed during the interrupt process (I_INTR). Therefore, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed due to interrupt prohibition, or when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed because a program outside the used area (second program) is being executed, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is also not executed. The specific contents of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) will be described later. Then, when the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is completed, the process proceeds to step S454.

In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, after step S455, the process proceeds to step S2821, where the main control board 50 executes the LED display control (I_LED_OUT). In this manner, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). The specific content of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) will be described later.
Then, when the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is completed, the process proceeds to step S2765, where the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. The process then proceeds to step S2221, where the main control board 50 executes the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).

Here, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is a process that controls the lighting of the credit number display LED 76, the number of acquisitions display LED 78, and the setting value display LED 73 (digits 1 to 5), etc., and is executed by the program in the usage area (first program).
In contrast, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), and is executed by a program (second program) outside the usage area. Specific details of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) will be described later. When the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is completed, the process proceeds to step S458.

In step S458, the main control board 50 determines whether the set value is within the normal range. Specifically, it reads the set value data (_NB_RANK) stored at address "F000(H)" in the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Next, it performs a comparison operation between the A register value and "5" (subtracts "5" from the A register value) and determines whether the carry flag is "1". If the carry flag is not "1", it determines that the set value data is within the normal range (the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"); if the carry flag is "1", it determines that the set value data is not within the normal range. If it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, it proceeds to step S459; if it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, it proceeds to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811.

47, if step S458 is "No" or step S460 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2811, where the main control board 50 executes unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). The specific contents of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.
Furthermore, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in Fig. 47, if the answer is "No" in step S460, the process proceeds to step S2766, where the main control board 50 restores the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) that was saved in step S2765. Then, the process proceeds to step S457.

In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, the processes of steps S2221, S458, S459, and S460 are executed by a program (second program) outside the use area.
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the used area of RWM53 in step S2765, and when processing by the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and processing returns to processing by the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored in step S2766.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 in FIG.
When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is started, first, in step S2772, the main control board 50 saves the registers. This process saves the various registers in the stack area of the RWM 53 usage area.

Proceeding to the next step S2773, the main control board 50 clears all output ports 52. This turns off the output of all output ports 52, and for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reels 31 are spinning) or when the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while medals are being paid out), the driving of the motor 32 or the hopper motor 36 is stopped.
In the next step S2774, the main control board 50 saves the stack pointer at a predetermined address in the work area of the used area of the RWM 53. The stack pointer saved in step S2774 is restored in step S2722 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG.

In the next step, S2775, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the RWM 53's used area. Then, in step S2776, the main control board 50 executes the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET). Specific details of the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) will be described later. When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is complete, the process proceeds to the next step, S2777, where the main control board 50 restores the AF register saved in step S2775. Then, in step S2778, the process proceeds to the next step.

The RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the used area.
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the used area of RWM53 in step S2775, and when processing by the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and processing returns to processing by the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored in step S2777.

When processing proceeds to step S2778, the main control board 50 prohibits access to the RWM 53. Then, processing proceeds to the next step S2779, where the main control board 50 enters a reset wait state (loop processing state). Processing according to this flowchart then ends.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 in FIG.
When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is started, the main control board 50 first saves the stack pointer (SP register) to a specific address in a work area outside the used area of RWM 53 in step S2781, and then sets the stack pointer ("F400 (H)") outside the used area in the next step S2782. In the next step S2783, the main control board 50 saves multiple registers to a stack area outside the used area of RWM 53. Then, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S2784.

Here, in step S2781, the stack pointer (SP register) is stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in Figure 35).
As described above, the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is a process performed by a program (second program) outside the area of use. Therefore, while the program (second program) outside the area of use is running, the stack pointer used by the program (first program) in the area of use is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program (first program) in the area of use.
Also, in step S2782, the stack pointer (address "F400(H)") outside the used area is stored in the stack pointer (SP register).
Furthermore, in step S2783, various registers are saved to a stack area outside the area in use.

In step S2784, the main control board 50 sets a power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53. Here, when the power-off processing is executed, "55(H)" is stored as the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).
When the power is restored, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared (set to "0") in step S2724 of the power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in Fig. 42. Therefore, after the processing of step S2724 is executed, the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "00(H)". If the power-off processing is not executed, the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is not set, and the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "00(H)".
Proceeding to the next step S2785, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, proceeding to the next step S2786.

In step S2786, the main control board 50 sets the starting address ("F000(H)") of the area used by RWM 53 in a register for address specification (for example, register B), and in the next step S2787, it sets the number of bytes (number of checksum calculations) of the area used by RWM 53 in a register for the number of calculations (for example, register C), and in the next step S2788, it sets the initial data ("00000000(B)") in a register for checksum calculation (for example, register D).

Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2789, where the main control board 50 executes a checksum calculation process for the used area of the RWM 53.
In this embodiment, the used area of RWM 53 is set to the range of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)", and the processes of steps S2789 and S2790 are repeated until it is determined in the next step S2790 that the checksum calculation process has been completed up to address "F1FF(H)" of RWM 53. In this way, the checksum of the used area of RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in step S2789, the data indicated by the value in the register for address specification (register B) is subtracted from the value in the register for checksum calculation (register D). In the next step S2790, the value in the register for the number of operations (register C) is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". If it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the used area of RWM 53 has ended, and the process proceeds to step S2791. On the other hand, if it is determined to be not "0", the value in the register for address specification (register B) is updated (added by "1"), and the process returns to step S2789.

When the checksum calculation process for the area used by RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2791, where the main control board 50 sets the starting address ("F210(H)") outside the area used by RWM 53 in the address specification register (B register), and in the next step S2792, it sets the number of bytes outside the area used by RWM 53 (number of checksum calculations) in the calculation count register (C register).

Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2793, where the main control board 50 executes a checksum calculation process outside the used area of the RWM 53.
In this embodiment, the area outside the used area of RWM 53 is set to addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", and the processes of steps S2793 and S2794 are repeated until it is determined in the next step S2794 that the checksum calculation process has been completed up to address "F3FF(H)" of RWM 53. In this way, the checksum of the area outside the used area of RWM 53 (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when processing proceeds to step S2793, the checksum calculation register (D register) stores the checksum calculation result for the used area of RWM53. Then, in step S2793, the data indicated by the value of the addressing register (B register) is subtracted from the value of the checksum calculation register (D register). In the next step, S2794, the value of the calculation count register (C register) is updated (subtracted by "1") and it is determined whether the result is "0". If it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for outside the used area of RWM53 has ended, and processing proceeds to step S2795. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be "0", the value of the addressing register (B register) is updated (added by "1") and processing returns to step S2793.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the RWM checksum data (also referred to as complement data, error detection data, or error detection information) is calculated by executing the processes of steps S2785 to S2794.
As described above, this RWM checksum data (complement data) is a value that becomes "0" when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area.

Then, when the checksum calculation process outside the used area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2795, and the main control board 50 stores (saves) the RWM checksum data (complement data) at address "F2A0 (H)" of the RWM 53.
In the next step S2796, the main control board 50 restores the registers saved in step S2783, and in the next step S2797, restores the stack pointer saved in step S2781. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 in FIG.
First, in step S2822, output ports 3 and 4 (FIG. 38) are turned off. Output port 3 is the output port corresponding to digit 1 signals through digit 5 signals, and output port 4 is the output port corresponding to segment 1A through segment 1P signals. By outputting "00000000(B)" from output ports 3 and 4, the output of digits 1 through 5 is temporarily stopped. This prevents different LEDs from appearing to be lit simultaneously (overlapping displays) even for a moment when switching the LED display (preventing afterimages).

In the next step S2823, the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the used area (Figures 33 and 40(A)) is updated. Updating the LED display counter 1 involves shifting the bit "1" to the right by one digit. This updated value is stored in address "F051(H)" (Figure 33) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2824.

In step S2824, it is determined whether the value of LED display counter 1 is "00000000 (B)". If it is determined that the value is "00000000 (B)", the process proceeds to step S2825. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "00000000 (B)", step S2825 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2826.

In step S2825, the LED display counter 1 is initialized. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000(B)" and stored at address "F051(H)" (FIG. 33) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2826.
In step S2826, the values of the LED display counter 1 (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 33) and the LED display request flag (address "F052(H)" in FIG. 33) stored in the RWM 53 are obtained. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.

Next, proceed to step S2827, where the segment display confirmation and setting for the digit to be displayed this time is performed. This process performs an AND operation on the A register value (value of the LED display request flag) and the E register value (value of LED display counter 1) to create data for the LED to be lit this time.

for example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
This becomes:
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
This becomes:
The result of the calculation is then stored in register A. Furthermore, the value stored in register A is stored in register D.

Next, proceed to step S2828, where it is determined whether the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the value of LED display counter 1 and the value of the LED display request flag) is "0." If it is "0," it is determined that there is no display request ("No"), and proceed to step S2844. On the other hand, if it is not "0," it is determined that there is a display request ("Yes"), and proceed to step S2829.

In step S2829, error display data is acquired. When an error occurs, the error display data is stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53. Then, in step S2829, the error display data is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the B register.
In the next step S2830, LED segment table 2 is set. In this embodiment, LED segment table 1 stores data for displaying alphabetic characters on the 7-segment display, and LED segment table 2 stores data for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display, and these are stored in the use area of ROM 54. Note that a description of the specific configurations of LED segment tables 1 and 2 will be omitted. Then, in step S2830, the top address of LED segment table 2 is read, and the value is stored in the HL register.

Next, the flow proceeds to step S2831, where the set value display data (address "F001(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2832, where it is determined whether or not a request for displaying a set value has been made. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 5) of the value obtained by the AND operation stored in the D register is "1"("00010000(B)"). If the D4 bit is "1", it is determined that a request for displaying a set value has been made ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D4 bit is "0", it is determined that a request for displaying a set value has not been made ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2833.

In step S2833, the credit number data (address "F010(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2834, an upper digit offset is obtained. This process divides the A register value (credit number data obtained in step S2833) by 10 (decimal number), stores the quotient in the A register, and stores the remainder in the C register.

In the next step S2835, it is determined whether there is a request to display the most significant digits of the credit number. Specifically, it is determined whether the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1) of the value obtained by the AND operation stored in the D register is "1". If the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the most significant digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the most significant digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2836.

When proceeding to step S2836, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number. Specifically, it is determined whether the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2) of the value obtained by the AND operation stored in the D register is "1". If the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2842. On the other hand, if the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2837.

In step S2837, the acquisition number data (address "F011(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2838, it is determined whether an error display is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the B register value is "0." If it is "0," it is determined that an error display is not in progress ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2840. On the other hand, if the B register value is not "0," it is determined that an error display is in progress ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2839.

In step S2839, LED segment table 1 is set. When processing proceeds to step S2839, the HL register stores the starting address of LED segment table 2 for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display, but when an error is displayed, an English character corresponding to the type of error is displayed on the 7-segment display. Therefore, in step S2839, the starting address of LED segment table 1 for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display is read, and this value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the starting address of LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register instead of the starting address of LED segment table 2 set in step S2830.

In the next step S2840, an offset for the upper digits is obtained. When processing advances to step S2840, the A register stores the acquisition count data obtained in step S2837, and the B register stores the error display data obtained in step S2829. If no error has occurred, the A register divides the acquisition count data stored in the A register by 10 (decimal), stores the quotient in the A register, and stores the remainder in the C register. On the other hand, if an error has occurred, the B register divides the error display data stored in the B register by 10 (decimal), stores the quotient in the A register, and stores the remainder in the C register.

The next step, S2841, determines whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count display LED 78. Specifically, it determines whether the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3) of the value obtained by the AND operation stored in the D register is "1." If the D2 bit is "1," it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D2 bit is "0," it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2842.

In step S2842, the offset for the lower digits is obtained. This process stores the data stored in the C register in the A register. When processing advances to step S2842, the A register stores the quotient calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840, and the C register stores the remainder calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840. Then, in step S2842, the C register value (remainder of the division) is stored in the A register.

Next, proceed to step S2843 to obtain the segment output data. Specifically, the data stored in the HL register (the starting address of LED segment table 2 stored in step S2830 or the starting address of LED segment table 1 stored in step S2839) is added to the data stored in the A register (the offset value corresponding to the display data), and the data corresponding to the address after the addition is obtained from LED segment table 1 or 2 in ROM 54 and stored in the D register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2844, where it is determined whether or not a display request for segment P has been made.
Specifically, first, it is determined whether the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 (E register value) is "1" (timing when digit 4 lights up) and whether the D0 bit of the advantageous zone display LED flag (obtained from address "F062(H)" of RWM53 in FIG. 33) is "1." If the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous zone display LED flag is "1," it is determined that there is a display request for segment P ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845.
On the other hand, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the favorable zone display LED flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no request to display segment P ("No"), step S2845 is skipped, and processing proceeds to step S2846.

Next, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is not "1", the following processing is carried out.
An AND operation is performed on the LED display counter 1 (E register value) and the status display LED lighting data (obtained from address "F044(H)" of RWM53 in FIG. 33), and it is determined whether the result of the AND operation is "0". If the result of the AND operation is not "0", it is determined that a display request for segment P has been made ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845. On the other hand, if the result of the AND operation is "0", it is determined that a display request for segment P has not been made ("No"), and step S2845 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2846.

When processing proceeds to step S2845, the segment P output data is set. Specifically, an OR operation is performed on the segment output data (D register value) obtained in step S2843 and "10000000 (B)", and the result of the OR operation is stored in the D register. As a result, the D7 bit of the segment output data (the bit corresponding to segment P) becomes "1".

Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2846, where a digit signal is output from output port 3 and a segment signal is output from output port 4. Specifically, the data stored in the E register (LED display counter 1) is output as a digit signal from output port 3, and the data stored in the D register (segment output data) is output as a segment signal from output port 4. Processing according to this flowchart then ends.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).
As described above, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the second program, and since execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited during execution of the second program, no processing to prohibit interrupts is provided after the start of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). Except for this, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 51 is the same as unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 43.
In FIG. 51, the same processes as those in FIG. 43 are given the same step numbers.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG.
The ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed during the interrupt processing (I_INTR).The interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed during the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during game play), and even in the recoverable error state, so the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed, and various ratio information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

When the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) process starts, the main control board 50 first stores the stack pointer (SP register) in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3 (H)" in Figure 35) in step S2461.
As described above, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program (second program) outside the area of use, so while the program (second program) outside the area of use is running, the stack pointer used by the program (first program) in the area of use is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program (first program) in the area of use.

In the next step S2462, the main control board 50 sets the stack pointer outside the used area. This process stores "F400(H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the main control board 50 saves the registers. This process saves the various registers to a stack area outside the area in use.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2464, where the main control board 50 executes a flash request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) process. This process is the process shown in Fig. 53, which will be described later, and is a process for updating the flash request flag (address "F291(H)").

In the next step S2465, the main control board 50 updates the rate display timer (S_RATE_TIME). This process is the process shown in Fig. 55, which will be described later, and updates the blinking switch flag (address F293(H)), the display switch time (address F294), and the blinking switch time (address F296(H)).
In the next step S2466, the main control board 50 performs a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT). This process is shown in Fig. 56, which will be described later, and is a process for actually displaying (turning on or off) the ratio in the interrupt process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2467, where the main control board 50 restores the registers. This process restores the various registers that were saved in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. This process stores the stack pointer saved in step S2461, i.e., the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, this process causes the stack pointer to point to the address of the area in use. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed in the setting change state, setting confirmation state, between the start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in FIG. 46) and the game end check processing (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during game play), and in the recoverable error state, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed.
Therefore, even in the setting change state, setting confirmation state, during the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in Figure 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in Figure 46) (during game play), and in the recoverable error state, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed regardless of whether the door switch 17 is on or off (whether the front door 12 is open or closed). That is, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed both when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed).
Therefore, whether the door switch 17 is on (front door 12 is open) or off (front door 12 is closed), the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

On the other hand, when an irrecoverable error occurs and the irrecoverable error state is reached (the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the irrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed and the progress of the game is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited, and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is not executed, so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) no longer display the various ratios related to the information type and game results.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in an unrecoverable error state, the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off ("00000000 (B)") in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 43 described above or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 51 described below.

As a result, in the unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) remains "00000000 (B)", so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed.
Digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off, which is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall staff) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the generation of a flash request flag (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of FIG.
When the blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) process starts, the main control board 50 first sets the number of repetitions and initial values in step S2481. This process stores "6(H)" in the B register and "0" in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions "6" is a value for determining whether or not the six ratio segments should blink.

In the next step S2482, the main control board 50 sets the address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This process stores the top address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
Figure 54 shows the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). The blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table defines predetermined values for the ratios of six items. For example, if the command-inclusive role ratio is "70", the display will blink when the command-inclusive role ratio is "70" or higher.
54, the top address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table is "2500(H)." Therefore, "2500(H)" is stored in the DE register.

In addition, "non-applicable item" means that the machine does not have the function (performance) corresponding to that item. For example, a gaming machine that does not have "RB (first-class special feature)" does not display the consecutive feature ratio, so when the consecutive feature ratio is displayed, "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In the third embodiment, the ratios of all six items are displayed, but if there is an inapplicable item, "DE(H)" is stored in the address of ROM 54 corresponding to the inapplicable item in the blinking/inapplicable item judgment value table.

For example, in a gaming machine that does not have an "RB (first type special device),""DE(H)" is stored in addresses "2502 (H)" and "2504 (H)" instead of "60 (H)" in Figure 54.
In this way, even if the gaming machine does not have "RB (first-class special feature)", the control process is set up so that the lighting of the management information can be controlled simply by modifying part of the data in the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. Therefore, the control program can be easily used in other products.
Note that the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to "DE(H)".

In the next step S2483, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the ratio data. This process stores the address where the bonus item status ratio data is stored in the HL register ("F28D(H)" in FIG. 35).
Next, the process proceeds to step S2484, where the main control board 50 acquires the blinking or non-applicable item determination value. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The data at the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
(2) The value of the A register is decremented by "1."

In the next step S2485, the main control board 50 determines whether the item value is non-applicable. This process subtracts "DD(H)" from the A register value, and if the calculation result is "0" (zero flag="1"), it determines that the item value is non-applicable.
In other words, when the item is non-applicable, as described above, "DE(H)" is stored in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table, so if "1" is subtracted from "DE(H)" and then "DD(H)" is subtracted, the result becomes "0", and the zero flag becomes "1".

In addition, when a predetermined value other than "DE(H)" is stored as the value corresponding to a non-applicable item, for example, "predetermined value - 1 - (predetermined value - 1)" is calculated, and if the calculation result is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined to be a non-applicable item value.
Furthermore, the "predetermined value" may be a value exceeding "70 (H)" in the case of the instructed role ratio, role ratio (cumulative), and role ratio (6000 times), a value exceeding "60 (H)" in the case of the continuous role ratio (cumulative) and continuous role ratio (6000 times), and a value exceeding "50 (H)" in the case of the role etc. state ratio.
If it is determined that the item value is not a non-corresponding item value, the process proceeds to the next step S2486, and if it is determined that the item value is a non-corresponding item value, the process skips step S2486 and proceeds to step S2487.

In step S2486, the main control board 50 acquires the ratio data. This process stores the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, the main control board 50 saves the ratio data or the non-applicable item value. This process stores the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. This process has the following meaning.

When there is an inapplicable item, the storage area of the RWM 53 in which the ratio data is stored does not store any data before the above-mentioned saving process.
For example, if the machine does not have an "RB (Type 1 special feature)," the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289 (H)") and consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) data (address "F28B (H)") are stored as "00 (H)."

Details will be described later, but when the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in that address. In this case, if "00 (H)" is stored in the continuous feature ratio (6000 times) data, when the continuous feature ratio (6000 times) is displayed, "00" will be displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74. In order to prevent this, the value of the A register acquired in step S2485 ("DD (H)" in this embodiment) is stored as ratio data, so that "--" will be displayed.
In addition, the program processing is also designed so that it can be used in common by gaming machines that have non-applicable items and gaming machines that do not have non-applicable items.

In the next step S2488, the main control board 50 performs a blinking determination. This process subtracts the data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. If a carry is carried as a result of this calculation, the carry flag is set to "1."
As will be described in more detail later, when the carry flag is set to "1", it means that the item will be lit in a non-blinking manner when displayed, and when the carry flag is set to "0", it means that the item will be lit in a blinking manner when displayed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2489, where the main control board 50 generates a blink request flag, which is an arithmetic process for rotating and shifting the carry flag and the C register value to the left.
Specifically, if the carry flag value is "CY" and the C register values are "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0", then
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
The following calculation is performed:

For example, if the C register value is the initial value "00000000(B)" as shown in step S2481 and the carry flag is "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000 (B)"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
The following calculation is performed:
Therefore, the C register value becomes "00000001(B)".
This C register value ultimately becomes the blink request flag.
In other words, the processing of step S2488 is a process of storing information in a register (memory area) that determines whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item in question by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table.

In the next step S2490, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the next ratio data. This process subtracts "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value for the first blinking judgment is "F28D (H)" (reel device status ratio data) as described above. If "1" is subtracted from the HL register value, the HL register value becomes "F28C (H)" (reel device ratio (cumulative) data), which is the target for the second blinking judgment.

In the next step S2491, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This process increments the DE register value by "1." For example, if the DE register value initially stored is "2500(H)," this process will result in the DE register value becoming "2501(H)."
Here, as shown in Figure 54, the blinking/non-applicable item judgment values are stored in addresses "2500 (H)" to "2505 (H)" in the order of reel etc. state ratio, reel ratio (cumulative), continuous reel ratio (cumulative), reel ratio (6000 times), continuous reel ratio (6000 times), and reel ratio with instructions.
This simplifies the process by setting the initial value of the address (DE register value) of the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table to "2500 (H)" and adding "1" when judging the next blinking/non-applicable item through a loop process (steps S2484 to S2492).

Next, the process proceeds to step S2492, where the main control board 50 determines whether the repetition has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value of the B register is decremented by "1."
(2) If the value of the B register is not "0", it is determined that the repetition has not ended.
Here, since the value of the B register is set to "6" in the first step S2481, the number of repetitions is 6. If it is determined that the repetition has ended, the process proceeds to step S2493, and if it is determined that the repetition has not ended, the process returns to step S2484.
In this manner, the blinking determination is performed for six items.

After completing the blinking determination of the six items, the process proceeds to step S2493, where the main control board 50 acquires the total number of games counter value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value of the lower two bytes of the total number of games played counter (address "F26D(H)") is stored in the HL register.
(2) The value of the most significant byte of the total number of games played counter (address "F26D(H)") is stored in register A.
As mentioned above, the total number of games played counter is composed of 3 bytes, with "F26D(H)" being the memory area that stores the first digit, and that value being stored in the L register.
Also, "F26E(H)" is the storage area for storing the second digit, and that value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is the storage area for storing the third digit, and this value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, the main control board 50 determines whether the most significant byte of the total number of games counter is "0." This process determines whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0." If it is determined to be "0," the process proceeds to step S2495; if it is determined not to be "0," the process proceeds to step S2496.
In step S2495, the main control board 50 determines whether 6,000 games have been played. This process subtracts "6,000 (D)" from the HL register value (the lowest 2 bytes of the total number of games played counter). If a carry is made as a result of this calculation, the carry flag becomes "1". If the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 6,000 games have not been played, and the process proceeds to step S2497.
On the other hand, if it is determined that 6,000 games have been played, the process proceeds to step S2496.

In step S2496, the main control board 50 updates the data for the blink request flag. This process sets bit D6 of the C register to "1." Here, the C register value is set to the value corresponding to the blink request flag at address "F291(H)" in Figure 35 (however, at this point, the bit is inverted). Therefore, when 6,000 games have been played, the process of setting bit D6 to "1" is executed.

In the next step S2497, the main control board 50 determines whether the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter exceeds "2" ("3" or greater). Here, the process of subtracting "3" from the A register value is performed. If there is no borrowing in this subtraction, the carry flag is ≠ "1". If the carry flag is ≠ "1", it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter exceeds "2" ("3" or greater).

The reason for this is that in order to determine whether 175,000 games have been played, the most significant byte is first compared with "3." Here, "175,000 (D)" is "2AB98 (H)" in hexadecimal, so if the A register value exceeds "2" (the A register value is "3" or greater), it is clear that the value of the total number of games played counter is necessarily greater than "175,000 (D)."
In step S2497, if the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter exceeds "2" and the process proceeds to step S2500; if the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter does not exceed "2" and the process proceeds to step S2498.

In step S2498, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is "2". This process subtracts "2" from the A register value, and if it determines that the value is not "0", it determines that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is not "2". If it determines that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is not "2", it proceeds to step S2501, and if it determines that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is "2", it proceeds to step S2499.

In step S2499, the main control board 50 determines whether 175,000 games have been played. Specifically, "AB98(H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and if the result of this calculation involves a borrow, the carry flag is set to "1." If the carry flag is set to "1," it is determined that 175,000 games have not been played.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have been played, the process proceeds to step S2500, and if it is determined that 175,000 games have not been played, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2500, the main control board 50 updates the data for the blink request flag. This process sets bit D7 of register C to "1." Bit D7 of register C corresponds to bit D7 of the blink request flag (175000 game blink flag) at address "F291 (H)" in Figure 35. Then, proceed to step S2501.

In step S2501, the main control board 50 generates a blinking request flag and executes the following process.
(1) Store "01111111(B)" in register A.
(2) An exclusive OR (XOR) operation is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

Before the execution of the process of step S2501, as described above, the blinking item (bit) among the data stored in register C stores "0." For example, when 175,000 games have been played, bit D7 is set to "1" as described above. In other words, when 175,000 games have not been played, bit D7 is set to "0."
Therefore, by inverting the bits of the C register value, a blinking request flag is generated so that the blinking item (bit) becomes "1".

In the next step S2502, the main control board 50 saves the blink request flag generated in step S2501. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the blink request flag ("F291(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) The A register value is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value ("F291(H)" in FIG. 35).
As a result, items that blink are set to "1" and items that do not blink are set to "0." In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0," and blink request flags for eight items, including whether to blink, are stored in address "F291(H)" in FIG. 35.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG.
When the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) process starts, the main control board 50 first updates the display switching time in step S2511. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The address storing the display switching time ("F294(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is decremented by "1" and the result of the subtraction is stored at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cyclically cycles between "0" and "2144 (D)" when the display switching time is expressed in decimal notation.

Therefore, if this process is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) will be stored as the display switching time.
Also, when the process is performed at "0" and "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
Since interrupt processing is executed every 2.235 ms, the value changes from "0" to "2144(D)" approximately every 4792 ms, and the carry flag becomes "1".
This allows the ratio display content to be switched approximately every 5 seconds.

In the next step S2512, the main control board 50 determines whether the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is made by determining whether the carry flag has become "1" in the processing of step S2511. If the carry flag is "1," it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed.
If it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2513, and if it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2518.

In step S2513, the main control board 50 saves the blinking switching time. This process stores "134(D)(86(H))" in the address (blinking switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (i.e., "F296(H)").
That is, when it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching time is saved. The blinking switching time is stored as 2.235 x 134 = 299.49 (ms).

Next, the process proceeds to step S2514, where the main control board 50 turns off the blinking switch flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the blinking switch flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the blinking switch flag is "0", it indicates that the light is on, and when it is "1", it indicates that the light is off.
That is, when the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching flag becomes "0" (lit).

Next, the process proceeds to step S2515, where the main control board 50 updates the ratio display number. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The HL register value is decremented by "1."
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 corresponding to the ratio display number ("F292(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that cycles the ratio display number between "0" and "5." Therefore, if this process is performed when the ratio display number is "5,""0" is stored as the ratio display number. Also, if this process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5," the carry flag becomes "1."

In the next step S2516, the main control board 50 determines whether the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, when the carry flag = "1", it is determined that the ratio display number is not "0". In other words, when the ratio display number is "5", if the processing of step S2515 is executed, the carry flag will not be "1" (= "0"), and in this case, it is determined that the ratio display number is "0".

If it is determined in step S2516 that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process proceeds to step S2517, and if it is determined that the updated ratio display number is not "0", the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2517, the main control board 50 corrects the ratio display number. This process adds "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F292(H)" in FIG. 35). As a result of this process, if "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1." As a result, the ratio display number cycles between "1" and "6." Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

If it is determined in step S2512 that the display switching time has not elapsed and the process proceeds to step S2518, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switching time. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the flashing switching time ("F296(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the subtraction is stored at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cycles between "0" and "134 (D)" when expressed as a decimal number as the blinking switching time.
Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switching time is "0", "134 (D)" (86 (H)) will be stored as the blinking switching time.
Also, when the process is performed at "0", and "134(D)" (86(H)) is stored as the flashing switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, the process proceeds to step S2519, where the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switching time has elapsed. This determination is made by determining whether the carry flag is "1", and if the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed. If it is determined that the blinking switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2520, and if it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2520, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switch flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the blinking switch flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) "1" is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the addition is stored at that address.
This process executes a cyclic addition process for the blinking switch flag, which cycles between "0" and "1." Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switch flag is "1,""0" is stored as the blinking switch flag.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG.
When the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) starts, the main control board 50 first acquires the value of LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 35) in step S1471. This process acquires the value of LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and stores it in the D register.

In the next step S1472, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a ratio display request. Here, it determines whether or not there is a request to display any of digits 6 to 9. Specifically, it performs an AND operation on the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in the D register and "00001111 (B)." If the result of this AND operation is "0," it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the AND operation is not "0," it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process proceeds to step S1475.
In the third embodiment, the result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter 2 and "00001111(B)" will never be "0", and therefore step S1472 will never be "No".

In the next step S1475, the ratio display number (address "F292(H)" in FIG. 35) is obtained. This process obtains the ratio display number and stores it in the A register, and then executes a process of storing the A register value in the E register.
Here, the number of times to check the blinking bit, which will be described later, is determined based on the ratio display number. For example, the following is an example:
Example 1)
Ratio display number is "1": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the ratio of the indicated device.
Example 2)
Ratio display number is "2": Obtain the number of blinking bit inspections for the continuous role ratio (6000 times).
Example 3)
Ratio display number is "5": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the reel ratio (total cumulative).
Example 4)
Ratio display number is "6": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the reel status ratio.
Furthermore, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the blink bit check count table is set. This process stores the address obtained by subtracting "1" from the top address of the blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the HL register.
FIG. 57 shows the blinking bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
As shown in FIG. 57, a predetermined value (for example, the value corresponding to the ratio of the instructed device is "8(H)") is stored for each ratio.
The starting address is "2510(H)." Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

The "number of blinking bit checks" is a value indicating how many bits from bit D0 in the blink request flag at address "F292(H)" must be followed before reaching the bit to be checked.
For example, in Figure 57, "8 (H)" is stored in the command-indicated feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio, which is a value for determining whether the value of the eighth bit D7 counting from bit D0 in the blinking request flag is "1." Bit D7 is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of plays has not reached 175,000, and when bit D7 is "1," the identification segments for the command-indicated feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio will be subject to blinking.

Also, in Figure 57, "7 (H)" is stored for the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and feature ratio (6000 times). This is a value used to determine whether the value of the D6 bit, the seventh bit counting from the D0 bit in the flashing request flag, is "1". The D6 bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of plays has not reached 6000, and when this D6 bit is "1", the identification segments for the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and feature ratio (6000 times) will flash.

In the next step S2532, the main control board 50 sets the identification segment blinking bit inspection count. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register, and the resulting data is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (the ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250F(H) + 3(H) = 2512(H) (= HL register value)
7 (H) (= B register value)
This becomes:

In other words, "250F (H)" is the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F292 (H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit inspection table, making it possible to obtain the data stored at that address.
In the above example, "7 (H)" is obtained, which is information for determining whether or not to flash the identification segment at the reel ratio (6000 times) stored in address "2512 (H)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S1476, where the main control board 50 sets the identification segment offset table. This process stores the starting address of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) in the HL register. The starting address is "2520(H)", and the value obtained by subtracting "1" from this address, resulting in "251F(H), is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1477, the main control board 50 acquires an identification segment offset value. This process involves reading the ratio display number stored in register A in step S1475 as an offset value from the identification segment offset table.
Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register, and the resulting data is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520(H)" obtained by adding "1(H)" to "251F(H)" is stored in the HL register, and "7A(H)", the data stored at that address, is stored in the A register. Also, when the ratio display number is "2", "2521(H)" obtained by adding "2(H)" to "251F(H)" is stored in the HL register, and "6B(H)", the data stored at that address, is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digit) (a request to display digit 6). Here, it determines whether the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it determines that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digit), proceed to step S1482; if there is no display request, proceed to step S1479.

In step S1479, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (a request to display digit 7). Here, it determines whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it determines that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), proceed to step S1483; if there is no display request, proceed to step S2533.

In step S2533, the main control board 50 sets the ratio segment blinking bit check count. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the B register.
Here, the ratio display number acquired in step S1475 is stored in the E register, so the same value is stored in the E register, A register, and B register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1480. Note that the process proceeds to step S1480 when there is no request to display the ratio (1000 digit) and ratio (100 digit), i.e., when there is no request to display the identification segment (when the ratio segment is to be displayed). Therefore, in step S1480, the ratio data is acquired.
In step S1480, the main control board 50 acquires a value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register. For example, when the E register value is "00000001(B)" corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the main control board 50 acquires the instructed feature ratio data.

Specific ratio data is obtained as follows.
(1) The HL register stores the value ("F287(H)") obtained by subtracting "1" from the address of RWM53 ("F288(H)" in Figure 35) where the instruction-included reel ratio data is stored.
(2) The value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register and the result is stored in the HL register.
(3) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
In other words, using "F287 (H)" as the base address and the ratio display number as the offset value, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored can be calculated (specified), and the data stored in that RWM address can be obtained (stored) in a register (storage area).

As a result of this processing, an offset value for displaying one of the following ratios is stored in register A: instruction-included reel ratio data, continuous reel ratio data (6000 times), reel ratio data (6000 times), continuous reel ratio data (cumulative), reel ratio data (cumulative), or reel state ratio. This offset value (register A value) is used when obtaining the ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, in step S1481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (single digit) (a request to display digit 9). This process determines whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1." If there is a request to display the ratio (single digit), the process proceeds to step S1483; if there is no request, the process proceeds to step S1482.
When it is determined in step S1481 that there is no request to display the ratio (1 digit), this means that there is a request to display the ratio (10 digits).

Through the above processing, if there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or ratio (10 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) or ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483.
In step S1482, the main control board 50 sets the offset for the upper digits. The reason for proceeding to step S1482 is to light up the upper digits of the identification segment or ratio segment. At this point, the A register stores the identification segment offset value (step S1477) or the ratio data (step S1480). The following process is then executed.

(1) The lower 4 bits and upper 4 bits stored in the A register are swapped.
For example, if the data before the swapping is "0011/1001(B)"("/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), swapping the lower 4 bits with the upper 4 bits results in "1001/0011(B)."
(2) The value of the A register is ANDed with "00001111(B)" and the result is stored in the A register. This process masks the upper four bits (setting them to "0") so that the lower four bits of the A register are used as the offset value.
Of the 1-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the upper 4 bits correspond to the upper offset value, and the lower 4 bits correspond to the lower offset value. Therefore, by performing the above processing, an offset value for obtaining the upper segment data is generated.

In the next step S1483, the main control board 50 sets the ratio display segment data table. This process stores the starting address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register. The starting address is "2530(H)", and "2530(H)" is stored in the HL register. Note that a description of the specific configuration of the ratio display segment data table will be omitted.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1484, where the main control board 50 acquires the segment output data. This process adds the A register value (offset value) to the HL register value (start address of the ratio display segment data table), and stores the data corresponding to the address in the ratio display segment data table after the addition in the E register.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; first address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
When
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) (display data for "5")
This becomes:

Next, proceeding to step S1485, the main control board 50 determines whether segment P is being displayed. In this embodiment, when displaying digits 6 to 9, segment P (dot) for digit 7 is always displayed, so if there is a request to display ratio (100 digit), it is determined that segment P is being displayed. On the other hand, if there is a request to display ratio (1 digit), ratio (10 digit), and ratio (1000 digit), it is determined that there is no request to display segment P.

Here, for example, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P, and if it is not "1", it is determined that there is no request to display segment P. Specifically, the following process is executed.
(1) Store "00000010(B)" in the A register.
(2) The value of register A is ANDed with the value of register D (the value of LED display counter 2 stored in step S1471). If the result is not "0", it is determined that a display request for segment P has been made.
If it is determined that a display request for segment P has been made, the process proceeds to step S1486; if it is determined that a display request has not been made, the process proceeds to step S2534.

In step S1486, the main control board 50 sets the output data corresponding to segment P. Since segment P corresponds to bit D7 of the 8-bit data, it performs an OR operation on the segment data (E register value) obtained in step S1484 and "10000000 (B)", and stores the result of the operation in the E register.

In the next step S2534, the main control board 50 acquires the blink request flag. This process stores the data of the blink request flag (address "F291(H)" in FIG. 35) in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S2535, the main control board 50 performs a blink bit check. This process shifts the A register to the right by "1" and stores the overflow result in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag will be "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag will be "1".

In the next step S2536, the main control board 50 determines whether the inspection has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the value of the B register.
(2) If it is determined that the value of the B register is "0", it is determined that the inspection is complete.
If it is determined that the inspection has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2537, and if it is determined that the inspection has not been completed, the process returns to step S2535.
By the above process, the value of the blink request flag is shifted right by the number of times initially stored in the B register, and the result of the shift that overflows is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the blink request flag is "10000000(B)" (the 175000 blink flag in bit D7 is on) and the value of the B register is "8(H)",
1st time: "10000000(B)" → "01000000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 8 - 1 = 7 (H)
Second time: "01000000(B)" → "00100000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 7 - 1 = 6 (H)
3rd time: "00100000(B)" → "00010000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6 - 1 = 5 (H)
4th time: "00010000(B)" → "00001000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5 - 1 = 4 (H)
5th time: "00001000(B)" → "00000100(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4 - 1 = 3 (H)
6th time: "00000100(B)" → "00000010(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3 - 1 = 2 (H)
7th time: "00000010(B)" → "00000001(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 2 - 1 = 1 (H)
8th time: "00000001(B)" → "00000000(B)", carry flag = "1"
B register value = 1 - 1 = 0 (H)
This becomes:

In step S2537, the main control board 50 determines whether the blink request flag is on. This process determines whether the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has ended, and if it is "1", it determines that the blink request flag is on. If it is determined that the blink request flag is on, it proceeds to step S2538, and if it is determined that the blink request flag is not on, it proceeds to step S1487.

In step S2538, the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switch flag is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data of the blinking switch flag (address "F293(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is "0" (second zero flag="1"), it is determined that the blinking switch flag is not on.
If it is determined that the blinking switch flag is on, the flow proceeds to step S2539, and if it is determined that the flag is not on, the flow proceeds to step S1487.
In addition, from steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the blink request flag is off ("No" in step S2537), the process does not proceed to step S2538, and the light will not be turned off even if the blink switch flag is on.
b) Even if the blink request flag is on ("Yes" in step S2537), if the blink switch flag is off ("No" in step S2538), the light will be turned on.
c) If the blink request flag is on ("Yes" in step S2537) and the blink switch flag is on ("Yes" in step S2538), the process proceeds to step S2539, where the light is turned off.

In step S2539, the main control board 50 clears the segment data. This process stores the B register value in the E register.
Here, the value of the B register is always "0" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has ended. Therefore, this process sets "0" to the E register. That is, when the blink request flag is on ("1") and the blink switch flag is on ("1", i.e., off), the display to be lit is turned off in this interrupt process, so the process of step S2539 is executed to set the segment data (value of the E register) to "00000000 (B)". Then, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1487, in order to output the digit signal and the segment signal, the main control board 50 outputs the segment signal from output port 7 and the digit signal from output port 6. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged.
Here, the D register stores a digit signal, and the E register stores a segment signal.
The data stored in the D register and the data stored in the H register are swapped.
The data stored in the E register and the data stored in the L register are swapped.
This means:
The H register stores the digit signal.
The L register stores the segment signal.
(2) The L register value is output to output port 7 and the H register value is output to output port 6.
This completes the processing according to this flowchart.

Next, an operation when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the third embodiment is operated will be described.
When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, and a recoverable error state (for example, a medal retention error ("CE" error) in the medal selector) occurs, the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is operated to release the recoverable error state.
In this case, as described above, even if the recoverable error state is released, the data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM53 is maintained without being initialized, and therefore the data relating to the favorable zone is also maintained without being initialized, and therefore the favorable zone display LED77 also remains lit.
When recovering from a recoverable error state, data relating to errors such as error detection flags stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53 may be initialized.

In contrast, if a recoverable error state occurs when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated).
In this case, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "No" and step S2710 becomes "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2713, and the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally after a power outage is set.

Also, since medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so step S2714 returns "Yes" and processing proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of FIG. 44, initialization processing is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53, and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. Therefore, data related to the advantageous zone is initialized, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off. However, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" is maintained without being initialized, so the setting value is not changed. Furthermore, because it is reset, step S2741 in FIG. 44 returns "Yes," and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped, so the setting change state does not change. After that, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 46), and the game returns to a state where medals can be bet.

In this way, if a recoverable error state occurs when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the recoverable error state can be canceled by operating the reset switch 153, allowing play in the advantageous zone to be continued.
On the other hand, if a recoverable error state occurs when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power can be turned off once, and then turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on, thereby canceling the recoverable error state and allowing play to resume from the normal zone rather than the advantageous zone.
This allows the manager (hall staff) to choose whether to continue playing in the advantageous zone or resume playing from the normal zone.

Also, for example, if a player stops playing in the advantageous zone (in the middle of playing in the advantageous zone), if the next player were to start playing in the middle of playing in the advantageous zone, that player would be at an excessive advantage.
On the other hand, changing the settings while the hall is open is not desirable, as it may encourage players to become more gambling-minded.
Furthermore, if the gaming machines are turned off and stopped from operating while the hall is open, the utilization rate of the gaming machines will decrease, which is undesirable from the perspective of the hall's management.
Therefore, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power is turned off once, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on. This allows the game to be resumed from the normal zone without changing the settings.

Also, suppose that the power is turned off under conditions where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on under conditions where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated).
In this case, it becomes possible to transition to a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress), and then the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to one in which medals can be bet.

Specifically, when the power is turned off under conditions in which medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on under conditions in which the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated), step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "Yes", and processing proceeds to step S2711. Furthermore, since the power recovery is not an abnormality, step S2712 becomes "No", and processing proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when power recovery is normal is set. Furthermore, since medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so step S2714 becomes "Yes", and processing proceeds to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of step S2731.

Furthermore, because it is not reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 returns "No," and the process proceeds to step S2742, which is the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). Then, because it is not the start of setting confirmation, step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45 returns "No," and steps S2752 to S2758 are repeated until step S2756 returns "Yes." In other words, the setting change state is entered. Thereafter, when the start switch 41 is operated, step S2756 returns "Yes," and when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, step S2760 returns "Yes," and the setting change state ends. Then, through steps S2743 to S2747 in FIG. 44, the process proceeds to step S248, which is the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), and the process returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

Also, as described above, in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46), the setting is set to be unchangeable from the start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in Figure 46) to the game end check processing (step S301 in Figure 46), including while the reels 31 are rotating, and during this period the setting unchangeable flag is turned on.
Then, when the setting change disable flag is on, the power is turned off, and then, even if the power is turned on under the circumstances where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the result in step S2714 of FIG. 41 is "No," so the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 is not performed, and therefore the setting change state is not entered.

In contrast, when medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so if the power is turned off under these circumstances, and then the power is turned on under the circumstances where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, step S2714 in Figure 41 will return "Yes", and the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be performed in step S2731, making it possible to transition to the setting change state.

Also, as mentioned above, when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed when the power is restored normally after a power outage, the process proceeds to step S2713 in FIG. 41, and the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range of RWM53. Furthermore, the initialization range of the used area of RWM53 includes the credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" and the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)".

For this reason, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the number of bets is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet, the number of bets will be "0" and the number of credits will also be "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the bet number is between "1" and "3", and the credit number is "0", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet, the bet number will be "0" and the credit number will also be "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered when the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet, the number of bets will be "0" and the number of credits will also be "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered when the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet, the number of bets will become "0" and the number of credits will also become "0".

Also, suppose the power is turned off when medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated). In this case, initialization processing of a specified memory area of the RWM 53 can be performed, and after the initialization processing is performed, the game returns to a state where medals can be bet without transitioning to a setting change state.

Specifically, when the power is turned off while medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "No", step S2710 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally after a power outage is set. Also, since medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so step S2714 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.
Also, since it is reset, the answer is "Yes" in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, the process does not transition to the setting change state. After that, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 46) and returns to a state where medals can be bet.

Also, if the power is turned off while the setting change disable flag is on, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2714 in Figure 41 will return "No," so the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731 will not be performed, and therefore the initialization process of RWM 53 will not be executed.

In contrast, when medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off. Under these circumstances, the power is turned off. If the power is then turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2714 in Figure 41 becomes "Yes," and the process moves to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, whereupon the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed.

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, in step S2713 of FIG. 41, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range of the RWM 53. This initialization range is the same as the initialization range set when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state when the power is restored normally after a power outage.

In other words, provided that the power has been restored normally (not abnormally), the initialization process for the RWM 53 is executed to the same extent when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the setting key switch 152 is not operated, and therefore even if the setting key is not in hand, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed to the same extent as when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed without transitioning to the setting change state, within the same scope as when transitioning to the setting change state.

For this reason, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the number of bets is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on when the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 initialization process is executed, and then, when it becomes possible to bet medals again, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Also, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the bet number is between "1" and "3", and the credit number is "0", and then the power is turned on when the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 initialization process is executed, and then, when medals can be bet again, the bet number becomes "0" and the credit number also becomes "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on when the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 initialization process is executed, and then, when medals can be bet again, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", and then the power is turned on when the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when the situation returns to one where medals can be bet, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Also, suppose the power is turned off when medals can be bet, and then turned on when the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In other words, suppose the power is turned on when both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. In this case, it becomes possible to transition to the setting change state, and then the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to one in which medals can be bet.

41, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), it is determined in step S2707 whether the setting key switch signal is on, and then it is determined in step S2710 whether the reset switch signal is on. That is, it is first determined whether the setting key switch signal is on, and then it is determined whether the reset switch signal is on.
Therefore, when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the result in step S2707 is "Yes" and the process does not proceed to step S2710. In other words, when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the setting key switch 152 takes priority. Then, when the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, the result in step S2741 is "No" and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, allowing the process to transition to the setting change state.

Also, when the state shifts to the setting change state, it is assumed that the setting value "M" (for example, "2") is initially displayed on the setting value display LED 73. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" is "M".
Thereafter, suppose that the setting change switch 153 is operated and the setting value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" becomes "N".

Furthermore, suppose that while the setting value display LED 73 is displaying the setting value "N," the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated. In this case, because the start switch 41 has not been operated, the changed setting value data has not been saved (stored) in address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, and the value of "F000(H)" remains "M-1." Furthermore, because the start switch 41 has not been operated and the setting key switch 152 has not been turned off, the power is turned off without ending the setting change state (remaining in the setting change state).

Suppose that the power is then turned on while the setting key switch 152 and reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are both off. In this case, the power is simply turned on/off, and the data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized, so the system returns to the same state as when the power was interrupted, and the setting change state is restored. Furthermore, since "M-1" is stored in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, and "N" is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001(H)" of the RWM 53, the setting value "N" is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when the system returns to the setting change state.

In contrast, suppose that when the setting change state is entered, the setting value display LED 73 initially displays the setting value "M" (for example, "2"). Then, suppose that the setting change switch 153 is operated, causing the setting value display LED 73 to display the setting value "N" (for example, "3"). Furthermore, suppose that while the setting value display LED 73 is displaying the setting value "N," the power is turned off without operating the start switch 41. Up to this point, the situation is the same as above. Now, suppose that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.

In this case, since step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41 is "No" and step S2710 is "Yes," the process proceeds to step S2731, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when power is restored normally after a power outage is set. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Fig. 44, initialization processing is performed on addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. Therefore, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1."
Also, since this is a reset, the result in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 is "Yes," and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, the process does not transition to the setting change state. After that, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 46), and it becomes possible to bet medals. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 remains "M-1," so the setting value becomes "M."

Also, suppose that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.
In this case, in an unrecoverable error state, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed, and therefore the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed either, so when the power is turned off, the power-off processing completed flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved.

Also, since the power is on with the setting key switch 152 off, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41 results in "No" and the program proceeds to step S2708. Furthermore, since the power-off process completion flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved, step S2708 results in "Yes" and the program proceeds to step S2801 for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
That is, if the power is turned off in an irrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the irrecoverable error state will occur again.

Although the power is turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 does not proceed to step S2710, so the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON) is not executed, and the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is not executed.
Furthermore, while the processing by the second program is being executed, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed, and the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed either. Therefore, if the power is turned off while the processing by the second program is being executed, when the power is turned on thereafter, the power-off processing completion flag is not set, and the RWM checksum data is not saved, so the answer in step S2708 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. In other words, an unrecoverable error state occurs.

Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the program outside the used area (second program) is executing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 will be "No", step S2708 will be "Yes", and the program will proceed to step S2801, whereupon unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be executed by the program in the used area (first program).

Similarly, if the power is turned off while the program in the used area (first program) is executing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), and then the power is turned on again while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 will be "No," step S2708 will be "Yes," and the program will proceed to step S2801, so that the program in the used area (first program) will execute unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).

Also, suppose that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on again with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off.
In this case, the result of step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2711, and the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change in the event of a power failure recovery abnormality is set. Also, since a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred, the result of step S2712 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, initialization is performed on the entire range (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the usage area of RWM 53, and the entire range (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") outside the usage area. As a result, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 becomes "0", and the setting value becomes "1".

Also, since it is not reset, the result in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S2742 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL), where the state changes to the setting change state.
Then, in this setting change state, it is assumed that the power is turned off without operating the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153. In this case, since the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed in the setting change state, the power down process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed.
Thereafter, suppose the power is turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In this case, since the power recovery is not abnormal, the answer is "No" in step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41. Also, since the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the answer is "Yes" in step S2710. Then, the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power recovery is normal is set.

Also, because the setting change prohibition flag is OFF, step S2714 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Furthermore, because it is reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44 becomes "Yes", and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped. Therefore, this time, the process does not transition to the setting change state. After that, steps S2744 to S2747 are processed, and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 46), where medals can be bet. At this time, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 is "0" as described above, so the setting value becomes "1".

In this embodiment, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in step S2771 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47. Furthermore, RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is executed in step S2776 of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48. Then, in the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 49, steps S2785 to S2794 are executed to calculate RWM checksum data (complement data), and the calculated RWM checksum data is stored at address "F2A0(H)" of RWM 53 in step S2795.

As mentioned above, this RWM checksum data is a value that returns "0" when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area.

In this embodiment, even if a recoverable error occurs and the game enters a recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and the game progress is stopped), the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed as described above. Therefore, even if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off) in the recoverable error state, the power down process (I_POWER_DOWN) can be executed.
On the other hand, if an irrecoverable error occurs and the game enters an irrecoverable error state (a state in which the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the irrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed and the game progress is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited as described above. Therefore, if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off) in the irrecoverable error state, the power down processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed.

In this way, if the power is turned off during an irrecoverable error state, by not executing the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN), when the power is turned on thereafter, in the program start processing (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 41, it is determined in step S2708 that there is a power-off recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, simply turning the power on and off will not cause the unrecoverable error state to occur again.
When an unrecoverable error state occurs, the power supply is turned off once, and an operation to transition to a setting change state (turning the power supply on with the setting key switch 152 on) is not performed, making it impossible to return to a state in which medals can be bet (a state in which the game can be played).

Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, even if the power is turned off and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, step S2708 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 determines that there is a power outage recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. As a result, the process does not proceed to the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46), and the machine cannot be restored to a state where medals can be bet (a state where play can proceed).

Furthermore, even if a recoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state is reached (the error detection flag is turned on and game progress is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, but if an irrecoverable error occurs and a non-recoverable error state is reached (the non-recoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 43 or the non-recoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 51 is executed and game progress is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited.
Furthermore, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) that controls the lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73), and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) that controls the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) are executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR).

For this reason, in a recoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, and so LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Therefore, even in a recoverable error state, error information can be displayed on the number of wins display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) using LED display control (I_LED_OUT), and various ratios related to information type and game results can be displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6-9) using ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

On the other hand, in an unrecoverable error state, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) are not executed either.
Therefore, during an unrecoverable error state, error information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of Figure 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) of Figure 51 described above.

Also, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51, the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off ("00000000(B)").
As a result, during the unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) will remain "00000000 (B)", and digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed.
Digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off, which is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall staff) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are turned off ("00000000(B)"), so that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain unlit.
However, the display mode of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 in an unrecoverable error state is not limited to this.

For example, during an unrecoverable error state, the management information display LED 74 may display "8" in each of digits 6 to 9. In other words, the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "8888."
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and corresponds to FIG.
In FIG. 58, steps that differ from those in FIG. 51 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 51 are given the same step numbers.
The following mainly describes the differences from FIG.

In the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in FIG. 58, after step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506, where the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 6 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000001(B)" (data in which only the digit 6 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111(B)" (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1").

Next, proceeding to step S1507, the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LED from flickering. The length of the wait period depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to approximately 0.1 ms, for example. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., 255) is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted using the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes 0, it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, and proceed to the next step, S1508.

In step S1508, the main control board 50 turns off ("00000000(B)") the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7. This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1509, where the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LEDs from flickering. This process is performed to ensure that the LEDs are turned off after the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are turned off.

Proceeding to the next step S1510, the main control board 50 outputs data from output ports 6 and 7 to display "8" in digit 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000010(B)" (data in which only the digit 7 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111(B)" (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1").
Steps S1511 to S1513 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, in step S1514, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 8 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000100(B)" (data in which only the digit 8 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111(B)" (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1").
Steps S1515 to S1517 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, in step S1518, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 9 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000(B)" (data in which only the digit 9 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111(B)" (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1").
Steps S1519 to S1521 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509. After the process of step S1521 is executed, the process returns to step S1497.

In this way, during an unrecoverable error state, the management information display LED 74 may display "8" in digits 6 to 9.
The display of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all becoming "8" is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall staff) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

The display on the management information display LED 74 may be "---" instead of "8888." That is, only the segments G of digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Also, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be "...." In other words, only the segments P of digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Furthermore, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be "8.8.8.8." In other words, as shown in Figure 30(a) or (c), all segments of digits 6 to 9 (segments A to G and P) may be lit.

(2) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are turned off ("00000000(B)"), so that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain unlit.
However, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 51, the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 may be maintained rather than being turned off ("00000000(B)"). In this case, the display of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 will be as follows:

As mentioned above, digits 6 through 9 of the control information display LED 74 dynamically light up in cycles of four interrupts. Therefore, for example, when digits 6 through 9 of the control information display LED 74 display "7P.65," digit 9 "5," digit 8 "6," digit 7 "P.", and digit 6 "7" light up in sequence. Suppose, for example, that an unrecoverable error state occurs when digits 6 through 8 of the control information display LED 74 are off and digit 9 is lit with a "5" displayed. In this case, the interrupt process (I_INTR) stops while signals (digit signals and segment signals) that turn off digits 6 through 8 and light up digit 9 with a "5" are being output from output ports 6 and 7.

Specifically, when output port 6 outputs "00001000(B)" (digit 9 signal is "1" and the others are "0") and output port 7 outputs "01101101(B)" (segment 2G, 2F, 2D, 2C, and 2A signals are "1" and the others are "0"), the interrupt process (I_INTR) stops, and thereafter the signals (data) output from output ports 6 and 7 are no longer rewritten.
Therefore, until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed, the output of signals (digit signals and segment signals) from output ports 6 and 7 is maintained, so digits 6 to 8 remain unlit and digit 9 remains lit and displays "5".

Similarly, for example, assume that an unrecoverable error state has occurred when digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is lit to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 are off.
In this case, until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed, the signals (digit signal and segment signal) that cause digit 6 to light up and digits 7 to 9 to turn off will continue to be output from output ports 6 and 7, so digit 6 will light up and digits 7 to 9 will remain off.

Also, for example, suppose that unrecoverable error processing 2 is executed by the second program while digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is lit with "7" and digits 7 to 9 are unlit. Then, suppose that unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program maintains the output of output ports 6 and 7 without turning them off. In this case, as described above, signals (digit signals and segment signals) that illuminate digit 6 and turn off digits 7 to 9 continue to be output from output ports 6 and 7, so digit 6 remains lit with "7" and digits 7 to 9 remain unlit.

If the power is turned off in this state, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will go out. If the power is then turned on with the setting key switch 152 off, step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 will answer "Yes," and the process will proceed to step S2801, where the first program will execute unrecoverable error processing. In this case, the process will not proceed to the initialization process of step S2731, and the data in RWM 53 will remain uninitialized. Therefore, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at "F297(H")) will also remain uninitialized.

Now, let's say that during the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is enabled and not prohibited. In this case, the lighting of the management information display LED 74 is controlled by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR), so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 first display the ratio information immediately before the unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program is executed, i.e., "7P.65" (instruction-included reel ratio, ratio display number "1").

Also, assume that immediately before unrecoverable error processing 2 is executed by the second program, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 display "7P.65" for, for example, 2000 ms. In this case, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed during unrecoverable error processing by the first program, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 display "7P.65" for 4791.84 ms - 2000 ms = 2791.84 ms. Thereafter, display items from ratio display number "2" onwards are displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).

In this way, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed during the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the display starts (resumes) from the continuation of the ratio information immediately before the unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program is executed.
In contrast, if the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited during the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) is also not executed, and digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.

As mentioned above, for the instructed feature ratio, consecutive feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio, the identification segment will flash when the total number of plays is less than 175,000. For the consecutive feature ratio (6,000 plays) and feature ratio (6,000 plays), the identification segment will flash when the total number of plays is less than 6,000. Furthermore, for the instructed feature ratio, feature ratio (cumulative), and feature ratio (6,000 plays), the ratio segment will flash when the displayed value is 70 or greater. For the consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) and consecutive feature ratio (6,000 plays), the ratio segment will flash when the displayed value is 60 or greater. For the feature etc. state ratio, the ratio segment will flash when the displayed value is 50 or greater. Furthermore, when flashing, the light will alternate between turning on and off approximately every 0.3 seconds.

For this reason, it may happen that all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are turned off. Then, for example, suppose that an unrecoverable error state occurs when all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are turned off, that is, when the outputs from output ports 6 and 7 are "00000000 (B)" (off).
In this case, the output from output ports 6 and 7 will remain "00000000 (B)" (off) until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed, so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off.

The above display mode of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 is a display mode specific to an irrecoverable error state, which allows the manager (hall staff) to be notified that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

(3) In the above embodiment, provided that the power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the RWM 53 initialization process is executed to the same extent when the power is turned on (to transition to the setting change state) with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.

However, without being limited to this, the initialization range of the RWM 53 may be different when the power is turned on (when transitioning to the setting change state) under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, and when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
For example, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 may be executed within the same range as at the end of the favorable period.
Specifically, initialization processing is performed for a predetermined range of the usage area of RWM53 where data related to advantageous zones is stored (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 33), and other ranges (for example, credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" in Figure 33 and bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)" in Figure 33, etc.) can be maintained without initialization.
In any case, it is preferable to set the initialization range when the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on to be narrower than the initialization range when transitioning to the setting change state.

(4) In the above embodiment, in step S458 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Fig. 47, it is determined whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811. However, this is not limited to this.
For example, it may be determined whether the set value is within the normal range immediately after it is determined in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) that the start switch 41 has been turned on (operated).

(5) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned off while the device is in the setting change state, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the device transitions to a state in which medals can be bet without transitioning to the setting change state.
However, this is not limiting, and for example, if the power is turned off while the device is in the setting change state, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and then the power is turned on, an unrecoverable error state may occur.

Specifically, for example, a setting change state flag is set, and when the setting change state is entered, the setting change state flag is set in a specified memory area of the RWM 53, and when the conditions for terminating the setting change state are met, the setting change state flag is cleared.
If the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it is determined in step S2714 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41 whether the setting change state flag is on. If it is determined that the setting change state flag is on, the process proceeds to unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, where an unrecoverable error state is entered.
This makes it possible to prevent the set value from being set even though an operation to confirm the set value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) has not been performed.

(6) In the above embodiment, any one of values "0(D)" to "5(D)" is stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. In other words, the setting value data is managed as "0(D)" to "5(D)."
However, without being limited to this, any one of values "1(D)" to "6(D)" may be stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. In other words, the setting value data may be managed as "1(D)" to "6(D)."

When transitioning to the setting change state, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 is cleared (to "0"), and when an operation to confirm the setting value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) is performed, any one of values "1(D)" to "6(D)" may be stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53.
In this case, if the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it may be determined in step S458 of FIG. 47 that the setting value is not within the normal range (a setting value error has occurred), and the process may proceed to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811, resulting in an unrecoverable error state.

(7) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals) are output from output port 3, segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals) are output from output port 4, digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 6, and segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals) are output from output port 7.
When digits 1 to 5 were to be lit, a digit signal was output from output port 3, and a segment 1 signal was output from output port 4. When digits 6 to 9 were to be lit, a digit signal was output from output port 6, and a segment 2 signal was output from output port 7. In other words, different output ports were used for digits 1 to 5, whose lighting was controlled by a program in the used area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose lighting was controlled by a program outside the used area (second program).

However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the output port may be shared between digits 1 to 5, whose lighting is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose lighting is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a modified example of the output port in the third embodiment.
59, the segment signals for digits 1 to 9 (segment A to P signals) may be output from output port 3. Also, the digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals) may be output from output port 2, and the digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals) may be output from output port 4.
In this case, during an unrecoverable error state, the output of output port 4 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) can be turned off ("00000000(B)"), thereby keeping all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 off.

(8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) for outputting digit 1 signals through digit 5 signals is provided in the usage area of RWM 53, and LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) for outputting digit 6 signals through digit 9 signals is provided outside the usage area of RWM 53. In other words, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 through 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 through 9 are provided separately and independently. However, this is not limited to this.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a modified example of the LED display counter in the third embodiment.
60, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) with 5 interrupts per cycle may be provided in the usage area of the RWM 53, and based on the value of this LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1), digit 1 signals to digit 5 signals may be output, as well as digit 6 signals to digit 9 signals. In other words, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 may be combined into one counter.

In this case, in step S1471 of the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in FIG. 56, the value of LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is obtained and stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether or not a ratio display request has been made. Specifically, an AND operation is performed on the value of LED display counter 1 stored in the D register and "11110000(B)." If the result of this AND operation is "0," it is determined that a ratio display request has been made, and the process proceeds to step S1475. If the result of this AND operation is not "0," it is determined that a ratio display request has not been made, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Here, if the value of LED display counter 1 is "00001000(B)", "00000100(B)", "00000010(B)", or "00000001(B)", the AND operation result will be "0", so it is determined that there is a request for ratio display and the process proceeds to step S1475.
On the other hand, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000(B)," the AND operation result is not "0," so it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In this case, the output of output ports 6 and 7 is maintained, so the display mode of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 is the same as the display mode during the previous interrupt processing. For example, if digit 6 was lit to display "7" during the previous interrupt processing, digit 6 will also be lit to display "7" during the current interrupt processing.

Note that if it is determined in step S1472 that there is no request for ratio display, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for signals for digits 6 to 9) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) may be turned off ("00000000(B)"), thereby turning off all digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74.

(9) For example, provided that the power is restored normally (not abnormally) after a power outage, the initialization range of the RWM 53 may be different when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.
Specifically, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, for example, addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range of the RWM 53. In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared).

In contrast, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set to, for example, the entire range of the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)", and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. In this case, addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared), but the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" is initialized (cleared). In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) becomes "0", so the setting value becomes "1". As a result, the setting value can be changed to "1" simply by transitioning to the setting change state.

In addition, it is possible to transition to the setting change state in both cases when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.

(10) In the above embodiment, the initialization range of RWM53 for normal power recovery after power failure is set to addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.
However, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above range, and can be set appropriately according to the specifications of the slot machine 10.

For example, the initialization range of the RWM 53 can be varied depending on the content of the action status flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53 in FIG.
Specifically, for example, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030(H)" is "1" and 1BB is in operation, the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of address "F030(H)" can be excluded from the initialization range of RWM53.
In contrast, when the D2 bit of the operating status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030(H)" is "0" and 1BB is not in operation, the initialization range of RWM53 can include the operating status flag (_FL_ACTION) of address "F030(H)".

(11) In the above embodiment, interrupt processing is prohibited in step S1490 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 43. However, this is not limiting, and for example, interrupt processing does not have to be prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
Specifically, when the answer is "Yes" in step S2708 or S2715 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, interrupt processing does not need to be prohibited.

Furthermore, even during execution of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 47 may be executable, and the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of step S2821 and the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) of step S2221 may be executable.
This makes it possible to control the lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73) and digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) even while the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed.

(12) In the above embodiment, if an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed (power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on) and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, if the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), an operation to transition to the setting change state is then performed, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the control information display LED 74 will start displaying the role ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

However, this is not limited to this. For example, when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) and it is determined that the power has returned to normal after being turned off, the management information display LED 74 may first display specific information different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then start displaying from the first display item of various ratio information, the instructed game device ratio data (ratio display number "1").
This makes it possible to check whether all segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit, making it possible to check whether any of the segments are faulty or whether any of the segment signal lines are broken.
Similarly, when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the power recovery from power outage, the management information display LED 74 may first display specific information that is different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then start displaying from the instruction-included reel ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

(13) For example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on, or when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 also turned on, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) can first display specific information different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8."

Digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) then display the on/off status of various switches when the power is turned on, and information indicating whether the power-off recovery is determined to be normal or abnormal. This makes it possible to check whether all segments of digits 6-9 are lit when the power is turned on, making it possible to check whether any segments are faulty or whether any segment signal lines are broken.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch 153 on, or when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 also on, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) will display specific information that is different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." However, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also off, the management information display LED 74 does not have to display the above specific information.

(14) In the above embodiment, an operation to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed, and when it is determined that the power has returned to normal after being turned off, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at "F297 (H)") is initialized.
However, this is not limited to this, and when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state and it is determined that the power has returned to normal after being turned off, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at "F297 (H)") may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, suppose the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state, and it is determined that the power has returned to normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the control information display LED 74 will first display the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off, i.e., the role ratio (cumulative) data.

Also, assume that immediately before the power is turned off, the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") for, for example, "1000 ms." In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the role ratio (cumulative) data is displayed on the control information display LED 74 for "4791.84 ms" - "1000 ms" = "3791.84 ms." After that, the display items from ratio display number "6" onwards are displayed sequentially on the control information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state, the power outage recovery is determined to be normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the display will begin (resume) from the continuation of the ratio information from just before the power was turned off.

(15) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power has returned to normal after being turned off, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at "F297 (H)") is initialized.
However, this is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power has returned to normal after being turned off, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at "F297 (H)") may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, suppose the power is turned off when the consecutive feature ratio (6000 plays) data (ratio display number "2") is displayed on the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power has returned to normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the control information display LED 74 will first display the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off, i.e., the consecutive feature ratio (6000 plays) data.

Also, assume that immediately before the power is turned off, the continuous feature ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2") is displayed for, for example, "3000 ms" on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the continuous feature ratio (6000 games) data is displayed on the management information display LED 74 for "4791.84 ms" - "3000 ms" = "1791.84 ms." Thereafter, the display items from ratio display number "3" onwards are displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and the power recovery is determined to be normal and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the display will start (restart) from the continuation of the ratio information from just before the power was turned off.

(16) In the above embodiment, the setting was set to be unchangeable during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during game play), including while the reel 31 was rotating, and the setting unchangeable flag was turned on during this period.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to allow the settings to be changed at all times without providing a period during which the settings cannot be changed, and therefore without providing a setting change prohibition flag.

(17) In the above embodiment, a determination was made as to whether or not a power outage had occurred in step S2770 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47. If it was determined that a power outage had occurred, the process proceeded to the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771. If it was determined that a power outage had not occurred, the process skipped the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 and proceeded to step S454.
However, this is not limiting, and for example, when a power outage is detected, the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) may not be executed during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 47, and an interrupt processing other than the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 47 may be executed, and the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) may be executed during this other interrupt processing.
In this case, when a power outage is detected during execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 47, another interrupt processing is not started while the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is being executed, but is started after the interrupt processing (I_INTR) has finished, and the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed during this other interrupt processing.

(18) In the above embodiment, a slot machine 10 was used as an example of a gaming machine, but this is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to Parrot, which uses gaming balls as gaming media, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines.

Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment relates to interrupt processing and an interrupt disabled period. Note that "interrupt (processing)" is also called "timer interrupt (processing)", but will be simply called "interrupt (processing)" in the following description.
In addition, in the interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, an interrupt disable period may be set. As explained in the third embodiment, interrupt processing includes maskable interrupts (INT) that can be disabled and non-maskable interrupts (NMI) that cannot be disabled, but the "interrupt" in the fourth embodiment refers to a "maskable interrupt" for which an interrupt disable period can be set. Note that when referring to a "non-maskable interrupt", the term "interrupt" is not abbreviated and it is referred to as a "non-maskable interrupt".
The "interrupt disabled period" is also called an "interrupt disabled section" or an "interrupt disabled state." Similarly, the "interrupt enabled period" is also called an "interrupt enabled section" or an "interrupt enabled state."
Furthermore, in the present specification and claims, the term "when" is used as a general term that includes any of "before doing ('before' includes 'immediately before'),""at the same time as doing," and "after ('after' includes 'immediately after')." Specifically, for example, "when starting interrupt processing" means "before (immediately before) starting interrupt processing,""at the same time as starting interrupt processing," and "after (immediately after) starting interrupt processing."

The information processing executed by the gaming machine 10 includes main processing (Figure 46), which is executed once per game, and interrupt processing (Figure 66, described below), which suspends the main processing during execution of the main processing and executes a temporary exit from the main processing. The interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Note that in this embodiment, the system is configured to transition to the main processing after the initialization processing is completed (see Figure 65), but the processing that occurs before the start of a game, such as program start processing (Figure 63), power recovery processing (Figure 64), and initialization processing (Figure 65), may also be included in the concept of main processing.

61 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit 500 for executing interrupt processing, etc. The timer circuit 500 is built into the main chip (MPU (main CPU 55)) of the one-chip microprocessor.
The timer circuit 500 includes a PTC 8-bit counter (hereinafter simply referred to as the "8-bit counter") 501, a PTC prescaler register (also referred to as the "PTC prescaler setting register", hereinafter simply referred to as the "prescaler register") 502, a PTC counter setting register (also referred to as the "PTC count value setting register", hereinafter simply referred to as the "counter setting register") 503, and a PTC interrupt flag (hereinafter simply referred to as the "interrupt flag") 504.

The 8-bit counter 501 is an 8-bit (1 byte) counter used to measure the timing of interrupt processing. When the power is turned on (the power supply (switch) is turned on), the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0." The timing at which the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" is, for example, before or at the same time as the program starts, as shown in Figure 63, which will be described later.

The prescaler register 502 is a built-in register that can set a setting value to select the clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501. Specifically, it is a built-in register that can set how much the system clock (SCK) is divided (at what rate) to supply to the 8-bit counter 501. For example, when the system clock is "16" MHZ, if "143" is set in the prescaler register 502,
16 (MHZ) / 143 = approximately "111.8881" KHZ
becomes the clock source for the 8-bit counter 501 .
The system clock (SCK) is a clock supplied to the main chip (MPU), and various programs (commands) can be executed based on the system clock.

The counter setting register 503 is a built-in register that can set the count value of the 8-bit counter 501. Specifically, it is a built-in register that can set the number of clocks that must be input from the prescaler register 502 before an interrupt process is executed. For example, as described above, the clock source of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to approximately "111.8881" KHZ, and the 8-bit counter 501 times out when the clock of approximately "111.8881" KHZ is input "125" times.
in this case,
125/111.8881 (KHz) = approximately 1.117 ms
Interrupt processing can be executed at this cycle.
After the value is set in the counter setting register 503, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 starts to be updated (for example, by subtracting or adding "1") based on the clock from the prescaler register 502.
The value of the prescaler register 502 may be stored before the program (instruction) that stores the value of the counter setting register 503 .

After power is turned on, the initial value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0." When, for example, "125" is written to the counter setting register 503, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from "0" to "125," and updating of the 8-bit counter 501 begins at the point when the value reaches "125." As described above, "1" is subtracted approximately every "111.8881" KHZ. When the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated while it is "1," it becomes "125."
Therefore,
"0" (when power is turned on) → "125" → "124" → ... → "2" → "1" → "125" → "124" → ...
and repeats.
In other words, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" when the power is turned on, but does not become "0" at other times, and cycles between "125" and "1".

Furthermore, the time when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (either immediately before the update or at the moment of the update) corresponds to the time when the 8-bit counter 501 times out.
The time it takes for the value of the 8-bit counter 501 to change from "125" to "1" is approximately "1.117" ms as mentioned above, which is the interrupt processing period (interrupt period; "Tc" in FIG. 71, which will be described later).

Also, for example, if the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "n" (n = any value between "1" and "125"), when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" as described above.
In this way, 8-bit counter 501 cycles between "125" and "1" while power is on and never goes back to "0." It only goes back to "0" when power is turned off and then turned on again.
On the other hand, even if the power is turned off when the value of 8-bit counter 501 is any value between "125" and "1," the initial value of 8-bit counter 501 will be "0" the next time the power is turned on. In this way, the time from when the power is turned on until the 8-bit counter 501 first times out can be kept constant, and the time until the first time out can be made longer compared to when the count value of 8-bit counter 501 is stored when the power is turned off.

On the other hand, a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is provided with a storage area for a timer.
A timer for measuring the minimum time of one game, 4.1 seconds.
a timer for determining an error;
These timer values are backed up when the power is turned off, are maintained even while the power is off, and return to the value before the power is turned on again.
In this way, the timer value provided in the RWM 53 is configured to be able to maintain the value before power is turned off, whereas the value of the 8-bit counter 501 always becomes "0" when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, even if the main processing or interrupt processing goes out of control or the processing takes an unexpected amount of time, the 8-bit counter 501 will not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1".
Furthermore, even during interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1".
Furthermore, even during an interrupt disabled period, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1".

At least one interrupt disable period is provided during the main processing. For example, this can be the period between step S296 and step S300 in Figure 46. Note that the interrupt disable period is for the purpose of disabling interrupt processing during the ratio setting process in step S298.
Interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the ratio set processing because the ratio set processing is a process that uses a program stored outside the usage area, and if an interrupt processing occurs while a program outside the usage area is being executed in the main processing, the program processing within the usage area and the program processing outside the usage area will be mixed (running simultaneously in parallel), making the processing complicated.

Although not shown, examples of other interrupt prohibitions besides those mentioned above include:
a) When a control command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, if the control command is written to the control command buffer or the write pointer of the control command is updated, interrupt processing is prohibited before and after these processes.
b) When the blocker signal is turned on (medal acceptance permitted state) and the blocker state is turned on (insertion display LED is lit), if interrupt processing is prohibited before and after that,
c) When the blocker signal is turned off (medal acceptance refusal state) and the blocker state is turned off (insertion display LED is turned off), if interrupt processing is prohibited before and after that,
d) When executing a process for setting the number of times a medal bet signal is output, if interrupt processes are prohibited before and after the process,
e) When executing a process for setting the number of times a medal payout signal is output, interrupt processing may be prohibited before and after that process.

The above a) is for preventing malfunctions (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) caused by an interrupt process being executed during the write process of a control command.
Furthermore, the above b) and c) are intended to prevent an inconsistency that occurs when an interrupt occurs between the process of turning the blocker signal on or off and the process of turning the blocker state on or off, resulting in one being on and the other being off, for example, outputting on to the blocker but not outputting on to the input indicator LED (turning it off).
Furthermore, the above d) and e) are intended to prevent an interrupt process from being executed during the process of setting a medal bet signal or a medal payout signal, thereby preventing the medal bet signal or the medal payout signal from being updated.

The interrupt flag 504 is a flag that indicates that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
The interrupt flag 504 is set (turned on) when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (when the 8-bit counter 501 times out). The timing at which the set interrupt flag 504 is released (turned off) is arbitrary. For example, the timing at which the interrupt flag 504 is released (turned off) may be as follows:
a) When executing interrupt processing, or b) When setting predetermined information (hereinafter simply referred to as "information") indicating that an interrupt request notification signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "interrupt request signal") has been generated in an interrupt wait monitor register 301 (described later).

The interrupt wait monitor register 301 is one of the MPU's built-in registers that can store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 has been set. The interrupt flag 504 is set when the 8-bit counter 501 times out. When the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
In the following, "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in a specified bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301" will simply be referred to as "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301."
An interrupt request signal is then output to the main CPU 55 via the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and interrupt processing becomes executable. Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared when the main CPU 55 accepts the interrupt request (when the interrupt processing is executed).

Here, the "situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is defined as follows:
a) A situation in which an interrupt request is made b) A situation in which a specific flag related to an interrupt request is turned on ("1") c) A situation in which a specific flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is turned on ("1")
Similarly, "a situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is defined as follows:
a) A situation where there is no interrupt request b) A situation where a specific flag related to an interrupt request is off ("0") c) A situation where a specific flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is off ("0").

If the 8-bit counter 501 times out again while the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, an interrupt request signal based on the 8-bit counter 501 timing out will be output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301 again, but the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 will not be re-saved based on this interrupt request signal (in this case, the interrupt request signal will be ignored).

When the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal, interrupt processing is not initiated during an interrupt disable period. However, the state in which the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is maintained. Even in this state, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to cycle without interruption. Then, after approximately 1.117 ms has elapsed and the 8-bit counter 501 times out again, if the interrupt disable period is still in progress, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 will still store information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal. Here, processing to set the interrupt flag 504 may be executed regardless of whether the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal. Alternatively, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, it may be determined whether or not information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the process for setting the interrupt flag 504 may not be executed, and if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the process for setting the interrupt flag 504 may be executed.
In the following description, it is assumed that when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, processing to set the interrupt flag 504 is executed regardless of whether or not the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

Furthermore, if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 when the interrupt disable period ends, interrupt processing is started and the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. As a result, when interrupt processing is started, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 will no longer store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
Therefore, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during the period in which the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the number of interrupt processes executed based on the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the end of the interrupt prohibition period is limited to "1".
The 8-bit counter 501 continues to cycle through the values "m" to "1" even during interrupt processing.

61, the one-chip microprocessor includes an interrupt disable flag 302. The interrupt disable flag 302 in the fourth embodiment corresponds to the IFF1 register.
The IFF1 register is a register for determining whether a maskable interrupt is enabled or disabled, and the IFF2 register is a register used to restore the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt, or to restore the IFF2 register by the RETEX instruction after the CALLEX instruction is executed.

When a (maskable) interrupt process is executed, both the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are set to "0" to switch from an interrupt enabled state to an interrupt disabled state. When the IFF1 register is "0", this indicates that the interrupt is disabled. Then, when the interrupt process ends, an instruction to enable interrupts (EI instruction) is executed just before the end of the interrupt process to switch from an interrupt disabled state to an interrupt enabled state, and both the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are set to "1". When the IFF1 register is "1", this indicates that the interrupt is enabled.

The interrupt disabled period is first set in the main processing, for example, between step S296 and step S300 in FIG.
Secondly, the interrupt disable period is set during execution of interrupt processing. For example, as shown in Fig. 66 (to be described later), when executing interrupt processing, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "0". As described above, this is because overlapping interrupts are disabled during interrupt processing.

If the IFF1 register is "1" when information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the main CPU 55 will accept the interrupt request signal when the interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55. In other words, interrupt processing is executed.
On the other hand, if the IFF1 register is "0" when the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the main CPU 55 will not accept the interrupt request signal when it is output to the main CPU 55. In other words, interrupt processing will not be executed. In this case, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, and continues to output the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55. Then, when the IFF1 register changes from "0" to "1" (when the interrupt permission period begins), interrupt processing is executed based on the interrupt request signal.
When an interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt request signal, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. In other words, the output of the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55 is stopped.

Next, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register will be explained using a simple program.
62 shows an example of a program for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission. In the figure, (A) and (B) show main processing programs, and (C) shows an interrupt processing program.
In Figure 62A, the "DI" instruction is an instruction for disabling interrupts, and the "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling interrupts.
Furthermore, "AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary programs (commands).
When the "DI" instruction is executed, the values of the IFF1 and IFF2 registers both become "0", and interrupts are disabled.

Thereafter, "AAAA" and "BBBB" of the program are executed, and then when the "EI" instruction is executed, the values of the IFF1 and IFF2 registers both become "1", and an interrupt is permitted.
An example of the program "CCCC" after the "EI" instruction is the "RET" instruction. In this case, an interrupt can be executed after the "RET" instruction is executed (i.e., after "CCCC" is executed). Note that the condition is that information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at least immediately after the "RET" instruction.
As described above, even if the interrupt permission instruction "EI" is executed, the interrupt process is not executed until the next instruction ("CCCC" in this example, e.g., "RET") is executed, so that the instruction following the interrupt permission instruction "EI" can be executed reliably.

In FIG. 62(B), the "CALLEX" instruction is an instruction that disables interrupts and executes a call to a specified address, regardless of whether the state is interrupt enabled or disabled at that time.
The "RETEX" instruction returns the interrupt state to the state before the "CALLEX" instruction and returns ("RET") (returns to the state before "CALLEX"); in other words, it is an instruction that executes a return to the next instruction after "CALLEX" (the program at the return address).

Here, when the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the value of the IFF1 register becomes "0" and the value of the IFF2 register remains unchanged.
Furthermore, when the "RETEX" instruction is executed, the value of the IFF1 register becomes the value of the IFF2 register, and the value of the IFF2 register remains unchanged.
Furthermore, since the "RETEX" instruction includes the "RET" instruction, it becomes possible to execute an interrupt process immediately after the "RETEX" instruction.
For example, if the IFF1 register value is "1" and the IFF2 register value is "1" immediately before the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the "CALLEX" instruction will change the IFF1 register value to "0" and the IFF2 register value to "1." Also, the "RETEX" instruction will change the IFF1 register value to "1" and the IFF2 register value to "1." In this way, by having the IFF2 register, it is possible to restore the IFF1 register value and IFF2 register value to the values they had before the "CALLEX" instruction was executed.

In Figure 62 (C), when executing interrupt processing (maskable interrupt (INT)), both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "0". This causes interrupts (multiple interrupts) to be disabled. Therefore, the "DI" instruction is not required when starting interrupt processing.
When the interrupt processing ends, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the end of the interrupt processing, i.e., immediately before the "RETI" instruction, in order to change from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. This "EI" instruction sets both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value to "1."

When the "RETI" instruction is executed thereafter, the value of the IFF1 register becomes the value of the IFF2 register, as in the "RETEX" instruction, and the value of the IFF2 register remains unchanged.
From the above, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are as follows:
When interrupt processing starts: IFF1 = 0, IFF2 = 0
↓
"EI" instruction: IFF1=1, IFF2=1
↓
"RETI" command: IFF1 = IFF2, IFF2 = maintain.
The system is configured so that interrupt processing can be executed after the "RETI" instruction, thereby preventing overlapping interrupt processing, such as when an interrupt processing is executed immediately after the "EI" instruction, and then another interrupt processing is executed after the "RETI" instruction.

The data retention/clearing due to power on/off in the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), and the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is as follows.
An example of the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is a "timer storage area for measuring 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game." However, the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above-mentioned "timer storage area for measuring 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game," and may be a predetermined timer storage area capable of measuring various predetermined times, such as a "storage area for a standby timer for displaying a game standby display." Furthermore, the predetermined timer storage area may be a 1-byte storage area or a multi-byte storage area.

a) When the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not met When the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not met, the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are all cleared (to "0"). In contrast, the predetermined timer storage area of the RWM 53 is not cleared.
For example, suppose the power is turned off under the condition that the value stored in a predetermined timer storage area of the RWM 53 is "X" and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "Y." In this case, if the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the value stored in the timer storage area is "X" and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is restored to "0."

b) When the power is turned on to transition to the setting change state due to the setting change conditions being met. In this case, not only the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), but also a specified timer memory area of the RWM 53 are cleared (to "0").
Therefore, when the power is turned on, the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are cleared (to "0") regardless of whether the setting change conditions are met (whether or not the setting change state is entered).
On the other hand, the specified timer memory area is not cleared (does not become "0") when the power is turned on and the setting change state does not occur because the setting change conditions are not met, but is cleared (becomes "0") when the power is turned on and the setting change state occurs because the setting change conditions are met.

As explained in the third embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. When the power is turned on in this state, in FIG. 63 described later, it is determined that the door switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2706) and the setting key switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2707), and other predetermined conditions are met, so the process proceeds to initialization processing in step S2863 (FIG. 65 described later). Then, in FIG. 65, the process proceeds to setting change confirmation processing in step S2742 (see FIG. 45; also referred to as setting change confirmation mode, setting change confirmation state, setting change confirmation (processing), etc.).
The satisfaction of the conditions for transitioning to the setting change confirmation process corresponds to the above-mentioned "power-on when transitioning to the setting change state due to the setting change conditions being met."

The above is an example in which the gaming machine is a slot machine 10. In contrast, in the case where the gaming machine is a pinball gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), "satisfying the setting change conditions" corresponds to the door switch (frame open switch) signal being on, the setting change key switch signal being on, and the reset switch being on. In a pinball gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), when it is determined that all three of these conditions are met, the setting change conditions are met and the machine transitions to the setting change state.
In addition, in a pinball game machine (pachinko game machine), when the door switch (frame open switch) signal is on, the setting change key switch signal is on, and the reset switch is off, the setting confirmation condition is met (although the setting change condition is not met), and the machine transitions to the setting confirmation state.

As described above, when the power is turned off, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is not retained (when the power is restored, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0"). This makes it possible to keep constant the time until the first interrupt processing starts after power is turned on. Furthermore, since the update period of the 8-bit counter 501 (8.9375 microseconds) is shorter than the update period of the timer value of the RWM 53 (the period of the interrupt processing, 1.117 ms), the impact of clearing the 8-bit counter 501 on the gaming machine as a whole is minor.
For this reason,
a) A configuration in which the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off is held, and when the power is turned on, the count of the 8-bit counter 501 is restarted from the value when the power was turned off (the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is backed up);
b) A configuration in which the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" when the power is restored (this embodiment)
When compared with the above, the configuration in b) can also recover with an error of within "1" interrupt. Furthermore, the configuration in b) does not require a means for backing up the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off.

Next, the on/off timing of the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF register) will be described with reference to a flowchart.
Figure 63 is a flowchart showing program start (M_PRG_START) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 41 in the third embodiment. In Figure 63, the same steps as in Figure 41 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted. In Figure 63, step numbers that differ from those in Figure 41 are underlined.
When the program start is executed in step S2701, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0", and the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are "0". Since the IFF1 register is "0", interrupts are disabled until the IFF1 register becomes "1".

In step S2861, the counter setting register 503 is set to an initial value "m".
In the fourth embodiment, examples of setting the initial value "m" in the counter setting register 503 will be described, including an example in which the initial value is set before the RWM abnormality determination process is executed and an example in which the initial value is set after the RWM abnormality determination process is executed. Note that the "RWM abnormality determination process" here is a process for determining whether the data stored in the RWM 53 before power-off is normal or not, and corresponds to the processes of steps S2708, S2712, and S2715. Step S2861 in FIG. 63 is an example in which the initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 before the RWM abnormality determination process is executed.
As described above, the initial value "m" is, for example, "125." When the initial value is set in the counter setting register 503, the 8-bit counter 501 starts updating the count value and continues to update the count value until the power is turned off.
As described above, when the power is turned on and the program starts, interrupts are initially disabled, and if an initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 before an RWM abnormality is determined, the 8-bit counter 501 starts updating based on that value.

Fig. 64 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) (step S2862 in Fig. 63) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 42 in the third embodiment. In Fig. 64, the same steps as in Fig. 42 are assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted. In Fig. 64, step numbers that differ from those in Fig. 42 are underlined.
The power restoration process in FIG. 64 shows an example in which the counter setting register 503 is set after determining that an RWM abnormality has occurred.
In this example, after step S2724, the process proceeds to step S2871, where the counter setting register 503 is set to an initial value "m".

When an initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 in step S2861 of Fig. 63 (when the counter setting register 503 is set before an RWM abnormality is determined), the processing of step S2871 of Fig. 64 is not performed. On the other hand, when step S2861 of Fig. 63 is not performed (when the counter setting register 503 is set after an RWM abnormality is determined), if the processing does not proceed to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2863 of Fig. 63, an initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503 in step S2871 of Fig. 64.
After step S2871, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt process (FIG. 66, described later) that was performed immediately before the power was turned off. The power-off process is executed in the interrupt process (step S2771 in FIG. 66), and when the power is turned off, the return address of the interrupt process at that time is stored. After the power restoration process in FIG. 64, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt process, and the continuation of the interrupt process is executed. In step S2892 of the interrupt process (FIG. 66), the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are set to "1," and the interrupt is enabled.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating before an RWM abnormality is determined, the 8-bit counter 501 can be timed out earlier (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301) than when the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating after an RWM abnormality is determined, so that interrupt processing can be executed without delay when an interrupt enable instruction (EI instruction) is executed after an RWM abnormality is determined.
On the other hand, if the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating after an RWM abnormality is determined, even if the IFF1 register becomes "1" due to noise or the like before the RWM abnormality is determined, or even if a malfunction occurs in which the IFF1 register becomes "1" when the power is turned on (a malfunction resulting in an unintended interrupt enabled state), the 8-bit counter 501 has not timed out before the RWM abnormality is determined (information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301), so interrupt processing will not be executed before the RWM abnormality is determined. In other words, it is possible to prevent the RWM data from being changed by interrupt processing before the RWM abnormality is determined compared to before the power was turned off. This makes it possible to accurately determine an RWM abnormality.

Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) (step S2863 in Figure 63) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 44 in the third embodiment. In Figure 65, the same steps as in Figure 44 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted. In Figure 65, step numbers that differ from those in Figure 44 are underlined.
In FIG. 63, if the determination in step S2712 is "Yes", or if the determination in step S2714 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the initialization process in FIG.
In this initialization process, after the AF register is restored in step S2737, the counter setting register is set in step S2881. This process is an example of executing the counter setting register after determining an RWM abnormality, and is an example of executing the counter setting register when the process proceeds to the initialization process (without proceeding to the power restoration process).

In step S2740, a setting command set process is executed. This process stores a control command in the control command buffer in order to send a control command to the sub-control board 80 to start the setting change confirmation process (step S2742). As described above, interrupt processing is inhibited before writing the control command to the control command buffer or updating the control command write pointer, and is permitted after these processes are completed.
Therefore, in step S2740,
(1) DI (IFF1=0, IFF2=0)
(2) Actual setting command set (processing for writing control commands to the control command buffer, updating the write pointer for the control commands, etc.)
(3) EI (IFF1=1, IFF2=1)
Each process (instruction) is executed.
As described above, when the program proceeds from the start of the program (FIG. 63) to the initialization process (FIG. 65), the interrupts are enabled by the "EI" command in the set command set in step S2740. In this way, the state is changed from the interrupts disabled state to the interrupts enabled state by using the process of executing the interrupt disable command (DI) and the interrupt enable command (EI) before and after the process.

The setting command set in step S2746 is a process that sends an end command for the setting change confirmation process to the sub-control board 80, and similar to step S2740, executes the "DI" command and the "EI" command at the beginning and end of the process, respectively.

As described above, when a value is written to the counter setting register 503 after an RWM abnormality determination is made, it is possible to prevent interrupt processing from starting due to a malfunction or other reason while the RWM abnormality determination is being made. Note that when interrupt processing is started, the RWM data may be updated.

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 47 of the third embodiment. In Figure 66, the same steps as in Figure 47 are assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted. In Figure 66, step numbers that differ from those in Figure 47 are underlined.
When interrupt processing starts, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "0," thereby setting up an interrupt disabled state (a state in which multiple interrupts are disabled).
In step S452 of FIG. 47, an initial process including prohibiting duplicated interrupts is executed, but in the fourth embodiment, a register value saving process is executed in step S2891.

After the register values are restored in step S469, the "EI" instruction is executed in step S2892, which sets the IFF1 and IFF2 registers to "1" and enables interrupts.
Furthermore, in the final step S2893, the value of the IFF1 register becomes the value of the IFF2 register by the "RETI" instruction, which is equivalent to a return instruction. The value of the IFF2 register is also maintained.
As described above, the "EI" instruction in step S2892 sets the interrupt enabled state, but the interrupt process is configured to be executable after the "RETI" instruction in the next step S2893.
If the interrupt wait monitor register 301 does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" instruction is completed, the program resumes from the main processing program (return address) before the interrupt processing was executed. On the other hand, if the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" instruction is completed, the interrupt processing is executed again.

Next, the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing will be explained using a time chart.
67 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. Fig. 67 shows an example in which there is no interrupt disabled period in the main processing.
67, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0" when the power is turned on, but the counter value "m" is set by the counter setting register set process described above. In the above example, the counter value "m" is "125." Then, as in the above example, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is decremented by "1" at a clock of approximately "111.8881" KHZ (every "8.9375" microseconds).

When the value of 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1", it returns to "m". The time when it is updated from "1" to "m"("T1" in the figure) is the "timeout" of 8-bit counter 501, and when the timeout occurs, interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in interrupt wait monitor register 301. In the figure, the OFF state of interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored, and the ON state of interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored (the same applies to the following Figures 68 to 75).
When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is not set (interrupt permitted state), interrupt processing is started.
Note that even at the moment when information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, some processing (instruction) is being executed in the main processing, and interrupt processing begins when that processing (instruction) is completed. In other words, actual processing in the main processing and interrupt processing do not occur simultaneously in parallel. The example in Figure 67 shows an example in which, after information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", interrupt processing begins at timing "T2".

Furthermore, when interrupt processing is started, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. This corresponds to "IFF1=0, IFF2=0" shown to the right of step S2890 in FIG. 66. Then, when the interrupt processing is ended, the interrupt disable flag 302 is released from the set state. This processing corresponds to the processing in step S2892 in FIG. 66 (IFF1=1, IFF2=1).
In the following description, unless otherwise specified, "the interrupt disable flag 302 is set" means that at least IFF1 becomes "1" (IFF2 may be "0" or "1"). Also, "the interrupt disable flag 302 is released from the set state" or "the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set" means that at least IFF1 becomes "0" (is "0") (IFF2 may be "0" or "1").

68 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. Fig. 68 shows an example in which there is an interrupt disabled period in the main processing.
In Fig. 68, timing "T0", which is the start of the interrupt disabled period, corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction shown in Fig. 62. Furthermore, timing "T3", which is the end of the interrupt disabled period, corresponds to the "EI" instruction or the "RETEX" instruction shown in Fig. 62. Similarly, in Fig. 69 and onwards, the start of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction, and the end of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "EI" instruction or the "RETEX" instruction.
68 shows an example in which an interrupt inhibit period is set in the main processing at timing "T0", which is the timing before "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out. In this case, too, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, which is the same as the example in FIG.
On the other hand, at the time "T1", the interrupt disable period is still in progress and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set, so the interrupt processing does not start. However, even after that, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

Thereafter, the interrupt disable period ends at timing "T3". As a result, "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set", so interrupt processing can be executed. In the example of Figure 67, an example is shown in which interrupt processing is started at timing "T4".
If timing "T3" corresponds to the "EI" instruction and interrupt processing is started at timing "T4" after execution of one more instruction (for example, the "RET" instruction), a time lag of one instruction occurs between timing "T3" and "T4." In contrast, if a "CALLEX" instruction is executed at timing "T0" and a "RETEX" instruction is executed at timing "T3," interrupt processing is started immediately after execution of the "RETEX" instruction without executing one more instruction, so no time lag occurs between timing "T3" and "T4."
When interrupt processing is started, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. On the other hand, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set to disable overlapping interrupts.

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing an example (1) in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times in relation to the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing.
In this example, after the interrupt disabled period starts at timing "T0," the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1," the interrupt flag 504 is set, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and then the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2." At timing "T2," the interrupt disabled period has not yet ended. As will be described in detail later, when the interrupt period (the timeout period of the 8-bit counter 501) is "Tc" and the designed period of the interrupt processing is "Tp," the designed maximum period of the interrupt disabled period is configured to be less than "Tc - Tp." Therefore, normally, when an interrupt disabled period starts immediately after the end of interrupt processing, the next interrupt period arrives after the end of the interrupt disabled period.

On the other hand, if the main processing goes out of control or if the main processing executed during the interrupt disabled period takes longer than necessary, the 8-bit counter 501 may time out two or more times during the interrupt disabled period, as shown in FIG. 69.
Even in such a case, if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update the count value, and when it times out, it sets the interrupt flag 504. The example in Figure 69 shows an example in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1", the interrupt flag 504 is set, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
After that, even if the interrupt inhibit period continues, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update the count value if it is normal, and when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, an interrupt flag 504 is set, and if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is already stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, that state is maintained.
Next, at timing "T3," the interrupt disable period ends (the interrupt is enabled), and the interrupt process becomes executable. Then, at "T4," the interrupt process starts, and the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. The information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 until the 8-bit counter 501 next times out and the interrupt flag 504 is set.

As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the interrupt disabled period, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated only once. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the interrupt disabled period, the number of timeouts is not counted. After the interrupt disabled period ends, the number of interrupts executed is one based on the fact that the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
In other words, the interrupt process is not executed repeatedly (continuously) "n" times based on the 8-bit counter 501 timing out "n" times (n≧2).
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interrupt process from being repeated multiple times in succession after the end of the interrupt disabled period, which would prevent the main process from being executed during that time.
Whenever the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set, and the interrupt flag 504 is released at a predetermined timing thereafter.

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example (2) in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times in relation to the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing.
In FIG. 70, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", and based on that, interrupt processing is started at timing "A1". However, for example, if any of the processes during the interrupt processing takes an unexpected amount of time or a runaway occurs, the interrupt processing does not end before the 8-bit counter 501 next times out (timing "T2").
This example shows an example in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out twice (at times "T2" and "T3") during interrupt processing that started at timing "A1." When the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2" during interrupt processing, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Furthermore, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out later at timing "T3," the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal remains stored.

Thereafter, when the interrupt processing ends at timing "A2", the next interrupt processing is immediately executed because the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at that time. In other words, the interrupt processing is executed consecutively without executing the main processing. Furthermore, when the interrupt processing is executed, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared (timing "T4").
Next, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T5", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Meanwhile, the interrupt processing that started at timing "A2" has ended before timing "T5". As a result, the next interrupt processing is started based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T5".
As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing is executed only once after the completion of the interrupt processing, based on the fact that information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing will not be executed multiple times consecutively after the completion of the interrupt processing. Furthermore, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the execution of interrupt processing, the number of timeouts is not counted.

Next, the execution timing of the interrupt process will be described.
71 to 75, which will be explained below, show interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 (however, in the example of FIG. 74, interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 3), but interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 are all the same processing (the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 66). To be more specific, in the example of FIG. 71, after interrupt processing 1 (the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 66) is started, interrupt processing 2 (the same processing as interrupt processing 1) is started after "Tc" has elapsed.
FIG. 71 is a time chart showing the interrupt period when there is no interrupt inhibit period in the main processing.
As described above, when the system clock is set to 16 MHZ, the value of the prescaler register 502 is set to 143, and the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to 125, the interrupt period "Tc" is the period from when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from 125 to the next 125, and corresponds to approximately 1.117 ms.

As shown in Fig. 71, if there is no interrupt prohibited period during the period in which interrupt processing is executed four times, the interrupt processing is executed for each interrupt period "Tc". In the example of Fig. 71, the interrupt processing is started at the timings of "A1", "A2", "A3", and "A4". The time "Tp" required for one interrupt processing differs depending on the content of the interrupt processing, but the design value of the interrupt processing time "Tp" is at least shorter than the interrupt period "Tc"(Tp<Tc).
Also, similar to the above example, during the interrupt processing, interrupts are disabled and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

As is clear from FIG. 71, whatever the value of the 8-bit counter 501 may be, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 will not return to "m" when an interrupt process is executed, and the value will continue to be updated at regular intervals even during the interrupt process.
71 shows the period (time) of each interrupt process as if it were a constant (Tp), but in reality, the period of each interrupt process is not necessarily constant. For example, the current interrupt process may take longer than the previous interrupt process.

FIG. 72 shows an example in which an interrupt inhibit period in the main process is set between interrupt processing 1 and interrupt processing 2. In this example, interrupt processing 1 starts at timing "A1," ends at timing "A1'," and then the interrupt inhibit period in the main process starts at timing "T1." The interrupt inhibit period ends (the interrupt is enabled) at timing "T2." Here, timing "T2" occurs before the start timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing 2. As is clear from FIG. 72, if the interrupt inhibit period is "Td," then "Td<Tc-Tp" holds. Thus, even if an interrupt inhibit period is set, the timing of the interrupt processing is not limited by the interrupt inhibit period when it is within the time between the end of one interrupt processing and the start of the next interrupt processing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72, even if an interrupt prohibition period is set after the end of interrupt processing 1 and before the start of interrupt processing 2, interrupt processing 2 can be started when the interrupt period "Tc" arrives after the start of interrupt processing 1.
In particular, when the interrupt inhibition period "Td" that satisfies "Td<Tc-Tp" is the maximum period in design for the interrupt inhibition period, if the interrupt processing ends and the process returns to the main processing, and an interrupt inhibition period is immediately set in the main processing, the start timing of the next interrupt processing can be set to arrive after the end of the interrupt inhibition period.

FIG. 73 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt disabled period.
In this example, the interrupt inhibit period of the main process is set at timing "T1" after the end of interrupt process 1 and before the arrival of timing "A2" of the next interrupt process. Note that timing "A2" is after the elapse of the interrupt period "Tc" from timing "A1" when interrupt process 1 starts.
During the interrupt disable period, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. Therefore, when timing "A2" arrives, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set and interrupt processing cannot be started. In the figure, the two-dot chain line indicates interrupt processing assuming that interrupt processing 2 is started at timing "A2" (although it is not actually started).
On the other hand, just before the timing "A2" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and therefore the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

After that, at timing "T2", when the interrupt disable period ends, the interrupt disable flag 302 is unset. Also, at timing "T2", the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated remains stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. As a result, interrupts are enabled at timing "T2", and the second interrupt processing 2 is started. Figure 73 shows an example in which interrupt processing 2 is started at timing "A5". When interrupt processing 2 is executed, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. Also, when interrupt processing 2 is executed, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

Next, at the time "A5'" when interrupt process 2 ends, the time "A3" when the third interrupt process 3 starts has not yet arrived. Therefore, interrupt process 3 can be started when the time "A3" arrives.
As a result of the above, interrupt processing 2 cannot be executed at timing "A2", but interrupt processing 2 can be executed at the subsequent timing "A5", and interrupt processing 3 can be executed at timing "A3", so the number of interrupt processing times at this point is the same as when there is no interrupt prohibited period.

In this way, the interrupt cycle "Tc" is kept constant regardless of whether or not there is an interrupt disabled period, so that the interrupt cycle "Tc" is not disrupted. Furthermore, even if interrupt processing is not possible due to an interrupt disabled period, this does not affect the updating of the 8-bit counter 501.
Furthermore, when the interrupt disable period ends and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, executing interrupt processing without waiting for the next interrupt period does not affect the updating of the 8-bit counter 501.

FIG. 74 is a time chart showing an example (Example 2) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt disabled period.
In this example, after the interrupt process 1 ends, the interrupt disable period of the main process starts at timing "T1" before the timing "A2" of the next interrupt process 2 arrives. As a result, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.
Therefore, at timing "A2", although the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is also set, so the interrupt process cannot be executed.

When another interrupt period "Tc" has elapsed since timing "A2" and timing "A3" has arrived, the interrupt disable period is still ongoing. Therefore, at timing "A3," information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated continues to be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, but the interrupt disable flag 302 is also set, so interrupt processing cannot be executed. Note that at timing "A3," the 8-bit counter 501 times out, but there is no change in the situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
After timing "A3", when the interrupt disable period ends at timing "T2", the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released. At this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Thereafter, at timing "A6", interrupt processing 2 is started. When interrupt processing 2 is started, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

In this example, interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A6'", which is before timing "A4", i.e., before the point when "3 x Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1". Therefore, after interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A6'", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T3", and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. This causes interrupt processing 3 to start at the following timing "A4". When interrupt processing 3 starts, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

As described above, interrupt processing cannot be executed when "Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1" (timing "A2"), nor when "Tc" has further elapsed since that time (timing "A3"), but interrupt processing 2 is executed immediately after the interrupt inhibition period ends at timing "T2". Then, interrupt processing 3 can be executed at timing "A4", when there is no interrupt inhibition period and interrupt processing 4 would normally be executed. As a result, interrupt processing can be executed three times between timing "A1" and timing "A4", which is only one less than the number of interrupt processing times (four times) if there was no interrupt inhibition period.
Furthermore, at timing A4, the interrupt cycle Tc from timing A1 is not disrupted, and the update status of the 8-bit counter 501 is also constant.

FIG. 75 is a time chart showing an example (example 3) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt disabled period.
In this example, after interrupt processing 1 ends, the interrupt disable period begins at timing "T1" before the arrival of timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing, and ends at timing "T2." In other words, during the interrupt disable period, timing "A2" arrives, when interrupt processing 2 would normally be executed. At timing "A2," the interrupt disable flag 302 is set, so the interrupt processing cannot be executed.
However, since the 8-bit counter 501 times out immediately before timing "A2" arrives, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "A2".
Next, at timing "T2", when the interrupt disable period ends, the interrupt disable flag 302 is unset. At this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Therefore, at the following timing "A7", interrupt processing 2 is started.

Meanwhile, while interrupt processing 2 is being executed, timing "T3" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. However, because interrupt processing 2 is being executed at this point, duplicate interrupts cannot be performed. In other words, interrupt processing 3 cannot be executed at timing "A3," which is the timing when interrupt processing 3 would normally be executed.
When interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A8", the interrupt disable flag 302 is unset. At this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Therefore, interrupt processing 3 starts immediately at timing "A8". In other words, no program (instruction) in the main processing is executed between interrupt processing 2 and interrupt processing 3, and interrupt processing 3 starts immediately after interrupt processing 2 ends.
However, when interrupt processing 2 is completed, the IFF1 register is set to "1" by the "EI" instruction in step S2892 in Fig. 66, and the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released. Next, when the "RETI" instruction is executed in step S2893, the interrupt processing of step S2890 is started again, and when this interrupt processing starts, the IFF1 register is set to "0", and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. Therefore, the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released for just a moment between interrupt processing 2 and interrupt processing 3.
When the interrupt process 3 is started, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.
When interrupt process 3 ends, timing "A4" (3 x Tc has elapsed since timing "A1"), which is the start timing of interrupt process 4, has not yet arrived.

After interrupt processing 3 is completed, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. At this point, the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set, so the interrupt processing can be executed. Therefore, interrupt processing 4 is started at timing "A4". When interrupt processing 4 is started, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.
In this way, four interrupt processes can be started after "3 x Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1", and the same number of interrupt processes can be executed as if there were no interrupt prohibition period for the main process.

In this way, if the timing to start interrupt processing falls within an interrupt disabled period, the next interrupt processing will start immediately after the end of that interrupt disabled period. Furthermore, if an interrupt period arrives while the next interrupt processing is being executed, the next interrupt processing will start immediately after the end of the next interrupt processing. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to minimize the reduction in the number of interrupts and quickly return to a situation where interrupt processing starts when the original interrupt period arrives.

Although the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the fourth embodiment, when the system clock is 16 MHZ, the setting value of the prescaler register 502 is set to 143 and the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to 125 in order to set the interrupt period to approximately 1 ms. Therefore, the setting values of the prescaler register 502 and the counter setting register 503 vary depending on the setting of the interrupt period, and are not limited to the above values. Note that the system clock is not limited to 16 MHZ and can be set to various values, such as 12 MHZ or 24 MHZ.
For example, if the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to "250" under the above conditions, the interrupt period is set as follows:
250/(16/143)=2.234(ms)
It can be said that:
In this case, even if the value of the counter setting register 503 is "250", the value can be within one byte.
On the other hand, the counter setting register 503 may have a storage area of, for example, 2 bytes instead of 1 byte. If the counter setting register 503 has a storage area of 2 bytes, the 8-bit counter 501 may be changed to a 16-bit counter 501.

(2) In Figures 63, 64, and 65, the counter setting register is set before and after an RWM abnormality is determined, but the counter setting register is not limited to the timing shown in Figures 63, 64, and 65. It is sufficient to execute the counter setting register setting process by the timing at which you want to start interrupt processing.

(3) When transitioning to the initialization process (FIG. 65), the process of setting the IFF1 register to "1" (processing to enable interrupts) uses the set command set in step S2740, but is not limited to this and may be, for example, by executing the "EI" instruction after step S2747. In this way, even if each process during the initialization process is composed only of processes that do not have the "DI" and "EI" instructions, as in steps S2740 and S2746, it is possible to enable interrupts.
(4) The fourth embodiment is not limited to slot machines, but can also be applied to pinball gaming machines (pachinko gaming machines), mahjong ball gaming machines, casino machines, and the like.

Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment relates to displaying the error history.
76 is a time chart showing the relationship (example 1) between the rotation of the reels 31 and the detection (occurrence) and notification of an error. In this embodiment, "reels are rotating" refers to a situation in which at least one reel 31 is rotating. Furthermore, "reels have stopped" refers to a situation in which all reels 31 have stopped.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error occurs, the error is detected with almost no time lag. In other words, in this embodiment, the "time when an error occurs" and the "time when an error is detected" are assumed to be almost the same.

Furthermore, the "error" in this embodiment corresponds to the "recoverable error" in the other embodiments described above.
76 shows an example in which an error is detected during rotation of the reel 31. The types of errors in this case include, for example, a selector error (such as an error in the passage sensor 46 due to medal accumulation or an error in the input sensor 44) and a hopper error (such as an error in the payout sensor 37 due to an abnormal payout).

While the reels 31 are spinning, medals are not accepted, and even if medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 47, they are returned by the blocker 45. However, if fraudulent activity (cheating) is performed while the reels 31 are spinning, a selector error may be detected. Also, while the reels 31 are spinning, the hopper 35 is not driven and medals are not paid out, but there is a possibility that fraudulent activity (cheating) may cause the hopper 35 to be driven and medals to be paid out.
In this way, there are cases where an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating.

When the main control board 50 detects an error (time t0), it turns on the corresponding bit (the bit corresponding to the detected error) of the abnormal input flag provided in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. The main control board 50 also transmits a notification of the error detection (an error command) to the sub-control board 80, and in this embodiment, the transmission timing is when the error is notified ("t1" in FIG. 76). However, this is not limiting, and the error command may also be transmitted when an error is detected, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 76.
The main control board 50 determines whether an error has been detected during the interrupt process. Specifically, it determines whether the bit of the abnormal input flag is on. This determination is made, for example, in step S463 (input error check process) during the interrupt process shown in FIG. 47.

Also, when an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80, this is done by the control command sending process of step S464 in the interrupt process of Figure 47, for example.
If an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 immediately upon detecting an error, it can be sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after the abnormal input flag bit is turned on. Alternatively, if an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 after all the reels 31 have stopped (at the timing when an error is notified), it can be sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after all the reels 31 have stopped.

When all the reels 31 have stopped and an error command has been received, the sub-control board 80 notifies of the error using the effect lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23. If an error command is sent at time t1 in Fig. 76, the sub-control board 80 notifies of the error after all the reels 31 have stopped. In other words, an error is not notified while the reels 31 are spinning.
In addition, if an error occurs when all reels 31 are stopped, the main control board 50 also issues an error notification. For example, the winning number display LED 78 may display "En"("n" is an integer, and the value indicates the type of error).

Then, when the cause of the error is eliminated and the reset switch 153 (see the third embodiment, not shown in FIG. 1) is operated, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 end the error notification. In other words, when the cause of the error is eliminated and the reset switch 153 is operated, the state before the error was detected is restored, provided that no error is detected. Therefore, even if the cause of the error is eliminated, the state before the error is not restored unless the reset switch 153 is operated. Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated and no error is detected, the bit of the abnormal input flag stored in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is turned off.
Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 stores an error history (data) in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83, and displays the error history when requested. The error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning the power on or off or by changing settings. The error history will not be erased unless a serious error (an unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM of the sub-control board 80.

FIG. 77 shows examples of error history including the process of FIG. 76 (Example 1) displayed on the image display device 23, and shows two examples as (A) and (B).
In the fifth embodiment, power off, power on, door open, and door close are not errors themselves, but are displayed together with the error history.
Furthermore, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state or the setting change state, the error is not displayed on the error history screen, but is displayed on a setting change history screen (not shown) that is separate from the error history screen.
Furthermore, although the history of detected errors is displayed, the error history screen does not display the recovery from the error. However, this is not limiting, and the recovery from the error may also be displayed on the error history screen.

The error history can be displayed, for example, in the setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation process in this embodiment is similar to the setting change confirmation process shown in Figure 45 (third embodiment). Specifically, as described in the third embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets is "0" during game standby (before game play starts), a "1" is stored in the D register. Then, in step S2755 of Figure 45, the main control board 50 stores the D register value in the A register and determines whether the A register value is "1." If the A register value is "1," the main control board 50 determines that it is time to confirm the setting and proceeds to step S2760. After determining whether the A register value is "1," the main control board 50 stores the C register value in the A register. As described in the third embodiment, since the A register value was stored in the C register in step S2752, setting value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes setting value data.

In this way, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets in the waiting game state is "0," the setting confirmation state is entered. When the setting confirmation state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and a menu screen for the gaming machine 10 administrator is displayed on the image display device 23. This menu includes an "Error History" item, and when "Error History" is selected with the directional pad and a confirmation operation is performed (in this case, the push button is turned on), the error history screen shown in Figure 77 is displayed.

For example, in Figure 77(A), the time of the ○× error with error number "003", "January 29, 2021, 13:27:45", corresponds to time t1 in Figure 76. In other words, if the error is reported at time t1, three minutes after the time the error was detected (time t0 in the figure), then the error was actually detected three minutes before the time of the ○× error displayed on the error history screen.
However, as described above, by displaying the start date and time of the error notification as the time of the error, even if an error is detected while the reels 31 are spinning and it takes time from the time the error is detected to the time it is notified, there will be no discrepancy between the time the error is notified and the displayed time of the error, so the administrator will not be made to realize that there is a problem with the gaming machine 10 or that fraud may have occurred.
As described above, when the time of recovery from an error is displayed in the error history, "○× Error Recovery" is displayed between the error numbers "001" and "002" in the figure along with the time.

77(A) shows the date and time when the sub-control board 80 started to notify the error as the error time. The sub-control board 80 stores the error content and the time in association with each other. The information about the time is obtained, for example, using the RTC (real-time clock) function provided in the sub-control board 80.
On the other hand, Fig. 77(B) shows an example in which the time is displayed as the elapsed date and time from the current time. In this way, the actual time may be displayed as shown in Fig. 77(A), or the elapsed date from the current time may be displayed as shown in Fig. 77(B).
Furthermore, although "time" is displayed in the example of FIG. 77, it may be displayed as "alert time,""occurrencetime," or "detection time," etc.
However, even when the "time of occurrence" or "time of detection" is displayed, the actual time of occurrence or detection of the error is not displayed, but rather the time when the error notification began.

76, when an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the detected error cannot be immediately notified because the reels 31 are still rotating, and so the error is notified after the reels 31 have stopped. When an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the error is not notified while the reels 31 are rotating because the progression of the game (stopping the rotating reels 31) takes priority over notifying the error.
On the other hand, if an error is detected when the reels 31 are not spinning (for example, when the game is on standby after all the reels 31 have stopped), an error command is immediately sent to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 notifies the error (this corresponds to the first error in FIG. 82, which will be described later). Therefore, in this case, the time displayed in the error history will be the same as the time the error was detected.

Example 2 of Figure 78 is a time chart showing a case where a setting is changed after an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating.
In the third embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a setting change disable flag. When the start switch 41 is operated (when the reels 31 start to rotate), the setting change disable flag is turned on, and when all the reels 31 stop, the setting change disable flag is turned off. In this case, while the setting change disable flag is on, the gaming machine cannot transition to the setting change state. When the power is turned off while the reels 31 are rotating, the setting change disable flag is stored as being on, and even if the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the gaming machine does not transition to the setting change state (because the setting change disable flag is turned on when the gaming machine starts).
In contrast, the fifth embodiment does not include the setting change disable flag of the third embodiment. Therefore, if the power is turned off while the reels 31 are spinning, and then turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the system can transition to the setting change state.

If an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, a "1" is stored in the corresponding bit of the abnormal input flag provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50, as described above.
Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the reels 31 are rotating, the power supply to the motor 32 that drives the reels 31 is cut off, and the reels 31 then stop rotating. Next, if the front door is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, as shown in Figures 41 and 44, the initialization process (Figure 44) will be followed by a setting change confirmation process (Figure 45).

Here, when the initialization process (Figure 44) is executed, the abnormal input flag is also initialized in the memory area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 ("RWM clear when setting changed" in Figure 78). Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 starts up via the setting change state, data on errors detected before the setting change process is erased. For this reason, when the gaming machine 10 starts up via the setting change state, errors detected before transitioning to the setting change state (errors based on data stored in the abnormal input flag) are not reported.

As described above, as in Example 2 of Figure 78, if an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating and then the setting change state is entered, an error detected while the reels 31 are rotating and before the transition to the setting change state will have the error detection data erased by the RWM clear process in the setting change state, and therefore the error will not be notified after the setting change process state ends.
Furthermore, in this example 2, by going through the setting change state, the data of any errors detected before transitioning to the setting change state is erased, so no error command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 after the setting change state ends. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the first interrupt processing occurs after step S2740, as shown in FIG. 44. In this case, because the initialization processing has already been executed in step S2732, the error command stored before the power was turned off has been erased by the time the first interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, even if the system transitions to the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) and the control command transmission processing of step S464 in FIG. 47 is executed, no error command is sent to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, the error is not stored as an error history in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, nor is it displayed.

Figure 79 is a diagram showing the error history screen of Figure 78 (Example 2). In Figure 79, power-off for error number "004" corresponds to time t3 in Figure 78. Power-on for error number "003" corresponds to time t4 in Figure 78.
In this example, the power is turned off, the door is opened, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and then the power is turned on, so the door opening is detected at the same time as the power is turned on. Then, a setting change process is performed between error numbers "001" and "002", and then the door is closed. As mentioned above, the setting change process is not displayed on the error history screen.

As described above, the data of any errors detected before transitioning to the setting change state (before the power is turned off) is erased, so the error will not be notified even after the setting change state ends, and will not be displayed in the error history.
Therefore, errors that have not been notified are not displayed as error history, which ensures consistency between notified errors and errors displayed as history and prevents misunderstandings by the administrator. In other words, errors that have not been notified will not be displayed as error history.

FIG. 80 is a time chart showing a case where multiple errors are detected during the setting confirmation state (example 3).
In Figure 80, the transition from the game standby state to the setting confirmation state is the same as described above.
In this example, during the setting confirmation state, a first error is first detected, and then a second error is detected. As in the above, the first and second errors include a selector error (an error related to the passage sensor 46 or the input sensor 44) and a hopper error (an error related to the output sensor 37).
When a first error and a second error are detected during the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 stores information regarding the type of detected error in the memory area of the RWM 53 at the time the error is detected, as described above.
In the setting confirmation state, just as while the reels 31 are spinning, even if an error is detected, the error is not notified, and the error is notified after the setting confirmation state ends, because the control process for the setting confirmation state takes priority over the notification of an error.

When the main control board 50 ends the setting confirmation state, it first sends an error command to the sub-control board 80 based on the detection of the second error (timing t5 in the figure). The sub-control board 80 notifies the second error based on receiving the error command. In other words, if errors are detected in the setting confirmation state in the order of the first error and then the second error, the sub-control board 80 is configured to notify the errors in the order of the second error and then the first error after the setting confirmation state ends (the order of the errors being detected is reversed). Note that when the sub-control board 80 receives a second error command from the main control board 50, it stores the details of the second error as error history in a specified storage area of the RWM 83, linking it to the notification start date and time.
The sub-control board 80 continues to notify of the second error until the cause of the second error is eliminated, and when the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the second error has been eliminated, it sends a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it ends the notification of the second error.

Furthermore, once the cause of the second error has been eliminated, the main control board 50 then transmits an error command based on the detection of the first error to the sub-control board 80 (time t6 in the figure). The sub-control board 80 notifies the first error based on receiving the error command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the first error command from the main control board 50, it stores the details of the first error as error history in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83, linking it to the notification start date and time.
The notification of the first error continues until the cause of the first error is eliminated, and when the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the first error has been eliminated, it transmits a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it terminates the notification of the first error.
As in Example 1 of Figure 76, when a first error is detected, a command for the first error may be sent to the sub-control board 80 (dotted line in the figure), and when a second error is detected, a command for the second error may be sent to the sub-control board 80 (dotted line in the figure).

Here, in Example 3 of FIG. 80, it is assumed that the notification priorities of the first error and the second error are the same (there is no difference in notification priority).
In contrast, there are cases where priority is assigned to the notification of errors. For example, if the notification priority of a first error is higher than the notification priority of a second error, the first error will be notified first after the setting confirmation state ends, and the second error will be notified once the cause of the first error has been eliminated.
In this case, the error history will display the first error first, followed by the second error, in the order in which the errors were reported.

Figure 81 is a diagram showing the error history in Example 3 of Figure 80. In this example, after the door is opened with error number "004", the setting confirmation state is entered, and when this setting confirmation state ends, a second error with error number "003" is detected. Note that the "setting confirmation state" may or may not be displayed in the error history.
Then, once the cause of the second error is removed, the first error is reported next. The first error is displayed in the error history as error number "002" (time t6 in FIG. 80). In this way, the error history also lists the second error first, which matches the order of the reported errors. This eliminates the discrepancy between the order in which errors are reported and the order in which the history is displayed, preventing misunderstandings by the administrator.
As described above, in this embodiment, if multiple errors occur under conditions where error notification is not possible, when the situation becomes such that error notification is possible, the errors detected most recently will be notified in order.

Figure 82 is a time chart showing a case (Example 4) in which the first error and the second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 have stopped and before the start switch 41 is operated (before game starts)).
During game standby, the reels 31 are not rotating and the setting is not being checked, so if an error is detected, the detected error can be immediately reported.
First, when the main control board 50 detects a first error during game standby, it transmits a first error command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the first error command, the sub-control board 80 starts notifying the first error (time t7 in the figure). The received information about the first error is linked to information about the notification start time and stored in the error history.
If a second error is detected after a first error is detected but before the cause of the first error is eliminated (while the first error is being reported), the main control board 50 will transmit a command for the second error to the sub-control board 80 at the timing when it becomes possible to report the second error (time t8 in the figure), as in the above example, as will be described later. However, this is not limiting, and a command for the second error may also be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the time the second error is detected (two-dot chain line in the figure).

When the cause of the first error is removed, the main control board 50 transmits information to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the information to the effect that the cause of the first error has been removed, it terminates the notification of the first error.
On the other hand, when the main control board 50 detects that the cause of the first error has been removed, it sends a command for the second error to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the command for the second error, the sub-control board 80 starts notifying the second error (time t8 in the figure). The received information about the second error is linked to information about the notification start time and stored in the error history.
When the cause of the second error is removed, the main control board 50 transmits information to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the information to the effect that the cause of the second error has been removed, it terminates the notification of the second error.
In this way, when the first error and the second error are detected in this order during game standby, the first error and the second error are reported in this order, unlike during the setting confirmation state. This is because when the first error is detected, there is no need to suspend the reporting of the first error, and reporting of the first error can be started immediately.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the error history in Example 4 of FIG. 82. In this Example 4, when a first error is notified, the history of the first error is displayed with error number "004." The time of the first error with error number "004" corresponds to time t7 in FIG. 82. Furthermore, when the cause of the first error is removed, a second error is notified next, and the second error is displayed with error number "002." The time of the second error with error number "002" corresponds to time t8 in FIG. 82.
Therefore, the notification order of the first error and the second error matches the error history order.

Although not illustrated in this embodiment, if errors are detected consecutively, the following processing is performed.
For example, if a medal retention error (an error in the insertion sensor 44) is detected in the selector during game standby, a medal retention error command is sent to the sub-control board 80. This causes the sub-control board 80 to notify the medal retention error.
Next, suppose that after the administrator has cleared the medal retention error, but before operating the reset switch 153, they insert a medal into the medal insertion slot 47, causing another medal retention error. In this case, the main control board 50 does not resend the medal retention error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the administrator clears the medal retention error again and operates the reset switch 153, it is determined whether the cause of the error has been cleared, and if it is determined that the cause of the error has been cleared, information to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this information, it ends the medal retention error notification.

In this way, even if two medal retention errors are detected on the main control board 50 side, before the reset switch 153 is operated, a medal retention error command will only be sent once to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the error history from the sub-control board 80 will display only one medal retention error.
Although the above example is a medal retention error, it is not limited to medal retention errors, but also applies to other errors that can be resolved by operating the reset switch 153 after the cause of the error has been removed.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment relates to the structure of a main control board 50, a socket (also called a "chip socket") 56, and a main chip 55.
In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described later, "mounting" refers to soldering various electronic components (CPU, ROM, RAM, resistors, connectors, 7-segment displays, etc.) to the main control board 50 or other boards (printed wiring boards) or attaching them to sockets, thereby making them function (operate) as electronic circuits.
Furthermore, the "main chip 55" in this embodiment refers to a one-chip microprocessor that has a main CPU 55 and built-in memory, and further has a ROM 54 and RWM 53 within this built-in memory, as described in Figure 32 (third embodiment).

FIG. 84 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50, the socket 56, and the main chip 55 not yet mounted in the socket 56 in the sixth embodiment.
The socket 56 is provided with the main chip 55 and serves to electrically connect the main chip 55 to the main control board 50. The socket 56 is mounted at a predetermined position on the main control board 50. As will be described in detail later, the socket 56 is made of a transparent resin material (it may be translucent as long as the internal cavity 56a is visible). A pin insertion opening 56c is formed on the top surface of the socket 56, into which the pins 55a (terminals) of the main chip 55 are inserted.
84, the resistor 50a is also shown on the main control board 50 in order to compare the height of the resistor 50a with the height of the notch 56e of the socket 56. This will be described in detail later.

Fig. 85 is a plan view (viewed vertically downward from above) showing in more detail the main chip 55 mounted in the socket 56. Fig. 86 is a view (front view) taken along the arrow Z1 in Fig. 85. Fig. 87 is a view (side view) taken along the arrow Z2 in Fig. 85.
In FIG. 85, the "upper side of the drawing" and the "lower side of the drawing" are defined as shown.
In this example, the main chip 55 has 71 pins 55a. Here, "pin 55a(1)" refers to the first pin 55a, "pin 55a(2)" refers to the second pin 55a, and so on, and "pin 55a(71)" refers to the 71st pin 55a.

The main chip 55 has recesses 55b cut out in a generally arc shape at approximately the center of the upper and lower edges in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the drawing).
Of the 71 pins 55a, the first pin 55a (1) to the 35th pin 55a (35) are provided on the lower longitudinal edge of the main chip 55, excluding the portion where the recessed portion 55b is formed. Similarly, the 36th pin 55a (36) to the 71st pin 55a (71) are provided on the upper longitudinal edge of the main chip 55, excluding the portion where the recessed portion 55b is formed.
Of the 1st to 71st pins 55a, the 17th (pin 55a(17)), 35th (pin 55a(35)), 54th (pin 55a(54)), and 71st (pin 55a(71)) are GND (ground) lines. Pins other than these four are signal lines.

Here, the 35th pin 55a (35) is located at the right end of the lower edge of the main chip 55, and the 71st pin 55a (71) is located at the left end of the upper edge of the main chip 55. The 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), which are GND lines, are located adjacent to the recessed portion 55b.
When an operator grasps the main chip 55, first, the operator holds the vicinity of the 35th pin 55a (35) and the 71st pin 55a (71) (holding the diagonal corners of the main chip 55), thereby being able to hold the vicinity of the GND line, and therefore the number of signal lines that the operator's fingers come into contact with can be reduced.

Secondly, the main chip 55 can be held by gripping the vicinity of the recessed portions 55b on the lower and upper edges of the main chip 55. The recessed portions 55b make it easier to hold the main chip 55. Furthermore, by gripping the recessed portions 55b and holding the vicinity of the 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), it is possible to hold the vicinity of the GND line, as described above, thereby reducing the number of signal lines that the operator's fingers come into contact with.

Furthermore, a two-dimensional code 55e is printed in the left region on the top surface of the main chip 55. Furthermore, a model number sticker 55f displaying the model number of the gaming machine 10 is affixed to the right region. The region where the two-dimensional code 55e is printed and the region where the model number sticker 55f is affixed are flat surfaces (surfaces without steps). In particular, displaying the two-dimensional code 55e on a flat surface makes the two-dimensional code easier to read. Furthermore, providing the model number sticker 55f on a flat surface makes the information displayed on the model number sticker 55f easier to read. Furthermore, affixing the model number sticker 55f to a flat surface makes it less likely to peel off.
Furthermore, a roughly semicircular step 55c is formed on the left edge of the main chip 55. This step 55c, as well as step 55d and step 55i described below, are all recessed from the surface.
The step portion 55c is formed by recessing a region that is formed in a substantially semicircular shape.
Furthermore, a step portion 55d is formed near the step portion 55c and closer to the pin 55a(1). The step portion 55d has a generally circular recessed area, and the number "1" is displayed within the generally circular area. The number "1" may be recessed further than the generally circular area, or conversely, may be formed to be convex from the generally circular area (however, it does not protrude above the surface of the main chip 55). Furthermore, although the number "1" is shown in this example, other numbers, symbols, etc. may also be used.

On the top surface of the main chip 55, a product name 55g (in bold letters in the figure) and a company name 55h (in dotted letters in the figure) are displayed between the two-dimensional code 55e and the model number sticker 55f. The product name 55g is printed. The company name 55h has a stepped portion 55i.
88A is an enlarged view of the product name 55g and company name 55h, and FIG. 88B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Z3-Z3 in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 88, an area corresponding to the thickness of the lines of the company name 55h is recessed from the surface, forming a step portion 55i.
FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the above-mentioned step portion 55c (semicircular portion), step portion 55d (circular portion with the number "1" displayed inside), and step portion 55i.
When the depth of step portion 55c is D1, the depth of step portion 55d is D2, and the depth of step portion 55i is D3, the magnitude relationship among them is "D1 > D2 >D3." In this way, by making the depths of the three step portions 55c, 55d, and 55i different, counterfeiting is made difficult.
Furthermore, since the depths of these plurality of step portions 55c, 55d, and 55i are different, the worker can grasp the mounting orientation by feeling the top surface of the main chip 55 with his/her hand.

88(A), the product name 55g is arranged so that at least a part of the product name 55g overlaps with the company name 55h. In this example, the product names "B" and "C" overlap with the company name "A," the product names "D,""E," and "F" overlap with the company name "B," and the product name "G" overlaps with the company name "C."
In other words, the letters "BCDEFG" of the product name "ABCDEFG" are arranged so as to overlap the stepped portion 55i. By displaying the product name 55g in this manner, counterfeiting is made difficult.
For example, if the company name 55h is to be formed with the stepped portion 55i after the product name 55g has been printed, the portion of the product name 55g that overlaps with the stepped portion 55i may be erased.
On the other hand, when attempting to print the product name 55g after forming the company name 55h having the stepped portion 55i, the portion of the product name 55g that overlaps the stepped portion 55i may not be printed clearly.

Furthermore, hidden characters 55j are displayed within the product name 55g. The size of each character of the hidden characters 55j is equal to or smaller than the line thickness of the product name 55g.
88(A), the letter "A" of hidden characters 55j is displayed within a line surrounding the letter "C" of product name 55g. Similarly, the letter "B" of hidden characters 55j is displayed within a line surrounding the letter "D" of product name 55g, and the letter "C" of hidden characters 55j is displayed within a line surrounding the letter "E" of product name 55g.
Furthermore, of the letters "A,""B," and "C" of the hidden letters 55j, the letters "A" and "C" of the hidden letters 55j are arranged so as to straddle the step portion 55i of the company name 55h.
Therefore, the letter "C" of the product name 55g and the letter "A" of the hidden characters 55j are displayed so as to straddle the step portion 55i of the letter "A" of the company name 55h.
Similarly, the letter "E" of the product name 55g and the letter "C" of the hidden characters 55j are displayed so as to straddle the step portion 55i of the letter "B" of the company name 55h.
This configuration makes it more difficult to counterfeit. Also, by checking whether or not the hidden characters 55j are present, it is possible to determine whether or not the card is counterfeit.

The body of the socket 56 is formed from, for example, a transparent resin material, as described above. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 87, socket pins 56d (terminals) are provided inside the socket 56 at positions corresponding to the pins 55a of the mounted main chip 55. Note that Fig. 87 shows only the 35th socket pin 56d (35) and the 36th socket pin 56d (36), and Fig. 86 omits the socket pins 56d, but the socket pins 56d have socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) that are connected to the pins 55a(1) to 55a(71) of the main chip 55, respectively.
The socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of the socket 56 are soldered to the main control board 50, thereby electrically connecting the socket pins 56d and the main control board 50 and mounting the socket 56 on the main control board 50.
Furthermore, when main chip 55 is mounted in socket 56, pins 55a(1) to 55a(71) of main chip 55 are electrically connected to socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of socket 56, respectively. This electrically connects main chip 55 to main control board 50. After main chip 55 is mounted in socket 56, it is coupled so that main chip 55 cannot be easily pulled out of socket 56.

As shown in FIG. 85, on the surface of the main control board 50, around the area where the socket 56 is mounted, a mark number 50b and a mark 50c are printed.
The marker numbers 50b include four: a marker number 50b(1) displaying the number "1", a marker number 50b(35) displaying the number "35", a marker number 50b(36) displaying the number "36", and a marker number 50b(71) displaying the number "71".
These four mark numbers 50b(1), 50b(35), 50b(36), and 50b(71) correspond to pins 55a(1), 55a(35), 55a(36), and 55a(71) of the main chip 55. Specifically, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55, pin 55a(1) is located near mark number 50b(1), pin 55a(35) is located near mark number 50b(35), pin 55a(36) is located near mark number 50b(36), and pin 55a(71) is located near mark number 50b(71).

Furthermore, six marks 50c(5), 50c(10), 50c(15), 50c(20), 50c(25), and 50c(30) are printed between the mark number 50b(1) and the mark number 50b(35) on the surface of the main control board 50. These marks 50c are printed dots.
In Figure 85, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55, the mark 50c(5) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(5) of the main chip 55, the mark 50c(10) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(10), the mark 50c(15) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(15), the mark 50c(20) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(20), the mark 50c(25) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(25), and the mark 50c(30) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(30).

On the other hand, on the surface of the main control board 50, seven marks 50c (40), 50c (45), 50c (50), 50c (55), 50c (60), 50c (65), and 50c (70) are printed between the mark number 50b (36) and the mark number 50b (71). These marks 50c are printed with dots, similar to the mark 50c described above.
In Figure 85, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55, the mark 50c (40) of the main control board 50 is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (40) of the main chip 55, the mark 50c (45) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (45) of the main chip 55, the mark 50c (50) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (50), the mark 50c (55) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (55), the mark 50c (60) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (60), the mark 50c (65) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (65), and the mark 50c (70) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (70).

With the above configuration, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56, the pin number of the main chip 55 can be easily determined when viewed from directly above. For example, in Figure 85, it is easy to determine that pin 55a (36) of the main chip 55, located approximately directly below the mark number 50b (36), is the 36th pin. Furthermore, for example, pin 55a (17) (GND) can be easily determined to be the 17th pin 55a by the mark number 50b (1), mark 50c (5), mark 50c (10), and mark 50c (15).

In FIG. 85, a step portion 56b (56b(1) and 56b(71)) is formed at the left end of the surface (top surface) of the socket 56. The step portion 56b(1) has a substantially rectangular area recessed from the surface, and the number "1" is displayed within this substantially rectangular area. The amount of recess of the step portion 56b is arbitrary, but may be approximately the same as the amount of recess of the step portion 55c of the main chip 55, for example.
Furthermore, the number "1" on the stepped portion 56b(1) is displayed in a direction rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in Fig. 85. Therefore, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 and the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 are oriented 90 degrees apart. In this way, when the main chip 55 and the socket 56 are viewed in the orientation shown in Fig. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 is oriented correctly.
Therefore, when the main control board 50 is installed in the gaming machine 10 in the orientation shown in Figure 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 can be seen in the correct orientation. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 is installed in the gaming machine 10 in an orientation rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the orientation shown in Figure 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 can be seen in the correct orientation. Therefore, regardless of the orientation in which the main control board 50 is installed in the gaming machine 10, the number on either the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 or the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 can be seen in the correct orientation, which makes it easier to check the pin numbers when installing the main chip 55 in the socket 56.

The orientation of the main chip 55 can also be confirmed by checking the position of the stepped portion 55c. That is, the side of the main chip 55 having the stepped portion 55c is the side with pin numbers "1" and "71".
Furthermore, when the main chip 55 is viewed from above, only the lower left corner of the outer shape of the main chip 55 is chamfered in Figure 85. The chamfered corner corresponds to pin number "1." Therefore, the position of pin number "1" can be easily confirmed simply by checking this chamfered corner.

Furthermore, the stepped portion 56b (71) has a generally rectangular area recessed from the surface, and the number "71" is displayed within the generally rectangular area. Like the number "1" on the stepped portion 56b (1), the number "71" on the stepped portion 56b (71) is displayed rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85.
When the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56, the first pin 55a(1) of the main chip 55 is located near the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56, and the 71st pin 55a(71) (GND) of the main chip 55 is located near the stepped portion 56b(71) of the socket 56.

The stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) of the socket 56 are also provided with recesses and are configured so that numbers can be displayed within these areas, making it difficult to counterfeit the socket 56.
The number of pins 55a on the main chip 55 is "71," an odd number; in FIG. 85, there are "35" on the bottom side and "36" on the top side. The socket 56 is also shaped to accommodate these pins 55a, so the main chip 55 cannot be installed upside down (inserting the side with 36 pins 55a as the bottom side in the figure). This prevents incorrect installation. When installing the main chip 55 in the socket 56, aligning the number "1" printed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 with the number "1" printed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 ensures that the main chip 55 is installed in the correct orientation relative to the socket 56.

Furthermore, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the number "1" on the stepped portion 56b(1) makes it easy to identify that pin 55a(1) of the main chip 55 is the "1"th pin 55a. Similarly, the number "71" on the stepped portion 56b(71) makes it easy to identify that pin 55a(71) (GND) of the main chip 55 is the "71"th pin 55a.

As shown in FIG. 86 , two notches 56e (height H1) are formed on the bottom surface of the socket 56 in the longitudinal direction. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 87 , a notch 56f (height H2) is formed on the bottom surface of the socket 56 in the lateral direction. These notches 56e and 56f allow visual confirmation that no unauthorized components are attached to the bottom surface of the socket 56. As described above, the main body of the socket 56 is formed from a transparent or translucent resin material, which makes it possible to visually confirm that no unauthorized components are attached to the interior (cavity 56a). Furthermore, these notches 56e and 56f allow visual confirmation that no unauthorized components are attached to the contact surface between the socket 56 and the main control board 50.
87, socket pins 56d are provided inside socket 56. Therefore, if the height H1 of notch 56e is higher than necessary in the longitudinal direction of socket 56 (the side on which socket pins 56d are aligned), it becomes possible to insert a wire or the like through notch 56e, which could lead to fraudulent activity.

However, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 86, the height H1 of the cutout 56e is lower than the height H3 of the resistor 50a mounted on the main control board 50 (H1 < H3). Specifically, the height H1 of the cutout 56e is, for example, less than 1 millimeter, and the height H3 of the resistor 50a is, for example, approximately 1 to 3 millimeters. Note that the height H3 of the resistor 50a is assumed to be the shortest among the multiple types of resistors mounted on the main control board 50.
As described above, the socket 56 is configured to make it difficult to insert foreign objects such as wire through the notch 56e of the socket 56. This makes it difficult to access the socket pin 56d through the notch 56e, thereby preventing cheating.

Seventh Embodiment
The seventh embodiment relates to the positional relationship between the substrate and the electronic component.
In the seventh embodiment, the "board" may be the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 described above, as well as other control boards or relay boards connected to the main control board 50 or sub-control board 80.
Furthermore, examples of the "electronic component" include a (cable) connector, a 7-segment display, etc. When the electronic component is a 7-segment display, examples include a setting value display LED 73 (1 digit), a credit number display LED 76 (2 digits), an acquisition number display LED 78 (2 digits), and a management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 (4 digits) (see FIGS. 1 and 36).
In addition, in this embodiment, the "front surface" of the substrate refers to the surface on which a specified electronic component is mounted (the so-called "component surface"), and the "back surface" refers to the surface opposite to the surface on which a specified electronic component is mounted (the so-called "solder surface").

In the seventh embodiment, a predetermined gap is provided between the board and the bottom surface (the surface facing the board) of a predetermined electronic component, so that it is possible to visually check whether or not an unauthorized component has been attached between the bottom surface of the predetermined electronic component and the board. When the board is attached to the gaming machine 10, it may be difficult to visually check the gap depending on the attachment position, although this differs depending on the attachment position of the board.
However, when assembling the gaming machine 10 or when performing maintenance after the gaming machine 10 is installed, a worker can easily visually check the gap.
Furthermore, as will be described later, if an LED is used to illuminate the gap, it will be possible to check the gap even in a dimly lit environment after the board is installed inside the housing of the gaming machine 10.

90A and 90B are diagrams showing the positional relationship (example 1) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, where (A) is a plan view and (B) is a front view.
The “predetermined electronic component” in this example 1 corresponds to the connector 57 .
91(A) is a view seen from the Z4 direction in FIG. 90(A), with the circuit board omitted, and FIG. 91(B) is a view seen from the Z5 direction (the bottom side of the connector) in FIG. 90(B), with the circuit board omitted.
90, a connector 57 is mounted on the board. The connector 57 corresponds to a cable connector for connecting to another board (for example, the main control board 50) via a cable.

91(B), a plurality of legs 57a are formed on the bottom side of connector 57. As a result, the entire bottom surface of connector 57 does not come into contact with the board, and only legs 57a of the connector come into contact with the board, leaving a certain gap between the bottom surface of connector 57 (excluding legs 57a) and the board surface. In other words, connector 57 is positioned so as to float above the board surface by the height of legs 57a.
With this configuration, it is possible to visually check the gap between the connector 57 and the board, and to check whether or not an unauthorized part has been attached.

The lead wires 57b of the connector 57 are arranged in two rows as shown in Fig. 91(B), and are arranged to avoid the legs 57a. As a result, when viewed from the front as in Fig. 90(B) or from the rear as in Fig. 91(A), it is possible to visually check that the legs 57a and the lead wires 57b do not overlap, making it possible to correctly determine whether or not an unauthorized component has been installed in the gap between the board and the connector 57.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 91(A), when viewed from behind the connector 57, the lead wire 57b is visible, but when viewed from directly above the connector 57, the lead wire 57b is not visible, as shown in Figure 90(A).
For example, if this board is installed inside the gaming machine 10 (for example, inside the cabinet or on the back of the front door), and if it is installed in a way that looks like Figure 90 (A) when the front door is opened, the lead wire 57b of the connector 57 cannot be seen from that position, thereby increasing security.

92A and 92B are diagrams showing the positional relationship (example 2) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, where (A) shows a plan view and (B) shows a side view (enlarged view).
The board in Example 2 corresponds to the display board 75 shown in Figure 36 (third embodiment). The "predetermined electronic components" correspond to the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78.
To briefly explain the display board 75 once again, as shown in FIG. 1, the display board 75 is a board that is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and therefore it is preferable that it be provided with anti-tamper measures.

92, a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 are mounted on a display board 75. Each of these is composed of two 7-segment displays (one for the upper digits and one for the lower digits) arranged side by side.
Furthermore, six status display LEDs 79 are mounted on the display board 75 below the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 in Fig. 92(A). Each of these is an independent LED.

As shown in Figure 92 (B), the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78, like the connector 57 shown in Figure 90, have feet on their bottom surfaces (foot 78a in the case of the acquired number display LED 78), and these feet 78a are formed to a height of "H4". As a result, when the acquired number display LED 78 is mounted on the display board 75, a gap "H4" is formed between the bottom surface of the acquired number display LED 78 and the top of the display board 75. This is also true for the credit number display LED 76.

Furthermore, when the status display LED 79 (FIG. 92(B) shows the game start display LED 79d, but this applies to all status display LEDs 79) is mounted on the display board 75, the lead wires of the status display LED 79 are soldered to the display board 75, similar to the connector 57. At this time, the gap "H5" between the bottom surface of the status display LED 79 and the display board 75 is almost "0" or very small. Therefore, the gap "H4" between the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 and the display board 75 is larger than the gap "H5" between the bottom surface of the status display LED 79 and the display board 75 (H5 < H4). With this configuration, when the status display LED 79 is lit, light can illuminate the gap "H4" between the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 and the display board 75.

In particular, the status display LED 79 is located close enough to the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 that the light emitted from the status display LED 79 when lit reaches the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78. This makes it possible to visually check the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 by utilizing the light emitted from the status display LED 79 when lit.
For example, when medals are bet, at least one of the 1 bet display LED 79a, 2 bet display LED 79b, and 3 bet display LED 79c lights up, so when medals are bet, the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the winning number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed.

Furthermore, if the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned off while medals have been bet, when the power supply is turned on again, the bet number data before the power supply was turned off is read, and at least one of the 1 bet display LED 79a, 2 bet display LED 79b, and 3 bet display LED 79c is lit again when the gaming machine 10 is started up. Therefore, the LEDs are lit by the simple operation of turning on the power supply, and the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed.
Note that the above is not limited to the 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, and 3-bet display LED 79c, but is similarly true for other LEDs. For example, after a replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the replay display LED 79f remains lit unless the next game is started, and even if the power is turned off and on under this condition, the replay display LED 79f will light up again when the gaming machine 10 is started up. Therefore, the light emitted when the replay display LED 79f is lit can be used to visually confirm the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the winning number display LED 78.
The display board 75 is attached to the rear side of the front door of the gaming machine 10, and the credit number display LED 76, the winning number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 are arranged so that they can be seen from the control panel 12c.
In this manner, when the display board 75 is attached to the gaming machine 10, even if the status display LED 79 is turned on, it may not be easy to visually check the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, when the display board 75 is electrically connected to the gaming machine 10 (when the display board 75 is connected by a harness), if the display board 75 is removed from the front door and an operator holds the display board 75 in their hand and turns on the status display LED 79, the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 can be easily visually checked.

Figure 93 is a diagram showing the positional relationship (example 3) between a substrate and a specified electronic component in the seventh embodiment, where (A) shows a front view (the mounting surface of the specified electronic component), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view.
The board in Example 3 corresponds to the main control board 50. The "predetermined electronic component" corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74. The management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is the same as that shown in FIG. 1 (first embodiment) and FIG. 36(B) (third embodiment).

First, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example of Fig. 93 is composed of four independent 7-segment displays (digits in Fig. 36(B)) arranged side by side. Also, each 7-segment display has a DP (decimal point) (segment P in Fig. 37) as in the example of Fig. 36(B).
Furthermore, as shown in (B) in the figure, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, like the other examples of the seventh embodiment, has feet (not shown in FIG. 93) on its bottom surface, so that there is a gap between the bottom surface of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 and the surface of the main control board 50. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to visually check whether or not any illegal parts have been attached to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74.

Furthermore, on the back side of the main control board 50, in the area where the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached on the front side, a boundary line 50d having approximately the same dimensions as the outline of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is printed. If the main control board 50 is, for example, green, the boundary line 50d is displayed in, for example, white to make it easier to see. Furthermore, a DP mark 50e is also printed in the position corresponding to the DP of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 on the front side. The DP mark 50e is displayed in, for example, white, just like the boundary line 50d.

By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to check whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached in the correct position on the main control board 50. Specifically, it is possible to check whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached correctly in a position on the front surface corresponding to the boundary line 50d on the back side of the main control board 50. Furthermore, by making the outer dimensions of the boundary line 50d approximately the same as the outer dimensions of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, it is possible to check whether a different 7-segment display (for example, a 7-segment display with a different number of digits) has been attached.
Furthermore, by checking the positions of the four DP markers 50e on the back of the main control board 50 and the DP positions of each 7-segment display of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, it is possible to check whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is installed in the correct orientation.

Figure 94 is a diagram showing a modified example of Example 3 of Figure 93, and similarly to Figure 93, (A) shows a front view (the surface on which a specified electronic component is mounted), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view.
The management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example of Fig. 94 is an integrated 4-digit 7-segment display (each digit cannot be separated), unlike the example of Fig. 93. In other words, this management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is a single component.
In such a case, only the outline of the boundary line 50d on the back surface of the main control board 50 is printed (displayed), and the boundary lines for each digit are not printed. Therefore, the number of parts can be easily confirmed by checking whether the boundary line 50d is printed like that in Fig. 93(B) or like that in Fig. 94(B).

On the other hand, the DP markers 50e are printed in positions corresponding to the positions of the DPs provided on the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74. This makes it possible to check whether the four-digit management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is installed correctly and whether the orientation of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is correct.

Although the fifth to seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above descriptions and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Fifth Embodiment (1) The number of error histories to be stored and displayed can be determined arbitrarily, taking into account the storage capacity of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. For example, the error history may be stored without being erased until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached, and all of the stored error history may be displayed. Then, when the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached, the oldest data in the error history may be erased sequentially.
Also, for example, errors that are more than a predetermined number of days old (e.g., six months, one year, etc.) from the current time may be deleted from the error history data. Alternatively, the error history data may be stored until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached (it is preferable to configure the error history so that it can be checked in some way), but the error history may be displayed only if it is within one month prior to the current time.

(2) Although not illustrated in the above embodiment, if an error occurs while the reel 31 is rotating, the power is turned off before the reel 31 stops, and then the power is turned on (without transitioning to a setting change state), the following processing is performed.
When the power is turned off after an error is detected, the error data is stored in the abnormal input flag as described above.
When the system starts up without transitioning to the setting change state after power-on, the process proceeds to step S2721 (power restoration process) in the process of FIG. 41 (program start). Then, after step S2724 in FIG. 42 (power restoration process), an interrupt process occurs, and the error command stored before the power was cut off is sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it starts notifying the error. The time in the error history for that error becomes the time when the notification of that error started.

(3) The error content and time shown on the error history screen are examples and are not limited to these. For example, door open and door close may not be displayed in the error history. Also, power on/off may not be displayed in the error history. On the other hand, when the device transitions to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the error history screen may display something along with the time to indicate this fact.
Furthermore, the time may be any of those that display the date and time, those that display the month and date and time, and those that display the year, month, date and time.

(4) The error history screen can be displayed in the setting confirmation state, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to switch to manager mode by performing a specified operation when opening the door, and the error history screen may be displayed in that manager mode (the setting key may not be required to display the error history screen).
Alternatively, on the contrary, the error history screen may be configured not to be displayed unless the state is changed to the setting change state.
(5) When an error is being reported, the error report may be terminated when the cause of the error is eliminated, even if the reset switch 153 is not operated. Alternatively, when an error is being reported, even if the cause of the error is eliminated and the reset switch 153 is operated, the error report may be continued until a predetermined time has elapsed from that point, and the error report may be terminated after the predetermined time has elapsed.

B. Sixth Embodiment (1) The socket 56 is provided with two stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71), which respectively display the letters "1" and "71." However, this is not limiting, and even if only the stepped portion 56b(1) is provided, it is possible to align it with the number "1" on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55.
(2) In addition to the four mark numbers 50b, thirteen mark numbers 50c are displayed on the main control board 50. However, this is not limiting, and only the mark numbers 50b may be displayed. Furthermore, the mark numbers 50b may be only the mark number 50b(1), or only the mark numbers 50b(1) and 50b(71). Even if only the mark number 50b(1) is displayed, it is possible to align it with the number "1" on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55.

(3) In the above embodiment, the main chip 55 has a recess 55b, a model number sticker 55f is attached, and a two-dimensional code 55e, a product name 55g, a company name 55h, and hidden characters 55j are displayed (printed). However, this does not necessarily mean that these are essential requirements for the main chip 55.
(4) In the above embodiment, the number of pins on the main chip 55 is 71, but this is not limitative and an even number (for example, 72) may be used. Furthermore, if the number of pins is odd, it is not limited to 71, and may be, for example, 75 (32 + 33). The number of pins on the main chip 55 is determined by the number of signal lines and GNDs (grounds) required.

(5) The notches 56e and 56f of the socket 56 are not necessarily required. However, it is preferable to provide the notch 56e or 56f in at least one location on the bottom of the socket 56 so that the gap between the bottom surface of the socket 56 and the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed. Furthermore, even if the notches 56e and 56f are provided, it is not a required requirement that they have the heights described above.
(6) The socket 56 can be made of an opaque material. However, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud, it is preferable to make the socket 56 of a transparent or translucent material that allows the interior to be seen.
(7) The stepped portion 55i of the company name 55h is not necessarily a requirement. Even if the company name 55h is provided, the characters may be characters without a stepped portion. Furthermore, the depths of the stepped portions 55c, 55d, and 55i (D1, D2, and D3 in FIG. 89) may be partially the same (for example, D1 = D2 and D1 ≠ D3) or entirely the same (D1 = D2 = D3).

(8) The orientation of the characters in the stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise relative to the character "1" in the stepped portion 55d and the character of the marker number 50b, but is not limited to this. The orientation of the characters in the stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) may be the same as the orientation of the character "1" in the stepped portion 55d and the character of the marker number 50b.
Alternatively, the orientation of the characters in step portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise in FIG. 85, and the orientation of the character "1" in step portion 55d and the characters of marker number 50b may be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85.
(9) In the main chip 55, the pin numbers of the GND (ground) lines are 17, 35, 54, and 71, but this is not limited to these. For example, pins 1, 35, 36, and 71 may be used as GND (ground) lines. Alternatively, pins 17, 18, 53, and 54 (all pins adjacent to the recessed portion 55b) may be used as GND (ground) lines.

C. Seventh Embodiment (1) The foot portion (used to ensure a gap with the circuit board) provided at the bottom of a predetermined electronic component may have any shape. For example, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the foot portion 57a of the connector 57 is formed in a line shape, but this is not a limitation. The predetermined electronic component may have approximately cylindrical foot portions provided at the four corners. This is not limited to the connector 57, but also applies to seven-segment displays (FIGS. 92, 93, and 94).
(2) As shown in Figure 92(B), "H5" is exemplified as the gap between the bottom surface of the LED and the substrate, but in reality, the bottom surface of the LED and the substrate are almost in contact with each other, and the gap between the bottom surface of the LED and the substrate is almost "0".

(3) In the examples of Figures 93 and 94, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is exemplified, but this is not limiting, and the display board 75 shown in Figure 92 can also be configured in a similar manner. For example, if the credit number display LED 76 is made up of two 7-segment displays arranged side by side, a boundary line 50d corresponding to the two 7-segment displays arranged side by side is displayed on the back surface of the display board 75, and two DP marks 50e are also displayed.
Furthermore, when the credit number display LED 76 is an integrated seven-segment display in which the upper and lower digits are connected, a boundary line 50d indicating its outline and two DP marks 50e are displayed on the back surface of the display board 75. This also applies to the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, the same configuration can be applied to the set value display LED 73, which consists of, for example, one digit. In this case, a boundary line 50d corresponding to the outline of the set value display LED 73 is displayed on the back surface of the board (the main control board 50 or the board on which the set value display LED 73 is mounted), and one DP mark 50e is also displayed. Note that if the set value display LED 73 does not have a DP, only the boundary line 50d is displayed on the back surface of the board.

Eighth Embodiment
The eighth embodiment relates to timer interrupt processing and vector addresses (also called "interrupt vector addresses").
In the eighth embodiment, the following terms are used:
(1) The "timer interrupt processing" in the eighth embodiment is the same as the "interrupt processing (I_INTR)" in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 66). In the following description of the eighth embodiment, the "timer interrupt processing" may be abbreviated as simply "interrupt processing" as necessary.
(2) "Address value" refers to the numerical value of an address in the built-in memory. For example, in FIG. 96, which will be described later, the "vector address value" is "0004H." Note that in this specification, the terms "address" and "address number" may be used as necessary, but these terms are synonymous.

(3) "Data value of an address" refers to the value of the data stored at that address. For example, the above-mentioned "vector address" is actually composed of two-byte addresses, "0004H" and "0005H." However, when referring to the "data value of a vector address," it refers to the data value (2-byte (16-bit) value) stored at addresses "0004H" and "0005H."
(4) Address values are marked with "H.""H" indicates "hex" in hexadecimal. Bit values stored in the address are marked with "B.""B" indicates "bit" in binary.
Furthermore, when indicating a 2-byte bit value (16-bit value), a "/" is added between the upper byte (8-bit) value and the lower byte (8-bit) value, for example, "00000000/00000100B".

(5) On the other hand, a register does not have an address, and the "value of a register" refers to the value of the data stored in the register.
(6) In this embodiment, the storage areas in the built-in memory are referred to as the "program area,""dataarea,""registerarea,""program management area,""workarea," and "stack area." However, without being limited to these, they may also be referred to as the "program area,""dataarea,""registerarea,""program management area,""workarea," and "stack area," respectively.
The "program region" is also called a "program code region" or a "program code area."

95 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") in the eighth embodiment. This one-chip microprocessor is mounted on the main control board 50 in FIG. 1, and integrates the RWM 53, ROM 54, and main CPU 55 into a single chip.
95, the chip includes a main CPU 55 (same as in FIG. 1) and built-in memory. Note that the chip also includes various other pieces of hardware in addition to these two pieces of hardware, but explanations and illustrations of these will be omitted.
The built-in memory includes a built-in ROM 54 having an address range of "0000H" to "3FFFH" (16,384 bytes) and a built-in RWM 53 having an address range of "F000H" to "F3FFH" (1,024 bytes).
The built-in ROM 54 is the same as the "ROM 54" in FIG. 1, and the built-in RWM 53 is the same as the "RWM 53" in FIG.

Furthermore, the internal memory includes a function setting register area and a function control register area as internal memory register areas.
The function setting register area is a storage area for registers for operation settings including interrupt processing (for example, initial settings for interrupt processing, etc.). Specific examples of registers (including counters) stored in the function setting register area include the prescaler register 502 and counter setting register 503 in Fig. 61 (fourth embodiment). Furthermore, although not shown in Fig. 95, a register for setting the maximum value of random numbers, etc., is also provided in the function setting register area.
As in the fourth embodiment, the prescaler register 502 is a register that can set a setting value for selecting a clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 .
The counter setting register 503 is a built-in register that can set the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 .

The function control register area is a storage area for registers that perform monitoring and control, such as monitoring interrupt processing and storing random numbers. For example, in Fig. 61 (fourth embodiment), the interrupt wait monitor register 301, 8-bit counter 501, and interrupt flag 504 are provided in the function control register area.
As in the fourth embodiment, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is a register for storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 has been set.
The 8-bit counter 501 is a storage area for a counter value consisting of 8 bits (1 byte) for measuring the timing of interrupt processing.
The interrupt flag 504 is a flag that indicates that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
The built-in memory register area is not limited to the function setting register area and function control register area shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the main CPU 55 has a CPU register area, which is a register area different from the internal memory register area provided in the internal memory.
The CPU register area includes general-purpose registers A, B, C, D, E, F, H, and L. The F register is a flag register.
The Q register is a register that stores the upper address "F0H" of the work area (see FIG. 97) in the used area of the built-in RWM 53 and is used for instructions to read data whose upper address is "F0H" from the storage area of the built-in RWM 53.
Furthermore, the I register is a register called an interrupt page address register, and although details will be described later, it is a register for determining the upper byte value of a vector address.

The interrupt disable flags (IFF1, IFF2) 302 are the same as those shown in Fig. 61 (fourth embodiment). The IFF1 register is a register for determining whether a maskable interrupt is enabled or disabled. The IFF2 register is a register used to restore the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt, and to restore the IFF1 register by a RETEX instruction after executing a CALLEX instruction.
In addition to the registers described above, various other registers such as a Q register and a U register are provided, but illustration and description of these will be omitted in the eighth embodiment.

The registers, counters, and flags shown in Figure 95 are merely examples and are not limited to those shown in Figure 95. For example, the 8-bit counter 501 is provided in the function control register area, but this is not limiting and it can also be provided in the CPU register area within the main CPU 55 or configured as a circuit. Similarly, the interrupt flag 504 can be any flag that has the function of storing on/off, and can be provided in the CPU register area rather than in the function control register area, or configured as a circuit. Similarly, the prescaler register 502, counter setting register 503, and interrupt wait monitor register 301 can also be provided in the CPU register area or other areas within the internal memory, or configured as a circuit.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in ROM 54 in FIG.
The internal ROM 54 has a used area and a non-used area.
The "usage area" is a storage area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
In addition, the "area outside the use area" is a memory area in which information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored, such as a memory area in which a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), a program used during testing, and a program for preventing cheating are stored.
The used area and the non-used area of the built-in ROM 54 are respectively provided with a program area and a data area.
The "program area", also called the "control area", is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored.
Furthermore, a "data area" is a storage area in which information other than programs is stored, and in which data used when a program is executed is stored.

Here, as shown in parentheses in Fig. 96, the "usage area" may be referred to as a "first area." Also, the "area outside the use area" may be referred to as a "second area."
The program area of the area of use may be called the "first program area" or the "first control area." The data area of the area of use may be called the "first data area."
Furthermore, a program stored in the program area of the use area may be referred to as a "first program."
Similarly, the program area outside the area in use may be called a "second program area" or a "second control area." Also, the data area outside the area in use may be called a "second data area."
Furthermore, the program stored in the program area outside the area of use may be called a "second program."

As shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, there is an unused area (address "11FFH") between the program area and data area of the used area, but this unused area may be eliminated and the program area and data area of the used area may be arranged so that they are continuous.
In addition, there is an unused area (addresses "1DF7H" to "1FFFH") between the used area and the area outside the used area, but this unused area may be eliminated and the used area and the area outside the used area may be arranged so that they are continuous.
Furthermore, in the area outside the used area, the program area and data area are arranged contiguously, but like the used area, there may be an unused area of one byte or more between the program area and the data area.
The used area and the area outside the used area may be defined to refer only to the program area and data area, and to exclude the unused area. On the other hand, when there is an unused area between the program area and the data area, as in the used area in Figure 96, the unused area may be included in the term used area (or area outside the used area).

In addition to the above-mentioned used area, non-used area, and unused area, the built-in ROM 54 also has a memory area for storing the company name, date, model name (of the gaming machine 10), etc., and a program management area.
In the above, the vector address (0004H) described in detail below is provided in the program area of the use area in this embodiment.
The program code area start/end addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) are provided in the program management area.
The program management area includes program code area setting addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and an interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), which will be described later.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the internal RWM 53 in FIG.
The internal RWM 53 has a use area (which may be referred to as a "first area") and an area outside the use area (which may be referred to as a "second area"), similar to the area of the internal ROM 54. The concepts of the "use area" and the "area outside the use area" are the same as those of the internal ROM 54.
The used area and the non-used area in the internal RWM 53 each have a work area, an unused area, and a stack area.
The working area (also referred to as the "first working area") and the stack area (also referred to as the "first stack area") in the usage area are memory areas that are used (updated, referenced) during the execution of programs (programs related to the progress of the game) stored in the program area of the usage area of the built-in ROM 54.

Similarly, the working area (also referred to as the "second working area") and the stack area (also referred to as the "second stack area") in the area outside the used area are memory areas that are used (updated, referenced) during the execution of programs (programs that are not related to the progress of the game, for example, programs related to the display of the role ratio monitor) stored in the program area of the area outside the used area of the built-in ROM 54.
The "stack area" is a storage area where data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).

Next, the interrupt initial setting address will be described.
First, a "vector address" refers to an address that stores the start address (first address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) that is executed when a timer interrupt processing trigger occurs. In other words, the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) itself is not stored in the vector address, but rather the address that stores the location (first address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR).
The "interrupt initial setting address" is an address that stores data that allows the value of the vector address to be specified. In particular, in this embodiment, the vector address cannot be specified by the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address alone, but the value of the vector address can be specified based on the value of the I register and the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address.

98 is a diagram for explaining an interrupt initial setting address, in which (A) shows the details of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address, and (B) shows the relationship between the interrupt priority and the interrupt priority setting value.
96, the interrupt initial setting address is provided in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, and in this embodiment, the address is "3FDAH" (1 byte). However, this is an example and is not limiting.
After the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the data value stored in this interrupt initial setting address is read, and this data value is used to determine a vector address.

98A, the upper four bits (A7 bits to A4 bits) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address have a predetermined value as the vector address setting value, which in this embodiment is "0000B." This vector address setting value constitutes part of the vector address value, as will be described later.
In this embodiment, the vector address setting value is set to "0H (0000B)", but it is not limited to this and various settings such as "8H (1000H)" and "FH (1111B)" are possible.
In addition, among the data values of the interrupt initial setting address, the A3 bit and the A2 bit are fixed values, and in this embodiment are set to "00B." Note that, as will be described in detail later, this fixed 2-bit value is configured to be checked (in security mode) when the gaming machine 10 is started, and if the 2-bit value is not "00B," an error occurs.
Furthermore, this fixed value is not limited to "00B" and can be set to various values such as "11B".
Furthermore, the two lowest bits A1 and A0 of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address are interrupt priority setting values.
In this embodiment, four interrupt priority setting values are provided, namely, "00B", "01B", "10B", and "11B", as shown in FIG. 98(B).

FIG. 98B shows the relationship between interrupt priority setting values and interrupt causes.
In this embodiment, there are five types of interrupt causes, "IR0" to "IR5," and the smaller the last number, the higher the interrupt priority. In other words, the interrupt cause "IR0" has the highest interrupt priority, and the interrupt cause "IR5" has the lowest interrupt priority.
The types of interrupts include "PTC0" to "PTC2,""RX0" to "RX1," and "XINT." Here, "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used in timer interrupt processing, and "PTC2" in particular corresponds to the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the interrupt priority setting value is set to "01B." As a result, the interrupt priorities are set to "PTC0,""PTC1,""PTC2,""XINT,""RX0," and "RX1," in descending order of priority.
Furthermore, when "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, the A1 bit and A0 bit of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address become "01B".
As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the interrupt initial setting address is "3FDAH", and the data value of the interrupt initial setting address is "00000001B".

FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining vector address values and data values stored at the vector addresses.
FIG. 99A shows vector address values.
In this embodiment, the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the internal ROM 54 and is 2 bytes in size.
As shown in FIG. 99A, the value of the upper byte of the vector address is the I register value, and the value of the lower byte is made up of the vector address set value and the automatically assigned value.

Here, the I register value in this embodiment is "00H". As shown in Fig. 95, the I register is provided in the CPU register area, and is set to "00H" after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In other words, immediately after the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the values of each register provided in the CPU register area are cleared. Thereafter, unless a value other than "00H" is stored in the I register, the I register value remains "00H".
In this embodiment, no value is set in the I register after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, the I register value remains "00H."
Therefore, the value of the most significant byte of the vector address is "00H".

Next, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A7 to A4 bit values correspond to the A7 to A4 bit values (vector address setting value) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH). As shown in Figure 98 (A), the A7 to A4 bit value of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address is "0000B", so this value becomes the A7 to A4 bit value of the lower byte of the vector address.

In the lower byte of the vector address value, the A3 to A0 bits are automatically assigned values.
99B is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt causes and automatically assigned values. As shown in FIG. 98B, in this embodiment, "01B" is used as the interrupt priority setting value, and the priority of the interrupt cause of PTC2, which is the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment, is "IR2".
99(B), the automatically assigned value for the interrupt cause "IR2" and the interrupt "PTC2 (I_INTR)" is "0100B" (04H). This "0100B" becomes the value of bits A3 to A0 of the vector address value.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the value of the vector address is
"00000000/00000100B" = "0004H"
This becomes:
As a result, in FIG. 96, "0004H" becomes the vector address in the storage area of the built-in ROM 54 starting from "0000H".
As mentioned above, the vector address value is 2 bytes, so the actual vector addresses are "0004H" and "0005H".

99(C) is a diagram showing an example of data values of a vector address. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored starting at "1134H" in the program area of the used area of the internal ROM 54. In other words, the starting address of the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is "1134H."
Therefore, the data value of the vector address (0004H) becomes "1134H".
When "1134H" is stored in a 2-byte vector address, the lower byte value "34H" is stored in the first "0004H" and "11H" is stored in the next "0005H".
This means:
0004H:34H (00110100B)
0005H:11H (00010001B)
is stored.

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on and the main CPU 55 starts up, it is possible to determine where the vector address is based on the data value of the interrupt initial setting address and the I address value.
Specifically, first, since the value of the upper four bits of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) is "0000B", the value of the upper four bits of the lower byte of the vector address becomes "0000B".
In addition, since the value of the interrupt priority setting value, which is the value of the lower two bits of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), is "01B", the value of the lower four bytes of the lower byte of the vector address corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2) is assigned to "0100B" by the interrupt controller.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the value of the I register becomes "00H", and the value of the upper byte of the vector address becomes "00000000B".
From the above, the main CPU 55 can recognize that the vector address (the address where the starting address of "I_INTR" is stored) corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2, which corresponds to the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment) is "0004H".
Therefore, it is possible to recognize the address at which the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored (the start address of the timer interrupt processing program) based on the data value stored in the vector address.

However, after the power is turned on, the process of setting "00H" to the I register is not executed. When the power is turned on, the CPU register area on the main CPU 55 side in Fig. 95 is initialized, and as a result, the I register value becomes "00H" like the other register values.
Furthermore, when the registers are initialized after the power is turned on, "F0H" is stored in the Q register. When "F0H" is stored in the Q register, the Q register is specified when specifying the upper address "F0H" in the storage area of the built-in RWM 53.
In this embodiment, when the timer interrupt process (I_INTR) of the PTC2 is initiated, the program (i.e., the timer interrupt process (I_INTR)) at the address corresponding to the data (1134H) stored in the vector addresses ("0004H" and "0005H") is called. In other words, the program code of the timer interrupt process (I_INTR) becomes executable.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the process from when the power is turned on until the transition to the user mode in this embodiment.
First, before power is turned on (when the power is off), "XSRST" is "L (low)." Here, "XSRST" indicates the operating status of the main CPU 55, and when the main CPU 55 is in a state where it should not operate (stopped), "XSRST = L" (indicating that the main CPU 55 is stopped).
When the power is turned on under these circumstances, the system reset is released, and once the power supply is stabilized, the main CPU 55 goes from "L (low)" to "H (high)" in terms of circuitry.

Next, the registers in the CPU register area are initialized, and it is determined whether or not there is a PROM mode request. Here, "PROM mode" refers to a mode in which data is written to ROM (ROM is burned). If it is determined that there is a request to switch to PROM mode, the machine switches to PROM mode, and if it is determined that there is no request to switch to PROM mode, the machine then switches to security mode. Note that gaming machines installed in the market are configured so that after the system reset is released, it is determined that there is no request to switch to PROM mode.
In the security mode, a security check is performed, and if the security check is judged to be OK, the mode is shifted to the user mode, and if the security check is judged to be NG, the execution (processing) is stopped.
As a security check in this security mode, the program code area setting address of the program management area, the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), etc. are read. Then, the presence or absence of setting errors in the program management area is checked and self-diagnosis is performed. In this security mode, the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) is read and the vector address value is recognized.

Here, the data of the interrupt initial setting address is read, and if the value of the fixed value (A3 and A2 bits) in FIG. 98(A) is not "00B", it is determined that a setting error has occurred in the program management area.
If the security check is judged to be OK in the security mode, the system then shifts to the user mode.
This user mode corresponds to program processing that starts from "0000H" in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54.
In addition, in FIG. 100, "traveling outside the designated area" will be described later.

FIG. 101 shows an example of a program that starts from "0000H" in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54.
In this embodiment, the call instructions issued by the main CPU 5 include a special call instruction and a normal call instruction.
The special call instruction is called a "RST instruction," and the normal call instruction is called a "CALLF instruction."
The RST instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 1-byte (4-cycle) program. On the other hand, the CALLF instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 2-byte (4-cycle) program. Therefore, the number of bytes required to write the RST instruction is smaller than the number of bytes required to write the CALLF instruction, so using the RST instruction can reduce the program size more than using the CALLF instruction. Therefore, programs that are called frequently are called using the RST instruction.

Here, a "frequently called program" is, for example, a program that is called many times (multiple times) in one game.
However, examples of "frequently called programs" include programs that are called at least once per game, and programs that are likely to be called during play, although they may not necessarily be called at least once per game.

In this embodiment, addresses that can be called using the RST instruction are limited to predetermined addresses.
Specifically, the "predetermined address" is:
0008H
0010H
0018H
0020H
0028H
0030H
0038H
0040H
It consists of eight parts:
These eight addresses are merely examples, and the values (numbers) and number of "predetermined addresses" can be set in various ways depending on the specifications of the chip, etc.

By storing programs that can be called by the RST instruction in the above eight addresses, the program capacity can be reduced.
On the other hand, as described above, the program area in the use area starts at "0000H," and the power-on program is stored from this "0000H." The power-on program corresponds to, for example, the "program start process (M_PRG_START)" shown in Fig. 41 (third embodiment).

As mentioned above, the vector address is "0004H."
Therefore, as shown in FIG.
0000H: Power-on program (start program)
:
0004H: Vector address:
0008H: Program 1 called by the RST command
:
0010H: Program 2 called by the RST command
:
0018H: Program 3 called by RST command
:
0020H: Program 4 called by the RST command
:
0028H: Program 5 called by RST command
:
0030H: Program 6 called by the RST command
:
0038H: Program 7 called by RST command
:
0040H: Program 8 called by RST command
:
This is the arrangement of data (including instructions and programs).

In this embodiment, the jump instruction requires a capacity of 3 bytes. Therefore, the jump instruction is stored in "0001H" to "0003H", and "0050H" is specified as the jump destination address. The program following "0000H" is stored from "0050H" onwards.
Here, the power-on program may include the jump instruction, or may not include the jump instruction.
This allows the power-on program to start at "0000H", and then jump to "0050H" with the next jump command "0001H", from which the power-on program can continue.
By setting it in this way, the power-on program can be started from "0000H" while the vector address can be placed at "0004H." Furthermore, the power-on program can be started from "0000H," while the RST instruction can be placed at "0008H,""0010H," etc.

In the subsequent power-on program, it is determined whether or not to transition to a setting change mode, for example.
Here, since the voltage is unstable when the power is turned on, there is a risk that the jump command will not be executed properly. If the jump command is not executed properly, it may take a long time to transition to the setting change mode, or the setting change mode may not be entered at all. Therefore, when the power is turned on by performing an operation to transition to the setting change mode (for example, a predetermined operation of the setting key), if the setting change mode is not entered within a predetermined time (T), it can be determined that the program containing the jump command was not executed properly. If the administrator determines that the setting change mode will not be entered within the predetermined time (T), the administrator should power the gaming machine 10 off and on again. When the power is turned on again, the program will start again from address "0000H" after passing through security mode.
It is also preferable that the jump command in the power-on program be executed from "0000H" to "0007H" so that "0008H" can be used as the RST command.

Furthermore, when storing program 1 called by the RST command at "0008H," program 1 is allocated to the 8-byte capacity from "0008H" to "000FH," or a program that requires a capacity of 8 bytes or less.
Similarly, when storing program 2 called by the RST command at "0010H," program 2 is allocated in the 8-byte capacity from "0010H" to "0017H," or a program that requires a capacity of 8 bytes or less.

Here, if the program 2 is made up of, for example, four bytes "0010H" to "0013H", the addresses "0014H" to "0017H" may be used in any way.
For example, first, addresses "0014H" to "0017H" may be set as an unused area (storing "00000000B").
Secondly, other programs that fit within 4 bytes may be stored in "0014H" to "0017H".
Thirdly, a program following the power-on program starting at "0000H" may be stored at "0014H," and a jump command (a command to jump to the address where the program following "0014H" is stored) may be stored at "0015H" to "0017H."

The same applies to "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H", and "0040H".
For example, if program 4 called by the RST instruction is stored at "0020H," and program 4 has a capacity of 14 bytes from "0020H" to "002DH," program 5 that calls "0028H" with the RST instruction may not be provided. However, if the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, it is preferable to store it at "0040H" or later, where there is no limit to the program capacity. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to store eight programs that can be called by the RST instruction.
Furthermore, when a program called by an RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, the program can be allocated not only at "0040H" or later, but also, for example, in the above example, the program can be stored from "0020H" to "0024H," a jump command can be stored at "0025H" to "0027H," and the jump command can be used to jump to "0040H" or later. By doing this, a program that can be called by an RST instruction can be stored at "0028H." By using this method, even when the program called by an RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, eight programs that can be called by an RST instruction can be provided.
In the example of FIG. 101, an instruction to jump to "0050H" is stored at "0001H", and the program following "0000H" is stored after "0050H".

In this embodiment, the vector address is set to "0004H", but it is not limited to this.
Here, the upper byte of the vector address value is the value of the I register. As in this embodiment, the process of setting a specific value in the I register is not executed after power-on, and the I register is initialized as a register of the main CPU 55 and remains at "00H," so the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "00H." However, this is not limiting, and if the process of setting a specific value in the I register is executed after power-on and the I register is initialized, the upper byte value of the vector address can be set to the specific value.
However, as shown in FIG. 96, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the internal ROM 54, the value of the I register will be in the range of "00H" to "11H".
As will be described later, vector addresses are not limited to being provided in the program area of the used area, but can also be provided in the data area of the used area, the program area of the area outside the used area, or the data area of the area outside the used area.

However, if the I register is initialized after power-on and then a process is executed to set a specific value in the I register, then that requires a corresponding amount of program capacity. For example, if the specific value is "02H," then after power-on and the I register is initialized, it is necessary to provide an instruction (program) to load "02H" into the I register (LD I, 02H). If the program requires, for example, 2 bytes of capacity, then that amount will consume the program storage area.
In contrast, in this embodiment, when the initialized value "00H" is used as the I register value, there is no need to set a specific value in the I register, which saves the program storage area. As a result, setting the upper byte value of the vector address to "00H" reduces the program capacity.

Furthermore, when the I register value is set to "00H," the vector address value is not limited to "0004H." Specifically, the vector address value can be set to any value, for example, "00FEH" or "00FFH" or less, other than the addresses to be called by the RST instruction (such as the above-mentioned "0008H" and "0010H"). For example, it can be set to "00F4H." If the value of the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the vector address is set to "0100B (4H)," the automatically assigned value of this embodiment shown in FIG. 99B can be used as is.
Also, when the upper 4-bit value of the lower byte of the vector address is set to "FH" (1111B) as described above, the upper 4-bit value (vector address setting value) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) in Figure 98 (A) becomes "1111B".

102 shows an example where the vector address value is "00F4H." In this case, since "0004H" is not a vector address, a power-on program can be stored in "0000H" to "0004H."
Also, if a jump instruction requires a program capacity of 3 bytes, the jump instruction can be placed in the 3-byte memory area from "0005H" to "0007H", and program 1 called by the RST instruction can be stored in "0008H" as in Figure 101.

Next, a program called by the RST command, that is, a program called multiple times in one game, will be described.
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of processing called by the RST command, with (A), (B), and (C) showing example 1, example 2, and example 3, respectively.
Example 1 in Fig. 103(A) is a flowchart showing control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). This process corresponds to, for example, step S303 in Fig. 46 (third embodiment), and is a process for setting command data to be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.
Furthermore, although not shown, in Figure 46 (third embodiment), in the game start setting process in step S272, an output request for the operating status (whether or not the BB operating pattern is displayed, whether or not the replay operating pattern is displayed, etc.) is set, and control command set 1 is executed.
Similarly, although not shown, in the start switch acceptance process in step S279 in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), an output request at the start of reel rotation is set and control command set 1 is executed.

103A, first, in step S151, the main control board 50 executes interrupt disable processing. Next, in step S152, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) is executed. Then, in step S503, the interrupt processing that was disabled in step S151 is released (i.e., interrupts are enabled). Through the above processing, interrupt processing is disabled while control command set 2 is being executed.
Although detailed processing of control command set 2 is omitted, this processing is processing for writing control commands. Also, since interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of control command set 2, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by interrupt processing being executed during control command writing processing.

Example 2 in Fig. 103B is a flowchart showing an interrupt wait process (R_INTR_WAIT). This process corresponds to, for example, step S2754 in Fig. 45 (third embodiment) or step S295 in Fig. 46 (third embodiment).
First, in step S161, the main control board 50 acquires the interrupt counter value. This process stores the interrupt counter value in register A. Note that a 16-bit (2-byte counter) interrupt counter value is stored at a specific address in the work area of the used area of the built-in RWM 53, and in step S161, the value stored in the address of the lower 8 bits is stored in register A.
In the next step S162, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the lowest 8 bits of the interrupt counter value has changed. Specifically, the main control board 50 subtracts the value of the lowest 8 bits from the A register value, and if the calculation result is not "0" (if the zero flag is "0"), it determines "Yes." If it determines that the value has changed, it ends the processing of this flowchart, but if it determines that the value has not changed, it continues processing of step S162.

Example 3 of Figure 103 (C) is a flowchart showing countdown (R_CNT_DOWN). This process is used, for example, in the process of subtracting the advantageous zone clear counter in step S301 (game end check process) of Figure 46 (third embodiment), the process of updating the timer value in step S455 (timer measurement) of Figure 47 (third embodiment), or the process of updating the number of AT games during AT play (not shown).
In this process, in step S171, the counter value is decremented by "1" and the process of this flowchart ends.
103 are examples of processes that are called multiple times in one game, and are not limited to these three processes, and many more processes can be used.Then, a program that has a program capacity that can be stored in the above-mentioned address and is called many times in one game is set as the process to be called by the RST command.

104 is a diagram showing program code area designation addresses and their data values. Note that although the term "program code area designation addresses" will be used hereinafter, they may also be called "program code area setting addresses."
As shown in FIG. 96, in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, addresses "3FD3H" to "3FD8H" are set as program code area designation addresses.
The main CPU 55 determines that the program code stored within the range of addresses specified in the program code area is normal when executed, and determines that the program code stored outside the range of addresses specified in the program code area is abnormal (traveling outside the specified area) when executed. If the main CPU 55 determines that the program code is abnormal (traveling outside the specified area), it generates a reset.
In other words, when program code (instructions) stored outside the designated area is called (instructions are fetched), a reset occurs.

This is done for the following reasons.
The first reason is that there is a risk of fraudulent activity in which malicious program code is stored in an area other than the original program area, and the malicious program code is jumped to from the original program area using, for example, a jump command, and then executed.
The second reason is that runaway may occur when the voltage is unstable immediately after power-on, or runaway may occur due to heat, which could result in instructions jumping to an area other than the program area. Specifically, for example, if there is an instruction to jump from address A to address B, if that instruction is not executed correctly, instructions stored at address B and beyond may not be executed within the designed time. In such cases, the power is turned off and then turned back on (restarted).

FIG. 100 also illustrates the processing when traveling outside the designated area.
100, if traveling outside the designated area is detected during execution of the user mode, a reset occurs. In this case, the main CPU 55 initializes the registers, passes through the security mode, and executes the user mode again (executes the program from address "0000H").
However, this is not limiting, and when travel outside the designated area is detected and a reset is generated, after initializing the registers, the process may be executed from the user mode without going through the security mode.
In addition, in the example of Figure 100, the presence or absence of a PROM mode request is determined after the register is initialized, but this is not limited to this. When traveling outside the designated area is detected and a reset is generated, the presence or absence of a PROM mode request may not be determined.
However, when a reset is generated upon detection of travel outside the designated area, the registers are always initialized.

104A is a diagram showing an address for specifying the end address of program code area 1. "Program code area 1" corresponds to the program area in the used area in FIG. 96. "Program code area 2," which will be described later, corresponds to the program area in the area outside the used area in FIG. 96.
As shown in Figure 96, the address range of the program area in the used area is from "0000H" to "11FEH". For this reason, in this embodiment, the start address "0000H" is not defined, and only the end address "11FEH" is defined. In this way, the memory area (2 bytes) for defining the start address "0000H" is not required.
If only the end address is specified and not the start address, the main CPU 55 will inevitably recognize the range from the first address to the end address of the built-in memory as program code area 1. In fact, program code area 1 (the program area of the used area) starts from "0000H," so there is no problem if the main CPU 55 recognizes it as above.

The end address of program code area 1 is stored at addresses "3FD3H" and "3FD4H" (2-byte area) in the program management area. In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 104(A), the lower byte is stored at address "3FD3H" and the upper byte is stored at address "3FD4H".
Therefore, "FEH" (11111110B) is stored in address "3FD3H", and "11H" (00010001B) is stored in address "3FD4H".

FIG. 104B is a diagram showing an address for specifying the start address of the program code area 2.
The addresses for specifying the start address of program code area 2 are set to "3FD5H" and "3FD6H." As shown in Fig. 96, the address range of the program area outside the used area is "2000H" to "245DH." Therefore, the start address of program code area 2 is "2000H."
Therefore, "00H" (000000000B) is stored in address "3FD5H", and "20H" (00100000B) is stored in address "3FD6H".

104(C) is a diagram showing addresses for specifying the end address of program code area 2. The addresses for specifying the end address of program code area 2 are set to "3FD7H" and "3FD8H".
Then, "5DH" (01011101B) is stored in address "3FD7H", and "24H" (00100100B) is stored in address "3FD8H".

As described above, when the end address of program code area 1 and the start and end addresses of program code area 2 are stored in the program management area, the main CPU 55 determines that program code within these specified address ranges is executing normally, but determines that program code outside the specified address range is executing abnormally.

It is also possible not to specify a program code area. In this case, "0000H" is stored in all of the program code area 1 end address, program code area 2 start address, and program code area 2 end address.
Furthermore, for example, if an address is specified only for program code area 1 and no address is specified for program code area 2, the end address of program code area 1 can be set to "11FEH" as shown in FIG. 104, and the start address and end address of program code area 2 can be set to "0000H".

Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) Although the vector address is set in the program area of the area of use, it is also possible to set the vector address in the data area of the area of use. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "12H", after power is turned on, the I register will be set to "12H".
Alternatively, a vector address may be provided in the program area outside the area in use. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "20H", after power is turned on, the I register will be set to "20H".
Furthermore, a vector address may be provided in the data area outside the area of use. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "24H", after power is turned on, a process is executed to store "24H" in the I register.
In addition, in all cases where a vector address is set in the data area of the used area, in the program area of the area outside the used area, or in the data area of the area outside the used area, simply reading the data value stored in the vector address will result in running outside the specified area and will not result in a reset.

(2) The data value stored in the vector address, i.e., the starting address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored, can be set arbitrarily. In the example of Figure 99(c), it is set to "1134H", but this is not limited to this. In addition, the starting address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored may be later than the vector address or earlier than the vector address.
(3) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, two address ranges are defined as the executable range (runnable area) of the program code. However, this is not limited to this, and only one address range may be defined.
Furthermore, when determining the executable range of program code in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54, in the above embodiment only the end address is determined and the start address is not determined, but this is not limited to this and both the start address and the end address may be determined.

(4) In the above embodiment, the addresses storing the program called by the RST instruction are set to "0008H", "0010H", "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H", and "0040H", but the addresses are not limited to these eight. However, it is preferable to set the upper byte of the addresses storing the program called by the RST instruction to "00H".
By doing this, by placing a module that is called multiple times in one game near the starting address (0000H), it becomes possible to design that module first during the development stage and then design (consider) other modules later.

(5) The relationship between the address where the program called by the RST instruction is stored and the vector address is as follows:
First, as shown in FIG. 101, a vector address may be placed before all addresses storing programs called by the RST instruction.
Secondly, as shown in FIG. 102, a vector address may be placed after all addresses storing programs called by the RST instruction.
Third, a vector address may be placed (e.g., "0026H" and "0027H") between one address (e.g., "0020H") where a program called by the RST instruction is stored and another address (e.g., "0028H") where a program called by the RST instruction is stored.

In this case, if the vector address is located within the program area of the used area (within the range of "0000H" to "00FFH"), there is no need to set the upper byte value of the vector address in the I register after power-on. In other words, if the I register value is set to "00H", the program capacity can be reduced.
99B, in this example, the value of bits A3-A0 in the lowest byte of the vector address value is "0100B." Therefore, at this point, the vector address value is "00000000/####0100B" (where "#" is any value of "0" or "1").
Here, the above "####B" (vector address setting value) is "0000B" in the example of Fig. 99(A). However, this is not limiting, and "####B" may be, for example, "1000B (8H)" or "1111B (FH)".
When "####B" is set to "1000B (8H)", the vector address value is "00000000/10000100B", and when "####B" is set to "1111B (FH)", the vector address value is "00000000/11110100B".

(6) The upper byte value of the vector address value is the I register value, which is set to "00H." However, this is not limited to this, and although this overlaps with what has been described above, the upper byte value of the vector address may be set to a value other than "00H," for example, "02H." In this case, after the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the I register is initialized, and then a process is executed to store "02H" in the I register.
In particular, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the internal ROM 54, the value of the I register, that is, the upper byte value of the vector address, may be in the range of "00H" to "11H".

However, since the I register is initialized (to "00H") each time the gaming machine 10 is powered on, after the initialization, a process is executed to store, for example, "02H" in the I register. As described above, for example, program code "LD I, 02H" is provided, and a process to store "02H" in the I register is executed.
On the other hand, if the value of the upper byte of the vector address is set to "00H" as in this embodiment, the I register value will be "00H", so after the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the I register is initialized, there is no need to store a specific value in the I register. In other words, there is no need to provide program code such as "LD I, 00H". This allows the program capacity to be reduced accordingly.

(7) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments may not be implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Ninth Embodiment
The ninth embodiment relates to a gaming machine having a biased role in which the winning role (expected number of medals won) varies depending on the operation mode (pressing order and/or operation timing) of the stop switch 42.
A "biased role" is a role in which the winning role differs depending on the manner in which the stop switch 42 is operated, and which has a unilaterally advantageous pressing sequence and another pressing sequence (a unilaterally disadvantageous pressing sequence), and in a game in which a biased role is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a unilaterally advantageous pressing sequence, the expected number of medals won in that one game (the expected value without taking into account the expected value related to the AT) is higher than when the stop switch 42 is operated in a other pressing sequence.
In addition, the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed can be either normal pressing (stopping first on the left) or irregular pressing (stopping first on the middle or first on the right), but the "unilaterally advantageous pressing order" in the ninth embodiment corresponds to irregular pressing.

A biased role is composed of multiple types of small roles, and winning a biased role corresponds to winning multiple types of small roles. When a biased role is won (when multiple types of small roles are won), if the stop switch 42 is operated in a unilaterally advantageous pressing order, the small role with the largest payout number (hereinafter referred to as a "high-numbered role") will be awarded by the number priority control (see the first embodiment). On the other hand, when a biased role is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than the unilaterally advantageous pressing order, the number priority control (see the first embodiment) will be awarded by a small role other than the small role with the largest payout number (hereinafter referred to as a "low-numbered role"). When the number priority control is executed, a high-numbered role will generally be awarded with "PB = 1".
In contrast, when quantity priority control is executed,
a) When a low-ball wins with "PB = 1",
b) There are cases where a low number wins with "PB≠1" or where no small winning combination wins (missing out on winning combinations).

Furthermore, for the "biased role," the correct button press sequence is not evenly allocated to the six possible button press sequences, and when a biased role is won, operating the stop switch 42 with the irregular button presses described above is configured to be unilaterally advantageous. For this reason, when a biased role is won, there is a unilaterally advantageous button press sequence (irregular button presses) and another button press sequence (unilaterally disadvantageous button press sequence (normal button presses)). Also, "biased" indicates that the advantageous button press sequence is biased toward the irregular button presses.
Specifically, in a game in which a biased role is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in order, the percentage of winning a high number is set to "R1 (%)", and when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in an irregular sequence, the percentage of winning a high number is set to "R2 (%)".
"R1 <R2"
It is configured so that:
In particular, in the ninth embodiment, "R1=0(%)" is set.

Figure 105(a) is a diagram showing the type of role, winning probability, number of payouts for each pressing order of the stop switch 42, etc. in the ninth embodiment, and the same figure (b) is a diagram showing the ball output performance of biased roles. As in the first embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated, a role lottery is performed by the role lottery means 61, and the role shown in Figure 105 is configured to be won with the winning probability shown in the same figure. Note that special roles (bonus roles) are omitted in Figure 105.
In FIG. 105, the biased roles correspond to biased bell 1 to biased bell 4, rare role A, and rare role B.
Here, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, as a so-called push order bell,
Role number "1": Small role A1 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 1)
Role number "2": Small role A2 condition device (left center right correct answer bell 2)
Role number "3": Small role B1 condition device (left and right center correct answer bell 1)
Role number "4": Small role B2 condition device (left and right center correct answer bell 2)
Role number "5": Small role C1 condition device (middle left right correct bell 1)
Role number "6": Small role C2 condition device (middle left right correct bell 2)
Role number "7": Small role D1 condition device (middle right left correct bell 1)
Role number "8": Small role D2 condition device (middle right left correct answer bell 2)
Role number "9": Small role E1 condition device (right left middle correct answer bell 1)
Role number "10": Small role E2 condition device (right left middle correct answer bell 2)
Role number "11": Small role F1 condition device (right center left correct answer bell 1)
Role number "12": Small role F2 condition device (right center left correct answer bell 2)
was established.

As shown in FIG. 10, the winning probabilities for the above winning combination numbers 1 to 12 are all set to the same (number of combinations "2500").
As a result, no matter what order the player presses the buttons during the game, there will be no advantage or disadvantage in the expected number of medals to be won based on winning the winning combination numbers "1" to "12."
In other words, the expected number of medals to be won related to the push order bell is the same whether the game is played by pushing the buttons in order or by pushing the buttons in an irregular order.

In contrast, in the ninth embodiment, the biased role does not result in the correct button press order (a high number winning) when buttons are pressed in the correct order, and the correct button press order is limited to irregular button presses.
In other words, when a biased role is won, the correct button press order is limited to irregular button presses, so if a player plays the game in the normal order of pressing the stop switch 42, a high prize will not be won when a biased role is won.

The roles that make up biased bells 1 to 4 are all 1-coin roles, 2-coin roles, and 7-coin roles. When any of the biased bells is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct sequence of irregular button presses, the number-priority control will result in a prize of 7-coin roles, which are high-value bells, with "PB = 1." On the other hand, when any of the biased bells is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct sequence of button presses, which is an incorrect sequence, the number-priority control will result in a prize of 1-coin roles, which are low-value bells, with "PB = 1." Furthermore, when any of the biased bells is won and the irregular button presses are used but the incorrect sequence is used, the number-priority control will result in a prize of 1-coin roles, which are low-value bells, with "PB = 1."
In other words, in this example, when a biased bell is won, no misses will occur regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

To explain more specifically, for example, when biased bell 1 is won, if stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order of center left and right, a 7-coin role will be won with "PB = 1". On the other hand, when biased bell 1 is won, if stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order of center right left, right left center, or right center left, a 1-coin role will be won with "PB = 1".
On the other hand, when biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect order of pressing (left-center-right, or left-right-center), "PB=1" will result in a 1-coin or 2-coin win. Whether a 1-coin or 2-coin win is won depends on the operation timing of the stop switch 42. The same applies when biased bells 2 to 4 are won.

Similarly, when biased bell 2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order of center, right, and left, a 7-coin role is won with "PB=1", and if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order of center, left, right, center, or right, center, left, a 1-coin role is won with "PB=1".
In addition, when biased bell 3 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order of right, left, and center, "PB=1" will be won and a 7-piece role will be won, and if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order of center left, right, center right, left, or right center left, "PB=1" will be won and a 1-piece role will be won.
Furthermore, when biased bell 4 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order of right, center, left, a 7-piece role is won with "PB=1", and if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order of center, left, right, center, right, left, or right, left, center, a 1-piece role is won with "PB=1".

For each play, biased bells 1 to 4 have a combined probability of winning of 4/5. Here, when you press the buttons in order when you win a biased bell, if you assume that a 1-coin role has a 50% probability of winning and a 2-coin role has a 50% probability of winning, and if you press the buttons in order for each play, the expected number of medals won based on the biased bell is:
4/5 x 1/2 x 1 + 4/5 x 1/2 x 2 = 1.2 (sheets)
This becomes:
On the other hand, if you play every time and press the irregular buttons, the expected number of medals you get based on the biased bell is:
4/5 x 1/4 x 7 + 4/5 x 3/4 x 1 = 2.0 (sheets)
This becomes:

The rare combination A and the rare combination B are types of biased combinations. Both the rare combination A and the rare combination B are combinations including a 1-piece combination and a 12-piece combination.
As shown in Figure 105, when rare role A or rare role B is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in order, the pressing order is incorrect and a 1-coin role (low value) is won with "PB = 1".
On the other hand, when rare role A or rare role B is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in an irregular order, the pressing order is correct and a 12-piece role (high value) is won with "PB=1".
The combined winning probability of rare role A and rare role B is "1/125", so in the case of pressing in order, the expected number of medals acquired based on rare role A and rare role B is,
1/125 x 1 = 0.008 (sheets)
This becomes:
On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the expected number of medals acquired based on rare role A and rare role B is,
1/125 x 12 = 0.096 (sheets)
This becomes:
From the above, when a biased role is won, the expected number of medals won in that game will be unilaterally advantageous if you press the buttons in an irregular sequence, and unilaterally disadvantageous if you press the buttons in the normal sequence (Figure 105 (b)).

The roles other than the biased roles include a common bell, a watermelon, and a replay.
The common bell does not have the concept of correct/incorrect button press order, and regardless of the button press order in which the stop switch 42 is operated, a 6-piece role will be won (PB=1).
In addition, the watermelon is a minor winning combination that can be won regardless of the pressing order when it is won, but it is a combination that can result in a miss. For this reason, in Figure 105, it is displayed as "5 coins (when winning)" or "0 coins (when missing)." However, depending on the pattern arrangement and the timing of operating the stop switch 42, there may be differences in the ease of winning, but we will not explain this point here.
The common bell pays out 6 coins and the winning probability is 1/88.
In addition, the payout for watermelon is 5 coins (if you don't miss any), and the winning probability is 1/200. Assuming that the chance of winning is 50% and the chance of missing is 50%, the expected number of medals won from the common bell and watermelon combined is:
6 x 1/88 + 5 x 1/200 x 1/2 ≒ 0.081 (sheets)
is.

From the above, the expected number of medals won based on all roles when playing in order is:
1.2 + 0.008 + 0.081 = 1.289 (pieces)
This becomes:
On the other hand, the expected number of medals acquired based on all roles when playing with irregular pushes is:
2.0 + 0.096 + 0.081 = 2.177 (sheets)
This becomes:
Therefore, the expected number of medals to be acquired is greater when pressing buttons in an irregular sequence than when pressing buttons in the normal sequence.
In the ninth embodiment, the number of bets (also called the "prescribed number") is "3 (coins)." Therefore, even if a game is played by pressing irregular buttons every time, the expected value of the number of medals acquired per game will not be positive.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, as in the other embodiments described above, there is a normal section (non-advantageous section) and an advantageous section. Furthermore, the advantageous section has a non-AT and an AT. The non-AT has a non-CZ and a CZ (a state in which the AT winning expectation rate is higher than that of the non-CZ).
In the normal zone, the AT lottery (in the following explanation of the ninth embodiment, the CZ lottery will be referred to as the AT lottery) is not executed. In contrast, in the advantageous zone and during non-AT, the AT lottery is executed. The AT lottery can be executed when rare role A and rare role B (hereinafter, rare role A and rare role B will be collectively referred to simply as "rare role") are won.
Although the AT lottery may be executed when a common bell or watermelon is won, in the ninth embodiment, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, the AT lottery can only be executed when a rare role is won.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing in order when a rare role is won, the expected probability of winning the AT (also called the "winning probability", "winning rate", "expected winning value", etc.) is "P1", and when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing in an irregular manner when a rare role is won, the expected probability of winning the AT is "P2".
P1>P2
For this reason, since it is not known when a rare combination will be won during play, in order to increase the probability of winning the AT in the advantageous zone and non-AT, it is advantageous for the player to always play by pressing the buttons in order (Fig. 105(b)).
The expected probability of winning the AT "P2" may be a value exceeding "0" or may be "0." In the ninth embodiment, "P2=0" is set.

The AT lottery is conducted based on the start switch 41 being operated and a rare role being won (step S283 in Figure 115 described later), so the stop switch 42 has not yet been operated at the time the AT lottery is executed.
Therefore, for example, when a rare role is won, the AT lottery is held at the timing of the rare role win (when the start switch 41 is operated), and if the AT is won and the current game was an irregular press, the AT win will be invalidated (the AT win will be discarded) when the current game is completely stopped (which may be at the end of the current game or the start of the next game).

As described above, when a biased role is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in an irregular sequence, the expected number of medals to be acquired in the game will be higher than when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in the normal sequence.
However, as described above, when a biased role is won in a favorable zone and not in an AT, if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in order, the right to an AT may be granted, but if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in an irregular order, the right to an AT may not be granted.
For this reason, the total ball output performance (overall game), including balls output in the AT, is higher when pressing in order than when pressing in irregular order (Figure 105 (b)).
For this reason, in the ninth embodiment, the order of pressing in order (stopping first on the left) is referred to as the "recommended order of pressing," and the order of pressing in an irregular manner (stopping first on the middle or first on the right) is referred to as the "non-recommended order of pressing" (Figure 105 (b)).
"Recommended" means that if you play in that order in an advantageous zone and in a non-AT zone, the expected total number of medals you will win (for the entire game) will be higher than with other orders.

However, pressing the buttons in order is merely a "recommended" rule, not an "instruction." In other words, pressing buttons in an irregular order is "not recommended" and not "prohibited."
In the ninth embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended pressing order in a favorable zone and non-AT, a recommended image (which may also be called a "predetermined image" or "specific image") is displayed.
Here, the "recommended image" is an image that informs the player that pressing buttons in order is the recommended order, in other words, that pressing buttons in order is advantageous to the player. Note that the display of the recommended image is a display that informs the player of the recommended order, and is different from a warning display. When the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing buttons in an irregular order, no penalty will be imposed on the player in the next game or thereafter, and the player will not suffer any disadvantage. However, as described above, the probability of winning the AT in a game in which the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing buttons in order differs from that in a game in which the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing buttons in an irregular order.
For this reason, the display of the recommendation image is intended to inform the player that the expected total number of medals won (throughout the game) will decrease if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the stop switch 42 in an irregular manner. Here, "the expected total number of medals won (throughout the game) will decrease" corresponds to, for example, a lower probability of winning the AT, a decrease in the expected number of medals won during the AT when the AT is won, an increase in the ceiling number of games until the AT is won, etc.
Examples of "recommended images" include images such as "Left push (sequential push) is recommended,""Left push (sequential push) is advantageous," and "Left push (sequential push) is more likely to win the AT." However, various other images can be used as recommended images.

In games in which the stop switch 42 is pressed in order, the recommended image is not displayed. In contrast, in games in which the stop switch 42 is pressed in an irregular order in a favorable zone and non-AT, the recommended image is displayed at the time of the first stop. Even if the recommended image is displayed, it will be terminated at least at the start of the next game (when the start switch 41 is operated). However, it is also possible to terminate the display of the recommended image when the current game is completely stopped or when a bet is placed for the next game. In this case, it is preferable to execute a process to match the internal control state with the presentation image when the recommended image display ends. This configuration shortens the period for which the recommended image is displayed, preventing players from feeling annoyed and other players from seeing the recommended image and realizing that the machine was played using a non-recommended button press order, which could lead to a decrease in subsequent activity.
In addition, a sound may be output to notify the user of the recommended button press order together with or instead of the recommended image. Below, appropriate and inappropriate examples of notification of the recommended button press order, including the display of a recommended image, are given.
(1) Examples of inappropriate notification of recommended button press sequences a) Displaying "No irregular button presses" is inappropriate as notification of recommended button press sequences. This is because the word "prohibited" is a warning expression. The gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the recommended button press sequence for the stop switch 42, but since the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed is decided by the player, it is inappropriate to prohibit a specific button press sequence.

b) Displaying "DANGER" is inappropriate as a notification of the recommended button press order. This is because, like the above-mentioned "prohibited," it is a warning expression.
c) Displaying black and yellow stripes, prohibition marks (a red line sloping diagonally downwards to the right within a red circle), or "x" marks are inappropriate for indicating the recommended button press order. These images are generally recognized as warnings, dangers, prohibitions, etc.
d) The output of sounds similar to buzzers or alarms is inappropriate for informing the user of the recommended button press order. This is because, in common sense, these sounds are recognized as warning sounds or prohibition sounds. However, it is of course possible to output sounds such as buzzers or alarms when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10, such as a medal selector error or a hopper error.

(2) Examples of appropriate notification of recommended button press order a) Displaying "Left button press (in order) is recommended" as described above is appropriate notification of recommended button press order because it notifies the player of the optimal playing method (button press order) for the player (the one that maximizes the player's profit).
b) Outputting a sound for the reels 31 to stop that is different from the normal sound is appropriate as a notification of the recommended pressing order. If the sound is of a level that is generally used as a presentation for the gaming machine 10, it does not fall under the category of a warning sound.
c) Turning off the backlights of the reels 31 after the reels have stopped is an appropriate way to notify the user of the recommended pressing order. This is because, as with the above, this is a commonly used effect for the gaming machine 10.

d) Darkening the LCD screen is an appropriate way to notify the user of the recommended button press order. This is for the same reason as in c) above. The timing of the darkening may be at the first stop, second stop, full stop, or after full stop.
e) Not outputting the stop sound of the reels 31 is appropriate for announcing the recommended pressing order. This is for the same reason as c) above. Note that it is acceptable to not output the stop sound only at the first stop, not output the stop sounds at the first and second stops, or not output any stop sounds. Also, not outputting the winning combination sound is appropriate for announcing the recommended pressing order.

f) When a continuous effect spanning multiple games is being output, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended button press sequence, it is appropriate to interrupt the progress of the continuous effect as a notification of the recommended button press sequence. This is for the same reason as in c) above.
g) When the number of remaining plays is displayed during the premonition, not displaying the subtraction of the remaining plays is appropriate as a notification of the recommended button press sequence. Note that if the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended button press sequence during the premonition, the internal control will not execute the subtraction process of the remaining plays during the premonition. This is because doing so merely notifies the fact and does not constitute a warning, etc.

h) Displaying an image and/or outputting a voice message saying "You are pressing buttons in an irregular order" is appropriate as a notification of the recommended button press order. This is because, like in g) above, this is merely a notification of the facts and does not constitute a warning or the like.
i) Displaying an image stating, "Pressing the buttons in order will increase AT performance and decrease the base. Pressing the buttons in an irregular order will decrease AT performance and increase the base," is appropriate as a notification of the recommended button press order. This is for the same reasons as in g) above.
j) When displaying the number of plays after a specified condition (for example, moving into a favorable zone or starting a new cycle related to a lottery such as an AT) is met (for example, the number of plays after moving into a favorable zone or the number of plays remaining until the end of a cycle related to a lottery such as an AT), it is appropriate to not add or subtract the number of plays based on the fact that a non-recommended button press sequence was used in a specified game (for example, a game in a favorable zone or a game in a cycle related to a lottery such as an AT) in order to notify the user of the recommended button press sequence.
In addition, if, after transitioning to a favorable zone, the game is not controlled to a favorable game state such as an AT even after the specified number of plays or the specified number of cycles have been consumed, a rescue function (also called a "ceiling") is known that forcibly controls the game to a favorable game state such as an AT.
Furthermore, when a non-recommended button press sequence is used in the specified game, the internal control will not perform the addition process (in the case of an increment counter) or subtraction process (in the case of a decrement counter) of the number of games related to the rescue function, but will perform the subtraction process for the advantageous zone clear counter.This is for the same reason as in g) above.

106 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (Example 1) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order (sequential pressing) during a favorable zone and non-AT. In the figure, the chronological order is (a) → (b) → (c) → (d).
In this example, during the advantageous zone and non-AT, the current stage is displayed on the image display device 23. The stage has normal and high probability, and is set so that when it is high probability, the probability of winning the AT is higher than when it is normal. Also, when a rare combination is won when the stage is normal, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to promote the stage from normal to high probability. The following example shows an example of when the stage is promoted from normal to high probability.
In FIG. 10A, before the game starts, a pre-game effect is displayed on the image display device 23. The stage at this point is normal.
Then, as shown in FIG. 1(b), when the start switch 41 is operated and a rare combination is won, a stage promotion suggestion effect is started.

Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, it is confirmed that this is the recommended pressing order at this point, so the recommended image is not displayed, and a stage promotion suggestion effect develops as an effect when the left (first) stop switch 42 is operated. Note that, although this example shows an example in which a stage promotion suggestion effect develops when the first stop switch 42 is operated, it goes without saying that the effect does not have to change between when the game starts (while all reels 31 are spinning) and when the left stop switch 42 is operated (when the left reel 31 has stopped).
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, when all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 stop, an effect indicating that the player has successfully advanced to the next stage is output as the effect after all the reels 31 have stopped. Then, the stage switches from the normal stage to the high probability stage.
As described above, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the recommended image is not displayed.

Figure 107 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (Example 1) when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended button press sequence (irregular button presses) in the example of Figure 106. In this example, a rare combination is won, resulting in a lottery to advance the stage from normal to high probability, but because the button press sequence was non-recommended, the win is invalidated, and the stage does not advance to high probability. In the figure, the chronological order is (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e) → (f) (the same applies to Figures 108 to 111 below).
In Figure 107, (a) and (b) are both the same as Figure 106(a) and (b). Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, if the first stop is a non-recommended button press sequence, the main control board 50 sends that command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 determines, based on the received command, that the first stop is a non-recommended button press sequence, it displays a recommended image. This recommended image covers almost the entire image display area of the image display device 23, and the previous stage promotion suggestion effects are hidden by the recommended image and become invisible.

After the recommended image is displayed, the sound output from the speaker 22 may be the sound corresponding to the previous effect image (i.e., the same sound as in FIG. 106 ), or the sound corresponding to the previous effect image may be interrupted and the sound for the recommended image may be output. An example of the sound for the recommended image is a sound such as "We recommend pressing left" output once or multiple times. Furthermore, while the sound corresponding to the previous effect image is being output, a sound corresponding to the recommended image, such as "We recommend pressing left," may be output over the sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 10(d), even if all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 stop, the display of the recommended image is maintained.
Furthermore, as shown in (e) of the figure, the display of the recommended image is maintained even when a bet is placed. Furthermore, as shown in (f) of the figure, when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the recommended image ends at that timing and returns to the image before the recommended image was displayed.
The example in Fig. 107 is one in which the start switch 41 is operated within three seconds of the engine coming to a complete stop (d) in the figure. As will be described later, when a recommended image is displayed, a demo display is executed three seconds after the engine comes to a complete stop. This also applies to Figs. 109 and 111.

Figure 108 shows the flow of presentation (example 2) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order (press in order) during a favorable zone and non-AT.
In this example, character images are displayed on the image display device 23 (corresponding to characters A, B, and C in the figure (a)), and when a rare combination is won, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a new character will be acquired. When the number of characters reaches a predetermined number (for example, "5"), the game transitions to CZ, or the AT lottery is favored. The following example shows an example in which a new character D is acquired by winning a rare combination.
In the figure, (a) shows the situation before the start of the game. In this situation, the pre-game performance is being output, and images of characters A, B, and C are displayed as characters.
Next, proceeding to (b) in the figure, it is assumed that the start switch 41 is pressed and a rare combination is won, and a character acquisition effect is started.

Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the first stop operation is performed in the recommended button press order, the recommended button press order is confirmed at this point, so the recommended image is not displayed, and the character acquisition effect develops as the effect at the first stop. Note that in this example, an example is shown in which the character acquisition effect develops when the first stop switch 42 is operated, but it goes without saying that the effect does not have to change between the start of the game and the first stop.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, when all stop switches 42 are operated and all reels 31 stop, an effect (successful acquisition effect) in which character D is newly acquired is output as the effect after all reels 31 stop. Then, in addition to characters A, B, and C that have been acquired up until now, the newly acquired character D is displayed.
Furthermore, as shown in (e) of the figure, when a bet operation is performed, the display shifts to the pre-game performance. Next, the display proceeds to (f) of the figure, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the game start performance of the game is output.
In this way, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the recommended image is not displayed. Furthermore, the newly acquired character D will be displayed as is in the next game.

Figure 109 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation (Example 2) when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended button press order (irregular button press) in the example of Figure 108. In this example, as in Example 1 above, a rare combination is won and the lottery to acquire a character is won, but because the button press order is non-recommended, the win is invalidated and the number of characters does not increase.
In Figure 109, (a) and (b) are the same as Figure 108(a) and (b). Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the first stop is operated in a non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image is displayed and the previous effects are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 10(d), even if all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 stop, the display of the recommended image is maintained.
Also, as shown in (e) of the figure, the display of the recommended image is maintained even when a bet is placed. Furthermore, as shown in (f) of the figure, when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the recommended image ends at that timing and returns to the image before the rare combination was won (the image in which no character was acquired).

110 and 111 are diagrams for explaining the state of the (image) layer when the recommended image is displayed.
The examples in FIGS. 110 and 111 correspond to Example 1 in FIG.
In Figures 110 and 111, both the front layer and the back layer are not limited to a single layer, but are actually made up of multiple layers.
In this example, the recommended image is output by the front layer, and the normal effect image is output by the back layer.

In the figure, (a) before the game starts and (b) when the start switch is operated, the front layer is transparent, so that the player can see only the effect image on the back layer.
Next, as shown in (c) of the figure, when the first stop is in a non-recommended pressing sequence and the stop switch 42 is operated, a recommended image is displayed using the front layer. Also, the recommended image on the front layer makes the rear layer invisible to the player. Also, as shown in (c) of the figure, even when a recommended image is displayed on the front layer, the effects on the rear layer are output (displayed) as is without being stopped or the like. The image on the rear layer in (c) of the figure corresponds to the effect image in Figure 106 (c).

Next, even when the display is completely stopped (d) in Figure 111, the recommended image on the front layer remains the same. Also, on the rear layer at this time, the effects of the recommended push order are progressing, and the successful stage promotion effect and the state in which the stage has transitioned to high probability are output. This image corresponds to Figure 106 (d). However, since the rear layer is not visible to the player while the recommended image is being displayed, the successful stage promotion effect is not visible to the player.
Next, proceed to (e) in the figure, and even if a bet operation is performed, the display of the recommended image will be maintained. Also, at this time, the back layer will proceed to the effect image at the time of the bet operation. Also, at this point, the high probability state after the stage promotion is displayed.

Next, proceeding to (f) in the figure, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), a process is executed to match the internal control state (the normal stage is maintained because the non-recommended button sequence was used) with the effect image. This returns the stage to normal. Also, when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the recommended image ends and the front layer becomes transparent. This allows the player to see the image display content of the back layer at this point.
By controlling the image display in this manner, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended push order, the recommended image can be displayed on the front layer without stopping the image display for the recommended push order, thereby simplifying program processing. Also, during the period when the internal control state and the effect image do not match, the recommended image is displayed on the front layer, making the effect image on the back layer invisible to the player, so the player will not mistakenly believe that the stage has shifted to a high probability.
It should be noted that the image may be returned when a bet is made (at the timing of Figure 111(e)) rather than when the start switch 41 is operated. Specifically, when a bet is made, a process is executed to match the internal control state (maintaining the normal stage because the non-recommended button sequence was used) with the effect image at this time. This returns the stage to normal. On the other hand, when a bet is made, the display of the recommended image on the front layer is terminated, and the player can now view the image display content on the rear layer.
In the above example, a foreground layer is provided in advance and is transparent when recommended images are not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a foreground layer may be configured so that there is no foreground layer when recommended images are not displayed, and the foreground layer is placed only when recommended images are displayed.

Next, the relationship between the recommended image, the game state, the game section, and the number of bets will be described.
1. Relationship between recommended images and game states In the ninth embodiment, in a non-special game state, a lottery for a special role (bonus role) is conducted. When a special role is won and a symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a special game (the game state is entered).
In the ninth embodiment, the special roles include 1BB-A and 1BB-B, similar to the first embodiment (see FIG. 5).
While 1BB-A and 1BB-B are operating, the RB is continuously activated (FIG. 9). During the RB continuously activated state, as shown in FIG. 8, the winning number "17" is won in every game, and the prize-winning ALL condition device is activated. In a game in which the prize-winning ALL condition device is activated, the reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that a 10-coin combination (small combination 01 to small combination 06; see FIG. 4) is won, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed (there is no advantage or disadvantage depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed).
In addition, while 1BB-A and 1BB-B are operating, the AT lottery is controlled not to be executed.
As a result, there is no recommended button press sequence when playing games with 1BB-A and 1BB-B in operation. Therefore, when playing games with 1BB-A and 1BB-B in operation, the recommended image will not be displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in an irregular sequence. When playing games with 1BB-A and 1BB-B in operation, the player can play in any button press sequence. Note that games with 1BB-A and 1BB-B in operation (RB continuous operation) are configured so that the expected number of medals won is the same regardless of the button press sequence.

Also, during the AT, the recommended image will not be displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in an irregular sequence. During the AT, as a general rule, when a biased role is won, the correct button press order is announced, and the player follows that correct button press order, so the irregular button press is performed in that game. In this case, of course, the recommended image will not be displayed.
In addition, during the AT, even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing in a game other than the game in which the biased role is won, for example, in a game in which the role is not won, the recommended image is not displayed.

2. Relationship Between Recommended Image and Game Zone The ninth embodiment has a non-advantageous zone (normal zone) and an advantageous zone, similar to the other embodiments described above.
The AT lottery can be executed in the advantageous zone, but not in the non-advantageous zone. Therefore, in the non-advantageous zone, there is no recommended pressing order that is advantageous in the AT lottery. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in an irregular order during the non-advantageous zone, the recommended image is not displayed.
Therefore, when a recommended image is not displayed even when pressing an irregular button in a normal state (a state other than a special game state or an AT state), it is possible to indicate to the player that the game is currently in a non-advantageous zone and that the AT lottery will not be executed.
Although detailed explanations are omitted for the ninth embodiment, during a non-advantageous zone (normal zone), a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone is executed, and the lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone is set to be won in all cases except when the result of the internal lottery is a loss. Therefore, even if the difference in the number of coins in an advantageous zone exceeds 2,400 coins, for example, and the zone transitions from an advantageous zone to a non-advantageous zone, the non-advantageous zone usually lasts for only one or a few plays. Therefore, even if a player knows that the zone is non-advantageous (checks that the advantageous zone display LED 78 is off) and presses the irregular button, the expected increase in medals is small and negligible.
Conversely, even in a non-advantageous zone, a recommended image may be displayed when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the stop switch 42 in an irregular manner. This configuration makes it impossible to determine whether the current game is in an advantageous zone based on whether or not a recommended image is displayed when pressing the stop switch 42 in an irregular manner. Furthermore, this effect can be further enhanced by preventing the advantageous zone display LED 77 from lighting up even in an advantageous zone, or by not providing a lamp (zone indicator) that indicates that the zone is advantageous.

3. Relationship Between Recommended Image and Number of Bets (Specified Number) In the ninth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment (see FIGS. 4 and 5), a game can be played with either the number of bets "2" or "3."
The bet number "3" is advantageous to the player. In other words, the bet number "3" is the recommended bet number.
When the expected probability of winning the AT (winning rate, winning probability) when playing with the number of bets "3" is "P1", and the expected probability of winning the AT when playing with the number of bets "2" is "P2",
P1>P2
is.
In particular, P1>P2×1.5
is.
Therefore, even if the game is played with a bet number of "2", the expected probability of winning the AT will not be more favorable than if the game was played with a bet number of "3".
In particular, in the ninth embodiment, when a game is played with the number of bets "2", the AT lottery is not executed regardless of the result of the internal lottery (in the program processing, the AT lottery processing is not performed). In other words, "P2 = 0".

Furthermore, the probability of winning each role when playing with a bet of "2" is set to 2/3 or less compared to the probability of winning each role when playing with a bet of "3." As a result, even when playing with a bet of "2," the expected number of medals won will not exceed the bet number.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when the bet number is "2", the AT lottery is not executed regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. Therefore, even if a game is played with the bet number "2" and the stop switch 42 is operated in an irregular manner, the recommended image is not displayed. This is because displaying the recommended image even though the AT lottery is not executed could confuse the player. Furthermore, when the recommended image is not displayed even though the stop switch 42 is operated in an irregular manner even though the game is in a favorable zone and not in an AT, the player can be made aware that the bet number for that game was "2".

Next, a demonstration image display (hereinafter simply referred to as "demo display") will be described.
After the machine is completely stopped (or after the medal payout process is completed if a medal payout process is performed), if no operation to progress the game (betting operation) is performed within a predetermined time, the display on the image display device 23 may be switched from the end-of-game presentation display to a demo display (an example in which the display does not switch to a demo display will be described later). The demo display is, for example, a promotional video that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 10.
In the ninth embodiment, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order to when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order to when the demo display is displayed is set to be different.
Specifically, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended pressing order, and the time from when the reels 31 come to a complete stop or a certain timing after the reels 31 come to a complete stop (when the payout starts, when the payout ends, or after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the reels 31 came to a complete stop) until the demo display is displayed is defined as "t1," and when the stop switch 42 is operated in a recommended pressing order, and the time from when the reels 31 come to a complete stop or a certain timing after the reels 31 come to a complete stop until the demo display is displayed is defined as "t2."
t1<t2
is set to.

In other words, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended button press order, the demo display will be displayed sooner than when the stop switch 42 is operated in a recommended button press order.
The reason for this setting is to make it as difficult as possible to notice that the stop switch 42 has been operated in a non-recommended button sequence by switching from the display of the recommended image to the demo display as soon as possible. When a player is choosing a gaming machine to play on, if the recommended image is displayed, the player will know that the machine has had the stop switch 42 operated in a non-recommended button sequence, which could lead to the player mistaking that some kind of penalty has occurred and avoiding playing on that gaming machine.
As mentioned above, in a game in which the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended button sequence, even if a winning combination that is subject to the AT lottery is won, the AT will not be won (or even if the AT is won, it will be invalid), and no penalty will be incurred in subsequent games after the game in which the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended button sequence. However, in the case of a No. 5 machine (a conventional gaming machine), if irregular button pressing is performed, a penalty (such as not holding an AT lottery for a specified period of time) may continue in subsequent games, so there is a risk of confusion that a penalty has been incurred, as with the No. 5 machine, and therefore it is not desirable for the recommended image to continue to be displayed for longer than necessary.

Furthermore, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order and the demo display is displayed, the demo display is canceled by a bet operation (insertion of a medal), and the display returns to the normal display (game waiting display).
On the other hand, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended pressing sequence and the demo display is switched on, the demo display will not be canceled by a bet operation (insertion of a medal), and the demo display will continue. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and a game is started, the display will return to the normal display (game standby display).
After the recommended image is displayed, when the time "t2" has elapsed since the full stop and the display shifts to demo display, the demo display layer is placed before the layer displaying the recommended image. As a result, the recommended image display is not visible to the player during the demo display.
Even if a bet operation is performed, the display of the recommended image and the demo display are maintained. When the start switch 41 is further operated, both the display of the recommended image and the demo display are erased, and a layer of the normal display located further behind the display of the recommended image is displayed.
107, 109, and 111 show examples in which the display returns to normal display without transitioning from the display of the recommended image to the demo display. In other words, these are examples in which the start switch 41 is operated before the time "t2" has elapsed after a total power outage.

Next, the transition to the demo display will be described using a time chart.
Figure 112 is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu (screen) display when a bet operation and a start switch (abbreviated as "Start" in Figures 112 to 114) are operated after the demo display, and shows the case when no replay wins. Figure (a) is an example when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, and Figure (b) is an example when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order.

1, push buttons are connected to the sub-control board 80. The push buttons are also called effect buttons, chance buttons, operation buttons, decision buttons, sub buttons, menu buttons, etc.
Furthermore, a lamp (push button lamp) is provided inside the push button, which lights up when the push button is active and goes out when the push button is inactive, and the player can visually check the on/off state. This allows the player to determine whether the push button is active or not by checking whether the push button lamp is lit or not.
The push button can be used, first, to display an effect that prompts the player to operate the push button, and then to develop the effect when the push button is detected to be operated.
Secondly, a menu can be displayed by operating the push button while the machine is in game standby mode. The menu can display, for example, the issuance of a two-dimensional code for My Slot, the game flow, the payout table, etc. The menu can be displayed when the push button lamp is lit, but cannot be displayed when the push button lamp is off.

In FIG. 112(a), it is assumed that the normal effect is displayed at the time of the first bet operation.
In addition, during the specified period when the demo display is not being executed during the normal performance (for example, from the time of betting until 5 seconds have passed after the full stop), it is not possible to move to the menu. For this reason, the push button lamp is turned off.
The above state is maintained until 5 seconds have passed since the game started (start switch 41 was operated), all stop switches 42 were operated, and all reels 31 stopped. Note that this "5 seconds" is an example, and various settings such as "3 seconds" or "10 seconds" can be used.

Also, although only "normal effect" is displayed from the start of the game to the end of the game, the effect content will of course change as the game progresses.
After the machine has stopped completely, the push button lamp lights up after 5 seconds have passed. This notifies the player that the menu can be displayed (the player can move to the menu). When the push button is operated while the push button lamp is lit, the menu can be displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the push button is not operated (the menu is not displayed).

Furthermore, when it is determined that 60 seconds have passed since the reels 31 came to a complete stop, the image display switches from the normal effect display to the demo display. Note that this "60 seconds" is an example, and various settings such as "20 seconds,""30seconds," etc. are possible. However, the demo display generally begins after the push button lamp lights up.
112(a), the demo display is executed under the condition that no bet has been placed, i.e., no replay has been won in the game (no automatic bet has been placed), and no medals have been inserted.
If a bet operation is performed (or a medal is inserted) while the demo display is running, the demo display will end and the game will switch to the normal performance. In addition, with the switch to the normal performance, the menu display will no longer be possible and the push button lamp will also turn off.

Figure 112(b) is an example in which the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended pressing sequence, unlike Figure 112(a).
In Figure 112(b), when the middle stop switch 42 is operated as the first stop, resulting in a non-recommended pressing sequence, the image display switches from the normal effect display to the recommended image display. As described above, the recommended image display layer is placed before the normal effect display layer.
Then, when three seconds have passed since the machine stopped, the recommended image display switches to the demo display. Note that "three seconds" is an example and may be "five seconds," etc. As described above, in the case of the recommended button press sequence, the demo display switches 60 seconds after the machine stopped, but in the case of the non-recommended button press sequence, the demo display switches three seconds after the machine stopped. This allows the demo display to be switched to early after the machine stopped when the non-recommended button press sequence is used. Therefore, if a player finishes playing with that game, it is likely that the demo display will already be on when other players look at the gaming machine. This makes it difficult to tell that the stop switch 42 was operated using the non-recommended button press sequence in the previous player's final game.

Also, when the recommended button press sequence was used, a bet operation caused the display to transition from the demo display to the normal display. In contrast, when the non-recommended button press sequence was used, even if a bet operation (coin insertion operation) was performed, the display would not transition from the demo display to the normal display (nor would the recommended image display, which is the layer behind the demo display). Therefore, for example, after finishing a game using a non-recommended button press sequence, even if another player inserts a coin into the same gaming machine, the display would not transition to the normal display (nor would the recommended image display, which is the layer behind the demo display).
Then, when a bet operation is performed and the start switch 41 is operated (when the game starts), the demo display (and the recommended image display, which is the layer behind it) ends and the game transitions to the normal presentation state.

Furthermore, when a small winning combination is achieved, the winning number is displayed on the winning number display LED 78 (Figure 1). This winning number display is cleared, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the payout process ended, or when the demo display begins (60 seconds after the full stop). However, for example, if a biased bell is achieved, the stop switch 42 is operated using a non-recommended button sequence, and a 7-coin combination is achieved, the winning number display LED 78 will display "07." Similarly, if a rare combination is achieved, the stop switch 42 is operated using a non-recommended button sequence, and a 12-coin combination is achieved, the winning number display LED 78 will display "12."

However, if a player finishes playing with 7 or 12 coins, the next player may discover that the winning number display LED 78 on that gaming machine is displaying "07" or "12." This may discourage the next player from playing on that gaming machine.
Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended pressing order, a 7-coin or 12-coin combination is won, and the number of wins is displayed on the win number display LED 78, it is preferable to clear the number of wins displayed on the win number display LED 78 earlier than when the stop switch 42 is operated in a recommended pressing order. For example, in Figure 112(b), the display on the win number display LED 78 can be cleared at the timing when the display switches to demo display 3 seconds after the full stop.
When the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the display of the winning number display LED 78 may be cleared when a predetermined time has elapsed after the buttons have stopped. Alternatively, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the display of the winning number display LED 78 may be maintained until a bet operation is made for the next game, and the display of the winning number display LED 78 may be cleared by a bet operation.

113 is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when a replay is won (when an automatic bet is placed). In the figure, (a) shows an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the recommended pressing order, and (b) shows an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the non-recommended pressing order.
In Figure 113(a), if an automatic bet is placed based on a winning replay after a full stop, the state after the bet will be the same as in Figure 112(a), so the image display will continue to show the normal effect, and the demo display will not be executed even if 60 seconds have passed since the full stop. As a result, the push button lamp will not light up, and the menu cannot be displayed.
On the other hand, in Figure 113 (b), if the stop switch 42 is operated at the first stop in a non-recommended pressing sequence, the recommended image is displayed at that time, as in Figure 112 (b).
Furthermore, after three seconds have passed since the last reel, the display switches from the recommended image to the demo image. In this respect, the replay win differs from the recommended push order, in which no demo image is displayed.
This demo display continues while an automatic bet is being placed, and when the start switch 41 is operated (a game is started), the demo display is switched to a normal effect display.

114 is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when a bet operation (including the insertion of a medal) is performed within 3 seconds after the machine has stopped completely and the start operation is performed 60 seconds after the machine has stopped completely. In the figure, (a) is an example of when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, and in the figure, (b) is an example of when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order.
In Figure 114(a), if a bet operation is performed before 3 seconds have passed after the full stop, the state after the bet will be the same as in Figure 112(a), so the image display will continue to show the normal effect and will not switch to the demo display even after 60 seconds have passed since the full stop. As a result, the push button lamp will not light up and the menu cannot be displayed.

On the other hand, in Figure 114 (b), if the first stop is operated in a non-recommended button press sequence, a recommended image is displayed at that time, as in Figure 112 (b).
Furthermore, even if a bet operation is performed within three seconds after a total stop, the recommended image display is maintained. Next, when three seconds have passed after a total stop, the recommended image display is switched to a demo display. In other words, even if a bet operation is performed, the recommended image display is limited to the time three seconds have passed since a total stop, and when three seconds have passed since a total stop, the recommended image display is switched to a demo display.
As explained above, when the recommended pressing order is selected, either the demo display will be displayed 60 seconds after the full stop (Figure 112(a)), or the normal display will be maintained even after 60 seconds have passed since the full stop (Figure 113(a) or Figure 114(a)).
In contrast, when pressing the buttons in a non-recommended order, the recommended image is displayed at the first stop, and when three seconds have passed since the last stop, the display switches to a demo image.

As mentioned above, Figures 112(b), 113(b), and 114(b) are all limited to advantageous periods and non-AT periods, and the recommended image is not displayed even if irregular pressing is performed during non-advantageous periods (normal periods), AT periods, or special game periods. Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing during non-advantageous periods (normal periods), AT periods, or special game periods, the images are the same as Figures 112(a), 113(a), and 114(a), respectively.
Also, as shown in Figure 112(a), when the recommended pressing order is used (when no replay is won), a demo display is performed 60 seconds after the full stop, but there are cases where the demo display is not performed even if the recommended pressing order is used, for example, during a continuous performance or CZ. Therefore, the example in Figure 112(a) does not necessarily mean that a demo display will be performed 60 seconds after the full stop.
Furthermore, even in situations where a demo display is not performed (a menu is not displayed) when the recommended button press sequence is used, such as during the above-mentioned continuous performance or CZ, if the button press sequence is not recommended, a demo display will be performed 3 seconds after the buttons have stopped.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 112(b), 113(b), and 114(b), the demo display and recommended image display are ended and the normal effect display is restored by the start operation because in this embodiment the effect display content is switched when the start operation is performed (a new effect command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80). On the other hand, if the effect display content is configured to be switched when a bet operation is performed, the normal effect display may be restored when a bet operation is performed. In this case, a new effect command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 when a bet operation is performed.
In any of the above cases, the demo display and recommended image display are terminated when the effect display content coincides with the internal control state or thereafter, so that there is no discrepancy between the effect display content visible to the player and the internal control state.

Next, we will explain how to send the push order instruction number and the effect group number.
As in the first embodiment, the push order instruction number is a number corresponding to the correct push order (the push order that will result in a high-value role) when a role with an advantageous push order (a biased role in the ninth embodiment) is won. As in the first embodiment, when a role lottery is performed by the role lottery means 61 and a biased role is won, the push order instruction number selection means 63 (FIG. 1) selects the push order instruction number that corresponds to the biased role that has been won.
When the push order of the bias role is set to six options, the push order instruction number is, for example, as in the third embodiment,
Left, center, right: Press order number "A1"
Correct answer: Press the number "A2"
Correct answer: Press the number "A3"
Correct answer: Press the number "A4"
Right, left, center: Press the number "A5"
Right, center, left Correct answer: Press order instruction number "A6"
The following points can be mentioned.
However, in the ninth embodiment, the correct order of pressing when a biased bell is won is irregular pressing (four choices), so for example,
Correct answer: Press the number "A1"
Center, right, left Correct answer: Press order instruction number "A2"
Right, left, center: Press the number "A3"
Right, center, left Correct answer: Press order instruction number "A4"
It may also be possible to use the following.
When a rare combination is won, any number from among the push order instruction numbers "A1" to "A4" may be selected. Alternatively, a push order instruction number indicating an irregular push when a rare combination is won may be set.

As in the first embodiment, when a biased role is won during AT (a game in which instructions are given), the main control board 50 selects a push order instruction number and displays push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number on the winning number display LED 78 (instruction monitor). For example, when the push order instruction number is "A1", the push order instruction information may be displayed as "=1", as in the third embodiment.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information, it sends a command corresponding to the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the push order instruction number, it becomes able to output information regarding the correct push order. In other words, the command corresponding to the push order instruction number sent by the main control board 50 is a command that can identify the correct push order. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it displays the correct push order as an image on the image display device 23.
In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 can only transmit push order instruction numbers to the sub-control board 80 during advantageous zones and AT. Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 during a zone other than advantageous zones and AT, that push order instruction number will not be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Note that it is not necessary to select a push order instruction number except during advantageous zones and AT.

On the other hand, the effect group number is a number corresponding to the winning number, as in the first embodiment, and is information that enables the sub-control board 80 to output an effect corresponding to the winning role.
The performance group number is selected not only in a game in which a winning combination is achieved but also in a game in which a winning combination is not achieved.
In addition, the effect group number selected in a game in which a role with an advantageous push order is won is information indicating that a role with any advantageous push order has been won, and is configured so that the advantageous push order cannot be identified from the effect group number.
The effect group number selection means 64 (FIG. 1) selects an effect group number corresponding to a winning combination and transmits it to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the effect group number, the sub-control board 80 is able to output an effect related to the winning combination based on the information.

Here, the following is an example of how the main control board 50 transmits the performance group number to the sub-control board 80.
a) Example 1
In games other than the game in which the biased role is won, the performance group number is selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In contrast, in a game in which a biased role is won, the effect group number is not selected and is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. However, in a game in which a biased role is won, the effect group number may be selected but not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
b) Example 2
Regardless of the result of the role lottery (including games in which a biased role is won), a performance group number is selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

The main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number corresponding to the winning role to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the winning role. However, since the sub-control board 80 can receive the effect group number, it can output the effect corresponding to the winning role based on the received effect group number. Furthermore, if the sub-control board 80 is designed not to receive the effect group number when a biased role is won, it can infer that the game has won the biased role if it does not receive the effect group number, so it is possible to substantially determine whether the game has won the biased role.
Even if the main control board 50 is designed not to transmit the effect group number when a biased role is won, during AT, when a biased role is won, the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. This enables the sub-control board 80 to output an effect related to the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

In the first embodiment, even when the push order bell (corresponding to the biased role in the ninth embodiment) was won, the performance group number was uniformly transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
However, there is a doubt as to whether transmitting the effect group number to the sub-control board 80 when a biased role is won constitutes an instruction. This is because the game when a biased role is won has a unilaterally advantageous press order, so the transmission of the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the biased role can be interpreted as the transmission of instruction information. Furthermore, if instruction information is interpreted as being sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, the instruction monitor must be displayed, and the medals won in that game must be added to the instruction-included role ratio (see the first embodiment).
For this reason, in the ninth embodiment, the above example 1 is adopted, and when a biased role is won, the effect group number is not sent to the sub-control board 80. However, as described above, since the effect group number is not sent only when a biased role is won, the sub-control board 80 can infer that a biased role has been won in a game in which the effect group number has not been received.
105, the combined winning probability of biased roles when the bet number is "3" is "101/125," which exceeds "1/2" (half of all games). By increasing the winning probability of biased roles in this way, there are more games in which the effect group number does not need to be transmitted, and the number of transmitted commands can be reduced.
On the other hand, by increasing the winning probability of the combined biased roles, it is possible to lower the base during normal times and increase the ball output performance of the AT, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Depending on the probability of winning a biased role and the expected number of medals to be won, when a performance group number is sent when a biased role is won, it has been thought that the order in which the buttons are pressed (also called the "stop order") must be indicated (the indication monitor must be lit) and included in the ratio of roles including instructions.
However, at present, it is believed that when a biased role is won, even if the performance group number is sent, it will not instruct the order in which to press the buttons (the instruction monitor will not light up), and it will not be included in the ratio of roles with instructions, if the following three conditions are met.
1) Under the condition that the pressing positions are random (no "eye pressing"), the expected value for each pressing order (6 ways in the case of 3 reels) based on all roles (including misses) must be less than a specified number (number of bets, basically "3").
2) Do not suggest the order or position of buttons to be pressed through effects, etc. For example, effects using colors that are only displayed in games where a biased role is won may be considered as a suggestion of the order of buttons to be pressed, and therefore such effects may be prohibited.
3) Under the condition that the player always plays in a way that results in a high number (a way that always results in a low-numbered 1-piece role even if the button press sequence is incorrect), the expected value for each button press sequence when winning a group of small roles that are assigned the same performance group number, including biased roles, will all be below the specified number.
By configuring it to satisfy the above 1) to 3), even if the performance group number is obtained illegally when a biased role is won, the expected number of medals won when pressing irregularly will be less than the specified number, so it is possible to prevent the act of illegally increasing medals. Here, "when a small role group is won" means "when any small role included in the small role group is won."

The above points will be explained more specifically with reference to FIG.
First, in the following explanation,
The pressing order of "left, center, right" is "press order 1",
The pressing order of "left, right, center" is "press order 2",
The pressing order of "center left right" is "press order 3",
The pressing order of "center, right, left" is "press order 4",
The pressing order of "right, left, center" is "press order 5",
The pressing order for "right, center, left" is "press order 6".
(See FIG. 105(a)).
Also,
The expected number of medals acquired for push order 1 based on all roles is "E1",
The expected number of medals acquired in the push order 2 based on all roles is "E2",
The expected number of medals acquired for the push order 3 based on all roles is "E3",
The expected number of medals acquired for the push order 4 based on all roles is "E4",
The expected number of medals acquired for the push order 5 based on all roles is "E5",
The expected number of medals won for push order 6 based on all roles is "E6".
At this time,
E1 = Σ {(Number of coins won when pressing in the order 1 for each winning role) × (Probability of winning for each winning role)}
E2 = Σ {(Number of coins won when pressing the button in the second order for each winning role) × (Probability of winning each winning role)}
E3 = Σ {(Number of coins won when pressing the button in the order of 3 for each winning role) × (Probability of winning for each winning role)}
E4 = Σ {(Number of coins won when pressing the button in the order of 4 for each winning role) × (Probability of winning for each winning role)}
E5 = Σ {(Number of coins won when pressing the button in the 5th order for each winning role) × (Probability of winning each winning role)}
E6 = Σ {(Number of coins won when pressing the button in the 6th order for each winning role) × (Probability of winning each winning role)}
is.
and,
The above condition 1) is satisfied when E1≦prescribed number, E2≦prescribed number, E3≦prescribed number, E4≦prescribed number, E5≦prescribed number, and E6≦prescribed number.

When the expected number of medals to be won based on all roles when the stop switch 42 is operated in a predetermined pressing order is 0.1 or more medals more than the expected number of medals to be won based on all roles when the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific pressing order that is different from the predetermined pressing order, there is a view that the predetermined pressing order is a unilaterally advantageous pressing order, and the specific pressing order is a unilaterally disadvantageous pressing order.
When the expected number of medals to be won based on all roles differs for each push order, each push order is classified as either a unilaterally advantageous push order or a unilaterally disadvantageous push order.
In the ninth embodiment, as described above, the expected number of medals to be acquired based on all roles when playing with the buttons pressed in order ("Push Order 1" and "Push Order 2") ("E1" and "E2") is 1.289, and the expected number of medals to be acquired based on all roles when playing with the buttons pressed in an irregular order ("Push Order 3" to "Push Order 6") ("E3" to "E6") is 2.177.
2.177 - 1.289 = 0.888 > 0.1
Therefore, "Push Order 1" and "Push Order 2" are unilaterally disadvantageous push orders, while "Push Order 3" to "Push Order 6" are unilaterally advantageous push orders.

Here, in actual gaming machines, there are specifications in which, for example, when comparing "push order 3" with "push order 4" to "push order 6" (push orders that are unilaterally advantageous), the expected number of medals won based on all roles is strictly different.
Specifically, for example, if the specifications are such that when "push order 3" is used, a symbol related to a special role (bonus role) may be drawn, but when "push order 4" to "push order 6" do not draw a symbol related to a special role, when "push order 3" is used, a special role may be won and the number of coins paid out may be "0", whereas when "push order 4" to "push order 6" are used, a special role may not be won and a minor role that has been won twice (for example, a 1-coin role) may be won and the number of coins paid out may be "1".
In such a case, the expected number of medals to be won based on all roles will differ between "Push Order 3" and "Push Order 4" to "Push Order 6". Therefore, if the error in this expected value is "0.01" or less, it is considered to be the same "unilaterally advantageous push order".
In other words, in this example, if the error between "E3" and "E4" to "E6" is "0.01" or less, there will be no advantageous or disadvantageous relationship between "Push Order 3" and "Push Order 4" to "Push Order 6".

where:
E1 = E2 = A
E3=B
E4=E5=E6=C
As,
B-A≧0.1
C-A≧0.1
0<C-B≦0.01
When this is the case, "Push Order 3" and "Push Order 4" to "Push Order 6" are uniformly considered to be "unilaterally advantageous push orders" compared to "Push Order 1" and "Push Order 2." Note that while the example described here is one in which the expected number of medals to be won based on all roles differs between unilaterally advantageous push orders, the same applies to cases in which the expected number of medals to be won based on all roles differs between unilaterally disadvantageous push orders. In this case, if the difference in the expected number of medals to be won based on all roles between unilaterally disadvantageous push orders is "0.01" or less, they are uniformly considered to be "unilaterally disadvantageous push orders."
As mentioned above, even if two push-button sequences are unilaterally advantageous (disadvantageous), the expected number of medals to be won based on all roles may differ in the strictest sense. Therefore, whether or not the condition 1) above is met is determined not by "expected value of push-buttons in order and expected value of push-buttons in irregular order ≦ specified number," but by "expected number of medals to be won for each push-button sequence based on all roles ≦ specified number."
For the same reason, when determining whether or not the above condition 3) is met, the expected number of medals to be won for each press order when a group of small winning combinations to which the same performance group number is assigned is calculated.

When calculating the expected number of medals to be won for each push order to determine whether or not the above condition 3) is met, keep in mind that a strategy that always aims for a higher number of medals will be used. For example, if you win biased bells 1 to 4, and you play with "push order 1" or "push order 2," you will always get a two-coin winning combination.

<Examples where the pressing order needs to be specified and included in the ratio of the instructed features>
As small role groups to which the same performance group number including biased roles is assigned, there are a small role group A consisting of biased bell 1 to biased bell 4 and a small role group B consisting of rare role A and rare role B.
Here, the ratio of the number of small roles in small role group A is,
Biased Bell 1: Biased Bell 2: Biased Bell 3: Biased Bell 4
= 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/5
= 1:1:1:1
Therefore,
Probability of winning biased bell 1 when winning small role group A = Probability of winning biased bell 2 when winning small role group A = Probability of winning biased bell 3 when winning small role group A = Probability of winning biased bell 4 when winning small role group A = 1/4
This becomes:

Therefore, if the expected number of medals won for push order 1 to push order 6 when winning small role group A is E1 (A) to E6 (A), respectively,
E1(A)=2×1/4×4=2
E2(A)=2×1/4×4=2
E3(A)=7×1/4+1×1/4×3=2.5
E4(A)=7×1/4+1×1/4×3=2.5
E5(A)=7×1/4+1×1/4×3=2.5
E6(A)=7×1/4+1×1/4×3=2.5
Since all of E1(A) to E6(A) are equal to or less than the specified number (here, "3"), the above condition 3) is satisfied.
On the other hand, the ratio of the number of small roles in small role group B is,
Rare Role A: Rare Role B
= 1/250: 1/250
=1:1
Therefore,
Probability of winning rare role A when winning small role group B = Probability of winning rare role B when winning small role group B = 1/2
This becomes:

Here, if the expected number of medals won for push order 1 to push order 6 when winning small role group B is E1 (B) to E6 (B), respectively,
E1(B)=1×1/2×2=1
E2(B)=1×1/2×2=1
E3(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E4(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E5(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E6(B)=12×1/2×2=12
As a result, E3(B) to E6(B) become larger than the specified number (here, "3").
Therefore, in this example, when transmitting the performance group numbers of small role group A and small role group B, if small role group A is won, no instructions on the order to press the buttons will be given and it will not be included in the role ratio with instructions, but if small role group B is won, instructions on the order to press the buttons will be given and it will be included in the role ratio with instructions.

(Example of not including instructions in the ratio of games with instructions)
This point will be explained with another example.
In FIG. 105(a), there is a small role group C (biased role group) consisting of biased bell 1 to biased bell 4, rare role A, and rare role B, as a small role group to which the same performance group number including biased roles is assigned. The ratio of the number of small roles in this small role group C is
Biased Bell 1: Biased Bell 2: Biased Bell 3: Biased Bell 4: Rare Role A: Rare Role B
= 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/250: 1/250
=50:50:50:50:1:1
This becomes:
This means:
Probability of winning biased bell 1 when winning small role group C = Probability of winning biased bell 2 when winning small role group C = Probability of winning biased bell 3 when winning small role group C = Probability of winning biased bell 4 when winning small role group C = 50/202
And
Probability of winning rare role A when winning small role group C = Probability of winning rare role B when winning small role group C = 1/202
This becomes:

Therefore, if the expected number of medals won for push order 1 to push order 6 when winning small role group C is E1 (C) to E6 (C), respectively,
E1(C)=2×50/202×4+1×1/202×2≒1.990
E2(C)=2×50/202×4+1×1/202×2≒1.990
E3(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
E4(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
E5(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
E6(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
Therefore, when winning small prize group C, the expected number of medals to be won is equal to or less than the specified number (here "3") for all push orders, and condition 3) above is met. In addition, if conditions 1) and 2) above are met, even if the performance group number of small prize group C is sent, no instructions on the push order may be given and it may not be included in the ratio of roles with instructions.
In this way, the condition of 3) above is that the expected number of medals won when winning a group of small roles that are assigned the same performance group number, including biased roles, is less than the specified number for all button press orders.

Fig. 115 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the ninth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 46 of the third embodiment. In Fig. 115, step numbers of processing that differ from Fig. 46 are underlined.
In the main process of Fig. 115, after the role lottery process is executed in step S282, the push order instruction number is set in step S181 based on the result of this role lottery, and the effect group number is set in the next step S182. The rest is the same as the process of Fig. 46.
In addition, although the effect group number setting process is not shown in FIG. 46, this is simply because the effect group number setting process has been omitted, and does not mean that it is not provided.
In step S283, a lottery for transition to an advantageous zone is executed during a non-advantageous zone, and an AT lottery is executed during an advantageous zone and non-AT. Furthermore, during AT, an AT addition lottery and an AT continuation lottery are executed. However, if the number of bets for the current game is "2", the above lottery is not executed.

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process in step S181 in Figure 115.
In Figure 116, in step S191, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is in a favorable zone. Here, for example, this is done by determining the value of the favorable zone type flag at address "F061 (H)" in Figure 33. If it is determined that it is in a favorable zone, it proceeds to step S192, and if it is determined that it is not in a favorable zone, it ends the processing according to this flowchart.
In the next step S192, the condition device numbers (small winning combination and replay condition device numbers) for the current game are acquired. When the winning combination lottery process is executed in step S282 of Fig. 115, the condition device number corresponding to the winning number is generated and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and the information is acquired.

Then, in the next step S193, it is determined whether or not a biased role has been won in the current game. This process is performed by determining whether or not the condition device number acquired in step S192 is the condition device number corresponding to the biased role. If it is determined that a biased role has been won, the process proceeds to step S194, and if it is determined that a biased role has not been won, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S194, the main control board 50 determines whether the current game is a game in which push order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor. If it is determined that the current game is a game in which push order instruction information is displayed, the process proceeds to step S195, and if it is determined that the current game is not a game in which push order instruction information is displayed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S195, a push order instruction number is acquired. This process is a process of identifying the push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number acquired in step S192 based on the condition device number. Next, the process proceeds to step S196, where the acquired push order instruction number is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S197, the push order instruction number is stored in the acquisition count data of the RWM 53. This storage area corresponds to, for example, address "F011 (H)" in Figure 33 (third embodiment). When the push order instruction number is stored in the acquisition count data, the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number stored in the acquisition count data is displayed in the LED display control (step S2821, Figure 50) of the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 47).
Then, the process proceeds to step S198, where a request to output the push order instruction number is set, and in the next step S199, control command set 1 is performed. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. The process according to this flowchart then ends.
In this way, in a game in which a biased role is won and push order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor, the push order instruction number is sent to the sub-control board 80.

Fig. 117 is a flowchart showing the effect group number setting process in step S182 in Fig. 115. Note that this example is an example in which an effect group number is not selected and is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a game in which a biased combination is won.
In FIG. 117, in step S201, the condition device number for the current game is obtained. This process is the same as step S192 in FIG. 116 described above. In the next step S202, it is determined whether or not a biased role has been won in the current game. This process is the same as step S193 in FIG. 116 described above. If it is determined that a biased role has been won, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and if it is determined that a biased role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, the main control board 50 acquires the effect group number corresponding to the condition device number of the current game based on the condition device number acquired in step S201. Next, the process proceeds to step S204, where the acquired effect group number is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53.
The process then proceeds to step S205, where an output request for the performance group number is set, and in the next step S206, control command set 1 is performed. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting the performance group number to the sub-control board 80. The process according to this flowchart then ends.

As described above, in this example, when a biased role is won, the performance group number is not saved, and is not sent to the sub-control board 80. On the other hand, in cases other than a biased role win (i.e., including when the role is not won), the performance group number is saved and sent to the sub-control board 80. Also, the flow in FIG. 117 is executed regardless of whether the zone is a non-advantageous zone or an advantageous zone.
In this example, since the process of saving the effect group number is not executed when a biased role is won, it is not necessary to provide an effect group number corresponding to the win of the biased role. Alternatively, an effect group number corresponding to the win of the biased role is prepared, and when a biased role is won, the effect group number corresponding to the win of the biased role is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, but the effect group number may not be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
However, as mentioned above, if the interpretation is adopted that when the expected number of medals won per game is equal to or less than the specified number "3," transmitting an effect group number to the sub-control board 80 does not constitute an instruction, it is also possible to select an effect group number corresponding to the winning of a biased role when a biased role is won and transmit it to the sub-control board 80. In this case, the processing of step S202 is unnecessary.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the relationship between the biased winning combination and the indication monitor and image display in the ninth embodiment.
When a biased role is won during a non-advantageous zone, the instruction monitor is not displayed. In particular, the instruction monitor is not displayed when a rare role is won. This is because the AT lottery is not executed even if a rare role is won during a non-advantageous zone. Also, since the instruction monitor is not displayed, images regarding the push order are not displayed.
On the other hand, in advantageous sections, the display on the indicator monitor differs depending on whether the vehicle is non-AT or AT.
Even if you win a biased bell during a favorable zone and non-AT, the instruction monitor will be off. Also, no image display will be performed regarding the push order.
On the other hand, in a game in which a biased bell is won during the advantageous zone and AT, the instruction monitor is turned on and the push order instruction information corresponding to the biased bell that was won is displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 23 displays the correct push order.

Furthermore, when a rare combination is won during a favorable zone and non-AT, the instruction monitor is turned on and display push order instruction information corresponding to pressing in order. Furthermore, the image display device 23 displays an image of "1--", indicating the first stop on the left as the correct push order. Here, when a rare combination is won, operating the stop switch 42 in an irregular manner will result in a higher expected number of medals won in that game than pressing in order. However, since pressing in order is more advantageous in terms of total ball payout (Figure 105 (b)), a notification of pressing in order corresponding to an advantageous push order is displayed even in non-AT.
Furthermore, when a rare combination is won during an advantageous zone and AT, the instruction monitor is turned on and push order instruction information corresponding to irregular pushes is displayed. Since AT lottery is not held during AT, irregular pushes with a high expected value for the number of medals won in that game are displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 23 displays an image of the irregular pushes as the correct push order. Therefore, when a rare combination is won during an advantageous zone and both non-AT and AT, the instruction monitor is displayed and the correct push order is displayed on the image display device 23, but the displayed push order will differ.

Therefore, in step S194 of Fig. 116, when a biased bell is won during a non-AT, it is judged as "No", but when a rare role is won during a non-AT, it is judged as "Yes". In addition, when a biased bell or rare role is won during an AT, it is judged as "Yes".
Furthermore, if a rare role is won, the result of step S194 is judged as "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S195, if the device is not in the AT mode, a push order instruction number corresponding to pressing the buttons in order is obtained, and if the device is in the AT mode, a push order instruction number corresponding to pressing the buttons in an irregular order is obtained.

Next, the temporary storage process in the ninth embodiment will be described. Below, two types of methods (temporary storage process 1 and temporary storage process 2) will be described. Note that the non-CZ and CZ (a gaming state in which the AT winning expectation rate is higher than that of the non-CZ) described below are both advantageous zones.
1. First Method (Temporary Preservation Process 1)
In the ninth embodiment, as shown in Fig. 115, when the start switch 41 is operated, a role lottery process (step S282) is performed, and furthermore, as shown in step S283, a lottery for the AT is performed. Note that the lottery for the AT includes a lottery for the CZ. The number of lotteries for the AT is not limited to one, and usually, multiple types of lotteries are performed.
In addition, the lottery regarding AT may be referred to as a "lottery regarding instructions" or "lottery regarding ball output performance," etc.

In the ninth embodiment, as a lottery regarding AT during non-CZ,
1) AT lottery 2) CZ lottery 3) Stage lottery will be held. Note that the expected probability of winning CZ or AT differs for each stage (low probability of winning, high probability, etc.).
In addition, as a lottery for AT during CZ,
4) AT lottery 5) CZ counter 1 lottery 6) CZ counter 2 lottery will be carried out.
In the ninth embodiment, points are awarded to the player during the CZ, and the accumulated points are used to give preferential treatment in the AT lottery or determine the AT, etc. The lottery for the CZ counter 1 is a lottery for the number of points to be awarded during the CZ.
In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the initial number of CZ plays is set to a predetermined value, and a lottery is held on the CZ counter 2 to determine whether or not to add to the number of CZ plays during the CZ.

In the ninth embodiment, after the lottery relating to the AT as described above is carried out, the lottery result is temporarily stored, and when the conditions for actual storage are met, the temporarily stored information is actually stored.
Further, as temporary storage means, temporary storage area 1, temporary storage area 2, and temporary storage area 3 are provided in the storage area of the RWM 53.
When the above-mentioned lotteries 1) to 3) are executed during a non-CZ, the results of these lotteries are stored in temporary memory areas 1, 2, and 3, respectively.
On the other hand, when the above-mentioned lotteries 4) to 6) are executed during the CZ, the results of these lotteries are stored in temporary memory areas 1, 2, and 3, respectively.
In other words, different lottery results are stored in the temporary memory areas 1, 2, and 3 depending on whether it is during a non-CZ or a CZ.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits the information stored in the temporary memory areas 1 to 3 to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving this information, the sub-control board 80 is able to output a performance corresponding to the information.
Here, the sub-control board 80 cannot determine which information is stored in temporary storage areas 1 to 3 simply by receiving the information.
On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 is capable of determining whether the current game state is non-CZ or CZ based on other commands sent from the main control board 50.
Therefore, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the received information is an AT lottery result, CZ lottery result, or stage lottery result during a non-CZ based on whether it is during a CZ or the information stored in temporary memory areas 1 to 3, or an AT lottery result, CZ counter 1 lottery result, or CZ counter 2 lottery result during a CZ, and is able to output a presentation corresponding to each lottery result.

The main storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is:
1) This memory area stores the AT lottery results (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 1").
2) This memory area stores the CZ lottery results (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 2").
3) This memory area stores the stage lottery results (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 3").
4) This memory area stores the lottery results of the CZ counter 1 (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 4").
5) This memory area stores the lottery results of the CZ counter 2 (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 5").
are provided respectively.
In the ninth embodiment, when a biased role is won, the above-mentioned lottery 1) to 3) or 4) to 6) is executed, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the lottery result is reflected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the lottery result is cleared (discarded) (not reflected).

119 and 120 are flowcharts showing the above-mentioned temporary storage process 1. Fig. 120 is a flowchart following Fig. 119. In the flowcharts of Fig. 119 and 120, it is assumed that the area is in an advantageous zone and is not an AT (a state in which an AT is selected).
119, in step S312, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S313. Note that if it is determined in step S312 that the start switch 41 has been operated, a role lottery is executed, but this process is omitted in this flowchart.
In the next step S313, the main control board 50 determines whether the current game is in a CZ. If it is determined that the current game is not in a CZ, the process proceeds to step S314, and if it is determined that the current game is in a CZ, the process proceeds to step S320.
In the example shown in Figure 33, an AT flag is provided, but in addition to this AT flag, a CZ flag (not shown in Figure 33) is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 to determine whether the current game state is CZ or not. Then, based on the value of this CZ flag, it is determined whether the current game is in CZ or not.

In step S314, the main control board 50 draws a lottery to determine whether or not to execute AT. Then, the process proceeds to step S315, where the result of the lottery drawn in step S314 is stored in the temporary storage area 1 (temporary storage).
In the next step S316, the main control board 50 draws a lottery to determine whether or not to execute CZ. Then, the process proceeds to step S317, where the result of the lottery drawn in step S316 is stored in the temporary storage area 2 (temporary storage).
In the next step S318, the main control board 50 executes a stage lottery. Here, in the ninth embodiment, in the advantageous zone and non-AT, there are multiple stages with different expected CZ and AT winning rates, and a lottery is executed to determine which stage the player will stay in based on the result of the role lottery. For example, there are a stage with a low expected AT winning rate, a stage with a high expected AT winning rate, a stage with a high expected CZ winning rate, etc.
Next, the process proceeds to step S319, where the result of the lottery drawn in step S318 is stored in the temporary storage area 3 (temporary storage), and the process proceeds to step S326.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S313 that the game is in the CZ and the process proceeds to step S320, the main control board 50 executes an AT lottery. This lottery is the same as the lottery in step S314. Then, the process proceeds to step S321, where the lottery result of step S320 is stored in temporary memory area 1 (temporary storage). This process is also the same as step S315.

In the next step S322, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for CZ counter 1. Next, the process proceeds to step S323, where the lottery result of step S322 is stored in the temporary memory area 2 (temporary storage).
In the next step S324, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for CZ counter 2. Next, the process proceeds to step S325, where the lottery result of step S324 is stored (temporarily stored) in the temporary memory area 3. Then, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S326, the main control board 50 transmits the information in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub-control board 80. This process is a process for executing the control command set 1 and the like described above.
In this way, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for the AT is executed, the lottery results are stored in temporary memory areas 1 to 3, and the lottery results are transmitted to the sub-control board 80, so that the sub-control board 80 can output the effects at the start of the game (before the stop switch 42 is operated) based on this information.
Next, the process proceeds to step S327, where the main control board 50 determines whether the first (initial) stop switch 42 has been operated. If it is determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S328. In step S328, the pressing order information is updated.

In the ninth embodiment, the push order information is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. The push order information is 1-byte data consisting of "aabbcc00(B)".
"aa": the value of the first (first operated) stop switch 42; "bb": the value of the second (second operated) stop switch 42; "cc": the value of the third (third operated) stop switch 42.
moreover,
Value corresponding to the left stop switch 42: 01 (B)
Value corresponding to the middle stop switch 42: 10 (B)
Value corresponding to the right stop switch 42: 11 (B)
Let's say.
Therefore, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of left, center, and right, the pressing order information is
01000000 (B): When stopping first on the left ↓
01100000 (B): When the second middle stop ↓
01101100(B): When stopped at the third stop on the right side.
Therefore, in step S228, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the push order information is updated to "01000000(B)." Alternatively, for example, when the center stop switch 42 is operated first, the push order information is updated to "10000000(B)."

Next, the process proceeds to step S329, where the main control board 50 determines whether the stop switch 42 was operated in the recommended button press order (forward button press). This determination is made based on the button press order information described above. Here, "01000000(B)" is provided as definition data for determining whether the stop switch 42 was operated in the recommended button press order (forward button press). This definition data is the same value as the button press order information when the left stop switch 42 was first operated.
Then, in step S328, the value of the definition data is subtracted from the value of the updated push order information, and it is determined whether the result is 0. If the result of the subtraction is 0, it is determined that the left stop switch 42 was operated first.
In addition to subtraction, it is only necessary to determine whether the push order information updated in step S328 and the value of the definition data are the same value.Therefore, an exclusive OR (XOR) operation is performed on the push order information and the definition data, and if the result of the operation is ``0'', it can be determined that the two are the same value.

for example,
Press order information: 01000000 (B) (left stop switch 42 is operated first)
Definition data: 01000000 (B)
If so, performing an "XOR" operation on the two results in "00000000(B)." Since the operation result is "0," it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 is the left stop switch 42.
on the other hand,
Press order information: 10000000 (B) (middle stop switch 42 is operated first)
Definition data: 01000000 (B)
When the two are XORed, the result is 11000000(B). Since the result is not 0, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 is not the left stop switch 42.

If it is determined in step S329 that the button press order is recommended, the process proceeds to step S331 in FIG. 120; if it is determined that the button press order is not recommended, the process proceeds to step S330.
In step S330, the main control board 50 transmits the first stop information to the sub-control board 80 and proceeds to the next step S331. The information transmitted here corresponds to the operation being performed in a non-recommended button press sequence. On the other hand, the main control board 50 does not transmit the first stop information to the sub-control board 80 when the operation is performed in a recommended button press sequence. When the sub-control board 80 receives the first stop information, it can determine that the operation has been performed in a non-recommended button press sequence, and therefore controls the display of a recommended image.

In step S331, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the second stop switch 42 has been operated. If it is determined that the second stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S332.
In step S332, the main control board 50 updates the push order information. For example, when the first stop switch 42 is on the left, the push order information is "01000000 (B)." When the middle stop switch 42 is next operated, the push order information is updated to "01100000 (B)."
On the other hand, for example, when the first stop switch 42 is in the middle position, the push order information is "10000000 (B)", so when the right stop switch 42 is next operated, the push order information is updated to "10110000 (B)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S333, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not the third stop switch 42 has been operated. If it is determined that the third stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S334.
In step S334, the main control board 50 updates the push order information. For example, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of left, center, and right, the push order information is updated from "01100000(B)" to "01101100(B)."
On the other hand, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of center, right, left, for example, the push order information is updated from "10110000(B)" to "10110100(B)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S335, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not a biased role has been won in the current game. As explained in the first embodiment, when a role is drawn, the result of the drawing is stored in the "minor role and replay condition device number" provided in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and this data is read to determine whether or not any of the biased roles has been won.
If it is determined in step S335 that a biased role has been won, the process proceeds to step S336, and if it is determined that a biased role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S345.

In step S336, the main control board 50 generates a first stop reel identification flag. Here, the "first stop reel identification flag" is a flag for determining which reel 31 is the first stop reel 31 (synonymous with the first stop switch 42), and is a flag for determining whether the stop switch 42 was operated in the recommended press order. The press order information updated in step S328 stores only information about the first stop switch 42, so it is possible to immediately determine which stop switch 42 is the first stop switch 42 (i.e., the first reel 31). In contrast, the press order information updated in step S334 includes information about three stop switches 42, so it is impossible to determine which stop switch 42 is the first stop switch 42 without performing a calculation. For this reason, a first stop reel identification flag is generated to determine which reel 31 is the first stop reel 31.

To generate the first stop reel specification flag, the values of the center stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are masked from the push order information updated at the time of step S334.
For example, the masking data is set to "11000000(B)", and the first stop reel identification flag "aa000000(B)" is generated by performing a logical product (AND) operation on the push order information "aabbcc00(B)" and the masking data "11000000(B)".
In the next step S337, the main control board 50 determines whether the current press order is the recommended press order. This determination is the same as in step S329. The first stop reel specification flag "aa000000(B)" generated in step S336 is "XORed" with the definition data "01000000(B)". If the result is "0", it is determined to be the recommended press order, and if the result is not "0", it is determined to be not the recommended press order.

If it is determined in step S337 that this is the recommended button press order, the process proceeds to step S338; if it is determined that this is not the recommended button press order, the process proceeds to step S345.
In step S338, the main control board 50 determines whether the current game is in a CZ or not, and if it determines that the game is not in a CZ, it proceeds to step S339, and if it determines that the game is in a CZ, it proceeds to step S342.
In step S339, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the permanent storage area 1 (permanent storage).
In the next step S340, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary memory area 2 in the permanent memory area 2 (permanent storage).
In the next step S341, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary memory area 3 in the permanent memory area 3 (permanent storage).
Then, the process proceeds to step S345.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S338 that the CZ is in progress and the process proceeds to step S342, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the permanent storage area 1 (permanent storage).
In the next step S343, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 2 in the permanent storage area 4 (permanent storage).
In the next step S344, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary memory area 3 in the permanent memory area 5 (permanent storage).
Then, the process proceeds to step S345.

In step S345, the main control board 50 transmits the information stored in main memory areas 1 to 3, or main memory areas 1, 4, and 5, to the sub-control board 80. As a result, in a game in which a biased role is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended button press order, the updated information in this memory area is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game. In contrast, if a biased role is won and the stop switch 42 is not operated in the recommended button press order, the information in this memory area is not updated, and the same information transmitted in the previous game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

In addition, the sub-control board 80 determines what information has been transmitted by determining whether or not the information transmitted from the main memory areas 1 to 3 or the main memory areas 1, 4, and 5 is in a CZ, and controls the output of the performance based on the result.
Next, the process proceeds to step S346, where the main control board 50 clears temporary memory areas 1 to 3 (setting them to "0"). In the next step S347, the main control board 50 clears the push order information (setting them to "0"). Furthermore, in the next step S348, the main control board 50 clears the first stop reel specification flag (setting it to "0"). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Fig. 121 is a flowchart showing another example of the temporary storage process 1 in Fig. 120. In Fig. 121, step numbers that differ from the process in Fig. 120 are underlined.
Although not shown in Figures 120 and 121, the determination of whether the button press sequence is the recommended button press sequence is executed multiple times (e.g., about five times) after the processing of step S337. Each time, performing an "XOR" operation between the first stop reel identification flag and the definition data as shown in step S337 increases the program capacity. Therefore, after the determination processing of step S337, if the button press sequence is the recommended button press sequence, the process proceeds to step S351, where "0" is stored as the irregular game determination data; if the button press sequence is not the recommended button press sequence, the process proceeds to step S352, where "1" is stored as the irregular game determination data. The determination of whether the button press sequence is the recommended button press sequence after step S337 is performed by determining whether the irregular game determination data is "0." For example, by subtracting "1" from the irregular game determination data, if the zero flag becomes "1," it can be determined that the irregular game determination data (before subtraction) is "1" (not the recommended button press sequence).
This simplifies and speeds up the process of determining whether or not the button press order is recommended.
At the end of this process, the irregular game determination data is cleared (set to "0") in step S353.

2. Second Method (Temporary Preservation Process 2)
In this example, during the advantageous zone and non-AT, three types of count values A, B, and C are drawn as a lottery for the AT. The lottery results for each count value are added to the count value for each game and up to the previous game.
For example, the count values A, B, and C up to the previous game are respectively:
Count value A = X
Count value B=Y
Count value C=Z
and
The lottery results for count values A, B, and C in this game are as follows:
Count value A=a
Count value B=b
Count value C=c
When the count values A, B, and C for the current game are updated,
Count value A = X + a
Count value B = Y + b
Count value C = Z + c
This becomes:

For example, when count value A reaches a first value, an AT lottery is executed, when count value B reaches a second value, a decision is made to execute the AT, and when count value C reaches a third value, a transition is made to CZ.
In addition, the lottery result of the count value for the current game is reflected (addition of each count value) only when a biased role is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order. In other cases, the lottery result of the count value for the current game is not reflected.
Furthermore, unlike the first method, in the second method, the temporary storage area and the actual storage area correspond one-to-one.
Temporary storage area 1 and actual storage area 1 for storing count value A
Temporary storage area 2 and actual storage area 2 for storing count value B
A temporary storage area 3 and a real storage area 3 for storing the count value C
Equipped with.
Here, the above three types of temporary storage areas and actual storage areas are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to these, and in reality, many more count values are drawn by lottery, and temporary storage areas and actual storage areas are provided to store these count values.
A temporary storage area 4 and a main storage area 4 for storing the count value D
A temporary storage area 5 for storing the count value E and a real storage area 5
:
Equipped with.

122 and 123 are flowcharts showing the above-mentioned temporary storage process 2. Fig. 123 is a flowchart following Fig. 122.
122, in step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S363. When the start switch 41 is operated, a role lottery process is executed.
In step S363, the main control board 50 copies the value of real storage area 1 (count value A) to temporary storage area 1. In the next step S364, the main control board 50 copies the value of real storage area 2 (count value B) to temporary storage area 2. Furthermore, in the next step S365, the main control board 50 copies the value of real storage area 3 (count value C) to temporary storage area 3.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the value of the temporary storage area "N" (N=1, 2, 3) and the value of the real storage area "N" become the same value.

In the next step S366, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for the count value A. The lottery for the count value A, as well as the lottery for the count value B and the lottery for the count value C, which will be described later, are executed based on the result of the role lottery.
In the next step S367, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result of the count value A to the temporary memory area 1. For example, if the lottery result of the count value A is "a" and the value of the temporary memory area 1 up to that point is "X," the value of the temporary memory area 1 is updated to "X+a."
In the next step S368, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for the count value B. Next, in step S369, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result for the count value B to the temporary memory area 2.
In the next step S370, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for the count value C. Next, the process proceeds to step S371, where the main control board 50 adds the lottery result for the count value C to the temporary memory area 3.

Next, the process proceeds to step S372, where the main control board 50 transmits the information in temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub-control board 80. This process is a process for executing the control command set 1 and the like described above.
In this way, when the start switch 41 is operated, the lottery results for count values A to C are transmitted to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 can output the effects at the start of the game (before the stop switch 42 is operated) based on this information.
Next, the process proceeds to step S373, where the main control board 50 determines whether the first (initial) stop switch 42 has been operated. If it is determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S374. In step S374, as in the temporary storage process 1 described above, the pressing order information ("aa000000(B)") corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is stored.

Next, the process proceeds to step S375 in Figure 123, where the main control board 50 determines whether the stop switches 42 were operated in the recommended button press order (whether the left stop switch 42 was operated first). This process is made based on the button press order information described above. As with temporary saving process 1, this process subtracts the value of the definition data from the value of the button press order information and determines whether the result is "0".
If it is determined in step S375 that this is the recommended button press order, the process proceeds to step S377; if it is determined that this is not the recommended button press order, the process proceeds to step S376.
In step S376, the main control board 50 transmits the first stop information to the sub-control board 80, and then proceeds to step S377. The information transmitted here corresponds to the operation being performed in a non-recommended button press sequence. When the sub-control board 80 receives the first stop information, it can determine that the operation was performed in a non-recommended button press sequence, and therefore controls the display of the recommended image.

In step S377, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the second stop switch 42 has been operated. If it is determined that the second stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S378.
In step S378, the main control board 50 updates the pressing order information corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42.
Next, the process proceeds to step S379, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not the third stop switch 42 has been operated. If it is determined that the third stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S380.
In step S380, the main control board 50 updates the pressing order information corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42.
Next, the process proceeds to step S381, in which the main control board 50 determines whether or not a biased combination has been won in the current game. As described above, based on the "minor combination and replay condition device number" stored in the RWM 53, it determines whether or not any biased combination has been won.
If it is determined in step S381 that a biased role has been won, the process proceeds to step S382, and if it is determined that a biased role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S387.

In step S382, the main control board 50 generates a first stop reel specification flag. The first stop reel specification flag is generated by performing a logical AND operation on the push order information updated in step S380 and the masking data, as in temporary storage process 1, to generate the first stop reel specification flag "aa000000(B)."
In the next step S383, the main control board 50 determines whether the current press order is the recommended press order. The first stop reel specification flag "aa000000(B)" and the definition data "01000000(B)" are "XORed" and if the result is "0", it is determined to be the recommended press order, and if the result is not "0", it is determined to be not the recommended press order.
If it is determined that this is the recommended button press order, the process proceeds to step S384; if it is determined that this is not the recommended button press order, the process proceeds to step S387.
In step S384, the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary memory area 1 in the real memory area 1.
In the next step S385, the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary memory area 2 in the real memory area 2.
In the next step S386, the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary memory area 3 in the permanent memory area 3.
Then, the process proceeds to step S387.

In step S387, the main control board 50 transmits the values stored in this memory area 1 to 3 to the sub-control board 80. As a result, in a game in which a biased role is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended button press order, the updated values stored in this memory area are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game. In contrast, in a game in which a biased role is won and the stop switch 42 is not operated in the recommended button press order, the information stored in this memory area is not updated, and the same information as the information in this memory area transmitted in the previous game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Next, the process proceeds to step S388, where the main control board 50 clears temporary memory areas 1 to 3 (setting them to "0"). In the next step S389, the main control board 50 clears the push order information (setting them to "0"). Furthermore, in the next step S390, the main control board 50 clears the first stop reel specification flag (setting it to "0"). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

According to the above-described temporary saving process 1 and temporary saving process 2, the lottery results when the start switch 41 is operated can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 before it is determined whether or not this is the recommended pressing order, so that the sub-control board 80 can execute the effects at the start of the game based on these lottery results.
However, it is necessary to provide a storage area for temporary storage.
Also, after the full stop, it is necessary to determine whether or not a biased role has been won and whether or not the recommended button press order is correct.
Furthermore, in the method of temporary storage process 1, the temporary storage memory area is shared, so the memory area for temporary storage can be minimized. However, since the sub-control board 80 cannot determine what information is stored in the temporary storage memory area just by sending it, a process for determining what information it is is required.
In addition, in the method of temporary storage process 1, once a lottery result is stored in the temporary storage area, it becomes impossible to store other lottery results in the temporary storage area for the game.
In contrast, in the method of temporary storage process 2, the information to be stored can be stored one-to-one in temporary storage and final storage. However, it is necessary to provide the same number of temporary storage areas and final storage areas as the number of items to be stored.

In the example of Figure 123, as in Figure 121, if it is determined in step S383 that the button press order is recommended, the irregular game play judgment data may be set to "0" (as in step S351 in Figure 121), and if it is determined that the button press order is not recommended, the irregular game play judgment data may be set to "1" (as in step S352 in Figure 121).
In this case, after step S390, the irregular game determination data is cleared (similar to step S353 in FIG. 121).

Although the ninth embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the non-recommended push order (one-sidedly advantageous push order) was the center first stop or right first stop, which are irregular push orders. However, this is not limited to this, and it may be center first stop only or right first stop only. Furthermore, the non-recommended push order (one-sidedly advantageous push order) may be left first stop only or a push order including left first stop. For example, center first stop may be the recommended push order, and left first stop and right first stop may be the non-recommended push order.
In addition, the recommended pressing order is not limited to specifying only the first stop, but may be, for example, "left, center, right." In this case, if "left, right, center" is selected, it is preferable to display the recommended image at the second stop (right).

(2) In the above embodiment, a recommended image can be displayed to inform the player that the button press order is not the recommended order (a non-recommended button press order). However, the method of informing the player that the button press order is not the recommended order is not limited to displaying a recommended image. For example, instead of displaying a new image called a recommended image, the previous image may be changed. For example, the screen may be darkened (reducing the visibility of the image) to notify the player that the button press order for the current game is not the recommended order.
In addition, when darkening the screen to inform the player that the button press order is not the recommended one, if there is a discrepancy between the displayed content and the internal state, it is acceptable to significantly reduce the visibility of the displayed content, but it is preferable to make the displayed content completely invisible.
In addition, the lighting and blinking pattern of the effect lamp 21 provided on the gaming machine (slot machine 10) may be made to be a unique pattern to indicate that the button press order is not recommended.
Furthermore, a sound may be output from the speaker 22 to indicate that this is not the recommended button press order.

(3) The display area of the recommended image can be set in various ways. For example, first, the recommended image can be displayed so as to cover the entire image display area of the image display device 23.
Secondly, the recommended image may be displayed in a partial area of the image display area of the image display device 23 .
However, when a recommended image is displayed, if there is a discrepancy between the display content and the internal state, it is preferable to display the recommended image so that the display content (the part including the discrepancy) is hidden.

(4) In the ninth embodiment, the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed is determined at the time of the first stop, and if the order is correct, it is determined to be the recommended order. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine whether the recommended order is correct based on the stop results. In this case, the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed is not determined.
In addition, when determining whether the recommended push order is correct based on the stop result, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the stop result differs between the recommended and non-recommended push orders even if the winning combination is the same (same winning flag).
However, when determining the recommended pressing order based on the stop results, it is difficult to make such a determination unless all reels 31 have stopped. For this reason, the stop results are checked when all reels have stopped, and if it is determined that the stop results are based on a non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image is displayed.
Therefore, when displaying a recommended image at the first stop, it is preferable to determine whether the recommended pressing order is based on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

(5) The biased bell shown in Figure 105 is a minor role with four options depending on the pressing order. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to further increase the number of options depending on the pressing order and color.
For example, the push order can be set to four options as described above, and the color of the symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 can be set to two options each (the player must press the correct symbol color), resulting in four options for the correct symbol color. This results in a biased bell with "four push order options x four color options = a total of 16 options" (hereinafter referred to as "16-option biased bell").
In this case, when the 16-choice biased bell is won, if the buttons are pressed in order, the 1-coin role will be awarded with "PB = 1." On the other hand, when the 16-choice biased bell is won, if the buttons are pressed in the correct order and the color is correct, the 15-coin role will be awarded with "PB = 1."

Furthermore, when a 16-choice biased bell is won, if the buttons are pressed in an irregular order and the button order and color are not correct, the system can be configured so that a 1-coin winning combination will be won or the winning combination will be missed (0 coins).
Furthermore, when the 16-choice biased bell is won, if irregular buttons are pressed at will, there is a 1/16 probability of winning a 15-coin role, a 7.5/16 probability of winning a 1-coin role, and a 7.5/16 probability of missing out (0 coins), then the base can be lowered even further than when the biased bell shown in Figure 105 is used, and the number of medals paid out during the AT can be increased.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, a rare combination with a unilaterally advantageous pressing order is provided, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order when the rare combination is won, an AT lottery is executed. However, this is not limited to this, and the rare combination may be a combination that does not matter in pressing order, like a watermelon.
In addition, when a biased bell is won, the AT lottery may be executed (or the AT lottery is favored) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, and the AT lottery may not be executed (or the AT lottery is favored) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order.
(7) When the machine is in a favorable zone and not in AT mode, if the recommended button press sequence is used, the ceiling game number and cycle game number (described below) will be updated for each play. However, if the non-recommended button press sequence is used, the ceiling game number and cycle game number will not be updated regardless of the winning role.
Here, the "periodic game number" refers to, for example, an AT lottery being held every time a predetermined number of games (for example, "100") are played.
In addition, in a game where the button press order does not matter, the ceiling game number and cycle game number may or may not be updated.

(8) In the case of a favorable zone and non-AT, when a non-recommended push order is used in a game in which a push order does not matter, a recommended image is displayed. Here, when a non-recommended push order is used in a game in which a push order does not matter and an AT lottery or the like is executed, the AT lottery or the like may or may not be executed (the lottery result of the AT lottery or the like may be invalidated).
Since the push order doesn't matter role is a role whose expected value doesn't change depending on the push order, in a game where the push order doesn't matter role is won, it is possible to execute the AT lottery, etc., even if the player presses the buttons in a non-recommended order. This means that even if the player presses the buttons in the wrong order in a game where the push order doesn't matter role is won, the result will not be unfavorable to the player, and the results of the AT lottery, etc. are reflected in the performance image after the recommended image display has ended, so the player will not be disappointed. At the same time, the display of the recommended image makes it possible to inform the player of the recommended push order when the player is in a favorable zone and not in the AT.
On the other hand, if a non-recommended button press sequence is used in a game in which the button press sequence does not matter, and the AT lottery etc. is not executed (the results of the AT lottery etc. are invalidated), the results of the AT lottery etc. are not reflected after the display of the recommended image has finished, so it is possible to clearly inform the player of the disadvantages of using a non-recommended button press sequence, and to encourage the player to be careful.

(9) In the ninth embodiment (including the modified examples), a slot machine 10 is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines).
(10) The first to ninth embodiments (including the modifications) are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combination with other embodiments.

Tenth Embodiment
The tenth embodiment relates to a slot machine 10 having a medal selector 110 for sorting medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47, a chute member 120 for guiding medals M that are permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, and a return member 130 for guiding medals M that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the medal tray 19.

The tenth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 124 is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine 10 in the tenth embodiment.
125, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, a setting change (reset) switch 153, a push button 86, and a cross key 87 are added to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 124, the slot machine 10 comprises a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening at the front, and a front door 12 attached to cover the opening of the cabinet 13.
The cabinet 13 is configured into a box shape with an open front by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a top plate 13c, a right side plate and a left side plate (not shown), etc.
Furthermore, the front door 12 is attached to the cabinet 13 so as to cover the opening at the front of the cabinet 13 .

The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened when, for example, the power is turned on, settings are changed, settings are checked, an error occurs, medals are replenished, etc.
Specifically, the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 are attached via a hinge (not shown).
In addition, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the back side of the front door 12 (the side opposite to the side facing the player).

Furthermore, a door key insertion slot (not shown) is provided at a position corresponding to the locking device on the front surface of the front door 12. The door key insertion slot is a portion into which a door key for operating the locking device is inserted.
When the front door 12 is closed and locked, inserting the door key into the door key slot and turning the door key clockwise unlocks the door. When the front door 12 is unlocked and pulled, the door rotates around the hinges, opening the door.

In addition, the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 is provided with a door switch 17 (FIG. 125) for detecting the opening of the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is turned on.
Furthermore, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51 (Figure 125).
The main control board 50 is configured to determine that the front door 12 is closed when the door switch 17 is off, and to determine that the front door 12 is open when the door switch 17 is on.

A display window 18 is provided in the center of the front door 12. The display window 18 is configured to be located in front of the symbol display device 14 when the front door 12 is closed. The three reels 31 provided on the symbol display device 14 can be seen through the display window 18.
In addition, on the front surface of the front door 12 (the surface facing the player), below the display window 18, there are provided a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, and a medal insertion slot 47. The medal insertion slot 47 is where the player inserts medals M when betting or crediting medals M.

Furthermore, a medal payout opening 16 and a medal tray 19 that receives medals M discharged from the medal payout opening 16 are provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12. The medal payout opening 16 is an opening through which medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 and medals M that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 pass.
In addition, a medal selector 110 for sorting medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is provided at a position corresponding to the medal insertion port 47 on the back side of the front door 12 (the side opposite to the side facing the player).

Specifically, a selector base 113 (Figure 126) is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal insertion slot 47, and a medal selector 110 is removably attached to this selector base 113.
The selector base 113 is for detachably holding the medal selector 110, and is formed by bending a metal plate, and is fixed with screws to a position on the back surface of the front door 12 corresponding to the medal insertion slot 47. The medal selector 110 is then detachably attached to the selector base 113.

Furthermore, a chute member 120 is provided on the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position adjacent to the medal selector 110 for guiding medals M that are permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35.
Furthermore, at a position on the back side of the front door 12 corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout port 16, a return member 130 is provided for guiding medals M that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and medals M that have been paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal tray 19.

A medal payout device 15 is also located at the bottom inside the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals M, a hopper motor 36 (Figure 125) that is driven when paying out medals M stored in the hopper 35, and a payout sensor 37 (Figure 125) for detecting medals M paid out from the hopper 35.

The hopper 35 is used to store medals M. In addition, a storage receiving port 35a, which is an opening that receives medals M guided by the chute member 120, is provided at the top of the hopper 35. The storage receiving port 35a opens below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the end on the downstream side of the medal guide passage 121).
As explained in the first embodiment, the dispensing sensor 37 is composed of a pair of dispensing sensors 37a and 37b (Fig. 125) arranged at a predetermined interval.
When a medal M is paid out, a predetermined moving member (not shown) is moved by the medal M, and the movement of the predetermined moving member turns on/off the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b.

Also, in Figure 125, the hopper motor 36 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the output port 52, and the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51.
When medals M are to be paid out from the medal payout device 15, the main control board 50 drives the hopper motor 36.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 determines whether the medals M have been normally paid out based on whether the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

In Figure 124, a power supply unit (not shown) is located at the bottom inside the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The power supply unit includes a power supply board (not shown) that supplies power to the main control board 50, sub-control board 80, etc., a power switch 11 (Figure 125) that is operated to turn the power on/off, a setting key switch 152 (Figure 125) that is operated to transition to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 (Figure 125) that is operated to change the setting value or to clear an error.

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated to turn the power on and off.
Turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "powering on,""turning on the power," or "resuming power supply."
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the power supply."

The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is operated to transition to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed, or to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed.
When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port 151 (Fig. 125) and rotated clockwise by approximately 90 degrees, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and when the setting key is returned to its original position, the setting key switch 152 is turned off.

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves as both the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 .
The setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing a setting value in the setting change state.
Furthermore, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to cancel the error notification after the cause of the error has been eliminated.
In this way, the setting change (reset) switch 153 functions as the setting change switch 153 in the setting change state, and functions as the reset switch 153 when an error is notified.

Hereinafter, it may be referred to as the "setting change (reset) switch 153", the "setting change switch 153", or the "reset switch 153".
Furthermore, for various switches such as the setting change (reset) switch 153, turning them on may be referred to as "operating," being in the on state may be referred to as "being operated," and being in the off state may be referred to as "not being operated."
In the tenth embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are used as a single switch, but this is not limiting, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

In FIG. 125, a setting key switch 152 and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51 .
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 in the on state, the state transitions to a setting change state, and when the setting key switch 152 is turned on with the power on, the state transitions to a setting confirmation state.

When the setting change state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 mounted on the main control board 50. Furthermore, in the setting change state, the setting value changes (increases by 1) each time the setting change switch 153 is operated. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the setting key switch 152 is then turned off, the setting change state ends and the setting value display LED 73 goes out. After the start switch 41 is operated, the setting value can no longer be changed, even if the setting change switch 153 is operated.

The set value is stored in a predetermined address in the RWM 53 .
In the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value is changed and the changed setting value is stored (overwritten) at a predetermined address in the RWM 53 .
In addition, in the setting change state, simply operating the setting change switch 153 does not cause the changed setting value to be stored (overwritten) in a specified address of the RWM 53. Instead, the setting value is confirmed when the start switch 41 is operated, and at this time, the confirmed setting value may be stored (overwritten) in a specified address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, once the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. When the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends and the setting value display LED 73 goes out.

Next, the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130 will be described in more detail with reference to Figures 126 to 134.
Figure 126 is a diagram showing the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130, and is a diagram explaining the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.
Figure 127 is a diagram in which a hopper 35 is added to Figure 126, and explains the relationship between the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the hopper 35.

FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the distance of the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the thickness of the medal M.
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the dimensions of each part of the chute member 120 and the diameter and radius of the medal M.
Figure 130 is a diagram explaining the relationship between one medal M that has entered the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and other medals M that are heading from the medal selector 110 to the chute member 120.

FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the width of the medal guide passage 121 of the chute member 120 and the dimensions of each part of the screw 127 that fixes the chute member 120.
Figure 132 is a diagram illustrating an example in which neither the return receiving opening 131 nor the upper edge 135 is located vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

Figure 133 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a blocking member 140 is placed vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, and this blocking member 140 blocks part of the return receiving opening 131.
Figure 134 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a portion of the return receiving opening 131 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

As shown in Figure 126, the medal selector 110 has a medal passage 111 through which medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 pass. The medal passage 111 is formed in a roughly L-shape, and in Figure 126 has a vertical section 111a that extends roughly vertically downward from the left side of the top surface of the medal selector 110, and an inclined section 111b that slopes gently diagonally downward to the right from the bottom end of the vertical section 111a to the lower right side of the medal selector 110. In addition, an entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the medal selector 110, and an exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided on the lower right side of the medal selector 110.

When the medal selector 110 is attached to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, an entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is positioned vertically below the medal insertion port 47. The medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is then sent to the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110.
Also, as shown in Figure 126, a blocker 45 for allowing/disallowing the insertion of medals M is provided at the midpoint of the inclined portion 111b of the medal passage 111, and an insertion sensor 44 capable of detecting medals M passing through the medal passage 111 is provided downstream of the blocker 45 in the inclined portion 111b of the medal passage 111.

The blocker 45 is used to allow or disallow the insertion of medals M, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an output port 52 (Figure 125).
The main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 so as to prohibit the insertion of medals M during the game (from the time when the reels 31 start to rotate until all the reels 31 stop, and when a winning combination is achieved, until the time when the payout of medals M corresponding to the winning combination is completed).

Also, when a specified number of medals M have already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, no more medals M can be bet or credited, so the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to prohibit the insertion of medals M.
On the other hand, when no game is being played (after the payout of medals M has been completed and before the reels 31 start to rotate), if the number of medals M betted has not reached the specified number or the number of credits has not reached the upper limit, the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to allow the insertion of medals M.

When the insertion of medals M is prohibited, the blocker 45 is configured to remove medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 from the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 and cause them to fall downward. Furthermore, medals M that have fallen downward after leaving the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 are guided by the return member 130, discharged from the medal payout port 16, and stored in the medal tray 19.

In contrast, when the insertion of medals M is permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to guide medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111. Furthermore, medals M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 pass through insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b (hereinafter collectively referred to as "insertion sensors 44"), are discharged from the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111, are guided by the chute member 120, and are stored in the hopper 35.

The insertion sensor 44 is used to detect medals M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, and as shown in Figure 126, is composed of a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance. The insertion sensor 44a is arranged upstream, and the insertion sensor 44b is arranged downstream. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (Figure 125).

The medal M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 is first detected by the upstream throw-in sensor 44a, and then detected by the downstream throw-in sensor 44b.
Specifically, when a medal M is guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, the upstream insertion sensor 44a first detects the medal M (changes from off to on).
When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the downstream throw-in sensor 44b next detects the medal M (changes from OFF to ON).

When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the upstream insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (changes from ON to OFF).
When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the downstream insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changes from ON to OFF).
The main control board 50 then determines whether the medal M has passed through the medal passage 111 normally based on whether the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

The chute member 120 guides medals M that have been permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and are ejected from the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111 to a hopper 35 located below the interior of the cabinet 13, and is located adjacent to the medal selector 110 on the back side of the front door 12.

The chute member 120 also has a medal guide passage 121 for guiding the medals M from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.
The medal guide passage 121 is gently inclined so that its height gradually decreases from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.

In addition, in Figure 126, when a medal M is permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and passes through the medal passage 111, it is discharged from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111. Here, as shown in Figure 124, the medal selector 110 is attached to the back surface of the front door 12. Therefore, the exit 111d is located closer to the back surface of the front door 12. In contrast, as shown in Figure 124, the hopper 35 is located closer to the center inside the cabinet 13. In other words, in the direction perpendicular to the plane of Figure 126, the hopper 35 is located closer to the front than the exit 111d. Therefore, there is a certain distance between the exit 111d and the hopper 35. Therefore, the medal guide passage 121 is curved in an arc toward the hopper 35 in order to guide the medal M discharged from the exit 111d toward the hopper 35.

126, the chute member 120 has a bottom surface portion 122 that forms the bottom surface of the medal guide passage 121, an inner wall portion 123 that forms the inner side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121, and an outer wall portion 124 that forms the outer side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121. The top of the medal guide passage 121 is open.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129, the chute member 120 has a step portion 125 at a position on the bottom surface portion 122 corresponding to the middle of the medal guide passage 121, which is lower in height on the hopper 35 (downstream) side than on the medal selector 110 (upstream) side.

As described above, the medal guide path 121 is formed in an arc-shaped curve. As a result, the medal M moves from upstream to downstream on the bottom surface 122 of the medal guide path 121, and its speed slows down as it comes into contact with the inner wall portion 123 and outer wall portion 124 along the medal guide path 121.

To address this issue, a step 125 is provided on the bottom surface 122 at a position midway along the medal guide path 121, as shown in Figure 129, with the downstream side being lower in height than the upstream side. Then, medals M moving from the upstream side to the downstream side of the medal guide path 121 are dropped down the step 125. This allows medals M that have been decelerated by coming into contact with the inner wall 123 and outer wall 124 to be accelerated.

As shown in FIG. 126, a fixing portion 126 is provided on the outer wall portion 124 of the chute member 120 near the end on the medal selector 110 side. The fixing portion 126 is used to fix the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12, and protrudes upward from the upper end of the outer wall portion 124. The fixing portion 126 also has a screw hole (not shown) that penetrates from its front side to its rear side. The screw hole that penetrates the fixing portion 126 is provided above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124.

The chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through a threaded hole in the fixing portion 126. Furthermore, when the chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 by the screw 127, the screw 127 is positioned above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124.

Here, as shown in FIG. 128, the thickness of the medal M is "T".
129, the diameter of the medal M is "D" and the radius of the medal M is "R." Furthermore, the height of the step portion 125 is "H1," the height of the inner wall portion 123 is "H2," and the height of the outer wall portion 124 is "H3."
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 131, the width of the medal guide passage 121 (the distance between the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124) is "L1", the total length of the screw 127 is "L2", and the diameter of the screw head is "L3".

The width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the thickness "T" of the medal M, and the diameter "D" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "L1 >T" and "L1 <D." In other words, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121 is wider (larger) than the thickness "T" of the medal M, and narrower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M.
This allows the medal M to move on the bottom surface 122 of the medal guide passage 121 in an upright state.

Furthermore, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the diameter "D" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "H2<D" and "H3<D." In other words, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 is lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M, and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 is also lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M.
This allows the medal M to move on the bottom surface 122 of the medal guide passage 121 with the top of the medal M projecting upward from the upper ends of the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124 .

Furthermore, the height "H1" of the step portion 125, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the radius "R" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "H1<H2", "H1<H3", and "H1<R". In other words, the height "H1" of the step portion 125 is lower (smaller) than the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and lower (smaller) than the radius "R" of the medal M.
This prevents the medal M from climbing over the inner wall portion 123 or the outer wall portion 124 and flying out of the medal guide passage 121 when it falls from the step portion 125.

The height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 may be configured to satisfy "H2 = H3", or may be configured to satisfy "H2 <H3", or may be configured to satisfy "H2 >H3".
That is, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 may be equal to the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, may be higher (larger) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, or may be lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124.

Furthermore, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the overall length "L2" of the screw 127, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head are configured to satisfy "L1 <L2" and "L1 <L3." In other words, the overall length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head is thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121.
This prevents the removed screw 127 from entering the medal guide passage 121 even if the screw 127 comes off from the rear surface of the front door 12, so that the passage of the medal M is not obstructed.
The screw 127 is also configured to satisfy the relationship "L2 >L3." That is, the overall length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the diameter "L3" of the screw head. This allows the screw 127 to firmly secure the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12.

Note that a locking portion (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position on the chute member 120. This locking portion is used to lock the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12. With the sheet member 120 locked to the back surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through a threaded hole in the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes loose, the chute member 120 will not come off the back surface of the front door 12 and fall.

The medal insertion slot 47 also has a medal placement section (not shown) on which multiple medals M can be placed in a lined up state. In the tenth embodiment, the medal placement section is capable of placing 10 medals M in a lined up state. Then, multiple medals M placed in a lined up state on the medal placement section can be inserted successively from the medal insertion slot 47.

Furthermore, when the thickness of the medal M is "T," the width of the medal guide passage 121 is "L1," and the number of medals M that can be placed in the medal placement section is "M," the medal guide passage 121 is configured to satisfy "L1 < (M ÷ 2) × T." In other words, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121 is narrower (smaller) than the thickness "(M ÷ 2) × T" of half the number of medals M that can be placed in the medal placement section of the medal insertion port 47.

The return member 130 is intended to guide medals M that have been prohibited from being inserted by the medal selector 110 and medals M that have been paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal tray 19, and is provided at a position on the back side of the front door 12 corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout opening 16.
When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, a medal return passage 132 and a medal payout passage 134 are formed between the back surface of the front door 12 and the return member 130, as shown in Figure 126.

The medal return passage 132 is a passage that guides medals M that have been prohibited from being inserted by the medal selector 110 to the medal payout opening 16 .
Furthermore, the medal payout passage 134 is a passage that guides the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout opening 16.
The medal return passage 132 and the medal payout passage 134 merge midway to form a single passage.

126, a return acceptance opening 131 is provided at the top of the return member 130. The return acceptance opening 131 is an opening for accepting medals M that have been prohibited from being inserted by the medal selector 110 and have fallen downward after deviating from the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45, and is an opening that serves as the entrance to a medal return passage 132, and is configured to be located vertically below the blocker 45 of the medal selector 110.
Then, the medal M, which is not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and falls downward off the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45, passes through the return receiving port 131, is guided by the medal return passage 132, passes through the medal payout port 16 and is stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

In addition, a payout receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the return member 130 and to the right in Fig. 126. The payout receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15, and serves as an entrance to the medal payout passage 134, and is configured to be located in front of the medal payout device 15 when the front door 12 is closed.
The medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass through the payout receiving port 133, are guided by the medal payout passage 134, pass through the medal payout port 16 and are stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

126, the peripheral edge of the return receiving opening 131 at the top of the return member 130 is referred to as the "upper edge 135." In other words, the upper edge 135 is the part that corresponds to the edge around the return receiving opening 131. When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be approximately horizontal.
126, a gap 112 is provided between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. An upper edge 135 is disposed vertically below the gap 112. As a result, the return receiving opening 131 is not disposed vertically below the gap 112.

As shown in FIG. 128, the thickness of the medal M is "T", the spacing of the gap 112 is "W", and the width of the upper edge 135 is "B".
The thickness "T" of the medal M and the spacing "W" of the gap 112 are configured to satisfy "W>T." In other words, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is larger than the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 130 , the medal M can be placed in the gap 112.
More specifically, it is configured to satisfy "W≈2×T." In other words, the width "W" of the gap 112 is set to be approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, "2" medals M can be placed in the gap 112.

In the tenth embodiment, a selector base 113 (Figure 126) is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal insertion slot 47, and a medal selector 110 is removably attached to this selector base 113.
126 , the right side of the selector base 113 is disposed between the right side surface of the medal selector 110 (the surface on which the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided) and the upstream end of the chute member 120. The gap 112 is disposed between the right side of the selector base 113 and the upstream end of the chute member 120.

The selector base 113 is formed by bending a metal plate, and the thickness of the metal plate that forms the selector base 113 is set to 0.8 mm to 1.0 mm.
Furthermore, the thickness "T" of the medal M is set to "1.6" mm, and the width "W" of the gap 12 is set to "3.2" mm.
Therefore, the distance from the right side of the medal selector 110 (the side on which the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided) to the upstream end of the chute member 120 is set to between 4.0 mm and 4.2 mm.

The upper edge 135 is positioned vertically below the gap 112, and is configured so that the thickness "T" of the medal M, the spacing "W" of the gap 112, and the width "B" of the upper edge 135 satisfy the relationships "B > T" and "B > W." In other words, the width "B" of the upper edge 135 is greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M and greater than the spacing "W" of the gap 112. In addition, the upper edge 135 is configured to be approximately horizontal. Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 can be placed on top of the upper edge 135.

For example, a hall attendant may place a medal M in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 during maintenance of the medal selector 110. At this time, the medal M rests on the upper edge 135, so the medal M can remain in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.
However, there are cases where a store clerk at the parlor closes the front door 12, forgetting that the medal M is still in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. In this case, the impact of closing the front door 12 causes the medal M to fall out of the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

At this time, the upper edge 135 is located vertically below the gap 112, and the return receiving opening 131 is not located there, so medals M that fall through the gap 112 do not fall into the return receiving opening 131. Therefore, medals M that fall through the gap 112 do not pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout opening 16, and reach the medal tray 19. This prevents hall staff from giving medals M that have been placed in the gap 112 for maintenance of the medal selector 110 to players.

Also, as shown in Figure 127, the gap 112 is positioned above the storage receiving opening 35a of the hopper 35. In other words, the storage receiving opening 35a of the hopper 35 opens at a lower position than the gap 112. This allows medals M that fall through the gap 112 when the front door 12 is closed to fall into the storage receiving opening 35a, and can therefore be stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, so when "one" medal M is placed in the gap 112, there is a gap between the gap 112 and the medal M, so the "one" medal M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112.
When the front door 12 is closed with this "one" medal M in the gap 112, the "one" medal M falls from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time, falls into the storage receiving port 35a, and is stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, if the interval "W" of the gap 112 is slightly wider (larger) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, when "two" medals M are placed in the gap 112, the "two" medals M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112.
When the front door 12 is closed with these "2" medals M in the gap 112, the medals M fall from the gap 112 due to the impact when the front door 12 is closed, just as when the front door 12 is closed with "1" medal M in the gap 112, and fall into the storage receiving port 35a to be stored in the hopper 35.

Conversely, if the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower (smaller) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, two medals M will be pushed into the gap 112. In this case, the two pushed-in medals M will not become unable to be removed from the gap 112.
However, if the front door 12 is closed with the two medals M still pushed into the gap 112 , the two medals M may remain in the gap 112 .

Here, as shown in Figure 130, the medal M that has been inserted into the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 remains in the gap 112, blocking the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110. Therefore, when one medal M remains in the gap 112, other medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 will hit the one medal M in the gap 112 and stop when they pass through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

Furthermore, when another medal M passing through the medal passage 111 hits one medal M in the gap 112, the upper end of the one medal M in the gap 112 is positioned above the center of the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111. Therefore, the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111 will not climb over the one medal M in the gap 112.
Therefore, when one medal M has entered the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

Furthermore, although it is not possible to directly detect whether a medal M is remaining in the gap 112, as described above, when one medal M is remaining in the gap 112, other medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 will hit the one medal M in the gap 112 and stop. At this time, the other medals M will remain stuck near the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, causing the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b to remain on.

Furthermore, if the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error has been detected in which a medal M has become stuck (remained) in the medal selector 110, and issues a notification to that effect. This makes it possible to indirectly detect that a medal M is stuck in the gap 112. Error detection and notification will be described later.

Furthermore, when the chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127 , the return receiving opening 131 is not located vertically below the screw 127 .
Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes off from the rear surface of the front door 12, the removed screw 127 will not fall into the return receiving opening 131. Therefore, the removed screw 127 will not pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout opening 16, and reach the medal tray 19.

As shown in Figure 125, the medal selector 110 is also equipped with a passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine whether or not there is an error such as a medal M becoming stuck (retained) or cheating. Although not shown in Figure 126, the passage sensor 46 is provided in the vertical section 111a of the medal passage 111. In other words, the passage sensor 46 is provided upstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111.

For this reason, a medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is first detected by the passage sensor 46. Furthermore, the passage sensor 46 can detect a medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 regardless of whether the blocker 45 is in a state that allows the insertion of a medal M (on state) or a state that does not allow it (off state).

Although not shown in Figures 124 to 134, the chute member 120 is equipped with a chute sensor midway along the medal guide passage 121. Similar to the passage sensor 46, the chute sensor is a sensor provided to determine whether or not there is an error such as a medal M becoming stuck (retained) or whether cheating has occurred. Because the chute member 120 is intended to guide medals M that have been permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, the chute sensor is provided downstream of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In addition, the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51 .
It is possible to provide both the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor, or only one of them, or neither of them.

Next, the detection of an error, the notification of an error, and the cancellation of the notification of an error in the tenth embodiment will be described.
For example, when the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector retention error") has been detected in which a medal M is jammed (remains) in the medal selector 110, and issues a notification indicating the selector retention error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector retention notification"). Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code (for example, "CE") indicating the selector retention error on the winning number display LED 78 as the selector retention notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector congestion error, it transmits a command indicating the selector congestion error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector congestion command") to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stagnant command, it issues a selector stagnant notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the selector stagnant notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "selector error" on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, for example, if the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not turn on in this order (the medal M does not pass through normally), the main control board 50 determines that an error has been detected in which the medal M has not passed through normally (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passage error"), and issues a notification indicating the selector passage error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passage error notification").

As described above, when a medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, first the insertion sensor 44a changes from off to on, then the insertion sensor 44b changes from off to on, then the insertion sensor 44a changes from on to off, and finally the insertion sensor 44b changes from on to off.
When the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b turn on/off in the above order, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed through normally, and when the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b do not turn on/off in the above order, it determines that a selector passage error has been detected.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally, it executes a process of adding "1" to the number of bets or the number of credits for that medal M.
In response to this, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passage error, it displays a code indicating the selector passage error (for example, "CP") on the winning number display LED 78 as a selector passage error notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passage error, it transmits a command indicating the selector passage error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passage error command") to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the selector passing error command, it issues a selector passing error notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the selector passing error notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "selector error" on the image display device 23.

It may also be determined that a selector passing error (or selector backflow error) has been detected when the input sensor 44b changes from off to on while the input sensor 44a is off.
In addition, it may be determined that a selector passing error (or selector backflow error) has been detected when the input sensor 44b changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44b changes from on to off, and finally the input sensor 44a changes from on to off.

Furthermore, when the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined time from when it detects the medal M, and the medal M is no longer detected after the predetermined time has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally.
On the other hand, if the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the passage sensor 46 first detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Furthermore, if the passage sensor 46 no longer detects the medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed since it first detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has been detected.

Furthermore, the chute sensor continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined time from the time it detects the medal M, and when it no longer detects the medal M after the predetermined time has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally.
On the other hand, if the chute sensor continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first time the medal M was detected, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Furthermore, if the chute sensor no longer detects the medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed since the chute sensor first detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has been detected.

The main control board 50 also includes an input monitoring counter (not shown).
The insertion monitoring counter is a counter that is incremented by "1" when the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally while the blocker 45 is in the on state (a state in which the passage of the medal M is permitted), and is decremented by "1" when the medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally. Therefore, the insertion monitoring counter alternates between "1" and "0" under normal circumstances.
When the blocker 45 is in the OFF state (a state in which the passage of the medal M is not permitted), the insertion monitoring counter is not incremented by "1" even if the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46.
The insertion monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from an off state (a state in which the passage of medals M is not permitted) to an on state (a state in which the passage of medals M is permitted).

When the blocker 45 is in the on state, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally, and subtracts "1" from the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally.
When the blocker 45 is in the on state, if the passage sensor 46 does not detect the passage of the medal M, and only the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b detect the passage of the medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 determines that an insertion monitoring error has been detected.

Also, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, if the passage sensor 46 detects the passage of a medal M, but the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b do not detect the passage of a medal M, and then the passage sensor 46 detects the passage of a medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "2" and the main control board 50 determines that a insertion monitoring error has been detected.

In addition, the insertion monitoring counter may be a counter that adds "1" when the medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally when the blocker 45 is in the on state, and subtracts "1" when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally.
In other words, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the main control board 50 may add "1" to the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally, and may subtract "1" from the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally.

When the blocker 45 is in the on state, if the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b detect the passage of a medal M, but the chute sensor does not detect the passage of a medal M, and then the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b further detect the passage of a medal M, the input monitoring counter becomes "2", and the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected.
Also, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, if the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, and only the chute sensor detects the passage of the medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 may determine that an insertion monitoring error has been detected.

Note that the normal value of the input monitoring counter is not limited to "0" to "1." In other words, the main control board 50 does not necessarily determine that an input monitoring error has occurred when the input monitoring counter reaches "2" or "-1." For example, the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "3" or greater, or a predetermined value of "-2" or less.

In addition, when the main control board 50 increments/decrements the input monitoring counter using the input signal from the passage sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b, it clears the input monitoring counter when the blocker 45 is changed from the off state to the on state.
However, when the main control board 50 increments/decrements the input monitoring counter using input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor, the input monitoring counter may or may not be cleared when the blocker 45 is changed from the off state to the on state.
In other words, when the input monitoring counter is incremented/decremented by the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor, it may or may not be cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

Alternatively, a loading monitoring counter for the passage sensor 46 and a loading monitoring counter for the chute sensor may be provided separately.
That is, the input monitoring counter may include a first input monitoring counter and a second input monitoring counter.
The first input monitoring counter is a counter that is incremented/decremented by an input signal from the passage sensor 46 and input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b.
Furthermore, the second throw-in monitoring counter is a counter that is incremented/decremented by input signals from the throw-in sensors 44a and 44b and an input signal from the chute sensor.

In other words, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the first input monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally, and subtracts "1" from the first input monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally.
The main control board 50 then determines that an input monitoring error has been detected when the first input monitoring counter is no longer a normal value (for example, when it becomes a predetermined value below "-1" or a predetermined value above "2").

In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the second input monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally, and subtracts "1" from the second input monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally.
Then, the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has been detected when the second input monitoring counter is no longer a normal value (for example, when it becomes a predetermined value below "-1" or a predetermined value above "2").

Furthermore, for example, if the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b do not turn on/off even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the main control board 50 determines that an error has been detected in which no medals M are stored in the hopper 35 (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper empty error"), and issues a notification indicating the hopper empty error (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper empty notification"). Specifically, the main control board 50 issues a hopper empty notification by displaying a code indicating a hopper empty error (for example, "HE") on the winning number display LED 78 (Figure 125).

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper empty error, it sends a command indicating that the hopper is empty (hereinafter referred to as an "empty command") to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the empty command, it issues a hopper empty notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the hopper empty notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "hopper empty" on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, for example, if the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error in which medals M are jammed in the hopper 35 (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam error") has been detected, and issues a notification indicating the hopper jam error (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam notification"). Specifically, the main control board 50 issues a hopper jam notification by displaying a code indicating a hopper jam error (for example, "HP") on the winning number display LED 78.

In addition, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it sends a command indicating a hopper jam (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam command") to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, it issues a hopper jam alert using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the hopper jam alert, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "hopper jam" on the image display device 23.

When the various errors described above are detected, the main control board 50 stops the progress of the game until the various error notifications are cleared.
Furthermore, when the causes of the various errors described above are removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the various errors, but once the various error notifications have been issued, they will not be released simply by removing the cause of the corresponding error (by no longer detecting the error), but will continue until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 will release the various error notifications.

For example, when a selector retention error occurs, the cause of the selector retention error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the medal M that has become jammed (retained) in the medal selector 110. After that, the selector retention notification can be cancelled by operating the reset switch 153.
In the case of a selector passage error, as in the case of a selector retention error, the cause of the selector passage error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the medal M from the medal selector 110. After that, the selector passage error notification can be canceled by operating the reset switch 153.

Furthermore, when a hopper empty error occurs, the cause of the hopper empty error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and refilling the hopper 35 with medals M. After that, the hopper empty notification can be cancelled by operating the reset switch 153.
After replenishing the hopper 35 with medals M, the hopper empty notification can also be cancelled by turning the door key counterclockwise by about 45 degrees to switch the release switch from off to on.

Furthermore, in the event of a hopper jam error, the cause of the hopper jam error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the medals M stuck in the hopper 35. The hopper jam alarm can then be cancelled by operating the reset switch 153.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open (hereinafter referred to as "door open") by the door switch 17 being turned on, it issues a notification (hereinafter referred to as "door open notification") indicating that the front door 12 is open. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code (for example, "dE") indicating that the front door 12 is open on the acquisition number display LED 78 as the door open notification.
In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open by the door switch 17 being turned on, it sends a command indicating that the front door 12 is open (hereinafter referred to as the ``door open command'') to the sub-control board 80.

When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it issues a door open notification using the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as a door open notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

Additionally, a release switch (not shown) for releasing the door open notification is provided near the locking device on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player). When the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot and turned counterclockwise by approximately 45 degrees in this state, the release switch changes from off to on. In other words, when the door key is turned by approximately 45 degrees in the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12, the release switch changes from off to on.
As described above, the door lock is released when the door key is inserted into the door key slot and turned 90 degrees clockwise. When the front door 12 is pulled in the unlocked state, the front door 12 rotates around the hinges and opens.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, but once the door open notification is executed, it is not cancelled simply by closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17, but continues until the cancellation switch is turned from off to on.
Then, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed to turn off the door switch 17, and in this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) by about 45 degrees to turn the release switch from off to on, thereby canceling the door open notification.

In this way, the operation of turning the door key in the opposite direction to that for unlocking the front door 12 is the operation for canceling the door open notification.
Also, when the door open notification is cancelled, the main control board 50 displays the number of wins before displaying "dE" on the win number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the release switch changes from off to on, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating the release of the door open notification (hereinafter referred to as the "notification release command") to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancel command, it terminates the door opening notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

Next, with reference to Figures 135 to 145, the operation modes when an error is detected, when an error is notified, and when an error is cleared in the tenth embodiment will be described.
135 to 142 are time charts showing the operation modes when an error is detected and when an error is cleared in the tenth embodiment.
FIG. 135 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated after the cause of the selector retention error has been removed, and when the release switch is operated after the front door 12 is closed.

135, when a selector stagnation error occurs at timing "X11", the main control board 50 detects the selector stagnation error. In addition, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 execute a selector stagnation notification.
Specifically, at the timing of "X11" in Figure 135, if a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, the main control board 50 displays "CE", which indicates a selector retention error, on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector retention notification.

In addition, when the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnant error, it sends a selector stagnant command to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stagnation command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stagnation notification, and displays the words "Selector stagnation error" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened at timing "X12" in Figure 135, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12 (door open).
135, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X12", the door switch 17 is turned on and the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12. However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification even if it detects the opening of the front door 12, and continues the selector retention notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it transmits a door open command indicating that the front door 12 is open to the sub-control board 80 .
However, while the selector stagnation notification is being executed, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector stagnation notification.

After that, at timing "X13" in Figure 135, if the medal M stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is removed, that is, if the cause of the selector retention error is removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the selector retention error. However, once the selector retention notification has been issued, it will not be released simply by removing the cause of the selector retention error (the selector retention error will no longer be detected), and will continue until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on).

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X14" in FIG. 135, the main control board 50 cancels the selector stagnation notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it cancels the selector stagnation notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

However, at timing "X14" in Figure 135, even if the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector retention notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. Then, when the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification, it then issues a door open notification using the acquisition number display LED 78. Specifically, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "CE," which indicates a selector retention error, to "dE," which indicates the front door 12 is open (door open).
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector dwell notification, it then issues a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the door open notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message saying "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

After that, when the front door 12 is closed at timing "X15" in Figure 135, the door switch 17 is turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects that the front door 12 is open. However, once the door open notification has been executed, it will not be canceled simply by closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17, and will continue until the release switch is operated (turned on).

135, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of wins before the error code was displayed on the win number display LED 78, and sends a notification release command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the door open notification has been released.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancel command, it cancels the door open notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

FIG. 136 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error.
In Figure 136, at the timing of "X21", when a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnation error, it displays "CE" indicating a selector stagnation error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification, and sends a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.
In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector stagnation command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stagnation notification, and displays the words "Selector stagnation error" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, at timing "X22" in Figure 136, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened.
However, while the selector stagnation notification is being executed, even if the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector stagnation notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it transmits a door open command indicating that the front door 12 is open to the sub-control board 80 .
However, while the selector stagnation notification is being executed, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it will not execute the door open notification and will continue to execute the selector stagnation notification.

Then, at timing "X23" in Figure 136, if a medal M becomes stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, i.e., the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated, and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector retention notification.

Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it cancels the selector stagnation notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.
However, in FIG. 136, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily cancelled at the timing of "X23", but then the selector stagnation notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".

Specifically, at timing "X23" in Figure 136, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will cancel the selector stuck notification and will now control the system to issue a door open notification. Then, at timing "X24" in Figure 136, the main control board 50 will cancel the door open notification and will again control the system to issue a selector stuck notification.

That is, at timing "X23" in Figure 136, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "CE," which indicates a selector dwell error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at timing "X24," controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "dE" to "CE." Furthermore, at timing "X24" in Figure 136, the main control board 50 sends a selector dwell command to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when an error clear command is received at timing "X23" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector dwell notification and controls the system to issue a door open notification. Then, when a selector dwell command is received at timing "X24" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls the system to issue a selector dwell notification again.

In other words, at timing "X23" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open." Then, at timing "X24," the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Selector stuck error."

Here, various errors such as selector congestion errors, selector passing errors, hopper empty errors, and hopper jam errors are managed (detected, notified, and released) by the main control board 50, but door opening is sometimes managed (detected, notified, and released) by the main control board 50 and sometimes managed (detected, notified, and released) by the sub-control board 80.
In addition, the door open notification may be cancelled (terminated) when a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has passed since the door was detected as open, when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, or when the release switch is operated (from off to on, or from off to on and back to off) with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off.

Furthermore, the door open notification can be displayed in three ways: by displaying a code such as "dE" on the acquisition count display LED 78, by outputting a voice such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22, and by displaying text such as "Door open" on the image display device 23; by outputting a voice such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and by displaying text such as "Door open" on the image display device 23; by only outputting a voice such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22; or by only displaying text such as "Door open" on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, in Figure 136, depending on the processing performed between the time when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", the time required from "X23" to "X24" may be extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) so that it cannot be perceived by human perception, or may be relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) so that it can be perceived by human perception.
Therefore, by combining the various cases described above, various operating modes are possible between the time when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 136 and the time when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24".

That is, in FIG. 136, between the time when the selector stagnant notification is cancelled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnant notification is executed again at timing "X24", there are cases where the door open notification is executed and cases where the door open notification is not executed.
In addition, in Figure 136, when a door open notification is executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", there are times when it is possible for a human to recognize that the door open notification has been executed visually or audibly, and times when it is not possible for a human to recognize that the door open notification has been executed visually or audibly, or if it is recognized, it is only for an instant.

Furthermore, in Figure 136, if the door open notification is not executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24," there will be times when it is possible for a human to visually or audibly recognize that the selector dwell notification has been canceled and then executed again, and times when it is not possible for a human to visually or audibly recognize that the selector dwell notification has been canceled and then executed again, or if it is recognized, it will only be for an instant.

For example, door opening may be managed by the main control board 50, and the door open notification may be released (ended) when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off. The door open notification may be displayed in one of three ways: by displaying a code such as "dE" on the number of wins display LED 78, by outputting a voice message such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22, or by displaying text such as "Door open" on the image display device 23.

In this case, in FIG. 136, the door open notification can be executed between the time when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23" and the time when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, in Figure 136, if the time required from canceling the selector dwell notification at timing "X23" to executing the selector dwell notification again at timing "X24" is relatively long enough to be recognized by human perception (for example, 3 to 5 seconds), when the door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X24", this door open notification can be recognized by human vision and hearing.

In contrast to this, if the time required from canceling the selector dwell notification at timing "X23" in Figure 136 to executing the selector dwell notification again at timing "X24" is so short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) that it cannot be perceived by human perception, even if a door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X23", it will be difficult for humans to recognize this door open notification visually or audibly.
However, even if the time required from "X23" to "X24" is so short that it cannot be recognized by human perception, there are cases in which the human hearing can recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been canceled at the timing of "X23" and then re-executed at the timing of "X24."

That is, when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23," the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" is interrupted midway, and when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at the timing of "X24," the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning. Therefore, since it sounds like "Call an attendant...call an attendant," it is possible for a human ear to recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been canceled and then executed again.
In addition, when an alarm sound such as "beep" or "beep" is output from the speaker 22 as a selector stagnation notification, the human ear cannot recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been cancelled and then executed again, or even if it can be recognized, it is only for an instant.

In addition, for example, door opening may be managed by the sub-control board 80, and the door open notification may be canceled (terminated) when a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the door opening was detected. The door open notification may be output in two ways: by audio output from the speaker 22, such as "Door is open," and by displaying text such as "Door open" on the image display device 23.
In this case, if the selector stagnation notification is canceled and then executed again before a predetermined time has elapsed since the door opening was detected, the door open notification can be executed between the time when the selector stagnation notification is canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 136 and the time when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24".

In contrast, the door open notification is not executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was detected as open. Therefore, if the selector dwell notification is canceled and then executed again after a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was detected as open, the door open notification will not be executed between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 136 and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24".

Also, in Figure 136, if the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" and then the door open notification is not executed until the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", there may be times when the time required from "X23" to "X24" is relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) to the extent that it can be recognized by human perception.
In this case, from "X23" to "X24," the winning number display LED 78 displays the winning number before "CE" was displayed, the speaker 22 outputs the sound before outputting the sound "Please call an attendant," and the image display device 23 displays the screen before displaying the words "SELECTOR ERROR" (for example, the game screen or game standby screen). These displays from "X23" to "X24" are recognizable by human eyes and ears. Therefore, it is also recognizable by human eyes and ears that the selector dwell notification has been cancelled and then re-executed.

Also, in Figure 136, if the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" and then the door open notification is not executed until the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", there may be times when the time required from "X23" to "X24" is so short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) that it cannot be perceived by human senses.
In this case, it is difficult for the human eye or ear to recognize the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 and image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22, between "X23" and "X24."

However, when the selector stagnation notification is cancelled at timing "X23", the voice output from speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" is cut off midway, and when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant", for example, so it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been cancelled and then executed again.

In addition, in FIG. 136, the following patterns (1) to (6) are possible patterns of processing that may be executed between "X23" and "X24".
(1) A pattern in which the selector congestion notification is once cancelled and then executed again in the same interrupt processing (FIG. 47). (2) A pattern in which the selector congestion notification is once cancelled and then executed again in the next interrupt processing.

(3) A pattern in which the selector stagnation notification is cancelled once in one interrupt process, and then executed again in a subsequent interrupt process, where multiple interrupt processes are required between the time the selector stagnation notification is cancelled once and the time the selector stagnation notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. (4) A pattern in which the selector stagnation notification is cancelled once in one interrupt process, and then executed again in a subsequent interrupt process, where multiple interrupt processes are required between the time the selector stagnation notification is cancelled once and the time the selector stagnation notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

(5) In one interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is cancelled once, and then in the subsequent interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is executed again, and a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) is required to pass between the time the selector dwell notification is cancelled once and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and during that time the door open notification is not executed. (6) In one interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is cancelled once, and then in the subsequent interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is executed again, and during that time the selector dwell notification is cancelled once, and then the selector dwell notification is executed again, and during that time the door open notification is executed.

First, the above-mentioned pattern (1) in which the selector stagnation notification is once cancelled and then executed again in the same interrupt process will be described.
In this case, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches (such as the reset switch 153) and various sensors (such as the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b). Based on the read input signals, the main control board 50 generates various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and if it determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and executes a selector stagnation notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the control command transmission processing (step S464), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector dwell notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
Furthermore, the cancellation of the selector congestion notification and the re-issuance of the selector congestion notification are executed by the same interrupt process. Furthermore, the interrupt process is executed every 2.235 ms. Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector congestion notification to the execution of the re-issuance of the selector congestion notification is less than the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms).

For this reason, in Figure 136, the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23", and then executed again at timing "X24". However, between "X23" and "X24", it is difficult for humans to visually or aurally recognize the displays on the acquisition number display LED 78 and image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22.

However, when the selector stagnation notification is cancelled at timing "X23", the voice output from speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" is cut off midway, and when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant", for example, so it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been cancelled and then executed again.

Next, a pattern will be described in which the selector stagnation notification is once cancelled in the above (2) first interrupt process, and then the selector stagnation notification is executed again in the next interrupt process.
In this case, as in the case of pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.

Then, as in pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, unlike pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) during the main processing (FIG. 46) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is entered in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector dwell notification is also cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
However, unlike the pattern (1) above, in one interrupt process, the selector stagnation notification is cleared, and then in the main process that is executed afterwards, an error process is executed to stop the game progress as a selector stagnation error state. Then, in the interrupt process that is executed afterwards, the selector stagnation notification is executed again. Therefore, the time required from the clearing of the selector stagnation notification to the execution of the selector stagnation notification again is about the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).

In this case, too, the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 136, and then executed again at timing "X24." However, between "X23" and "X24," it is difficult for humans to visually or aurally recognize the displays on the acquisition count display LED 78 and image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22.

However, when the selector stagnation notification is cancelled at timing "X23", the voice output from speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" is cut off midway, and when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant", for example, so it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been cancelled and then executed again.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled during the above (3)-1 interrupt processing, and then executed again during a subsequent interrupt processing. This requires multiple interrupt processing operations between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as with pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.

Then, unlike pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) during the main processing (FIG. 46) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area and temporarily cancels the selector retention error state.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is released in the error processing during the main processing, when the LED display control (step S2821) is performed, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits an error release command to the sub-control board 80.

Then, in the next interrupt process (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above, and if it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected. An error flag indicating a selector retention error is then stored in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is entered in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector dwell notification is also cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
Furthermore, in the "Z"th interrupt process ("Z" is an integer), the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled, and in the main process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation error state is temporarily canceled. Then, in the "Z+1"th interrupt process, the number of wins before displaying "CE" is displayed on the win number display LED 78, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt process, a selector stagnation error is detected. Furthermore, in the main process executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector stagnation error state. Then, in the "Z+3"th interrupt process, a selector stagnation notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector stagnation notification to the execution of the next selector stagnation notification is approximately the time for three interrupts (2.235 ms×3=6.705 ms) to the time for four interrupts (2.235 ms×4=8.94 ms).
Therefore, in Figure 136, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23", and then the selector stagnation notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". However, it is difficult for humans to visually or aurally recognize the displays on the acquisition number display LED 78 and image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22 between "X23" and "X24".

However, when the selector stagnation notification is cancelled at timing "X23", the voice output from speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" is cut off midway, and when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant", for example, so it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been cancelled and then executed again.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled during the interrupt process described above (4) and then executed again during a subsequent interrupt process. This requires multiple interrupt processes between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and during this time the door open notification is executed.

In this case, as with pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and when it determines that the door switch 17 is on, it determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating that the door is open in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the door to the open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the door is set to the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE" indicating that the door is open on the number of wins display LED 78 as a door open notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

Then, in the next interrupt process (Figure 47), when the input error check process (step S463) begins, the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected. It then cancels the door open notification and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is entered in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector stagnation notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136. Then, the door open notification is cancelled and the selector stagnation notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, in the "Z"th interrupt processing ("Z" is an integer), the selector stagnation notification is cleared and the door is detected as open, and in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the game from progressing as the door is in an open state. Thereafter, in the "Z+1"th interrupt processing, the door is opened, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt processing, the door is opened and the selector stagnation error is cleared. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the game from progressing as the selector stagnation error state. Thereafter, in the "Z+3"th interrupt processing, the selector stagnation notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector stagnation notification to the execution of the next selector stagnation notification is approximately the time for three interrupts (2.235 ms×3=6.705 ms) to the time for four interrupts (2.235 ms×4=8.94 ms).
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136, the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed, but the fact that the door open notification has been executed is not perceptible to the human eye or ear, or even if it is perceptible, it is only for an instant. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is cancelled and the selector dwell notification is executed again.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled during the interrupt processing described above (5) and then executed again during the subsequent interrupt processing, and a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) passes between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as in the case of pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.
Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the timer setting processing (not shown), the main control board 50 sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the selector stagnant notification was released.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area and temporarily cancels the selector retention error state.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is released in the error processing during the main processing, when the LED display control (step S2821) is performed, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits an error release command to the sub-control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector dwell notification was released.
Then, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stagnation notification was released, and the input error check process (step S463) determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector stagnation error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector stagnation error in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is entered in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector dwell notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
Furthermore, in one interrupt process, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time since the selector stagnation notification was canceled. In the main process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation error state is temporarily canceled. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the number of wins before displaying "CE" is displayed on the win number display LED 78, and an error cancellation command is sent to the sub-control board 80. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stagnation notification was canceled, a selector stagnation error is detected. In the main process executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector stagnation error state. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation notification is executed, and a selector stagnation command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, after the selector stagnation notification is once cancelled, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required before the selector stagnation notification is executed again.
Also, in Figure 136, between the time when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not display the words "SELECTOR ERROR" on the image display device 23, but displays the screen before the words "SELECTOR ERROR" were displayed (for example, the game screen or the game waiting screen).

Therefore, in Figure 136, between the time when the selector stagnation notification is once canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", it is possible for a human to visually and audibly recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been canceled.
In addition, instead of requiring a predetermined time to elapse between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again, the condition may be, for example, that the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned from on to off.
In this case, too, the selector stagnation notification is released at timing "X23" in Figure 136, and then the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", and the release of the selector stagnation notification can be recognized by human eyes and ears.

Furthermore, in the above (5)-1 interrupt processing, if the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and then executed again in a subsequent interrupt processing, a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) must pass between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. Examples of patterns that can be considered include the following:

First, in the interrupt process (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data is generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area and temporarily cancels the selector retention error state.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is released in the error processing during the main processing, when the LED display control (step S2821) is performed, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits an error release command to the sub-control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 47), if the input error check processing (step S463) determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a specified memory area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector stuck error state is established in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the timer set processing (not shown), the main control board 50 sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the selector stuck error state was established.
In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector stuck error state was established.

Then, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stagnation error state was entered, the main control board 50 proceeds to LED display control (step S2821) and displays the code "CE", indicating a selector stagnation error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24" without executing the door open notification.

In addition, in one interrupt process, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily cleared, and in the main process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation error state is temporarily cleared. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the number of wins before displaying "CE" is displayed on the win number display LED 78, and an error clear command is sent to the sub-control board 80. If a selector stagnation error is detected in the interrupt process executed thereafter, the main process executed thereafter executes error processing to stop game progress as a selector stagnation error state, and in the interrupt process executed thereafter, a timer is set to measure the elapsed time since the selector stagnation error state was entered. Then, in the interrupt process executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has passed since the selector stagnation error state was entered, a selector stagnation notification is issued and a selector stagnation command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, after the selector stagnation notification is once cancelled, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required before the selector stagnation notification is executed again.
Also, in Figure 136, between the time when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not display the words "SELECTOR ERROR" on the image display device 23, but instead displays the screen before the words "SELECTOR ERROR" were displayed (for example, the game screen or game standby screen).

Furthermore, in Figure 136, between the time when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not output the voice "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22, but outputs the voice that was output before the voice "Please call an attendant" was output.
Therefore, in Figure 136, between the time when the selector stagnation notification is once canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", it is possible for a human to visually and audibly recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been canceled.

Finally, we will explain a pattern in which the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled during the interrupt processing described above (6)1, and then executed again during the subsequent interrupt processing. A predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) must pass between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and a door open notification is executed during that time.

In this case, as with pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and when it determines that the door switch 17 is on, it determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating that the door is open in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the timer setting processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 and sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the error flag indicating the door was opened was stored.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the door to the open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the door is set to the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE" indicating that the door is open on the number of wins display LED 78 as a door open notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 and determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since storing an error flag indicating that the door is open.
Then, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the front door 12 was detected and an error flag indicating the door was open was stored, and when the input error check process (step S463) determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is entered in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector stagnation notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136. Then, the door open notification is cancelled and the selector stagnation notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, in one interrupt process, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled, door opening is detected, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time since the door opening was detected. In the main process executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as the door is open. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the door open notification is executed, and a door open command is sent to the sub-control board 80. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the door opening was detected, the door open notification is canceled, and a selector stagnation error is detected. In the main process executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as the selector stagnation error state. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation notification is executed, and a selector stagnation command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, after the selector stagnation notification is once cancelled, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required before the selector stagnation notification is executed again.
Also, in Figure 136, between the time when the selector stagnant notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnant notification is executed again at timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not display the words "selector error" on the image display device 23, but displays the words "door open".

Therefore, in Figure 136, between the time when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", it is possible for a human to visually and aurally recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been canceled and that the door open notification has been executed.
In addition, instead of requiring a predetermined time to elapse between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again, the condition may be, for example, that the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned from on to off.
In this case, too, in Figure 136, between the time when the selector stagnation notification is once canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", it is possible for a human to visually and aurally recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been canceled and that the door open notification has been executed.

In addition, the system measures the time that has elapsed since detecting the opening of the front door 12 and storing an error flag indicating that the door is open, and continues to issue a door-open notification until a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed. During that time, the door-open notification will not be canceled even if the reset switch 153 or cancel switch is operated. This ensures that the driver is notified that the front door 12 has been opened.

The same applies when an error such as a selector stuck error is detected. That is, the time elapsed since an error such as a selector stuck error was detected and an error flag indicating this was stored is measured, and the selector stuck error notification or other error notification is executed until a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed, and during that time, the selector stuck error notification or other error notification will not be canceled even if the reset switch 153 or release switch is operated. This ensures that the detection of an error such as a selector stuck error is notified reliably.

Here, Figure 136 uses the example of a selector retention error to explain the operation that occurs when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error. However, in the case of a selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error, the operation will be the same as in the case of a selector retention error.

For example, in Figure 136, if the hopper motor 36 is driven at timing "X21" but the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b do not turn on/off, the main control board 50 determines that a hopper empty error has been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects a hopper empty error, it displays "HE" indicating a hopper empty error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a hopper empty notification, and sends an empty command indicating a hopper empty error to the sub-control board 80.

In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives the empty command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a hopper empty notification, and displays the words "hopper empty" on the image display device 23.
Thereafter, at timing "X22" in Figure 136, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door is open.

However, while the hopper empty notification is being executed, even if the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it does not execute the door open notification and continues to issue the hopper empty notification.
In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80.
However, while the hopper empty notification is being executed, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it will not execute the door open notification and will continue to issue the hopper empty notification.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 136, when there are no medals M stored in the hopper 35, that is, when the cause of the hopper empty error has not been eliminated, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the hopper empty notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it cancels the hopper empty notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

However, in FIG. 136, the hopper empty notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23", but then the hopper empty notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Specifically, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in Fig. 136 while the cause of the hopper empty error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty notification and instead controls to issue a door open notification. Thereafter, at timing "X24" in Fig. 136, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and again controls to issue a hopper empty notification.

That is, at timing "X23" in Figure 136, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to change from "HE," which indicates a hopper empty error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at timing "X24," controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to change from "dE" to "HE." Furthermore, at timing "X24" in Figure 136, the main control board 50 sends an empty command to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when an error clear command is received at timing "X23" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 clears the hopper empty notification and controls the system to issue a door open notification. Then, when an empty command is received at timing "X24" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 clears the door open notification and controls the system to issue a hopper empty notification again.

In other words, at timing "X23" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Hopper empty" to "Door open". Then, at timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Hopper empty".

If the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b do not turn on/off after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the main control board 50 determines that a hopper empty error has been detected and displays "HE," indicating a hopper empty error, on the winning count display LED 78 as a hopper empty alert. Subsequently, even if the hopper 35 has not been replenished with medals M (the cause of the hopper empty error has been eliminated), when the reset switch 153 is operated, the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty alert and drives the hopper motor 36 again. However, because the hopper 35 has not been replenished with medals M, the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b do not turn on/off even after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper motor 36 was driven again, and the main control board 50 therefore issues the hopper empty alert again. Therefore, it takes approximately 3 to 5 seconds for the hopper empty notification to be reset after it has been canceled.

Furthermore, if the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected and displays "CE," indicating a selector retention error, on the winning count display LED 78 as a selector retention notification. Thereafter, even if a medal M remains stuck in the medal selector 110 (the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed), if the reset switch 153 is operated, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification. However, because a medal M remains stuck in the medal selector 110, the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, and the main control board 50 re-executes the selector retention notification. In this case, the time required to re-execute the selector retention notification after temporarily canceling it is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).

In this way, the time required to cancel the hopper empty notification and then execute it again is approximately 3 to 5 seconds, whereas the time required to cancel the selector retention notification and then execute it again is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).
Therefore, the time required to restart the hopper empty notification after it has been cancelled is longer than the time required to restart the selector retention notification after it has been cancelled.

Also, for example, in Figure 136, when the input sensor 44b changes from off to on at timing "X21", and then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector pass error has been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects a selector passage error, it displays "CP" indicating a selector passage error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector passage error notification, and sends a selector passage error command indicating a selector passage error to the sub-control board 80.

In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector passing error command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector passing error notification, and displays the words "Selector error" on the image display device 23.
Thereafter, at timing "X22" in Figure 136, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door is open.
However, while the selector passing error notification is being executed, even if the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it does not execute the door opening notification and continues to notify the selector passing error.

In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80.
However, while the sub-control board 80 is issuing the selector passing error notification, even if it receives a door opening command, it will not issue the door opening notification and will continue to issue the selector passing error notification.

After that, at timing "X23" in Figure 136, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector passage error has not been eliminated (the insertion sensor 44b changes from off to on, and then the insertion sensor 44a changes from off to on, so that the insertion sensors 44a and 44b remain on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector passage error notification.

Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it cancels the selector passing error notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.
Here, although the selector passing error notification is cancelled, the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, so the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected and issues a selector retention notification at timing "X24".

Specifically, in Figure 136, at the timing of "X23", in a situation where the cause of the selector passage error has not been eliminated (the input sensor 44b changes from off to on, and then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, so that the input sensors 44a and 44b remain on), if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector passage error notification and control the door open notification to be executed.
Since the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b continue to remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and controls the door open notification to be canceled and the selector retention notification to be executed at the timing of "X24" in Figure 136.

That is, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 136, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch from "CP", which indicates a selector pass error, to "dE", which indicates the opening of the front door 12.
Then, at timing "X24" in Figure 136, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch from "dE", which indicates the front door 12 is open, to "CE", which indicates a selector retention error.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80 at timing "X24" in FIG.

Also, when an error clear command is received at timing "X23" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 clears the selector passing error notification and then controls the sub-control board 80 to execute a door open notification.
Thereafter, when a selector dwell command is received at timing "X24" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and instead controls to execute the selector dwell notification.

That is, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and controls the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector error" to "Door open."
Thereafter, at timing "X24" in Figure 136, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and controls the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Selector error."

In this way, when a selector passing error is detected, a selector passing error notification is executed, and thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector passing error has not been removed, the selector passing error is cancelled, and then a selector stagnation error is detected and a selector stagnation notification is executed.
Furthermore, as described above, when a selector congestion error is detected, a selector congestion notification is issued, and if the reset switch 153 is operated after that in a situation where the cause of the selector congestion error has not been eliminated, the selector congestion notification may be cancelled once and then executed again.
In other words, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, there are times when the same error notification is issued before and after the operation of the reset switch 153, and times when different error notifications are issued before and after the operation of the reset switch 153.

In Fig. 136, the selector passing error notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", but there are cases where the door open notification is not executed at this timing. And there are also cases where the door open notification is not executed, and instead the selector stagnation notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
For example, in the same interrupt processing (FIG. 47), if reading of input port 51 (step S457 in FIG. 47), input error check (step S463 in FIG. 47), and error processing (not shown) are performed, door open notification is not performed.

Specifically, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches (such as the reset switch 153) and various sensors (such as the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b). Based on the read input signals, the main control board 50 generates various data, such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, the main control board 50 cancels the selector pass error notification.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and when it determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and executes a selector stagnation notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the control command transmission processing (step S464), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector passing error notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector stagnation notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, the release of the selector passage error notification and the selector congestion notification are executed in the same interrupt process, so the time required from the release of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector congestion notification is less than the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms).

In addition, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the input port 51 is read (step S457 in Figure 47) and an input error check (step S463 in Figure 47) is performed, and then in the main processing (Figure 46) that is executed subsequently, if error processing (not shown) is performed, the door open notification is not executed.

Specifically, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector pass error notification.

Then, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is entered in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector stagnation notification is also cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector stagnation notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
In addition, in one interrupt process, the selector passage error notification is cancelled, and in the main process executed after that, a selector retention error state is detected and the game progress is stopped, and in the interrupt process executed after that, the selector retention notification is executed. Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector retention notification is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).

136, at the timing of "X23", the selector passing error notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed, but there are cases where the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized by the human eye or ear, or even if it is recognized, it is only for an instant. Then, at the timing of "X24", there are cases where the door open notification is cancelled and the selector stagnation notification is executed.
In some cases, multiple interrupt processes are required between the time when the input port 51 is read and an input error check is performed in the interrupt process and the time when error processing is performed in the main process. In such cases, a door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized by the human eye or ear, or even if it is recognized, it is only for a moment.

Specifically, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector pass error notification.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and when it determines that the door switch 17 is on, it determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating that the door is open in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the door to the open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the door is set to the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE" indicating that the door is open on the number of wins display LED 78 as a door open notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

Then, in the next interrupt process (Figure 47), when the input error check process (step S463) begins, the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected. It then cancels the door open notification and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is entered in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector passing error notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136. Then, the door open notification is cancelled and the selector stagnation notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, in the "Z"th interrupt processing ("Z" is an integer), the selector passing error notification is cancelled and the door open is detected, and in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the game progress as the door is open. Then, in the "Z+1"th interrupt processing, the door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt processing, the door open notification is cancelled and the selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the game progress as the selector retention error state. Then, in the "Z+3"th interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector passing error notification to the execution of the selector stagnant notification is approximately the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms x 3 = 6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms x 4 = 8.94 ms).During this time, the door open notification is executed.
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 136, the selector passing error notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification is not perceptible by the human eye or ear, or even if it is perceptible, it is only for an instant. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is cancelled and the selector dwell notification is executed.

In addition, the sub-control board 80 stores the error history in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83, and is capable of displaying the stored error history when a request to display the error history is made.
In the tenth embodiment, the error history can be displayed in the setting confirmation state.
Specifically, when the power is on, the game is on standby (before the game starts), and the number of bets is "0", if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and a menu screen for the administrator is displayed on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, the administrator menu screen has an "Error History" item.
Then, while the administrator menu screen is displayed, operate the cross key (Figure 125) to select the "Error History" item, and in this state operate (turn on) the push button 86, and the error history screen will be displayed on the image display device 23.

The error history screen also displays an error code indicating the type of error (for example, "CE,""CP,""dE," etc.) and the time the error was reported (for example, "September 17, 2021, 15:35:25," etc.).
Here, for example, in Figure 136, a selector stagnation notification is issued at timing "X21", the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and a door open notification is issued, and then the door open notification is canceled at timing "X24" and a selector stagnation notification is issued again.
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as follows: "CE" September 17, 2021, 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021, 15:36:45 "CE" September 17, 2021, 15:36:45

Also, for example, in Figure 136, a selector stagnation notification is executed at timing "X21", and at timing "X23", the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled but a door open notification is not executed, and then, at timing "X24", a selector stagnation notification is executed again without executing a door open notification.
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as follows: "CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45

136, for example, suppose that a selector retention notification is executed at timing "X21," and at timing "X23," while a medal M remains stuck in the medal selector 110 (the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed), the reset switch 153 is operated multiple times (for example, "three" times) in succession. In this case, the selector retention notification may be released and re-executed multiple times (for example, "three" times).
Also in this case, for example,
"CE" occurs on September 17, 2021 at 15:35:25 "CE" is cancelled on September 17, 2021 at 15:35:25 "CE" occurs on September 17, 2021 at 15:35:25 "CE" is cancelled on September 17, 2021 at 15:35:25 "CE" occurs on September 17, 2021 at 15:35:25 "CE" is cancelled on September 17, 2021 at 15:35:25 It can be displayed as follows.

In addition, even if the reset switch 153 is operated multiple times in succession when the cause of the selector congestion error has not been eliminated, and the selector congestion notification is canceled and re-executed multiple times, the history of these operations may not be stored or displayed. Instead, the history may be stored and displayed only when the reset switch 153 is operated when the cause of the selector congestion error has been eliminated and the selector congestion notification is canceled.

Also, for example, in Figure 136, at timing "X21", a selector passing error notification is issued, at timing "X23", the selector passing error notification is temporarily canceled and a door opening notification is issued, and at timing "X24", the door opening notification is canceled and a selector stagnation notification is then issued.
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as follows: "CE" September 17, 2021, 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021, 15:36:45 "CP" September 17, 2021, 15:36:45

Also, for example, in Figure 136, a selector passing error notification is issued at timing "X21", and at timing "X23", the selector passing error notification is temporarily canceled but a door opening notification is not issued, and then, without the door opening notification being issued, a selector stagnation notification is issued at timing "X24".
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as follows: "CE" September 17, 2021, 15:35:25 "CP" September 17, 2021, 15:36:45

The push button 86 is also referred to as a sub-button 86, a performance button 86, a performance switch 86, etc., and is operated when progressing (developing) a performance, etc.
The cross key 87 is also called a selection switch 87, and is operated when moving the cursor position on a menu screen or the like.
The push button 86 and the cross key 87 are electrically connected to the sub-control means 80 via the input port 81 .
Furthermore, the error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning the power on/off or by changing settings. The error history will not be erased unless a serious error (an unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80.

In this way, when a specified error is detected, a specified error notification can be executed, and when the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated and an operation to cancel the specified error notification, i.e., operation of the reset switch 153, is performed, the specified error notification is once canceled and then the specified error notification can be executed again.
This allows confirmation that the reset switch 153 is functioning normally, and also provides a reminder that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

FIG. 137 is a time chart showing the operation modes when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the selector retention error, and when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 open.
In Figure 137, at the timing of "X31", when a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnation error, it displays "CE" indicating a selector stagnation error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification, and sends a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.
In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector stagnation command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stagnation notification, and displays the words "Selector stagnation error" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, at timing "X32" in Figure 137, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door is open.
However, while the selector stagnation notification is being executed, even if the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector stagnation notification.

In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80.
However, while the selector stagnation notification is being executed, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector stagnation notification.

Then, at timing "X33" in Figure 137, if a medal M becomes stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, i.e., the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated, and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector retention notification.

Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it cancels the selector stagnation notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.
However, in FIG. 137, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily cancelled at the timing of "X33", but then the selector stagnation notification is executed again at the timing of "X34".

Specifically, at timing "X33" in Figure 137, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will cancel the selector stuck notification and instead control the system to issue a door open notification. Then, at timing "X34" in Figure 137, the main control board 50 will cancel the door open notification and again control the system to issue a selector stuck notification.

That is, at timing "X33" in Figure 137, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "CE," which indicates a selector dwell error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at timing "X34," controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "dE" to "CE." Furthermore, at timing "X34" in Figure 137, the main control board 50 sends a selector dwell command to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when an error clear command is received at timing "X33" in Figure 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector dwell notification and controls the system to execute a door open notification. After that, when a selector dwell command is received at timing "X34" in Figure 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls the system to execute a selector dwell notification again.

In other words, at timing "X33" in Figure 137, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open". Then, at timing "X34", the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Selector stuck error".

After that, at timing "X35" in Figure 137, if the medal M stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is removed, that is, if the cause of the selector retention error is removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the selector retention error. However, simply removing the cause of the selector retention error (no longer detecting the selector retention error) will not cancel the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X36" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 cancels the selector stagnation notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it cancels the selector stagnation notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

However, at timing "X36" in Figure 137, even though the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector stuck notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on, so the main control board 50 then issues a door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "CE," which indicates a selector stuck error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Also, at timing "X36" in Figure 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector stuck notification and then issues a door open notification. That is, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "Door is open," and also controls the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open."

Thereafter, at timing "X37" in Figure 137, even if the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open, i.e., while the door switch 17 remains on, the main control board 50 will continue to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

Furthermore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 is left open (the door switch 17 is on), the main control board 50 does not send an alarm release command indicating the cancellation of the door open alarm to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 remains on), the sub-control board 80 continues to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

Here, Figure 137 uses a selector retention error as an example to explain the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error. However, in the case of a selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, the operation is the same as in the case of a selector retention error when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, or when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error.

For example, in Figure 137, if the dispensing sensor 37a remains off and the dispensing sensor 37b remains on at the timing of "X31", the main control board 50 determines that a hopper jam error has been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it displays "HP" indicating a hopper jam error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a hopper jam alert, and sends a hopper jam command indicating a hopper jam error to the sub-control board 80.
In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives a hopper jam command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a hopper jam alert, and displays the words "Hopper jam error" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, at timing "X32" in Figure 137, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door is open.
However, while the hopper jam notification is being executed, even if the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the hopper jam notification.
In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80.
However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command while the hopper jam notification is being executed, it will not execute the door open notification and will continue to issue the hopper jam notification.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X33" in Figure 137, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while medals M remain stuck in the hopper 35, i.e., while the cause of the hopper jam error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 controls the hopper jam alarm to be cancelled.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it controls the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. to cancel the hopper jam notification that has been performed.

However, in FIG. 137, the hopper jam notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X33", but then the hopper jam notification is executed again at the timing of "X34".
Specifically, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X33" in Fig. 137 while the cause of the hopper jam error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 cancels the hopper jam notification and controls the system to issue a door open notification. Thereafter, at timing "X34" in Fig. 137, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and controls the system to issue a hopper jam notification again.

That is, at timing "X33" in Figure 137, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to switch from "HP," which indicates a hopper jam error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at timing "X34," controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to switch from "dE" to "HP." Furthermore, at timing "X34" in Figure 137, the main control board 50 sends a hopper jam command to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when an error clear command is received at timing "X33" in Figure 137, the sub-control board 80 clears the hopper jam notification and controls the system to issue a door open notification. Then, when a hopper jam command is received at timing "X34" in Figure 137, the sub-control board 80 clears the door open notification and controls the system to issue a hopper jam notification again.

In other words, at timing "X33" in Figure 137, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Hopper jam error" to "Door open." Then, at timing "X34," the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Hopper jam error."

After that, at timing "X35" in Figure 137, if the medal M stuck in the hopper 35 is removed, that is, if the cause of the hopper jam error is removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the hopper jam error. However, simply removing the cause of the hopper jam error (no longer detecting the hopper jam error) will not cancel the hopper jam notification.

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X36" in Figure 137, the main control board 50 performs control to cancel the hopper jam notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it controls the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. to cancel the hopper jam notification that has been performed.

However, at timing "X36" in Figure 137, even though the reset switch 153 is operated and the hopper jam alert is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on, so the main control board 50 now controls the door open alert. That is, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "HP," which indicates a hopper jam error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Also, at timing "X36" in Figure 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper jam alert and then controls the execution of a door open alert. That is, the sub-control board 80 controls the audio output from the speaker 22 to change from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and also controls the display on the image display device 23 to change from "Hopper jam error" to "Door open."

Thereafter, at timing "X37" in Figure 137, even if the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open, i.e., while the door switch 17 remains on, the main control board 50 will continue to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

Furthermore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 is left open (the door switch 17 is on), the main control board 50 does not send an alarm release command indicating the cancellation of the door open alarm to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 remains on), the sub-control board 80 continues to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

In this way, when a specified error is detected, a specified error notification can be executed, and when the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated and an operation to cancel the specified error notification, i.e., operation of the reset switch 153, is performed, the specified error notification is once canceled and then can be executed again.
This allows confirmation that the reset switch 153 is functioning normally, and also notifies the user once again that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

When the opening of the front door 12 (door open) is detected, a door open notification can be executed, and even if a release switch for releasing the door open notification is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 is open, the door open notification can be continuously executed without being released.
This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being committed without any notification being issued even though the front door 12 remains open.

In addition, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and a door open notification is issued. However, for example, the door open notification may be issued when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes openable. At this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released and the front door 12 is now openable.

The main control board 50 may be configured to issue a door open notification when it detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can be opened by the door switch 17 being turned on, even if the front door 12 is closed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, the main control board 50 can be configured to cancel the door open notification by turning the door key counterclockwise and operating (turning on) the release switch.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked and is now openable by the door switch 17 being turned on, it may send a door open command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the front door 12 should be opened, even if the front door 12 is closed.
The sub-control board 80 may be configured to issue a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. when it receives a door open command, even if the front door 12 is closed.

In other words, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door open notification can be executed, and even if an operation to cancel the door open notification (operation of the release switch) is performed when the front door 12 is open or can be opened, the door open notification can continue to be executed without being canceled.
This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being committed without issuing any notification even when the front door 12 is in an open state or can be opened.

Figure 138 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again, and the time "T2" from when a medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by insertion sensor 44b.

In Figure 138, the on/off of selector stagnation detection, door open detection, selector stagnation notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 136.
136. Also, the timings of "X41", "X42", "X43" and "X44" in FIG. 138 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 136, respectively.

In Figure 138, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X43" when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification, and then, at timing "X44", the main control board 50 will control the selector stuck notification to be executed again.
The time from "X43" to "X44" is the time "T1" from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily cancelled until when the selector stagnation notification can be executed again.

Also, in Figure 138, if we assume that a medal M is inserted through the medal insertion port 47 at the timing just before "X43" and that the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a at the timing "X43", then at the timing "X45", the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.
The time from "X43" to "X45" is the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

Furthermore, "when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a" means the moment when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is allowed to pass through the blocker 45, approaches the insertion sensor 44a, and the insertion sensor 44a changes from off to on.
Furthermore, "the moment when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b" means the moment when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is allowed to pass through the blocker 45, passes through the insertion sensor 44a, passes through the insertion sensor 44b, and then the insertion sensor 44b changes from on to off.

Here, it is assumed that the medal M falls from the medal insertion port 47 at an initial velocity of "0", passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, and is detected by the insertion sensor 44a and then the insertion sensor 44b as it passes through them. It is also assumed that the blocker 45 allows the medal M to pass through.
In other words, the medal M is released from the hand at the medal insertion port 47 without gaining momentum, passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is allowed to pass through the blocker 45, passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b in sequence, and is detected by the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b, respectively.

The tenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1 < T2." In other words, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the time "T2" from when a medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by insertion sensor 44b.

For example, suppose the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) and a medal M is inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 to check whether the selector retention error has been cleared. Then, at timing "X43" in Figure 138, the selector retention notification is cleared and the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. If the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed at this time, the selector retention notification will be issued again at timing "X44" in Figure 138, and then, at timing "X45", the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 will no longer be detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

Therefore, a medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 will not pass through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally, and the medal M will be swallowed, but the process of adding "1" to the number of bets or credits for the medal M can be prevented from being executed.
In Figure 138, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using the selector retention error as an example, but in the case of a selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation will be the same as in the case of a selector retention error.

Figure 139 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stuck error, and shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is temporarily canceled until the selector stuck notification can be executed again, and the time "T3" from when digit 5 is illuminated until digit 1 is illuminated.

The tenth embodiment also includes digits 1 to 5, similar to the third embodiment.
Digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit number (reserved number) display LED 76, and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76. Digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78, and digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78. Furthermore, digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73.

Furthermore, the address "F051(H)" shown in FIG. 33 in the third embodiment is a 1-byte storage area in which LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated with each interrupt.
Furthermore, the bits of the LED display counter 1 are assigned such that bit D0 is a digit 1 signal, bit D1 is a digit 2 signal, bit D2 is a digit 3 signal, bit D3 is a digit 4 signal, and bit D4 is a digit 5 signal. In one interrupt process, dynamic lighting control of digits 1 to 5 is executed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 1 is turned on.

LED display counter 1 has an initial value of "00010000(B)". LED display counter 1 updates its bit "1" by shifting it one digit to the right with each interrupt. When the value of LED display counter 1 reaches "00000001(B)" at the next interrupt, LED display counter 1 shifts one digit to the right to become "00000000(B)". However, at the time of this interrupt, LED display counter 1 is initialized, and the value is set to "00010000(B)". As a result, LED display counter 1 has one cycle of five interrupts.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is
"N" Interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interruption: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interruption: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interruption: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+6" interruption: 00001000 (B)
:
This becomes:

In the tenth embodiment, as in the third embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically illuminated.
Specifically, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. Then, the output of the digit 5 signal enables digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) to be lit (digits 1 to 4 are turned off).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00001000 (B)", at which time the digit 4 signal is output and digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) can be lit (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are turned off).

At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100 (B)", at which time a digit 3 signal is output and digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) can be lit (digit 1, digit 2, digit 4 and digit 5 are turned off).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010 (B)", and at this time, the digit 2 signal is output, and digit 2 (the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be lit (digit 1 and digits 3 to 5 are turned off).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)", and at this time, the digit 1 signal is output, and digit 1 (the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be lit (digits 2 to 5 are turned off).

In Figure 139, the on/off of selector stagnation detection, door open detection, selector stagnation notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 136.
136. Also, the timings of "X51", "X52", "X53" and "X54" in FIG. 139 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 136, respectively.

In Figure 139, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X53" when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification, and then at timing "X54", the main control board 50 will execute the selector stuck notification again.
The time from "X53" to "X54" is the time "T1" from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily cancelled until when the selector stagnation notification can be executed again.

Also, in FIG. 139, if it is assumed that digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) lights up at timing "X53", then digit 1 (the most significant digit of credit number display LED 76) lights up at timing "X55".
The time from "X53" to "X55" is the time "T3" from when digit 5 (the set value display LED 73) is turned on until digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit number display LED 76) is turned on.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, dynamic lighting control is executed to sequentially light up digits 5 through 1 for each interrupt. Also, there are four interrupts from lighting up digit 5 to lighting up digit 1. Therefore, time "T3" is the time for four interrupts (2.235 ms x 4 = 8.94 ms).
The tenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T3." That is, the time "T1" from when the selector stagnation notification is once released until when the selector stagnation notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the time "T3" from when digit 5 (the set value display LED 73) is turned on until digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit number display LED 76) is turned on.

In Figure 139, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at "X53" while the cause of the selector stall error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stall notification and execute a door open notification. At this time, the main control board 50 will control the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "CE," which indicates a selector stall error, to "dE," which indicates the front door 12 is open (door open). Then, at "X54," the main control board 50 will execute the selector stall notification again. At this time, the main control board 50 will control the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "dE" to "CE." If we assume that digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) is lit at "X53," then digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit count display LED 76) will light up at "X55." In other words, between "X53" and "X55", digits 5 to 1 will each light up once.

For this reason, although the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is controlled to switch from "CE" to "dE" at timing "X53," and then switch from "dE" to "CE" at timing "X54," between "X53" and "X54,""dE" will only light up once on the acquisition number display LED 78, or "dE" will not light up at all. For this reason, it is difficult for the human eye to confirm that "dE" has been lit on the acquisition number display LED 78, and therefore it is possible to prevent the user from mistakenly believing that the cause of the selector retention error has been removed.
In Figure 139, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using the selector retention error as an example, but in the case of a selector passing error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation will be the same as in the case of a selector retention error.

Figure 140 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stuck error, and shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is temporarily released until the selector stuck notification can be executed again, and the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.

In Figure 140, the on/off of selector stagnation detection, door open detection, selector stagnation notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 136.
140 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 136, respectively.

In Figure 140, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X63" when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification, and then, at timing "X64", the main control board 50 will control the selector stuck notification to be executed again.
The time from "X63" to "X64" is the time "T1" from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily cancelled until when the selector stagnation notification can be executed again.

Also, in Figure 140, assuming that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at timing "X63", then at timing "X65", an event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, and at timing "X66", power outage processing is executed.
The time from "X63" to "X65" is the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.
The time from "X65" to "X66" is the time "T5" from the detection of an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) to the execution of power-off processing.

Figure 140 also shows the voltage level when an event occurs in which the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off (power outage) (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.).
In FIG. 140, the voltage level when the power is on is "V0." The voltage level (power interruption detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off is "V1." When the power supply voltage is at voltage level "V0," the slot machine 10 operates normally. When the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1," it becomes possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off.

Figure 140 shows an example in which an event (power outage) occurs at timing "X63" in which the power supply is cut off. When the power outage occurs at timing "X63", the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at timing "X65". The time from "X63" to "X65" is "T4". In other words, when the power outage occurs, the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at time "T4".

In addition, the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected is designed to be at least the time of 20 interrupts (2.235 ms x 20 = 44.7 ms).
In addition, the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected is not limited to the time of the 20 interrupt, but can be set appropriately depending on the performance of the voltage monitoring device (power outage detection circuit) and the main CPU 55.

A voltage monitoring device (power interruption detection circuit) is provided on the main control board 50. When the power supply voltage falls below the power interruption detection level "V1," a power interruption detection signal is input to a specified bit in the input port 51, and a power interruption is detected by checking whether or not this signal has been input.

Furthermore, if the power supply voltage drops further from the power interruption detection level "V1" and falls below the main CPU 55's driving limit voltage level, the main CPU 55 will no longer be able to be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 will no longer be guaranteed).
The main control board 50 cannot execute power-off processing when the power supply voltage falls below the drive limit voltage level, so when a power-off occurs at timing "X63", the power-off processing is set to be completed by timing "X66".

Power interruption detection is performed within the interrupt process, which is executed every 2.235 ms. However, if two consecutive interrupts detect that the power supply voltage is below the power interruption detection level "V1," power interruption processing is performed in the next interrupt process. Therefore, in Figure 140, timing "X65" is the timing when the interrupt process detects that the power supply voltage is below the power interruption detection level "V1" twice in a row. The main control board 50 then performs power interruption processing in the next interrupt process (timing "X66" in Figure 140).

During power-off processing, the main control board 50 backs up data in a specified storage area of the RWM 53. When power supply is subsequently resumed (power is turned on, power is supplied, or power is restored from a power-off), the main control board 50 executes power-on processing and restores the backed-up data to the specified storage area of the RWM 53. This allows the state at the time of power-off detection to be restored when power is restored from a power-off.

Figure 140 also shows the timing (timing "X63") when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, and the timing (timing "X64") when the selector stuck notification is canceled and then executed again.
Furthermore, in FIG. 140, the timing when an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) coincides with the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation in which the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated.

The tenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1 < T4." In other words, the time "T1" from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled until the selector stagnation notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.

In Figure 140, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X63" while the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification and control the system to issue a door open notification. Also, let's assume that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs approximately simultaneously with the operation (on) of the reset switch 153. In this case, at timing "X64" in Figure 140, the system will control the system to issue the selector stuck notification again, and then at timing "X65" the system will detect the event in which the power supply is cut off, and then at timing "X66" the system will execute power outage processing.

Therefore, in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, if an event occurs in which the supply of power is cut off (power outage) at approximately the same time as the operation (on) of the reset switch 153, control is performed so that the selector stuck notification is executed again before the power outage is detected and power-off processing is executed. Therefore, since data indicating that the selector stuck notification is being executed can be backed up during the power-off processing, the selector stuck notification can be executed when the supply of power is resumed (recovery from power outage).
In Figure 140, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using the example of a selector retention error, but in the case of a selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation will be the same as in the case of a selector retention error.

Figure 143 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the power supply is cut off during door opening notification, the front door 12 is then closed with the power supply cut off, and then the power supply is resumed.
In FIG. 143, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.

In FIG. 143, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing "X91", the main control board 50 determines that the door has been opened.
Specifically, when the front door 12 is opened at timing "X91" in Figure 143, the door switch 17 turns on, and the main control board 50 determines that the door has been opened. Furthermore, upon detecting the door being opened, the main control board 50 issues a door-open notification. Specifically, as the door-open notification, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the door open command, the sub-control board 80 executes a door open notification. Specifically, as the door open notification, it outputs a voice message saying "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

Subsequently, if the power supply is cut off (for example, the power plug is unplugged, the breaker trips, or a power outage occurs) at timing "X92" in Figure 143, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will operate, and the door open alert will also stop. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute power-off processing. As a result, data in specified memory areas on the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is backed up.
Thereafter, at timing "X93" in Figure 143, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.

After that, when power supply is resumed at timing "X94" in Figure 143, the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 each execute a power-off recovery process. This restores the data backed up during the power-off process to the specified storage areas in the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80. This restores the state to the state when the power outage was detected. At this time, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is off, but the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 each execute a door-open notification.

143, when the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12) and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of wins before displaying "dE" on the win number display LED 78, and sends a notification cancel command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the door open notification has been canceled.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancel command, it cancels the door open notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

In addition, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and a door open notification is issued. However, for example, the door open notification may be issued when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes openable, and at this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released and the front door 12 is now openable. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is now openable, a door open notification may be issued even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when power is supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door-open notification can be issued. Furthermore, if the power supply is cut off while the door-open notification is being issued, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off, the door-open notification can be issued when the power supply is resumed.

It is conceivable that a perpetrator might fraudulently open the front door 12, then fraudulently cut off the power supply while the door-open alert is being issued, and then close the front door 12 while the power supply is still cut off in an attempt to conceal the fraud. Even in such a case, the above-described configuration makes it possible to issue a door-open alert when the power supply is resumed, even if the front door 12 is closed, thereby preventing the fraudulent behavior described above.

Figure 144 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the power supply is cut off during door opening notification, the front door 12 is then closed with the power supply cut off, and then the power supply is resumed with the door key turned left (the release switch operated).
In Figure 144, as in Figure 143, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.

144, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X101", the main control board 50 determines that the door has been opened. Then, as a door-open notification, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs a voice message saying "The door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door Open" on the image display device 23 as a door open notification.

144, when the power supply is cut off at timing "X102," neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 operates, and the door-open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute power-off processing and back up the data in a specified storage area.
Thereafter, at timing "X103" in Figure 144, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.

Thereafter, at time "X104" in Fig. 144, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to that used to unlock the front door 12). This state continues until time "X105" in Fig. 144.
Thereafter, at timing "X105" in Figure 144, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked) and power supply is resumed. At this time, because the door key is turned counterclockwise, the release switch is turned on when power supply is resumed. Therefore, the main control board 50 does not issue a door-open alert. The main control board 50 also sends an alert release command to the sub-control board 80, indicating that the door-open alert has been released. The sub-control board 80 then receives the alert release command and does not issue a door-open alert.

Furthermore, instead of configuring the door switch 17 to turn on and issue a door-open notification when the front door 12 is opened, the system may be configured to issue a door-open notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes openable, and this state may be detected by the door switch 17. When it is detected that the front door 12 is openable, a door open notification may be issued even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when power is supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door open notification can be issued. Furthermore, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being issued, and the front door 12 is then closed with the power supply cut off, and the power supply is then resumed with the door key turned counterclockwise (the release switch operated), the door open notification can be prevented from being issued.

In addition, while the door open notification is being issued, if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and the door key is turned counterclockwise in this state (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12), the release switch will turn on and the door open notification will be released. However, it may also be configured as shown below, for example.

While the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and in this state the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) to change the release switch from off to on, and then the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch is turned from on to off, thereby canceling the door open notification.
In this case, the operation for canceling the door open notification is to turn the door key in the opposite direction to that used to unlock the front door 12 and then return the door key to its original position.

Figure 145 is a time chart showing the operation of a system configured so that the door open notification is canceled when the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12) to change the release switch from OFF to ON, and then the door key is returned to its original position to change the release switch from ON to OFF.

In Figure 145, as in Figure 144, the power supply is cut off during the door opening notification, and then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, and then the power supply is resumed when the door key is turned to the left (the release switch is operated).
Also, in Figure 145, as in Figures 143 and 144, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.

In Fig. 145, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X111", the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12 (door open). Then, as a door open notification, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs a voice message saying "The door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door Open" on the image display device 23 as a door open notification.

After that, when the power supply is cut off at timing "X112" in Figure 145, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will operate, and the door open notification will also stop. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute power-off processing and back up the data in the designated memory area.

Thereafter, at timing "X113" in Figure 145, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.
Thereafter, at time "X114" in Figure 145, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked). This state continues until time "X116" in Figure 145.

Then, at timing "X115" in Figure 145, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction from when the front door 12 was unlocked) and power supply is resumed. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power-off recovery process. This restores the data backed up during the power-off process to the specified storage areas of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. This restores the state to the state when the power outage was detected. At this time, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is off, but the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a door-open notification.

In addition, because the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12), the release switch turns on when power is supplied again. However, simply turning on the release switch does not release the door open notification, so the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 continue to output the door open notification without releasing it.

145, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch changes from on to off, the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of wins before displaying "dE" on the win number display LED 78, and sends a notification release command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the door open notification has been released.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancel command, it cancels the door open notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

Furthermore, instead of configuring the door switch 17 to turn on and issue a door-open notification when the front door 12 is opened, the system may be configured to issue a door-open notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes openable, and this state may be detected by the door switch 17. When it is detected that the front door 12 is openable, a door open notification may be issued even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when power is supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door open alert can be issued. Furthermore, if the power supply is cut off while the door open alert is being issued, and the front door 12 is then closed with the power supply cut off, the door open alert can be issued when the power supply is subsequently resumed with the door key turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction from when the front door 12 was unlocked). Then, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch changes from on to off, the door open alert is cancelled.

This prevents the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior by fraudulently opening the front door 12, then cutting off the power supply while the door open alert is being issued, and then closing the front door 12 with the power supply cut off, even if the fraudulent behavior is concealed. When the power supply is resumed, the door open alert can be issued even if the front door is closed.

Although the tenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the tenth embodiment, the door switch 17 is configured to be turned off when the front door 12 is closed and turned on when the front door 12 is open, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the door switch 17 may be configured to be turned on when the front door 12 is closed, and turned off when the front door 12 is open, thereby detecting whether the front door 12 is closed or open.

(2) In the tenth embodiment, when the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected, an alert indicating that the front door 12 is open (door open alert) is issued, but this is not limited to this.
For example, when a door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state, the door is unlocked, and at this time, the door switch 17 may detect that the door has been unlocked.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked by the door switch 17 being turned on, it may issue a door open notification even if the front door 12 is closed.
In addition, the main control board 50 can display "dE" on the number of wins display LED 78, for example, to notify that the door has been opened.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked by the door switch 17 being turned on, it may send a command (door open command) indicating that the front door 12 should be opened to the sub-control board 80, even if the front door 12 is closed.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it may issue a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc., even if the front door 12 is closed.
In addition, the sub-control board 80 can notify the door opening by, for example, outputting a voice message such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22 or displaying the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

(3) In the tenth embodiment, when the door switch 17 is turned on to detect the opening of the front door 12, both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 issue an alert (door open alert) indicating that the front door 12 is open. However, this is not limited to this.
When the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected, the main control board 50 issues a door open notification, but the sub-control board 80 does not have to issue a door open notification.

In addition, when the door switch 17 is turned on to detect the opening of the front door 12, the main control board 50 may not issue a door open notification, and only the sub-control board 80 may issue a door open notification.
In this case, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open by the door switch 17 being turned on, it does not execute a door open notification, but may send a command (door open command) indicating that the front door 12 is open to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it can execute a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

(4) In the tenth embodiment, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . However, this is not limiting, and the door switch 17 may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 detects that the front door 12 is open by the door switch 17 being turned on, it can issue a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, commands are sent unidirectionally from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, if the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 and the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 cannot detect the opening of the front door 12, nor can it receive a door open command from the sub-control board 80. Therefore, even if the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 does not issue a door open notification, nor does it stop game progress by indicating the door is open. In other words, the main control board 50 can continue game play even when the front door 12 is open.

(5) In the tenth embodiment, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. In this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) to turn the release switch from off to on, thereby canceling the door open notification. However, this is not limited to this.
For example, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 can be closed and the door switch 17 can be turned off, and in this state the door key can be turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) to change the release switch from off to on, and then the door key can be returned to its original position and the release switch can be changed from on to off, thereby canceling the door open notification.

In this case, simply turning the door key counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) and turning the release switch from off to on will not cancel the door open notification and will continue.
The door open notification can be cancelled by turning the door key in the opposite direction to that used to unlock the front door 12 and then returning the door key to its original position.

(6) In the tenth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, thereby preventing the return receiving port 131 from being positioned, but this is not limited to this.
132, the return receiving opening 131 and the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 may be located to the left of the gap 112 in the vertical direction, so that the return receiving opening 131 is not located vertically below the gap 112. In this case, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is not located vertically below the gap 112 either.

Furthermore, even if the upper edge 135 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, it is possible to push one medal M into the gap 112 and have it remain within the gap 112. In this case, it is not possible for the pushed-in medal M to become unable to be removed from the gap 112.

If the front door 12 is closed with one medal M still pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause one medal M to fly out of the gap 112. In this case, because the return receiving opening 131 is not located vertically below the gap 112, the one medal M that flies out of the gap 112 does not fall into the return receiving opening 131, but instead falls into the storage receiving opening 35a and can be stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, even if the upper edge 135 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, it is possible to push two medals M into the gap 112 and have the two medals remain within the gap 112. In this case, the two pushed-in medals M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with two medals M still pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause two medals M to fly out of the gap 112. Just as when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M still pushed into the gap 112, the two medals M that fly out of the gap 112 will not fall into the return receiving opening 131, but will instead fall into the storage receiving opening 35a and be stored in the hopper 35.

(7) In the tenth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but this is not limited to this.
133, a blocking member 140 may be provided vertically below gap 112, and this blocking member 140 may block the portion of return receiving opening 131 that is vertically below gap 112. In other words, the portion of return receiving opening 131 that is vertically below gap 112 may be blocked by blocking member 140. Also, blocking member 140 may be configured to be approximately horizontal.

In this case, medals M placed in the gap 112 can be placed on top of the blocking member 140. If the front door 12 is closed with medals M still in the gap 112, the impact will cause the medals M to fall from the gap 112. At this time, the portion of the return receiving opening 131 that is vertically below the gap 112 is blocked by the blocking member 140, so the medals M that fall from the gap 112 will not fall into the return receiving opening 131, but will instead fall into the storage receiving opening 35a and be stored in the hopper 35.

(8) In the tenth embodiment, the return receiving opening 131 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but this is not limited to this. For example, as shown in Figure 134, a portion of the return receiving opening 131 may be positioned vertically below the gap 112.
Furthermore, even if a portion of the return receiving opening 131 is positioned vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, it is possible to push "one" medal M into the gap 112 and have "one" medal M remain within the gap 112. In this case, it is not possible for the pushed-in "one" medal M to become unable to be removed from the gap 112.

If the front door 12 is closed with one medal M still pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause one medal M to fly out of the gap 112. In this case, because part of the return receiving opening 131 is located vertically below the gap 112, the one medal M that flies out of the gap 112 falls into the return receiving opening 131, passes through the medal return passage 132, passes through the medal payout opening 16, and is guided to the medal tray 19.

Furthermore, even if part of the return receiving opening 131 is positioned vertically below the gap 112, if, for example, the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medals M, it is possible to push two medals M into the gap 112 and have the two medals remain within the gap 112. In this case, the two pushed-in medals M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with two medals M still pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause two medals M to fly out of the gap 112. Just as when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M still pushed into the gap 112, the two medals M that fly out of the gap 112 will fall into the return receiving opening 131, pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout opening 16, and be guided to the medal tray 19.

(9) In the tenth embodiment, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the length "L2" of the screw 127, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 are configured to satisfy "L1 < L2" and "L1 < L3." In other words, the length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 is also thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, but this is not limited to this.

For example, the screw 127 may be configured to satisfy the relationships "L1<L2" and "L1>L3." In other words, the length "L2" of the screw 127 may be longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, but the width "L3" of the screw 127 may be thinner (smaller) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121.
This allows the removed screw 127 to enter the medal guide passage 121 when the screw 127 is removed from the rear surface of the front door 12, so that the removed screw 127 can be prevented from being lost.

As mentioned above, a locking portion is provided at a predetermined position on the chute member 120 to lock the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12. With the sheet member 120 locked to the rear surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through a threaded hole in the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes loose, the chute member 120 will not fall off the rear surface of the front door 12.

(10) In the tenth embodiment, when one medal M has entered the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 to the chute member 120. However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that even when one medal M has entered the gap 112, other medals M can pass from the medal selector 110 to the chute member 120.
As a result, when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M in the gap 112, even if the one medal M remains in the gap 112, it does not prevent other medals M from passing from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120, so that the progress of the game is not hindered.

(11) In the tenth embodiment, five digits (displays) 1 to 5 are provided, and dynamic lighting control is performed to sequentially light up digits 5 to 1 with five interrupts as one cycle.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that four digits, digit 1 to digit 4, are provided, and four interrupts constitute one cycle, with digits 4 to 1 being illuminated in sequence by dynamic illumination control.
That is, the number of digits (displays) is not limited to five and can be set appropriately as needed. Also, the cycle of dynamic lighting control is not limited to five interrupts and can be set appropriately according to the number of digits, etc.

(12) In the tenth embodiment, the design value "T1" of the time from when the selector stagnation notification is once cancelled until when the selector stagnation notification can be executed again, and the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected, are configured to satisfy "T1 < T4", but conversely, they may also be configured to satisfy "T1 > T4".

Figure 141 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stuck error, and shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is temporarily released until the selector stuck notification can be executed again, and the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.

In Figure 141, the on/off of selector stagnation detection, door open detection, selector stagnation notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 136.
141 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22" and "X23" in FIG. 136, respectively.

141, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X73" while the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification. If there is no event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) thereafter, at timing "X76", the main control board 50 will be able to issue the selector stuck notification again.
The time from "X73" to "X76" is the time "T1" from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily cancelled until when the selector stagnation notification can be executed again.

Also, in Figure 141, assuming that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at timing "X73", then at timing "X74", an event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, and at timing "X75", power outage processing is executed.
The time from "X73" to "X74" is the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.
The time from "X74" to "X75" is the time "T5" from when an event of power supply interruption (power outage) is detected until power-off processing is executed.

140, FIG. 141 also shows the voltage level when an event occurs in which the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off (power outage).
141, the voltage level when the power supply is on is set to "V0." Also, the voltage level at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff detection level) is set to "V1."

141 also shows an example in which an event of power supply interruption (power outage) occurs at timing "X73." When power outage occurs at timing "X73," the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at timing "X74." Furthermore, the time from "X73" to "X74" is "T4."
Furthermore, since power-off processing cannot be executed when the power supply voltage falls below the drive limit voltage level, when a power-off occurs at timing "X73" in Figure 141, the power-off processing is set to be completed by timing "X75".

Figure 141 also shows the timing (timing "X73") when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, and the timing (timing "X76") when the selector stuck notification can be executed again after it has been canceled, provided that no event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power outage).
Furthermore, in FIG. 141, the timing when an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) coincides with the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation in which the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated.

The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "T1 > T4." In other words, the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when that event that cuts off the power supply is detected is configured to be shorter than the time "T1" until the selector stuck notification can be issued again, provided that no event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs after the selector stuck notification has been canceled.

If the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X73" in Figure 141 while the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification and issue a door open notification. Also, assume that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs approximately simultaneously with the operation (on) of the reset switch 153. In this case, the power supply cutoff event is detected at timing "X74" in Figure 141, and then power off processing is executed at timing "X75". If no event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs thereafter, the selector stuck notification can be issued again at timing "X76" in Figure 141.

For this reason, if the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated and an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at approximately the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (on), the selector stuck notification is first canceled, and then the power outage is detected and power outage processing is executed before the selector stuck notification is executed again. Therefore, since the data indicating the execution of the selector stuck notification is not backed up during the power outage processing, it is possible to prevent the selector stuck notification from being executed when the power supply is resumed (recovered from power outage).

141, at the timing of "X75," a door open notification is executed instead of a selector retention notification. Therefore, in the power-off process, data indicating that a door open notification is being executed is backed up, so when the power supply is resumed (recovered from power-off), the door open notification is executed.
Also, in Figure 141, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using the selector retention error as an example, but in the case of a selector passing error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation will be the same as in the case of a selector retention error.

(13) In the tenth embodiment, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the selector stuck notification is first canceled and then executed again without any further operation. However, this is not limited to this.
For example, when the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, if the reset switch 153 is operated, the selector stagnation notification is cancelled and a door open notification is issued; and thereafter, when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, if the release switch is operated, the door open notification is cancelled and the selector stagnation notification is issued again.

Figure 142 is a time chart showing the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated when the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated, and when the release switch is operated when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated.
In Figure 142, at the timing of "X81", when a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnation error, it displays "CE" indicating a selector stagnation error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification, and sends a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.
In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector stagnation command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stagnation notification, and displays the words "Selector stagnation error" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X82" in Figure 142, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, but while the selector stagnant notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector stagnant notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it transmits a door open command indicating the opening of the front door 12 to the sub-control board 80. However, while the selector stagnant notification is being executed, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector stagnant notification.

After that, at timing "X83" in Figure 142, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will cancel the selector retention notification and issue a door open notification. Specifically, the display on the acquisition count display LED 78 will change from "CE," which indicates a selector retention error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error reset command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error reset command, the sub-control board 80 resets the selector stuck notification and issues a door open notification. Specifically, it switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call an attendant" to "Door is open," and switches the display on the image display device 23 from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open."

After that, at timing "X84" in Figure 142, if the front door 12 is closed while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the door switch 17 will be turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 will no longer detect that the front door 12 is open. However, the door open notification will not be canceled even if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and will continue until the release switch is operated (turned on).

Then, at timing "X85" in Figure 142, if the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector dwell error has not been eliminated, and the door key is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise) and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will release the door open notification and issue a selector dwell notification. Specifically, the display on the acquisition count display LED 78 will change from "dE," which indicates a selector dwell error, to "CE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, when the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an alarm release command to the sub-control board 80, indicating that the door open alarm should be released. Then, upon receiving the alarm release command, the sub-control board 80 releases the door open alarm and issues a selector stuck alarm. Specifically, it switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and switches the display on the image display device 23 from "Door open" to "Selector stuck error."

Here, Figure 142 uses a selector retention error as an example to explain the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated when the front door 12 is open and the cause of the error has not been eliminated, and when the release switch is operated when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the error has not been eliminated.
However, not limited to this, in the event of a selector passing error, a hopper empty error, or a hopper jam error, when the reset switch 153 is operated with the front door 12 open and the cause of the error not being eliminated, or when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 closed and the cause of the error not being eliminated, the operation will be the same as when a selector retention error occurs.

In addition, in Figure 142, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and a door open notification is issued, but it may also be configured to issue a door open notification when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes openable. At this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released and the front door 12 is now openable.

The main control board 50 may be configured to issue a door open notification when it detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can be opened by the door switch 17 being turned on, even if the front door 12 is closed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, the main control board 50 can be configured to cancel the door open notification by turning the door key counterclockwise and operating (turning on) the release switch.

In this way, when a specified error is detected, a specified error notification can be made. If, after that, it is detected that the front door 12 has been opened or can be opened, and the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, and an operation to cancel the specified error notification (operation of the reset switch 153) is performed, the specified error notification is canceled, and then a door open notification can be made. If, after that, the front door 12 is closed or locked, and the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, and an operation to cancel the door open notification (operation of the release switch) is performed, the door open notification is canceled, and then the specified error notification can be made again.

This allows confirmation that the reset switch 153 is functioning normally, and also notifies the user once again that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.
In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is open and the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, the specified error notification is cancelled and a door open notification is executed, thereby notifying the driver again that the front door 12 is open, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

(14) In the tenth embodiment, the processes related to error detection, error notification, and cancellation of the error notification are executed in the interrupt process.
In addition, in the same interrupt process, there may be a case where the error notification is once cancelled and then executed again.
In the example shown in Fig. 136, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in a situation where the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, the selector stagnation notification is canceled and a door open notification is issued. After that, at timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and a selector stagnation notification is issued again.

However, in the same interrupt process, there may be a case where the selector dwell notification is cancelled and then executed again, in which case the door open notification is not executed.
In this way, depending on the order of error detection, error notification, and cancellation of the error notification within the interrupt processing, there may be cases where the selector stagnation notification is canceled and then the selector stagnation notification is executed again without executing the door open notification.

Furthermore, a single interrupt process may execute only one of the processes related to error detection, error notification, and error notification cancellation. In such a case, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) when the cause of the selector jam error has not been eliminated, the selector jam notification may be canceled and a door open notification may be issued, and then the door open notification may be canceled and the selector jam notification may be issued again.

(15) In the tenth embodiment, when the return member 130 is fixed to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and upper edge 135 may be inclined so that its height gradually decreases from the front side to the back side in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of Fig. 126. In other words, upper edge 135 may be inclined so that its height is higher on the front side and lower on the back side in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of Fig. 126.

In this case, when a medal M is placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135, a force acts on the medal M to slide toward the back in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 126. In other words, a force acts on the medal M to slide toward the back surface of the front door 12. For this reason, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 tends to remain within the gap 112. Therefore, if the front door 12 is closed with the medal M still in the gap 112, the medal M is unlikely to fall out of the gap 112 even if an impact is applied when the front door 12 is closed.

When one medal M remains in the gap 112, another medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 will hit the first medal M in the gap 112 and stop. At this time, as the other medal M remains in the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, causing a selector retention notification to be issued, making it possible to indirectly detect that a medal M has remained in the gap 112.

Also, conversely to the above, the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that its height gradually decreases from the back side to the front side in a direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 126. In other words, the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that its height is higher at the back side and lower at the front side in a direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 126.

In this case, when a medal M is placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135, a force acts on the medal M to slide toward the front in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 126. In other words, a force acts on the medal M to slide in the opposite direction from the back surface of the front door 12 (toward the interior of the cabinet 13). For this reason, a medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 will easily slide down from the gap 112 toward the interior of the cabinet 13. Therefore, a medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 will be less likely to remain in the gap 112.

(16) In the tenth embodiment, the opening at the top of the hopper 35 is the storage receiving port 35a. The storage receiving port 35a is located below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the upper edge of the side wall of the hopper 35 may be positioned higher than the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). In other words, the opening at the top of the hopper 35 may be positioned higher than the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121).

In this case, for example, a recess is provided at a predetermined position on the side wall of the hopper 35, cutting out the side wall from the upper end downward. The lower end of this recess is positioned below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). This recess can then be used as a storage receiving port 35a to receive medals M guided by the chute member 120.

In this case, when the front door 12 is closed, the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) faces the recess serving as the storage receiving port 35a.
In addition, when the front door 12 is closed, the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) may be inserted inside the recess that serves as the storage receiving port 35a.

(17) The first to tenth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to tenth embodiments may not be implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Eleventh Embodiment
The eleventh embodiment relates to error detection. In the eleventh embodiment, after an error is detected, the error cannot be cleared until a predetermined condition is satisfied.
In the following description, "error" corresponds to "recoverable error" and does not include "unrecoverable error".
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be resolved and recovered from without turning the power on and off.
In the following, a hopper error, a selector error, and a door open error will be exemplified as errors.
Examples of hopper errors include:
"HP" error: Error of clogging (stagnation) of medals in the hopper 35 "HE" error: Error of empty medals in the hopper 35 "H0" error: Error in the payout sensor 37 of the hopper 35.
Note that the above errors do not represent all hopper errors.

The "HP" error occurs, for example, when the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b detects a medal (the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b is on) and the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b does not turn off (remains on at all times) even after a predetermined period of time has passed.
The "HE" error occurs when the hopper motor 36 is driven and a payout process is executed, but the payout sensors 37a and/or 37b do not detect any medals (the payout sensors 37a and/or 37b are off). Specifically, this error occurs when there are no medals left in the hopper 35.
The "H0" error occurs when the on/off timing of the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b is not within the range of the reference value, for example, when the time from when the dispensing sensor 37a turns on to when the dispensing sensor 37b turns on is not within the reference time.

Also, selector errors include, for example,
"CE" error: medal retention error in the medal selector; "CP" error: medal illegal passage error in the medal selector; "CH" error: abnormality in the passage sensor 46 located in the medal selector; "C0" error: abnormality in the insertion sensor 44 located in the medal selector; "C1" error: abnormal medal insertion error.
Note that the above errors do not mean all selector errors.
The "CE" error occurs when the downstream sensor 44b, of the two input sensors 44a and 44b, does not turn off even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the input sensor 44b, which is located downstream, turns on (detects a medal).
The "CP" error is an error that occurs when, for example, after the input sensor 44a turns on, the input sensor 44a turns off without the input sensor 44b turning on.

The "CH" error occurs when an abnormality is detected in the passage sensor 46. For example, this error occurs when the passage sensor 46 does not turn off even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the passage sensor 46 detects a medal (the passage sensor 46 turns on).
The "C1" error occurs when an abnormality in the passage time of the passage sensor 46 or the input sensor 44a or 44b is detected.

Furthermore, a door open error is called a "dE" error, and is an error that is detected when the front door 12 is opened. The error can be cleared by closing the front door 12 and turning the door key in a predetermined direction to clear the error (described later).
Hereinafter, when a hopper error is referred to, it is intended to mean an error relating to any of the hoppers mentioned above, or any error relating to a hopper other than those mentioned above.
Similarly, when a selector error is referred to hereinafter, it is intended to mean an error relating to any of the selectors mentioned above, or any error relating to a selector other than those mentioned above.

The above errors such as "HP" and "CE" are displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (error display on the main side). For example, if the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 before the error occurs is "*0"("*" indicates that the light is off), when an "HP" error occurs, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "*0" to "HP". Then, when the "HP" error is resolved, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 returns from "HP" to "*0".
Furthermore, if an error occurs, a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it displays an image corresponding to the received error command on the image display device 23, outputs a sound corresponding to the error from the speaker 22, and causes the effect lamp 21 to emit light in a color corresponding to the error.
Then, when the error is cleared, a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the error clear command, the sub-control board 80 returns the states of the image display device 23, the speaker 22, and the performance lamp 21 to the states before the error occurred.

In the following examples, we illustrate a case where a selector error, a second error, occurs while a hopper error, a first error, occurs (Figure 146), and a case where a hopper error, a second error, occurs while a selector error, a first error, occurs (Figure 147).
Here, it is almost impossible for a selector error and a hopper error to occur at the same time during a game, because it is practically impossible for a medal payout process to be executed when a selector error occurs.
Furthermore, when a hopper error occurs, the blocker 45 is turned off, so even if a medal is inserted, the medal does not reach the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. For this reason, it is practically impossible for a selector error to occur when a hopper error occurs.

However, for example, first, if a medal is inserted while a hopper error (such as an "HE" error) is occurring, it may pass through the blocker 45 for some reason (for example, if a malfunction occurs in the drive of the blocker 45) and reach the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Also, if a medal is inserted fraudulently while a hopper error is occurring, an abnormal medal insertion may be detected.
Secondly, there is a case where a hopper goofing action is performed while a selector error is occurring, and an abnormality in the payout sensor 37 is detected.
In this way, there is a risk that a selector error may occur while a hopper error is occurring, or that a hopper error may occur while a selector error is occurring.
Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, error notification is controlled to take into account the above events as well.

Next, the flow from error detection to notification will be described using the flowchart shown in the third embodiment.
When it is determined in step S274 in the main processing (M_MAIN) of Fig. 46 that a medal has been inserted, the main control board 50 proceeds to step S276 and executes medal management. This processing determines whether or not a selector error has occurred based on the detection of the passage sensor 46 and insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Specifically, in step S463 (input error check) of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of Fig. 47, it is determined whether or not a selector error has been detected for each interrupt processing.
When the main control board 50 detects a selector error, it transmits a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it becomes capable of issuing a notice of the selector error.

46 (M_MAIN), the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing in step S294. Alternatively, when the main control board 50 determines that the settlement switch 43 has been operated in medal management in step S276, the main control board 50 transitions to the settlement processing and executes medal payout processing of the stored medals.
During the medal payout process, the presence or absence of a hopper error is determined by the payout sensors 37a and 37b. Specifically, in step S463 (input error check) of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Figure 47, it is determined for each interrupt process whether a medal hopper error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a hopper error, it transmits a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it becomes capable of issuing a hopper error notification.
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during error detection or error notification and it is necessary to back up data related to the error, backup processing of the data related to the error is executed in the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) of Figure 48, for example, before processing step S2772.
When the power is turned on, the backed-up data relating to the error is read at some timing in the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 42, and the state before the power was turned off is restored.

Figure 146 is a time chart showing example 1 of error notification in the 11th embodiment, and shows the detection status of a first error, the notification status of a first error, the detection status of a second error, and the notification status of a second error, respectively.
In Example 1 of Fig. 146, the first error is a hopper error and the second error is a selector error, although the errors are not limited to these.
Error notification is performed by both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 issues an error alert using the acquired number display LED 78. For example, when the above-mentioned medal accumulation error is detected, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "CE" in a segment. The sub-control board 80 also issues an error alert using the performance lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23. The "BGM" of the error alert shown in the following example corresponds to the output of the error alert sound by the sub-control board 80.

First, assume that no other errors have occurred when the cause of the first error occurs. When the cause of the first error occurs, the first error is detected by the main control board 50. Note that in this example, the timing when the cause of the first error occurs and the timing when the first error is detected are assumed to be simultaneous (no time lag). In reality, when the cause of the error occurs, the error is detected (it is determined that an error has occurred) by the interrupt processing that is executed afterwards, so there is a time lag of up to one interrupt time (for example, 2.235 ms), but this time lag will be ignored here.

As described above, when the main control board 50 detects a first error, it transmits an error command related to the first error to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command related to the first error, it notifies the user of the first error.
On the other hand, after the first error is detected, the main control board 50 controls the system so that the operation to clear the first error is not valid for a predetermined period of time. The cause of the first error can be removed even within the predetermined period. However, even if the cause of the first error is removed within the predetermined period of time, the operation to clear the first error is disabled until the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Of course, the cause of the first error can be removed even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.
For this reason, the first error notification is executed for at least a predetermined period of time. The BGM related to the error is configured to play one loop within this predetermined period of time. In other words, the BGM plays at least one loop as the first error notification. The sub-control board 80 stores sound source data for outputting the BGM, and the playback of this sound source data from start to finish corresponds to "one loop" of the BGM.
If the first error clearing operation is not performed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the notification of the first error continues and the BGM transitions to the second loop.

Here, the start of the "predetermined period" is "a predetermined timing after the first error is detected." Examples of the "predetermined timing after the first error is detected" include when the main control board 50 detects the first error, when the main control board 50 sets the error state, when the main control board 50 sends an error command to the sub-control board 80, and when the sub-control board 80 starts reporting an error. In this embodiment, the "predetermined timing after the first error is detected" is "when the first error is detected."
From the above, in the eleventh embodiment, "when a first error is detected" means "when the cause of the first error occurs" and also "at a predetermined timing after the first error is detected."
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first error can be cleared by inserting the door key DK into the door key insertion slot 160a of the front door 12, rotating it 45 degrees counterclockwise, and turning on the reset sensor 175 (Figure 160) installed inside, as will be described in detail in the 12th embodiment described below.
The error can be cleared by various methods other than turning the door key DK counterclockwise. For example, the error can be cleared by pressing the reset switch 153 shown in FIG. 125.

When the reset sensor 175 detects that it is on, it determines whether the cause of the detected first error has been eliminated. If it determines that a predetermined period has passed and that the cause of the first error has been eliminated, it terminates the notification of the first error on the main control board 50 side. It also sends a command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the first error has been cleared. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 terminates the notification of the first error. In contrast, if the main control board 50 detects that the reset sensor 175 is on but determines that the cause of the first error has not been cleared, it continues to notify the first error. It also does not send an error clear command to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 also continues to notify the first error.

Furthermore, even if the main control board 50 detects that the reset sensor 175 is on and determines that the cause of the first error has been eliminated, if the predetermined period has not elapsed, the main control board 50 continues to notify the first error. Furthermore, the main control board 50 does not send an error release command to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 also continues to notify the first error.
The determination of whether the predetermined period has elapsed is made, for example, as follows: First, at the start of the predetermined period, a timer value corresponding to the predetermined period is set in the RWM 53, and "1" is subtracted from the timer value for each interrupt process. Then, for each interrupt process, it is determined whether the timer value has reached "0." If it is determined that the timer value is not "0," it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed, and if it is determined that the timer value is "0," it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed.

The example in Figure 146 shows an example in which the cause of the first error is removed and then an operation to clear the first error (turning the door key DK) is performed before a predetermined period of time has elapsed, but in this case the operation to clear the first error is invalid and the notification of the first error cannot be terminated.
If the operation to clear the first error is performed again after the specified period has elapsed, the clearing operation becomes valid, and the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80 to notify that the first error has been cleared. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 ends the notification of the first error.

146 shows an example in which a cause of a second error occurs during a predetermined period. In this example, no other errors are detected during the predetermined period. Therefore, although a cause of the second error occurs before the predetermined period has elapsed, the second error is not detected during the predetermined period.
One method of controlling this is to prevent the main processing from proceeding to the second error detection processing during a predetermined period.
In this example 1, the second error (selector error) is not detected during the predetermined period, but other errors may be detectable.
When the predetermined period for the first error has elapsed, the main control board 50 detects the second error and sends a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. This causes the sub-control board 80 to notify the second error. Therefore, the second error is notified at approximately the same time as the end of the predetermined period for the first error (the start of the predetermined period for the second error).
In this way, in this embodiment, the notification of the first error and the notification of the second error are not executed in duplicate. Therefore, the notification of the second error starts after the notification of the first error ends. Of course, the second error is detected before the notification of the second error starts.
Furthermore, once notification of the second error begins, the operation to clear the second error becomes invalid for a predetermined period of time from the start of notification of the second error. This is the same as in the case of the first error. Therefore, the second error cannot be cleared (the notification of the second error cannot be terminated) during this predetermined period of time.

The notification of the second error is configured to have the background music play one loop for a predetermined period of time, similar to the notification of the first error. Therefore, the notification of the second error is configured to have the background music play at least one loop.
After the predetermined period has elapsed, the second error can be cleared. The second error can be cleared by turning the door key DK counterclockwise 45 degrees, similar to the first error.
When the cause of the second error is removed and an operation to cancel the second error is performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the cancellation operation becomes valid, and the main control board 50 ends the notification of the second error on the main control board 50 side and sends a command to the sub-control board 80 to notify that the second error has been canceled. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 ends the notification of the second error.

In this way, when a first error occurs, the notification of the first error is made for at least a predetermined period. Also, when a second error occurs, the notification of the second error is made for at least a predetermined period. Therefore, even if a second error occurs after the occurrence of a first error but before the notification of the first error has ended, the notification period of the first error (predetermined period) is not shortened.
Regarding the first error, since the first error is detected at approximately the same time as the cause of the first error occurs, the time when the first error was detected is stored in the error log (history) in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 as the date and time when the first error occurred.
In contrast, for a second error, the time when the second error was detected is stored as the date and time when the second error occurred. Therefore, strictly speaking, there may be a discrepancy between the date and time when the second error actually occurred and the date and time when the error occurred (actually the date and time when the error was detected) stored in the RWM 53.

FIG. 147 is a time chart showing Example 2 of error notification. Example 2 differs from Example 1 of FIG. 146 in that a second error is detected even during the predetermined period of the first error. In Example 2, the first error is a selector error, and the second error is a hopper error. However, the errors are not limited to these.
In FIG. 147 , if a cause of a second error occurs within a predetermined period after a first error is detected, the second error is detected even during the predetermined period. However, the second error is not notified in conjunction with the first error notification. When the cause of the first error is removed, the predetermined period for the first error has elapsed, and an operation to clear the first error is performed, the notification of the first error ends. When the notification of the first error ends, notification of the second error that was already detected begins. When notification of the second error begins, a new predetermined period begins as the notification period for the second error, and the operation to clear the second error is invalid until the predetermined period has elapsed. When the cause of the second error is removed, the predetermined period has elapsed, and an operation to clear the second error is performed, the notification of the second error ends.
In this way, when a first error occurs, notification of the first error is made for at least a predetermined period. Also, when a second error occurs, notification of the second error is made for at least a predetermined period. Therefore, even if a second error occurs after the first error, the notification period (predetermined period) of the first error is not shortened.

148 is a time chart showing Example 3 of error notification. In Example 3, the first error is either a hopper error or a selector error. Alternatively, it may be a recoverable error other than these two errors.
Example 3 in Figure 148 shows an example in which the front door 12 is opened during a predetermined period after the first error is detected, and a door open error (hereinafter simply referred to as a "door error") is detected.
In the eleventh embodiment, a door error can be detected and reported even during a predetermined period. Furthermore, the door error can be canceled at any time (even during the predetermined period), and the notification of the door error ends when the front door 12 is closed and the error is canceled. In other words, unlike the first error and the like, a door error is not an error that is reported for a predetermined period once it occurs.
When the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open. When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it issues an error notification on the main side (displays "dE") and also sends a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it notifies the sub-control board 80 of a door error.
When the above-mentioned selector error or hopper error occurs, the waiting staff opens the front door 12 to eliminate the cause of the error, but at this time the opening of the front door 12 is detected and a door error occurs.

In Example 3 of FIG. 148 , if the front door 12 is opened within a predetermined period after the first error is detected, a door error is immediately detected regardless of whether the predetermined period is still in progress. Furthermore, when a door error is detected, a door error notification is immediately issued. Therefore, the notification of the first error and the notification of the door error are issued in a redundant manner. For example, background music corresponding to the notification of the first error and a door error sound (such as an alarm sound or a voice repeatedly saying "The door is open") are output in a redundant manner.
Here, while the door error is being notified, the volume of the notification of the first error may be lower than normal. Alternatively, while the door error is being notified, the notification of the first error may be displayed only as an image, with no audio output. Furthermore, while the door error is being notified, the notification of the first error may be suspended.

When the front door 12 is closed and the door error is cleared, a determination is made as to whether the front door 12 is closed, regardless of whether it is within a predetermined period of time, and if it is determined that the front door 12 is closed (the door error has been cleared), the door error notification ends. Therefore, only the first error notification continues.
As in the above example, the first error cannot be cleared until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and can be cleared by performing a first error clearing operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.
Although not shown in Figure 148, when the front door 12 is closed and a door error reset operation is performed after the predetermined period of the first error has elapsed and the cause of the first error has been eliminated, both the door error notification and the first error notification may be terminated. In this case, the door error reset operation also serves as the first error reset operation.

FIG. 149 is a time chart showing Example 4 in which a power outage (an event that cuts off the supply of power) occurs while the first error is occurring.
In this example, it is assumed that the "predetermined period = time t1 + time t2", and that a power outage occurs when time t1 has elapsed after the first error is detected and the predetermined period has started.
When the first error is detected, a notification of the first error is made, but when a power outage occurs, power is eventually no longer supplied, and therefore the notification of the first error is also interrupted.
In this embodiment, data indicating that the time t1 of the predetermined time has elapsed is stored as backup data in the RWM 53 during power-off processing.
When the power is turned on after a power outage, the state before the power outage is restored (regardless of whether an error was detected before the power outage.) If an error was detected before the power outage, after the power recovery process shown in Figure 42 is completed, the data related to time t1 that was backed up at the time of the power outage is read, and notification of the first error is resumed at a predetermined timing.

After the power is restored from the power outage, the operation to clear the first error is invalid until time t2 has elapsed. This ensures a first error notification period (predetermined period) before and after the power outage, in other words, a period during which the operation to clear the first error is invalid. By doing this, even if the power is turned off due to cheating after the first error is detected, the first error notification can be made after the power is restored from the power outage, and a predetermined period can be ensured both before and after the power outage.
If the notification of the first error resumes after the power is restored from a power outage, the first error cannot be cleared until time t2 has elapsed since the notification resumed. After time t2 has elapsed, the first error can be cleared if the cause of the first error has been eliminated.

Example 5 of FIG. 150 is a time chart showing an example when a power outage occurs while the first error is occurring, and is a modification of FIG. 149 .
In this example, if a power outage occurs after time t1 has elapsed during a predetermined period, data relating to time t1 is not backed up.
After recovery from the power outage, the notification of the first error can be canceled even if the notification time of the first error after recovery from the power outage is less than time t2, provided that the cause of the first error has been eliminated. In this way, although notification of the first error is resumed after recovery from the power outage, it is also possible not to secure a predetermined time before and after the power outage.
In the case of controlling in this manner, for example, when power is restored from a power outage, the timer value corresponding to the remaining time of the predetermined period is stored as "0" in the RWM 53. Therefore, if the cause of the first error has been eliminated after power is restored from a power outage, the notification of the first error can be terminated immediately when the operation to clear the first error is performed.

Next, we will explain various situations in which selector errors and hopper errors occur, and specific examples of how to notify them. In the following explanation, selector error 1 is an error caused by the occurrence of a reverse flow of medals. For example, if the insertion sensor 44b (downstream side) first detects a medal and then the insertion sensor 44a (upstream side) detects a medal, it is determined that a reverse flow of medals has occurred, and selector error 1 is issued.
Selector error 2 is an error caused by the accumulation of medals. For example, the input sensor 44a and/or 44b changes from OFF to ON to OFF as medals pass through, but this corresponds to a case where the ON state continues for a predetermined period of time.
In the following example, a selector error 1 occurs first, and then a selector error 2 occurs immediately thereafter.

If a medal backflow occurs (including an illegal medal insertion due to cheating), a selector error 1 (backflow) occurs when an abnormality is detected in the insertion sensor 44, but when a medal backflow occurs, a medal jam usually occurs in the medal selector. Therefore, by removing the medal jam, the cause of selector error 1 is eliminated.
Similarly, when selector error 2 (stagnation) occurs, a medal becomes jammed in the medal selector, and the cause of selector error 2 is eliminated by removing the jammed medal.
If the hopper error is, for example, a hopper empty error, the cause of the hopper error can be eliminated by refilling the hopper with medals.If the hopper error is, for example, a medal jam at the hopper outlet, the cause of the hopper error can be eliminated by removing the jammed medals.
Furthermore, if the hopper error is, for example, an abnormality in the payout sensor 37a (including fraudulent payouts due to cheating), there is no operation to remove the cause of the hopper error, and after an error cancellation operation is performed, it is again determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the payout sensor 37.

In the following example, regardless of whether or not the error cannot be cleared during the period (corresponding to the above-mentioned "predetermined time"), the cause of the error is assumed to have been removed (the error has not occurred) at the time the error clearing operation is performed.
Furthermore, the "error clearing operation" corresponds to turning the door key DK counterclockwise by 45 degrees (however, as mentioned above, it may also be an operation such as turning on the reset switch 153).

FIG. 151(a) is a time chart showing Example 6 of error notification.
In this example, first, the cause of selector error 1 occurs, and immediately thereafter, selector error 2 occurs. In this case, the notification of selector error 1 is executed based on selector error 1 that occurred first. Once the notification of selector error 1 has started, the notification of selector error 1 will not end during the "(error) cancellation impossible period 1"("5seconds" in this example), even if a selector error cancellation operation is performed.
Furthermore, this shows an example in which a cause of a hopper error occurs while a selector error 1 is being notified and during the unrecoverable period 1. As mentioned above, after a selector error occurs, the progress of the game is stopped and no medals are paid out, so it is difficult to imagine that a hopper error will occur, but there is a risk that medals will be forcibly paid out due to cheating, for example, and in such a case a hopper error will occur.

As described above, while the selector error 1 is being notified (during the unrecoverable period 1), the three errors, selector error 1, selector error 2, and hopper error, overlap.
If the cause of the selector error is removed and a selector error cancellation operation is performed during the first uncancellable period 1, the cancellation operation is invalid, and therefore the notification of selector error 1 does not end.
Next, if a selector error cancellation operation is performed 5 seconds after the start of the notification of selector error 1, the notification of selector error 1 ends because the operation is valid.
The error cancellation operation that is executed five seconds after the unrecoverable period can be executed at any time as long as five seconds have passed (the same applies to other unrecoverable periods).
When the selector error cancellation operation (valid) is performed and the notification of selector error 1 ends, the notification switches to selector error 2. The uncancellable period 2 during which this selector error 2 is notified also continues for a new period of 5 seconds. Therefore, even if 5 seconds or more have passed since the cause of selector error 2 occurred and the cause of selector error 2 has been eliminated, the notification of selector error 2 cannot be terminated until the uncancellable period 2 ends.

If a selector error cancellation operation is performed five seconds after the start of the selector error 2 notification, the operation is valid, and the selector error 2 notification ends. When the selector error 2 notification ends, the notification switches to a hopper error notification. The uncancellable period 3 during which this hopper error notification is notified also continues for another five seconds. Therefore, even if five seconds or more have passed since the cause of the hopper error occurred and the cause of the hopper error has been eliminated, the hopper error notification cannot end until the uncancellable period 3 ends.
If a hopper error cancellation operation is performed 5 seconds after the start of the hopper error notification, the hopper error notification will end because the operation is valid.
In this way, even if three errors occur at the same time, an error notification is issued for each error for "5 seconds," and each "5 seconds" is a period during which the error cannot be canceled.

FIG. 151(b) is a time chart showing a modification of (a).
The example in FIG. 151(b) shows a case where the operation to clear the selector error is performed 20 seconds after the first notification of selector error 1 in FIG. 151(a).
In this case, the operation to cancel the selector error is performed 20 seconds after the notification of selector error 1, which means that the first uncancellable period 1 (5 seconds) has passed. Therefore, the notification of selector error 1 ends when the error is canceled, just like in Figure 151(a).
However, no matter how many seconds have passed since the non-cancellable period 1 has elapsed when the error cancellation operation is performed, the other non-cancellable periods (non-cancellable period 2 and non-cancellable period 3) will not be canceled or shortened.
Therefore, even if an operation to cancel the selector error is performed 20 seconds after the notification of selector error 1, the notification of selector error 1 will end, but then the notification of selector error 2 will begin. The notification of selector error 2 has a 5-second non-cancellable period 2, so even if an operation to cancel the selector error is performed during this non-cancellable period 2, it will be invalid. If an operation to cancel the selector error is performed after the 5 seconds of the non-cancellable period 2 have elapsed, the cancellation operation will be valid and the notification of selector error 2 will end. However, a hopper error notification will be executed thereafter.

FIG. 152 is a time chart showing Example 7 of Error Notification.
In Example 7, if multiple errors occur within the first unrecoverable period of "5 seconds," the unrecoverable period will continue for more than 5 seconds.
In the example of Fig. 152, a hopper error occurs first, and a hopper error is reported. Next, selector error 1 (backflow) and selector error 2 (backup) occur within 5 seconds of the hopper error being reported.
In this case, even if the hopper error cancellation operation is performed after "5 seconds" has elapsed since the start of the hopper error notification, the hopper error notification cannot be terminated. In Example 7, the hopper error cancellation operation is configured to become effective when 10 seconds have elapsed since the hopper error notification was started.
In Example 7, the period until the hopper error cancellation operation becomes effective is set to "10 seconds," but it is not limited to this and may be "15 seconds." If it is set to "15 seconds," it becomes equal to "the period during which the hopper error notification cannot be canceled (5 seconds) + the period during which the selector error 1 notification cannot be canceled (5 seconds) + the period during which the selector error 2 notification cannot be canceled (5 seconds)."

Furthermore, if 10 seconds have passed since the hopper error was notified, and all causes of the hopper error, selector error 1, and selector error 2 have been eliminated, and the error cancellation operation is performed, the hopper error notification will end. Furthermore, after the hopper error notification has ended, the notification of selector error 1 and selector error 2 will not be executed.
As in Example 7, if other errors occur cumulatively during the notification period of the first error, and if a sufficient error notification period is secured, once the first error release operation is performed, the system may return to normal without issuing notifications of other errors. Of course, when the error release operation is performed and the error notification is terminated, all error causes must be removed.

FIG. 153 is a time chart showing Example 8 of Error Notification.
In Example 8, a cause of a hopper error first occurs, the hopper error is notified, and then selector error 1 (backflow) and selector error 2 (stagnation) occur within the first irrecoverable period 1 (5 seconds). In other words, the error occurrence situation is the same as Example 7 in FIG.
In this example, the first unrecoverable period 1 (5 seconds) corresponds to a hopper error, and even if the hopper error cancellation operation is performed during this unrecoverable period 1, the hopper error notification will not end.
If the hopper error is cancelled after the unrecoverable period 1 has elapsed, the cancellation operation becomes valid and the hopper error notification ends. When the hopper error notification ends, the next notification of selector error 1 (unrecoverable period 2 (5 seconds)) begins.

The unrecoverable period 2 (5 seconds) is a period corresponding to the selector error 1, and even if the operation to cancel the selector error is performed during this unrecoverable period 2, the notification of the selector error 1 will not end.
If a selector error cancellation operation is performed after the non-cancellable period 2 has elapsed, the cancellation operation becomes valid and the notification of selector error 1 ends. When the notification of selector error 1 ends, the system moves to the notification of selector error 2 (non-cancellable period 3 (5 seconds)).
The unrecoverable period 3 (5 seconds) is a period corresponding to the selector error 2, and even if the operation to cancel the selector error is performed during this unrecoverable period 3, the notification of the selector error 2 will not end.
If a selector error cancellation operation is performed after the non-cancellable period 3 has elapsed, the cancellation operation becomes valid and the notification of selector error 2 ends.

Next, when the notification of selector error 2 is finished, the notification of hopper error is executed again (for the second time). At this point, no hopper error has occurred. The first hopper error is notified again to draw attention.
The second hopper error notification continues for Unrecoverable Period 4 (5 seconds). Even if an error cancellation operation is performed during Unrecoverable Period 4, the second hopper error notification will not end. If an error cancellation operation is performed after Unrecoverable Period 4 has elapsed, the cancellation operation becomes valid and the second hopper error notification ends. Once the second hopper error notification ends, normal operation is restored.
In this way, although no error has occurred at that point (the cause of the error has been removed), the error that initially occurred may be reported again to alert the user.

Example 9 in FIG. 154 is a time chart showing a situation in which, like FIG. 153, a hopper error, a selector error 1, and a selector error 2 occur in this order.
In Example 9 of Figure 154, a hopper error factor first occurs, a hopper error notification is made, and while this hopper error notification is in progress, the hopper error factor is removed and the selector error factor is also removed.
If all error factors are eliminated within the unreleasable period 1, and a hopper error cancellation operation is performed after the unreleasable period 1 has elapsed, the hopper error notification ends and the next notification of selector error 1 begins. That is, the factors of the selector error have been eliminated at this point, but based on the occurrence of selector error 1, selector error 1 is notified regardless of whether the factors of the selector error have been eliminated at that point, and this notification continues until the unreleasable period 2 has elapsed. Until the unreleasable period 2 has elapsed, any error cancellation operation that is performed will be invalid.

If an error cancellation operation is performed after the non-cancellable period 2 has elapsed, the notification of selector error 1 ends and the next notification of selector error 2 begins. As above, the cause of the selector error has been eliminated at this point, but based on the occurrence of selector error 2, selector error 2 is notified regardless of whether the cause of the selector error has been eliminated at that point, and this notification continues until the non-cancellable period 3 has elapsed. Until the non-cancellable period 3 has elapsed, any error cancellation operation will be invalid.
If an error cancellation operation is performed after the non-cancellable period 3 has elapsed, the notification of selector error 2 ends and the system returns to normal.
In this way, regardless of whether the cause of the error has been eliminated at that point, error notifications having an unrecoverable period may be issued in the order in which the errors occurred.

Although the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the example of Fig. 149, it is also possible to continue reporting the first error for a predetermined period after power is restored from a power outage. In other words, the operation to clear the first error is invalid for the predetermined period after power is restored from a power outage.
As a method for such control, for example, when a power outage is detected and a transition to power-off processing is made, data equivalent to the entire time of a predetermined period is backed up.
Furthermore, in this case, after recovery from a power outage, notification can be made again for a specified period of time, but if an operation to clear the first error is performed during this specified period, notification of the first error can be terminated even before the specified period has elapsed.

(2) In the example of Figure 149, if a power outage occurs after a predetermined time has elapsed after the first error is detected and before the operation to clear the first error is performed, the following control can be performed.
A first method is to not notify the first error after power recovery from a power outage, because the first error notification has already been executed for a predetermined period of time before the power outage.
As a second method, after recovery from a power outage, notification of the first error is resumed, but if a specific time has passed (from the time when notification of the first error was resumed) without an operation to clear the first error being performed, notification of the first error may be terminated even if an operation to clear the first error is not performed.
Furthermore, as a third method, similar to the example of Figure 150, after recovery from a power outage, the first error notification is resumed, but the first error notification may be terminated when the operation to clear the first error is performed.

(3) In Example 1 of Fig. 146, after a first error is detected, a second error is not detected until a predetermined time has elapsed. In Example 2 of Fig. 147, after a first error is detected, a second error is detected even before the predetermined time has elapsed.
Alternatively, for example, once a first error is detected, the first error may not be detected again until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, it may be determined whether the cause of the first error has been eliminated.
In this case, if the cause of the first error has not been eliminated, the notification of the first error continues. Also, even if the cause of the first error has been eliminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the notification of the first error continues if the operation to clear the first error has not been performed.
On the other hand, after the predetermined period has elapsed, if the cause of the first error has been eliminated and an operation to clear the first error has been executed, notification of the first error is terminated.

For example, suppose that a cheating offense is committed against the hopper, resulting in an illegal payout. If a hopper error is detected based on the first illegal payout, the hopper error is reported. Next, suppose that a second illegal payout is made while the hopper error is being reported. In this case, the second illegal payout may or may not be detected.
If an error reset operation is performed before the predetermined period has elapsed, the operation is invalid and the hopper error notification will not end. Next, if an error reset operation is performed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the hopper error notification will end and the system will return to normal. In other words, after the error reset operation is performed, a hopper error notification corresponding to a second fraudulent payout will not be issued again.
It is also possible to control as described above.

(4) When the cause of the first error has been eliminated, the notification of the first error has ended, and no other errors have been detected, the game can be played immediately.
Furthermore, when the cause of the first error has been eliminated, the notification of the first error has ended, and no other errors have been detected, the system can transition to a setting confirmation state. When the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 during game standby and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (see FIG. 163, which will be described later), the system can transition to the setting confirmation process shown in FIG.
(5) In the above embodiment, the specific "predetermined period" can be set in various ways. When the "predetermined period" is set to a short period, it can be set to, for example, about 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is set to a long period, it can be set to, for example, about 60 seconds.

Twelfth Embodiment
The twelfth embodiment relates to a door key (including a setting key as opposed to a door key).
In the twelfth embodiment (the same applies to other embodiments), the clockwise (also referred to as "right rotation") and counterclockwise (also referred to as "left rotation") directions of the door key DK and the setting key CK refer to the rotation directions as seen from the key side.
Figure 155 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10. When the slot machine 10 is viewed from the player's side, a door key insertion port 160a is provided near the right edge of the front door 12 (towards the right side panel 13d) and below the medal insertion slot 47. The front door 12 can be opened by inserting a door key DK (described later) into this door key insertion port 160a and rotating it 45 degrees clockwise. When the front door 12 is opened, it is opened relative to the cabinet 13 around the left side of the front door 12 in Figure 155 as an axis.

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing the door key DK and the door key cylinder 160.
156, (a) is a front view showing the door cylinder 160, and (b) is a side view showing the state in which the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion port 160a of the door cylinder 160. In (b) of the same figure, the door key DK is shown by a solid line, and the door key cylinder 160 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
156(a), the door key cylinder 160 includes an outer cylinder 161 and an inner cylinder 162 housed therein. The outer cylinder 161 of the door key cylinder 160 is fixed to the front door 12, and the inner cylinder 162 is formed to be rotatable relative to the outer cylinder 161.

The inner cylinder 162 has a door key insertion opening 160a at its center for inserting the door key DK. The outer cylinder 161 has two grooves 161a on the inner cylinder 162 side.
Meanwhile, the door key DK has two protrusions DK1, and when the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, the two protrusions DK1 fit into the two grooves 161a, respectively. The overall length L11 of the door key cylinder 160 is longer than the length of the keyway DK2 (the portion where the key groove is formed) of the door key DK. When the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, and the groove shape of the keyway DK2 of the door key DK fits into the internal shape of the door key cylinder 160 (when a door key DK that matches the internal shape of the door key cylinder 160 is inserted), the door key DK becomes rotatable, and the inner cylinder 162 can be rotated.

As shown in Figure 156(b), a cam 171 is connected to the tip of the door key cylinder 160. When the door key DK is inserted and the inner cylinder 162 is rotated, the cam 171 rotates in conjunction with the inner cylinder 162. Details of the cam 171 will be described later (Figure 159, etc.).

Fig. 157 is a front view showing the positional relationship between the door key insertion slot 160a and the inserted door key DK. In Fig. 157, the door key DK is indicated by a two-dot chain line.
The state in Figure 157(b) is the so-called initial state (the state shown in Figure 156(a)), and shows the position of the inner cylinder 162 when the door key DK is not inserted. In this state, the door key insertion opening 160a (the space in the inner cylinder 162 into which the door key DK is inserted) extends in the vertical direction in the figure. Note that, with the front door 12 closed, in the state shown in Figure 157(b), the front door 12 is locked to the cabinet 13 regardless of whether the door key DK is inserted or not, and the front door 12 is in a closed state (a state in which it cannot be opened).

157, the state (a) shows the state in which the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state (b). This state shows the direction of the door key DK that is operated to clear an error that has occurred in the slot machine 10.
As described above, when a hopper error, selector error, or the like occurs and a hall attendant removes the cause of the error, the error notification continues and the system does not return to the state before the error occurred. After removing the cause of the error, the front door 12 is closed, the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, and the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise to the state shown in Figure 157(a). In other words, in the eleventh embodiment, the "error removal operation" corresponds to turning the door key DK to the position shown in Figure 157(a).
As a result, the reset sensor 175, which will be described later, detects the error clearing operation. When the error clearing operation is detected, it is determined whether the cause of the error has been eliminated, and if it is determined that the cause of the error has not been eliminated, the error is not cleared and the error notification continues. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cause of the error has been eliminated, the error notification ends and the state before the error detection is restored.

When the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a in the state shown in Figure 157(b), and the keyway DK2 of the door key DK enters the inner cylinder 162 as shown in Figure 156(b), the two protrusions DK1 of the door key DK enter the grooves 161a of the outer cylinder 161. When the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in this state as shown in Figure 157(a), the protrusions DK1 of the door key DK move to a position inside the outer cylinder 161 where the grooves 161a are not formed. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to remove the door key DK in the state shown in Figure 157(a), the protrusions DK1 abut against the outer cylinder 161, preventing the door key DK from being removed. The door key DK inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a can only be removed when it is in the position shown in Figure 157(b), i.e., when the protrusions DK1 of the door key DK are aligned with the grooves 161a.
Furthermore, the range of movement of the door key DK when rotated counterclockwise is 45 degrees. Therefore, the door key DK cannot be rotated counterclockwise beyond the position shown in Fig. 157(a). Even if an attempt is made to rotate the door key DK counterclockwise beyond the position shown in Fig. 157(a), it is restricted by a stopper (not shown).

Furthermore, when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise from the position shown in Figure 157(b), a rotational torque is generated in the door key DK. Then, after rotating the door key DK to the position shown in Figure 157(a), if you release the door key DK (remove the force acting on the door key DK), a force acts on the inner cylinder 162 to return it to its initial position. Therefore, if you rotate the door key DK counterclockwise from the position shown in Figure 157(b) to the position shown in Figure 157(a), and then release the door key DK, it will return to the state shown in Figure 157(b). The door key DK can also be returned to the state shown in Figure 157(b) by rotating it clockwise while still holding it from the position shown in Figure 157(a).

Furthermore, if the door key DK is released after being in the state shown in Fig. 157(a), it returns to the state shown in Fig. 157(b), but the inner cylinder 162 does not rotate further clockwise. This is because rotational torque is required to rotate the inner cylinder 162 clockwise. Therefore, even if the force acting on the door key DK is removed in the state shown in Fig. 157(a), the door key DK will hardly overrun in the direction shown in Fig. 157(c) from the state shown in Fig. 157(b).
This will cause, for example, a hopper empty error, and the hall staff member will open the front door 12, replenish the hopper 35 with medals (eliminating the cause of the hopper empty error), close the front door 12, and turn the door key DK counterclockwise to perform the release operation; even if the door key DK is released from that position, the door key DK will not turn to the open position of the front door 12, preventing the front door 12 from being opened unintentionally.

The state shown in Figure 157(c) shows the state in which the door key DK has been rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in Figure 157(b). When the door key DK is rotated to the state shown in Figure 157(b), the front door 12 can be opened.
The clockwise rotation range of the door key DK is also 45 degrees, and the state shown in Figure 157(c) is the limit. In other words, the door key DK cannot be rotated further clockwise from the state shown in Figure 157(c). Even if you try to rotate the door key DK clockwise beyond the position shown in Figure 157(c), it will be restricted by a stopper (not shown).
157(c), as in the state of Fig. 157(a), the protrusion DK1 of the door key DK moves to a position inside the outer cylinder 161 where the groove 161a is not formed. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull out the door key DK in the state shown in Fig. 157(c), the protrusion DK1 comes into contact with the outer cylinder 161, and the door key DK cannot be pulled out. The door key DK inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a can only be pulled out when it is returned to the position shown in Fig. 157(b).

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed and the door key DK is changed from the state shown in Fig. 157(b) to the state shown in Fig. 157(c), and then the door key DK is released, the door key DK returns to the state shown in Fig. 157(b), but the inner cylinder 162 does not rotate counterclockwise any further. This is because rotational torque is required to rotate the inner cylinder 162 counterclockwise. Therefore, even if the force acting on the door key DK is removed in the state shown in Fig. 157(c), the door key DK hardly overruns from the state shown in Fig. 157(b) in the direction shown in Fig. 157(a).
This prevents the error from being unintentionally cleared (the error from being unable to be confirmed) because the door key DK will not turn to the error clearing operation position even if the hall staff opens the front door 12 before checking the error content and releases their hands from the door key DK.
Furthermore, when the door key DK is turned from the state shown in Fig. 157(b) to the state shown in Fig. 157(c) and the front door 12 is opened and the door key DK is released, the door key DK may be configured to return to the state shown in Fig. 157(b), or to maintain the state shown in Fig. 157(c). If a locking mechanism that locks the door key DK at the position shown in Fig. 157(c) is not provided, the door key DK can return from the state shown in Fig. 157(c) to the state shown in Fig. 157(b) simply by releasing the door key DK. By configuring the door key DK to return automatically in this way, the work efficiency of the hall staff can be improved.
In contrast to this, as shown in Fig. 162, which will be described later, it is also possible to provide a locking mechanism that maintains the door key DK in the state shown in Fig. 157(c) after the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise to open the front door 12. This locking mechanism (Fig. 162) will be described later.

Figure 158(a) is a front view explaining various dimensions of the door key cylinder 160, and (b) is a plan view and a side view showing the dimensions of the power plug.
As shown in FIG. 158(a), the length of the door key insertion slot 160a in the longitudinal direction (excluding the groove 161a) is L14, and the length (width) of the door key insertion slot 160a in the lateral direction is L13.
Also, as shown in FIG. 158(a), the distance from the center of the door key insertion slot 160a to the side plate 13d is defined as L12.

158(b), the blades PP3 of the power plug PP have a length L15 and a thickness L16. The distance between the two blades PP3 (center-to-center distance) is L17. The width of the blades PP3 is L18.
Here, if the power plug PP is Type A as defined in "JIS C 8303",
L15: 17±1.3 (mm)
L16: 1.5±0.13 (mm)
L17: 12.7 ± 0.13 (mm)
L18: 6.35 ± 0.25 (mm)
is.
In the following description, it is assumed that the power plug PP is Type A of "JIS C 8303".

Here, when focusing on one blade PP3,
Width L18 of the blade PP3 < length L14 of the door key insertion opening 160a in the longitudinal direction
The thickness L16 of the blade PP3 is less than the length L13 of the door key insertion opening 160a in the short direction.
If so, the blade PP3 can be inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a.
If the blades PP3 could be inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, there is a risk that the blades PP3 of the power plug PP may be used to commit fraud.
Therefore, the distance L17 between the blades of the power plug PP and the distance L12 between the door key insertion slot 160a and the side plate 13d are set to:
L17<L12
It states that:
As a result, even if one of the blades PP3 of the power plug PP is to be inserted into the door key insertion port 160a, the other blade PP3 abuts against the front door 12, so that the one blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key insertion port 160a.

Secondly, if the depth of the door key insertion opening 160a (L11 in Figure 156 (b)) is sufficiently longer than the length L15 of the blade PP3, it is considered that the inner tube 161 cannot be rotated even if the blade PP3 is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, and therefore it is preferable to configure it in this way.
Thirdly, the relationship between the width L13 of the door key insertion opening 160a and the thickness L16 of the blade PP3 is as follows:
L13<L16
If
and/or
The relationship between the length L14 of the door key insertion slot 160a in the longitudinal direction and the width L18 of the blade PP3 is as follows:
L14<L18
In this case, the blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, and therefore, such a configuration is preferable.
moreover,
If "L13<L16" and/or "L14<L18" are satisfied, cheating can be prevented without the above-mentioned "L17<L12" (even if "L17>L12" is satisfied).
If the structure is such that the blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key insertion port 160a, it is possible to prevent an accident such as the blade PP3 being accidentally stuck into the door key insertion port 160a and breaking while still inside the door key insertion port 160a when, for example, a person purchases a real machine and plays at home.

Next, a locking device operated by the door key cylinder 160 will be described.
Figure 159 is a schematic diagram illustrating the locking device 170 in the twelfth embodiment, and is a front view seen from the inside of the front door 12 toward the outside (player side).
As shown in Figure 156(b), the cam 171 is connected to the tip of the inner cylinder 162 of the door key cylinder 160, and rotates simultaneously with the rotation of the door key DK and the inner cylinder 162. Figure 159 is a view seen from the back side of the front door 12, so when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise as seen from the outside, as shown in Figure 157(a), the cam 171 rotates clockwise in Figure 159. Similarly, when the door key DK is rotated clockwise as seen from the outside, as shown in Figure 157(c), the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise in Figure 159.

Fig. 159 shows the state in which the front door 12 is closed, and the position of the cam 171 in Fig. 159 is the position shown in Fig. 157(b). In this position, an engaging member (not shown) provided on the cabinet 13 side engages with the cam 171, so that the front door 12 is closed (locked) relative to the cabinet 13.
The cam 171 has two protrusions 171a and 171b. In this example, the protrusions 171a and 171b are provided at 90-degree intervals.
The locking device 170 includes moving members 172 and 173 that are configured to be movable in the up and down direction in the drawing. A coil spring 176 is connected to the moving member 172 via a hook 172c.
Similarly, a coil spring 177 is connected to the moving member 173 via a hook 173b, and a coil spring 178 is connected to the moving member 173 via a hook 173c.

Furthermore, the moving member 172 is supported by a predetermined member (not shown). When the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure, the coil spring 176 is stretched, and an elastic force acts on the coil spring 176.
Similarly, the moving member 173 is supported by a predetermined member (not shown). When the moving member 173 moves downward in the figure, the coil springs 177 and 178 are stretched, and an elastic force acts on the coil springs 177 and 178.
The moving member 172 is provided with a follower 172a that extends toward the cam 171, and the tip of the follower 172a abuts against a protrusion 171b of the cam 171. The abutment between the follower 172a and the protrusion 171b restricts the movement of the moving member 172 in the downward direction in the drawing.

The moving member 173 is provided with a follower 173a that extends toward the cam 171, and the tip of the follower 173a abuts against the protrusion 171a of the cam 171. The abutment between the follower 173a and the protrusion 171a restricts the movement of the moving member 173 in the upward direction in the drawing.
159, the length of the moving member 173 in the vertical direction in the figure is longer than the length of the moving member 172 in the vertical direction in the figure. In other words, the moving member 173 is larger than the moving member 172. Therefore, the weight of the moving member 173 is heavier than the weight of the moving member 172.

Here, the coil springs 176, 177, and 178 are all assumed to have the same shape (same performance). Therefore, if the elastic force of the coil spring 176 when the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure is F1, and the elastic force of each of the coil springs 177 and 178 when the moving member 173 moves downward in the figure is F2, then:
2 x F1 ≒ F2
It is configured so that:
By configuring it as described above, even when taking into account the influence of gravity, the force for moving the movable member 173 downward in the figure is greater than the force for moving the movable member 172 upward in the figure.
With this configuration, when the front door 12 is closed, turning the door key DK clockwise requires a greater force (rotational torque) than turning it counterclockwise. This makes it difficult to open the front door 12, even if an unauthorized device is inserted into the door key insertion port 160a. On the other hand, because turning the door key DK counterclockwise does not require a large force, a hall attendant can easily clear the error.

159, almost no tension is acting on the coil spring 176. Therefore, even if the contact between the follower part 172a and the protrusion 171b is released, the moving member 172 is configured not to move further downward in the drawing from the position in FIG.
159, almost no tension is acting on the coil springs 177 and 178. Therefore, even if the contact between the follower portion 173a and the protrusion 171a is released, the moving member 173 is configured not to move further upward in the drawing from the position in FIG.
Furthermore, the protrusion 171 a of the cam 171 abuts against the follower portion 174 .
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the follower 174 is configured to be movable up and down in the drawing. When the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise and the tip of the protrusion 171 a moves downward, the follower 174 is configured to be movable downward while in contact with the protrusion 171 a.

A detection piece 172b is provided on the moving member 172. Meanwhile, a reset sensor 175 is attached to the locking device 170. In the position shown in Fig. 159, the reset sensor 175 detects the detection piece 172b. The state in which the reset sensor 175 detects the detection piece 172b is referred to as "off."
In contrast, when the moving member 172 moves upward in the drawing, the detection piece 172b is no longer detected by the reset sensor 175. As a result, the reset sensor 175 detects "ON."

FIG. 160 shows the state when the cam 171 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG.
In the state shown in Fig. 157(b), when the door key DK is inserted and rotated 45 degrees clockwise to attain the state shown in Fig. 157(c), the cam 171 in Fig. 159 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise to attain the state shown in Fig. 160. Therefore, the state shown in Fig. 160 is a state in which the front door 12 can be opened.
When cam 171 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise, driven part 174, which is in contact with protrusion 171a, moves downward while maintaining contact with protrusion 171a. Similarly, driven part 173a moves downward while maintaining contact with protrusion 171a. This causes moving member 173 to move downward in the figure, stretching coil springs 177 and 178, which causes a rotational torque to act on cam 171, tending to rotate it clockwise (returning it to its original position). This rotational torque is the elastic force of coil springs 177 and 178.
Meanwhile, the protrusion 171b of the cam 171 and the follower portion 172a are released from contact with each other. The moving member 172 maintains the position shown in FIG. 159 even after the contact with the protrusion 171b is released. Therefore, the detection piece 172b remains detected by the reset sensor 175 (OFF state). Furthermore, since the moving member 172 does not move, no elastic force acts on the coil spring 176.

FIG. 161 shows the state when the cam 171 has rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.
When the door key DK inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in the state shown in Fig. 157(b) to bring it into the state shown in Fig. 157(a), the cam 171 in Fig. 159 rotates 45 degrees clockwise to bring it into the state shown in Fig. 161. Therefore, the state shown in Fig. 161 is the state at the time of the error reset operation.
159, the contact between the protrusion 171a and the follower 174 is released, but the follower 174 is configured to remain at the uppermost position. Therefore, the follower 174 does not move downward even when the contact with the protrusion 171a is released.

Furthermore, when cam 171 rotates clockwise, follower 172a is moved upward in the figure by protrusion 171b. This causes moving member 172 to move upward in the figure. When moving member 172 moves upward in the figure, coil spring 176 is stretched, and a rotational torque acts on cam 171, tending to rotate it counterclockwise (to return to its original position). This rotational torque is the elastic force of coil spring 176.
Since the follower 173a and the cam 171 are not in contact with each other, the position of the follower 173a does not change even when the cam 171 rotates clockwise from the state shown in Figure 159 to the state shown in Figure 161. Therefore, the position of the moving member 173 does not fluctuate.
161 from the state in Fig. 159, the detection piece 172a is no longer detected by the reset sensor 175. This turns on the reset sensor 175, and it is determined that the error reset operation has been performed.

Figure 162 is a front view showing a structure in which the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise (the state of Figure 157 (c)), the front door 12 is opened, and then the door key DK is locked in that position (rotated 45 degrees clockwise).
In Figure 162, (a) shows the state of Figure 157(b) and Figure 159 (the state before the door key DK is rotated, i.e., before the moving member 173 moves downward), and (b) shows the state of Figure 157(c) and Figure 160 (the state after the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise and the moving member 173 moves downward).
162, the fixed member 179 is a member fixed to the front door 12. Therefore, the moving member 173 moves in the vertical direction relative to the fixed member 179.
162, an opening 173d is formed in the moving member 173. A substantially cylindrical stopper 173e protrudes from this opening 173d toward the front in the drawing. The stopper 173e is attached so as to be movable within the opening 173d.

162(a), the fixing member 179 and the opening 173d are positioned at a height where they partially overlap in the vertical direction, and therefore the stopper 173e abuts against the right outer edge of the fixing member 179 in the drawing.
Then, the moving member 173 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. 162(a) to the state shown in FIG. 162(b), where the opening 173d is positioned below the fixed member 179. When the front door 12 is opened, the stopper 173e moves leftward in the figure and abuts against the lower outer edge of the fixed member 179. This restricts the force that causes the moving member 173 to return upward. Therefore, even if you release the door key DK after it has been rotated 45 degrees clockwise, the moving member 173 cannot move upward, and the door key DK does not automatically return. In other words, after the door key is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 157(b) (to the state shown in FIG. 157(c)) and the front door 12 is opened, the state shown in FIG. 157(c) is maintained even if you release the door key DK.
When the front door 12 is closed, the stopper 173e is returned to the right, allowing the movable member 173 to move upward. This returns the movable member 173 to the state shown in Figure 162(a), and the door key DK automatically returns from the state shown in Figure 157(c) to the state shown in Figure 157(b).

Note that even if the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in Fig. 157(b), the front door 12 will not open and will not be locked as shown in Fig. 162. Therefore, if you release the door key DK in the state shown in Fig. 157(a), it will automatically return to the state shown in Fig. 157(b).
In this embodiment, the lock shown in Fig. 162 is applied when the front door 12 is opened. Therefore, if the door key DK is turned from the state shown in Fig. 157(b) to the state shown in Fig. 157(c) without opening the front door 12 and then released, the door returns to the state shown in Fig. 157(b).

Next, the setting key CK will be described in comparison with the door key DK described above.
Figure 163 shows the setting key CK and the setting key cylinder 154. Figure 163(a) is a side view showing the setting key CK inserted into the setting key insertion port 151, and Figure 163(b) is a side view showing the setting key CK rotated 90 degrees clockwise. In Figure 163, the setting key cylinder 154 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
As shown in Fig. 125, the setting key insertion port 151 is mounted on the main control board 50. When the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion port 151 as shown in Fig. 163(a) and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees as shown in Fig. 163(b), the setting key switch 152 provided inside is turned on, and the setting can be changed or the setting value can be confirmed.
The movable range of the setting key CK is from the state shown in FIG. 163(a) (rotation angle 0 degrees) to the state shown in FIG. 163(b) (rotation angle 90 degrees clockwise).
Also, unlike the locking device 170, even if the setting key CK is released in the 90-degree rotated state shown in FIG.
Furthermore, within the rotational range of the setting key CK, the rotational torque is substantially constant, and the rotational torque hardly changes depending on the rotation angle of the setting key CK.

Fig. 164 shows the relationship between the rotation angle of each door key DK and the setting key CK and the rotation torque corresponding to the rotation angle. In the example of Fig. 164, the front door 12 is not opened (the lock shown in Fig. 162 is not engaged) after the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise.
As mentioned above, the door key DK has a movable range of −45 degrees to +45 degrees. Also, as mentioned above, the rotational torque when rotated clockwise is greater than the rotational torque when rotated counterclockwise.

In contrast, the setting key CK has a range of motion from 0 degrees to +90 degrees. Unlike the door key DK, the rotational torque acting on the setting key CK is generally constant relative to the rotation angle. While this example illustrates a case in which the rotational torque of the setting key CK is smaller than the rotational torque (T1) when the rotation angle of the door key DK is 0 degrees, this is not limiting. The rotational torque of the setting key CK may be greater than the rotational torque "T1" when the rotation angle of the door key DK is 0 degrees. Furthermore, the rotational torque of the setting key CK may be greater than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to -45 degrees, but less than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to +45 degrees. Alternatively, the rotational torque of the setting key CK may be greater than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to +45 degrees.

Although the twelfth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, when the front door 12 is open, the door key DK maintains the position shown in FIG. 157(c) and does not return to the position shown in FIG. 157(b). However, this is not limitative.
For example, the structure shown in Fig. 162 may be eliminated, and when the front door 12 is opened with the door key DK rotated 45 degrees clockwise and then the door key DK is released, the cam 171 returns to its initial position by the elastic force of the coil springs 177 and 178, thereby returning the door key DK to the position shown in Fig. 157(b). If the door key DK returns to the position shown in Fig. 157(b), the door key DK can be pulled out even while the front door 12 is open.

(2) The shape of the door key DK shown in the twelfth embodiment is an example and is not limited to this. For example, the door key DK may not have the protrusion DK1. In this case, the door key DK can be removed even when rotated.
(3) The configuration of the locking device 170 shown in the twelfth embodiment is not limited to that shown in the drawings. For example, the locking device 170 may be designed so that the rotational torque is the same when the door key DK is rotated clockwise and when it is rotated counterclockwise. Furthermore, the rotational range of the door key DK is not limited to "-45 degrees" to "+45 degrees." For example, the locking device 170 may be configured to rotate up to "+90 degrees" (the same as the setting key CK) when opening the front door 12.

(4) The maximum amount of clockwise rotation and the maximum amount of counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK can both be set arbitrarily. In the above embodiment, the door key DK can be rotated a maximum of 45 degrees clockwise and a maximum of 45 degrees counterclockwise.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is acceptable for there to be a slight difference between the maximum amount of clockwise rotation and the maximum amount of counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK.
On the other hand, it is also possible to provide a sufficient difference between the maximum amount of clockwise rotation and the maximum amount of counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK. For example, the maximum amount of clockwise rotation could be "+60 degrees" and the maximum amount of counterclockwise rotation could be "-30 degrees."
Alternatively, the maximum amount of rotation in the clockwise direction may be set to "+30 degrees" and the maximum amount of rotation in the counterclockwise direction may be set to "-60 degrees."

(5) The rotational torque (the force required to rotate) when rotating the door key DK clockwise and counterclockwise may be set to be the same or different.
For example, first, if the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise by "+45 degrees" is "T1" and the rotational torque when rotating it counterclockwise by "-45 degrees" is "T2," then it may be either "T1 ≒ T2,""T1>T2," or "T1 <T2."

Furthermore, the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise (toward the opening side of the front door 12) may be the same or different between the closed state and the open state of the front door 12. For example, the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise when the front door 12 is closed may be greater than the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise when the front door 12 is open.
In particular, when the door key DK is rotated clockwise with the front door 12 closed, a force is required to unlock the door, resulting in a large rotational torque. In contrast, when the door key DK is rotated clockwise with the front door 12 open, no force is required to unlock the door, resulting in a smaller rotational torque.

Furthermore, whether the front door 12 is open or not and the clockwise/counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK can be set in various ways.
in particular,
a) When the front door 12 is closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is approximately equal to the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK; b) When the front door 12 is closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is greater than the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK; c) When the front door 12 is closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is less than the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK; d) When the front door 12 is open, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is approximately equal to the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK; e) When the front door 12 is open, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is greater than the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK; f) When the front door 12 is open, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is less than the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK.

Thirteenth Embodiment
The thirteenth embodiment is an invention relating to cuts and branching of effects.
The meanings of terms used in the thirteenth embodiment are as follows.
The "effect stage" refers to an image of a background effect that is displayed over multiple games. In this embodiment, the term "image" includes both "moving images (video)" and "still images."
The presentation stage is determined by lottery or the like based on the game status, winning combination, number of games played, etc. During play, whether or not to change the presentation stage is determined by lottery or the like, for example, for each game or when a predetermined condition is met. When it is decided to change the presentation stage, the presentation stage is changed during play of the current game or between the end of play of the current game and the start of play of the next game.
As with events described below, the display of a presentation stage begins when a player performs an operation (such as placing a bet or operating the start switch 41), and the presentation stage continues to be displayed until a trigger occurs to switch to the next presentation stage.
As the production stage, for example, a normal stage, a premonition stage, a CZ stage, an AT stage, etc. are provided.
Here, the "premonition stage" refers to a stage that indicates whether or not the vehicle will transition to the AT. The premonitions include a true premonition that indicates a transition to the AT and a false premonition that indicates no transition to the AT.
In addition, a "CZ (chance zone) stage" is a stage where the probability of transitioning to an AT (winning) is higher than in a non-CZ stage. In other words, a CZ stage is a stage that is more advantageous to the player than a normal stage (a stage where it is easier to transition to a state that is advantageous to the player).
Furthermore, when we say "normal stage," we do not include the premonition stage or CZ stage.
Also, when we say "AT stage," we mean the normal stage during AT, and do not include the AT specialized zone stage or the sub-bonus stage during AT. The normal stage during AT is the stage with the highest stay ratio during AT.

An "event" is an effect that occurs as a result of an operation by the player, specifically, a bet operation (inserting a medal or operating the bet switch 40), operating the start switch 41, or operating the stop switch 42, and refers to a newly output effect or an effect that is different from the previous one. An event is the smallest unit of an effect, and various effects such as single effects and continuous effects, which will be described later, are created by combining events.
As described above, during a game, one of the effect stages is selected and a background effect is displayed. When an effect for the current game is selected, an event defined in that effect is output at a predetermined timing. In this case, the event is displayed as an image superimposed on the background effect (effect stage).
For example, as shown in Figure 167, when effect number 01 is selected, either no event occurs, or one or more events are set to be output in response to a predetermined operation. For example, when event "0101" is selected, event "0101" is output in response to operation of start switch 41.

A "cut" is the smallest unit of continuous (unbroken) moving images, and is also called a "shot." For example, if there is a moving image in which character A speaks, and then the screen switches to character B, and there is a moving image in which character B speaks, then if there is no break in the moving image of character A speaking, that will be one cut, and when character B switches to character A next, it will be another cut, and from then on, as long as there is a continuous moving image of character B speaking, it will be one cut.
Therefore, if there is one cut of continuous moving images of appearing character A and then another cut of continuous moving images of appearing character B, there will be a total of two cuts.
On the other hand, if the angle of the character A is changed in the middle of a moving image in which the character A speaks, and the moving image in which the character A speaks continues, there will be a total of two cuts, one before the angle is changed and one after the angle is changed.
In contrast, for example, a vertically long moving image panning up from the bottom is a continuous (uninterrupted) moving image, and therefore is considered to be one cut.
An event may consist of one cut or multiple cuts.
In addition, in a moving image, a series of cuts (one cut or a collection of two or more cuts) at a certain location may be called a “scene.” Therefore, one event can also be called one scene.

In this embodiment, "branch" refers to switching from a previous event to a new event, which results in a change in cut or scene.
Also, the "number of branches" refers to the total number of branch destination effects when the effect branches.
For example, if only event A can be output at a certain operation trigger and no other events can be output (for example, in Figure 168 described below, when only event "1501" is output at the start of performance 15 (when start switch 41 is operated)), the number of branches is set to "1".
Furthermore, if event A has been output up until that point, and a certain operation triggers a switch to either event B or event C (for example, in Figure 168 described below, when performance 15 stops once, either event "1502" or "1504" is output), the number of branches at that operation trigger will be set to "2".
Furthermore, when a certain operation trigger has the possibility of no event being output and the possibility of event A being output (for example, in Figure 167 described below, when performance 01 starts, there is either no event or event "0101" is output), the number of branches at that operation trigger is set to "2".
Furthermore, if event A has been output up until that point and no new event is to be output at a certain operation trigger (for example, in Figure 167 described below, if no event is selected at the first stop of performance 14), the number of branches will be displayed as "-".

In addition, from the viewpoint of how long the effect continues, there are single effect and continuous effect.
The "single effect" refers to an effect that is completed in one game, such as an effect that is output between the operation of the start switch 41 and the time when the reels stop (or from the time when the reels stop until the time when the bet is operated, or from the time when the reels stop until the time when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated), and that does not carry over to the next game.
Furthermore, a "chance up pattern" refers to an effect that is output in a single effect or a continuous effect, and is output as the game progresses or in response to a specified operation, and refers to an effect that increases the expectation level. Here, "expectation level" includes the expectation level for winning a special role (bonus), transitioning to a CZ (chance zone), winning an AT, transitioning to an AT specialized zone, winning a sub-bonus during an AT, etc.
Furthermore, a "confirmed effect" refers to an effect (premium effect) that is output in a single effect and signifies the confirmation of a result at the time the effect is output (confirmation of a win in a special role, AT, or sub-bonus during AT, confirmation of a transition to a CZ, confirmation of a transition to an AT-specialized zone, etc.). As will be described later, during a continuous effect, there are cases where a "successful effect" is output, signifying the confirmation of a result that is advantageous to the player, but a "confirmed effect" is output in a single effect and a "successful effect" is output in a continuous effect.

On the other hand, "continuous effects" refers to a series of effects that are output over multiple (at least two or more) plays, unlike the "single effects" mentioned above. Continuous effects have an "introduction effect" (an effect indicating that a continuous effect will start) as the first effect output. However, the introductory effect may be omitted and the continuous effect may start from the first play.
In addition, the final game of a series of effects (the game that announces the result) includes a "failure effect," a "success effect," and a "reversal effect."
A continuous effect is an effect that announces the winning of a special role (bonus), transition to CZ (chance zone), winning the AT, transition to an AT specialized zone, winning a sub-bonus during the AT, etc., while a "failure effect" is an effect that announces that a special role has not been won, that there has been no transition to CZ, that there has been no win in the AT, that there has been no transition to the AT specialized zone, that there has been no win in a sub-bonus during the AT, etc.
In contrast, a "success effect" is an effect that announces that a special role has been won, that a player will move to the CZ, that a player has won the AT, that a player will move to an AT-specialized zone, that a player has won a sub-bonus during the AT, etc.
In addition, even in the above-mentioned single performance, a failure performance or a success performance may be output to indicate the outcome of the performance.

In addition, the "reverse effect" is an effect that switches from the "failure effect" to the "success effect" when a bet operation is performed for the next game or when the start switch 41 for the next game is operated after the "failure effect" is output in the final game of the consecutive effects.
In the continuous performance, if a reversal performance is not output in the next game after a failure performance is output, the game in which the failure performance is output becomes the final game of the continuous performance.
On the other hand, when a reversal effect is output in the next game after a failure effect is output, the game in which the reversal effect is output becomes the final game of the consecutive effects.

An "ending effect" is an effect that is output when the completion of the AT is confirmed, and continues until the end of play at the end of the AT. Note that "completion of the AT" means that the parameters during the AT (number of plays, number of payouts, difference in number of coins) continue until they exceed (or reach) their upper limit. Specifically, this corresponds to the case where the difference counter value continues until it exceeds its upper limit (for example, "2400").

Fig. 165 is a diagram showing the stages in the thirteenth embodiment. The stages in Fig. 165 are merely examples, and are not limited to these 12. Fig. 165 also shows the number of cuts in each stage.
Normal stage 0 is a presentation stage that is selected only in the non-advantageous section. In this way, a presentation stage specific to the non-advantageous section may be provided, but it is also possible to use it in combination with a presentation stage in the advantageous section (for example, normal stage 1).
The presentation stages that can be selected during the normal advantageous zone include normal stages 1 to 5. The "advantageous zone (normal)" is a non-AT zone and does not include premonitions or CZs. During CZs, CZ stage 1 is selected, and during premonitions, premonition stage 1 is selected.

In addition, AT stage 1 is provided as a presentation stage in the advantageous section AT. Multiple types of presentation stages may be provided in the advantageous section AT. Furthermore, the "advantageous section AT" does not include (additional) specialized zones in the advantageous section AT or sub-bonus states in the advantageous section AT. AT specialized stages 1 and 2 are provided as presentation stages in specialized zones in the advantageous section AT, and an AT SB stage is provided as a presentation stage for sub-bonuses in the advantageous section AT.
As shown in Figure 165, the number of presentation stages (5) selected in the normal advantageous zone (non-AT) is set to be greater than the number of presentation stages (1) selected in the AT advantageous zone. This is to prevent players from getting bored by increasing the presentation variations during the normal advantageous zone.

In Figure 165, the image capacity of the performance stage is also shown. When the image capacity of the performance stage (normal stage 0) used in the non-advantageous section is C1 (MB), the total image capacity of the performance stages (normal stages 1 to 5) used in the advantageous section (normal, non-AT) is C2 (MB), and the image capacity of the performance stage (AT stage 1) used in the advantageous section AT is C3 (MB),
C1<C3<C2
is.
The non-advantageous zones have an extremely low stay rate, and since no AT lotteries, for example, are held, the image capacity of the presentation is the smallest.
In addition, since the number of presentation stages in the normal advantageous zone (non-AT) is greater than the number of presentation stages in the advantageous zone AT, the image capacity is proportionally larger.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of presentation stages during the advantageous zone AT may be increased. Furthermore, the number of presentation stages during the advantageous zone AT may be greater than the number of presentation stages during the advantageous zone normal (non-AT).
And the capacity of each image is
C1<C2<C3
It may also be possible to use the following.

Fig. 166 is a diagram showing the types of effects in the thirteenth embodiment. Fig. 166 shows only some of the effects, and does not mean that the effects shown in Fig. 166 include all of the effects.
For the effects, one of the effect numbers is selected for each game, by lottery, etc., depending on whether or not it is in a favorable zone, the winning role for the current game, whether or not it is in a CZ, whether or not it is in a premonition, whether or not it is in an AT, etc.
Effects 01 to 18 are effects that are selected during normal advantageous zones.
Furthermore, effects 14 to 18 are effects selected in consecutive effects. When consecutive effects are selected, effect 14 is selected first, announcing that the consecutive effects will start from the next game. Then, effects 15, 16, and 17 are selected for the first, second, and third games of the consecutive effects in the next game, respectively. Furthermore, if a failure effect (described below) is selected for the third game of the consecutive effects and the game transitions to a state advantageous to the player, effect 18 (reversal effect) is selected for the fourth game of the consecutive effects.
When the AT starts, the effect 21 is selected to notify the start of the AT, and when the AT ends, the effect 25 is selected to notify the end of the AT.

167 to 170 show some of the effects extracted from FIG. 166, each showing the event name, the number of cuts, and the number of branches.
In Figures 167 to 170,
Presentation 01 (Normal anticipation presentation) (Fig. 167)
Effects 03 (Normal anticipation effects) (Fig. 167)
Performance 14 (Continuous Performance (Introduction)) (Figure 167)
Effects 15 (Continuous Effects (1st Game)) (Figure 168)
Effects 16 (Continuous Effects (2nd Game)) (Figure 168)
Effects 17 (Continuous Effects (3rd Game)) (Figure 168)
Effects 18 (Continuous Effects (Reverse)) (Figure 169)
Effects 20 (Determined Effects) (Figure 169)
Effects 21 (AT start effects) (Figure 169)
Performance 22 (Normal AT Performance) (Figure 169)
Performance 23 (AT additional performance) (Figure 170)
Presentation 24 (AT anticipation presentation) (Figure 170)
Performance 25 (AT end performance) (Figure 170)
is shown as an example.

First, using effect 01 (normal expectation effect) in Figure 167 as an example, we will explain the events, number of cuts, and number of branches corresponding to the effect.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the event name is represented by a four-digit number, the first two digits of which represent the effect number, and the last two digits represent the event number during the effect, starting from "01".
In the case of the effects during the normal advantageous zone and not consecutive effects (effects 01 to 13 in FIG. 166), there is a case where "no event" is selected. Effect 01 has seven types of events, "0101" to "0107".

"No event" may be selected at any operation trigger. For example, at the start (when the start switch 41 is operated or when the reel 31 starts to spin), "No event" may be selected or the event "0101" may be selected. Similarly, at the first stop (when the first stop switch 42 is operated or when the first reel 31 stops), "No event", "0102", "0103", "0104", or "0106" may be selected.
Furthermore, for example, event "0102" may be selected by one of the following operation triggers: when the reel stops once, when the reel stops twice (when the second stop switch 42 is operated or when the second reel 31 stops), or when the reel stops three times (when the third stop switch 42 is operated or when the third reel 31 stops). In the case of an event that can be selected by multiple operation triggers, when the event is selected by any of the operation triggers, the same event will not be selected twice in that game. For example, if event "0102" is selected at the first stop, event "0102" will not be selected at the second or third stop. Furthermore, in effect 01, there is no event that can be selected after all reels have stopped.
From the above, if performance 01 is selected in this game, for example,
Start: Event "0101"
1st stop: Event "0104"
2 stops: No event 3 stops: Event "0102"
After total power outage: No event Events are output in this order.

Furthermore, if effect 01 is selected in the current game, there is a possibility that an event will be selected at every operation trigger.
for example,
Start: Event "0101"
1st stop: Event "0104"
2nd stop: Event "0102"
3rd stop: Event "0105"
This is the case.
Furthermore, in contrast to this, when effect 01 is selected in the current game, there may be a case where an event is not selected at all operation triggers.
for example,
At the start: No event At the first stop: No event At the second stop: No event At the third stop: No event.
In this case, since one of the presentation stages is selected, the game is played in a state where only the background image is output.

Note that if an event can be output in response to multiple operations, the same event may be output in response to multiple operations. For example, event "0102" may be output at the first stop, and then event "0102" may be output again at the third stop.

Furthermore, the number of cuts for each of events "0101" to "0107" is "1." Therefore, regardless of which event in performance 01 is selected, a continuous video is output without interruption, at least until the next operation trigger.
However, cuts are finite and have a predetermined length (time). For example, let's assume that the playback time of event "0101" is "T1."Let's also assume that event "0101" is selected at the start.
In this case, if the first stop switch 42 is not operated until the time "T1" has elapsed after the start switch 41 is operated, one shot of the event "0101" is output to the end, and then the output is stopped at the final image of that one shot.
Also, assume that after the start switch 41 is operated, the first stop switch 42 is operated before the time "T1" has elapsed, but no event is selected during the first stop. If the time "T1" has elapsed before the second stop, one shot of the event "0101" is output to its end between the end of the first stop and the end of the second stop, and then the image stops at the final image of that shot.
Furthermore, it is assumed that after the start switch 41 is operated, the first stop switch 42 is operated before the time "T1" has elapsed, and the event "0102" is selected during the first stop. In this case, the first stop triggers a switch from event "0101" to "0102." That is, even if the one shot of event "0101" has not been output to the end, the first stop triggers the output of the one shot of event "0101" to be stopped and the output of the one shot of event "0102" to be started.

The branching of effect 01 is as follows:
First, at the start, there may be cases where there is no event or where the event "0101" is selected, so the number of branches at the start is "2".
Similarly, during a single stop, there may be no event or events "0102,""0103,""0104," or "0106" may be selected, so the number of branches during a single stop is 5. In other words, during a single stop, there will be a branch to one of the five options: no event, or events "0102,""0103,""0104," or "0106."
Similarly, as shown in FIG. 167, the number of branches when there are two stops is "2" and the number of branches when there are three stops is "6".

The effect 03 is an effect that can be selected during normal advantageous zone times (non-AT), similar to the effect 01. As described above, when it is an effect during normal advantageous zone times and is not a continuous effect, there are cases where "no event" is selected.
As shown in event "0307," the number of cuts in one event is not limited to "1," and may be "2" or more.
In addition, there are operational triggers where no event is selected, such as when the second stop occurs in effect 03.

As shown in effect 03, the average number of cuts for events triggered by three stops (meaning the average number for all effects; the same applies below) is set to be greater than the average number of cuts for events triggered by one or two stops. Taking effect 03 as an example,
Average number of cuts per event during one stop: 1
Average number of cuts for events during three stops: 1.2
is.
The average number of cuts for each operation trigger event is as follows:
a) The average number of cuts for events at three stops was the highest.
b) The average number of cuts of the event at the start is equal to or less than the average number of cuts of the event at the three stops,
c) The average number of cuts for events with one or two outages is less than the average number of cuts for events with three outages.
Furthermore, even when single effects and continuous effects are combined, the average number of cuts in an event with three stops is greater than the average number of cuts in an event with one or two stops, as an effect executed in one game.

This is because when the three stops occur, the player has completed all of the operations required for one game, allowing the player to concentrate on the presentation (so that the event can be fully shown).
Furthermore, even if the number of cuts of an event is increased at the end of a game, the tempo of the game is not adversely affected, and the player will not accidentally skip an event that he or she wants to see in the flow of operations performed by the player.
It should be noted that a larger number of cuts does not necessarily mean that the duration of an event is longer, but on average, the greater the number of cuts, the longer the duration of an event.

Furthermore, the average number of branches in the operation trigger (excluding after a full stop. The same applies below) is
a) The average number of branches in the performance when there are three stops is the highest,
b) The average number of branches in the performance at the start is equal to or less than the average number of branches in the performance at three stops,
c) The average number of branches in the performance at one stop or two stops is less than the average number of branches in the performance at three stops,
d) The average number of branching effects when there are two stops is the smallest.
In performance 01, the number of branches in the performance at three stops is the highest (number of branches: "6"), and in performance 03, the number of branches in the performance at the start and at three stops is the highest (number of branches: "6").
In addition, both effect 01 and effect 03 have the fewest number of branching effects when there are two stops (for example, in the case of effect 03, the number of branching effects when there are two stops is "1").
Furthermore, when single effects and continuous effects are combined, the average number of branching effects at three stops executed in one game is greater than the average number of branching effects at one or two stops.
However, for the continuous effects executed in one game, the average number of branches in the effects at one or two stops is greater than the average number of branches in the effects at three stops.

In the continuous effects 14 to 18, unlike normal effects, if there is an event set for an operation trigger, the event will always be output at that operation trigger. Also, if there are multiple events set for an operation trigger, one of the events will be output at that operation trigger. Therefore, if at least one event is set for a certain operation trigger, it will not be "no event."
For example, in effect 14, event "1401" is always selected at the start. At the first and second stops, there are no defined events, so no event is selected, and at the third stop, either event "1402" or "1403" is selected.
In effect 15, the number of branches at the start is "1", the number of branches at one stop is "2", and the number of branches at three stops is "1". In effect 15, event "1501" is always selected at the start. Also, at one stop, either event "1502" or "1504" is selected. Here, event "1504" is a chance-up pattern. Therefore, at the first stop, the chance-up pattern may or may not be output. Furthermore, at three stops, event "1503" is always output.

Furthermore, the chance-up pattern of event "1504" is an event that can be selected when the machine stops once. In this embodiment, all chance-up patterns are events that can be selected when the machine stops once, and cannot be selected by other operation triggers. However, this is not limiting, and chance-up patterns may also be selectable by other operation triggers.
However, it is preferable that the chance-up pattern is output early during the progress of one game. Therefore, it is preferable to set the chance-up pattern to be more likely to be selected at the first stop (or at the start) than at the third stop. This is to give the player a sense of anticipation earlier within one game. In both single-shot effects and continuous effects, the chance-up pattern is more likely to appear at the first stop than at the second or third stop.
For this reason, in continuous effects, the number of branches for one stop trigger is set to be greater than the number of branches for two or three stop triggers. This is because it is easier to surprise the player and increase their sense of expectation for a successful effect.
The chance up pattern may also be selected in the second or third game of the following consecutive effects, but in all cases it is configured to be selected when the first stop occurs.

Effect 16 is an effect that is output in the second game of the consecutive effects (the next game after the game in which effect 15 is output), and the number of cuts for all events is 1. Event 1604 is a chance-up pattern, similar to event 1504.
For the second game and subsequent games of the continuous effect, if there is an event determined by the operation trigger, one of the events is selected and output, as in effect 15. Therefore, in effect 16, the event at the start is always "1601", the event at the first stop is either "1602" or "1604", there is no event at the second stop, and the event at the third stop is "1603".

Effect 17 is the effect output in the third game of the consecutive effects. The number of cuts for each event in effect 17 is relatively greater than the number of cuts for the events selected in the first and second games of the consecutive effects. The average number of cuts for events selected in the first game of the consecutive effects (effect 15) is 1.25, the average number of cuts for events selected in the second game of the consecutive effects (effect 16) is 1.0, and the average number of cuts for events selected in the third game of the consecutive effects (effect 17) is 1.83.
In this embodiment, the continuous effects continue for three games in principle, so effect 17 is the effect for the final game. However, if the outcome of the continuous effects is advantageous to the player (such as winning a lottery or transitioning to a game state advantageous to the player), and event "1704" (failure) is selected in the third game of the continuous effects (effect 17), then, as an exception, the continuous effects will transition to the fourth game, and event "1801" of effect 18 will be output. Therefore, only in this case will the continuous effects continue for four games.

Since the third game of the continuous performance is, in principle, the final game of the continuous performance, after the complete stop, either the event "1704" meaning "failure" or the event "1705" meaning success is selected and output. For example, in the continuous performance, a mission performance is output, and if the mission is accomplished, it is a "success," and if the mission is not accomplished, it is a "failure."
For example, if the CZ is won, the AT is won, or a special role is won, the event "1705" which is a "success" is selected as a rule. On the other hand, if the CZ is not won, the AT is not won, or a special role is not won, the event "1704" which is a "failure" is selected.

However, even if a player wins the CZ, the AT, or a special role, there is a predetermined probability (for example, 20%) that the event "1705" will be selected, which will result in a "failure," and the event "1801" of effect 18 will be selected in the next play.
Here, the number of cuts for the event "1704" corresponding to a failure is "2", while the number of cuts for the event "1705" corresponding to a success is "4". This is because by increasing the number of cuts in the performance when a success occurs, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the award of a special benefit.

Furthermore, when the probability that the chance-up pattern of the event "1706" is selected at the first stop when the event "1704 (failure)" is selected after a total stop is set to "X1," and when the probability that the chance-up pattern of the event "1706" is selected at the first stop when the event "1705 (success)" is selected after a total stop is set to "X2,"
"X1 <X2"
is.
In other words, when the chance-up pattern is selected, the expected value of "success" is set to be higher.

Rendering 18 is a rendering in which event "1801" is output at the start. The number of cuts for this event is "4," which is on the high side for a single event. In the example above, this corresponds to a rendering in which the mission is "failed" once, but is "succeeded" after a second attempt (for example, the character is revived).
Although the above describes continuous effects, effects similar to continuous effects are output from the start to the end of the CZ. In the final game of the CZ, a success or failure event is output.

Effect 20 is selected when a final effect is output during normal operation. In effect 20, a one-shot event "2001" is selected at the start and continues until all stops. However, this is not limited to this, and the event may be selected at the first stop, second stop, or third stop, and a final effect may be output.
This confirmation effect is a so-called premium effect, and is selected when a normal effect is being performed to announce the winning of a special role, a win in the CZ, or a win in the AT in the current game (1 game), without going through any premonitions or consecutive effects.
The event "2001" for the final effect is made up of one cut, in order to draw attention to the final effect by intentionally reducing the number of cuts for the final effect.

Effects 21 to 25 are effects that can be selected during the AT.
The effect 21 corresponds to the AT start effect. The number of cuts for the event "2101" selected here is "3", and it is selected at the start. However, this is not limited to this, and the event may be selected at the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop, and the AT start effect may be output.
In contrast, the number of cuts for the event in the AT end effect (effect 25) described below is "1". In the AT start scene, the number of cuts is increased (a performance with a lot of movement) to liven up the start of the AT and create a sense of anticipation. In contrast, the number of cuts is intentionally reduced at the end of the AT to create the effect of fading out the AT.

The effect 22 is a normal AT effect. During the AT, a different event is selected and always output for each game, at the start, at the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop. However, this is not limited to this, and even during the AT, when a winning combination is not achieved or a replay is achieved, a specific event may not be output for all operation triggers.
On the other hand, when the push order bell is won during the AT, the correct push order is announced at the start, and specific events are selected and output at the first, second, and third stops.
Effect 23 is an additional effect during the AT. Many types of events are provided as additional effects during the AT, making it possible to diversify the effects.
In addition, in effect 24, an anticipation effect during AT (for example, an effect output when a winning combination that is the subject of an additional lottery) an event is output for each operation trigger.
As shown in effects 22 to 24, similar to the normal effects, the average number of cuts of events output at the start or at the third stop is greater than the average number of cuts of events output at the first stop or at the second stop.
Effect 25 is an AT end effect. At the start, an event with a cut number of "1" is selected. However, this is not limited to this, and the event may be selected at the first stop, the second stop, the third stop, or after all stops, and the AT end effect may be output. In effect 25, one of the events is determined by lottery or the like depending on the game results during the AT, etc.

In the above, when an effect is selected, the event to be selected is determined by lottery or the like, but a pattern of event combinations may also be selected. For example, it is possible to store the event combination patterns that can occur for each effect, and at the start of the game, determine the effect to be output in the current game (e.g., effect 01) and the event combination pattern for that effect, and then output the effect according to the determined pattern.

Although the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the explanation focused on the number of cuts and branches in each effect, but the volume of the effect can be configured as follows, for example.
First, when one of the production stages shown in FIG. 165 is selected, background music (hereinafter simply referred to as "BGM") specific to that production stage is selected and output.
For example, when effect 20 (determined effect) is selected and event "2001" is output, the volume of the background music corresponding to event "2001" is louder than the volume of the general background music for the effect stage at that time. By configuring it in this way, the determined effect is emphasized and the player can focus their attention.
However, the volume of the background music that is output when an error is detected is louder than the volume of the background music for all effects. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to alert those around when an error is detected and to make it easier for hall staff to notice the occurrence of an error.

Also, for example, in the third game of a series of effects (a game in which effect 17 is selected), when the event "1705 (success)" is output after all effects have stopped, the background music is changed. Here, if a change in background music is one of the effects signifying "success," the background music may be changed together with the start of output of event "1705," or the background music may be changed before the start of output of event "1705" to suggest the output of event "1705."
The tempo (speed of the music) of the BGM for the event "1705 (success)" is faster than that of the BGM for the event "1704 (failure)." Furthermore, the volume of the BGM for the event "1705 (success)" is louder than that of the BGM for the event "1704 (failure)."

Furthermore, in the AT, the tempo of the BGM for event "2101" in effect 21 (AT start effect) is faster than the tempo of the BGM for events "2501" or "2502" in effect 25 (AT end effect).
In addition, the volume of the background music for event "2101" in effect 21 (AT start effect) is louder than the volume of the background music for events "2501" or "2502" in effect 25 (AT end effect).
In this way, when the AT starts, the tempo of the BGM is increased and the volume is turned up, thereby creating excitement for the start of the AT and creating a sense of anticipation.

(2) Furthermore, the color of the effect image can be configured as follows, for example.
First, in effect 17, the average brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed in event "1705 (success)" is higher than the average brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed in event "1704 (failure)." By making the effect brighter in the event of success, a sense of anticipation for the award of a special prize is created.
On the other hand, for example, the normal stage may have a low probability stage, a normal stage, and a high probability stage with different expected winning values for AT and CZ, but the average brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed in the high probability stage is lower than the average brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed in the normal stage or the low probability stage. For example, the high probability stage may have an image with a night motif, the normal stage may have an image with an evening motif, and the low probability stage may have an image with a day motif.

Furthermore, it may be configured so that when a high probability stage develops into a continuous performance, the brightness and saturation of the images that can be displayed during the continuous performance are more likely to develop into a continuous performance with relatively low brightness and saturation than when a low probability stage develops into a continuous performance. By doing so, it is possible to match the brightness and saturation during the continuous performance to the brightness and saturation of the stage before the continuous performance.
Furthermore, even in the effects output during normal play, the average brightness and saturation of images that can be displayed in effects with a high probability of winning CZ, AT, and special combinations (so-called hot effects) is lower than the average brightness and saturation of images that can be displayed in other effects. By establishing a relationship between brightness and saturation and the probability of winning in this way, it becomes possible for a player to estimate the probability of winning from the brightness and saturation of the current game, in other words, to be suggested the probability of winning.
However, the brightness and saturation of UI images such as the current stage, characters, game information (number of credits), etc. remain constant throughout the game (regardless of the expected probability of winning CZ, AT, special roles, etc.).

<Additional Notes>
The inventions (original inventions) described in the original specification, etc. of the present application can be exemplified by the following Original Invention 1 to Original Invention 15, and the problems that the original inventions aim to solve, the means for solving the problems related to the original inventions, and the effects of the original inventions are as follows:
1. Original invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can notify detected errors.
Gaming machines that detect multiple errors and notify the user of each of the multiple errors have been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-067621).
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to enable appropriate error detection and notification when multiple errors occur.

(b) Means for solving the problems of Original Invention 1 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (eleventh embodiment) is as follows:
A first error (hopper error) and a second error (selector error) can be detected;
The first error cannot be released until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after the first error is detected (including the timing at the moment the first error is detected),
The second error is not detected until the predetermined period has elapsed (FIG. 146).
It is characterized by:
(c) Effect of the original invention 1 According to the original invention, when the first error is detected, the error is not cancelled even if a cancellation operation is immediately performed, thereby ensuring a notification period for the first error.
Furthermore, it is possible to prevent cheating, such as intentionally causing a second error after a first error has occurred, and then switching from the notification of the first error to the notification of the second error.

2. Original invention 2
(a) The problem that Original Invention 2 aims to solve is the same as Original Invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problems of Original Invention 2 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (eleventh embodiment) is as follows:
A first error (hopper error) and a second error (selector error) can be detected;
The first error cannot be released until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after the first error is detected (including the timing at the moment the first error is detected),
When the first error is detected, a predetermined error sound (BGM) corresponding to the first error can be played in a loop;
The predetermined error sound is configured to be playable at least once in a loop within the predetermined period (FIG. 146).
It is characterized by:
(c) Effect of the original invention 2 According to the original invention, when a first error is detected, the error is not cancelled even if a cancellation operation is immediately performed, thereby ensuring a notification period for the first error.
Furthermore, it is possible to prevent cheating, such as intentionally causing a second error after a first error has occurred, and then switching from the notification of the first error to the notification of the second error.
Furthermore, when the first error is detected, a preset error sound is reproduced to the end, and is not terminated midway.

3. Original invention 3
(a) The problem that Original Invention 3 aims to solve is the same as Original Invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problems of Original Invention 3 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (eleventh embodiment) is as follows:
It is possible to detect predetermined errors (e.g., hopper errors or selector errors) and door open errors;
The specified error cannot be canceled until a specified period of time has elapsed from a specified timing after the detection of the specified error (including the timing at the moment the specified error is detected),
A predetermined error can be notified during the predetermined period,
When a door (front door 12) opening error is detected, the door opening error can be notified.
The door open error can be canceled regardless of the time that has passed since the specified timing when the door open error was detected,
If the door open error is resolved within the predetermined period, the notification of the door open error can be terminated (FIG. 148).
It is characterized by:
(c) Effect of the original invention 3 According to the original invention, when a specified error is detected, the error is not cancelled even if a cancellation operation is immediately performed, thereby ensuring a notification period for the specified error.
In addition, when the door is opened to remove the cause of a specific error and then closed, the door error can be immediately released, and unnecessary door error notifications can be eliminated thereafter.

4. Original invention 4
(a) The problem that Original Invention 4 aims to solve is the same as Original Invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 4 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (eleventh embodiment) is
A first error (hopper error) and a second error (selector error) can be detected;
The first error cannot be released until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after the first error is detected (including the timing at the moment the first error is detected),
The second error is not detected until the predetermined period has elapsed,
Even if a second error occurs during the specified period, the specified period does not change (FIG. 146).
It is characterized by:
(c) Effect of the original invention 4 According to the original invention, when the first error is detected, the error is not cancelled even if a cancellation operation is immediately performed, thereby ensuring a notification period for the first error.
Furthermore, even if a second error is intentionally generated after a first error occurs, the notification period for the first error can be prevented from being shortened.

5. Original invention 5
(a) The problem that Original Invention 5 aims to solve is the same as Original Invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 5 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (eleventh embodiment) is
A first error (selector error) and a second error (hopper error) can be detected;
The first error cannot be released until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after the first error is detected (including the timing at the moment the first error is detected),
a first error can be notified during the predetermined period;
A second error can be detected during the predetermined period;
When the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first error is detected and an operation to cancel the first error is performed, notification of the first error can be terminated;
After the notification of the first error is completed, if a second error is detected, the second error can be notified;
After the notification of the second error has started, the second error cannot be cleared until a predetermined period of time has elapsed (FIG. 147).
It is characterized by:
(c) Effect of the original invention 5 According to the original invention, when an error (first or second) is detected, the error is not cancelled even if a cancellation operation is immediately performed, thereby ensuring a notification period for the error.

6. Original invention 6
(a) The problem that Original Invention 6 aims to solve is the same as Original Invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 6 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (eleventh embodiment) is as follows:
Capable of detecting certain errors (e.g., hopper errors or selector errors);
The specified error cannot be canceled until a specified period of time has elapsed from a specified timing after the detection of the specified error (including the timing at the moment the specified error is detected),
A predetermined error can be notified during the predetermined period,
When a power outage occurs while a predetermined error is being notified for the predetermined period of time, and the power is subsequently restored, the notification of the predetermined error is resumed;
The predetermined period is configured to be the sum of the notification periods for a predetermined error before a power outage occurs and after recovery from the power outage (FIG. 149).
It is characterized by:
(c) Effects of the Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, even if a power outage occurs after a predetermined error occurs, a notification period for the predetermined error can be secured.

7. Original invention 7
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 7 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a door key insertion slot.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which the front door is opened by rotating a door key (for example, clockwise) or an error is cleared by rotating the door key (for example, counterclockwise) (see, for example, JP 2018-114235 A).
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to improve the operability of the inserted door key.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 7 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment) is as follows:
a door key insertion slot (160a) into which a door key (DK) can be inserted when opening the front door (12);
a setting key insertion port (151) into which a setting key (CK) can be inserted when changing or checking settings;
When the door key is inserted into the door key slot, it is turned to a predetermined position (the "+45 degree" position) that allows the front door to be opened. When the door key is released from the predetermined position, the door key returns to the position it was in before it was turned.
When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, it is rotated to a specific position (the "+90 degree" position) that allows it to transition to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even if the setting key is released at this specific position, the setting key is configured to maintain this specific position (Figs. 157, 163, and 164).
It is characterized by:
(c) Effect of the Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, even if the door key is turned, if the user releases his/her hand, the door key can be automatically returned to the position where it can be inserted or removed.
On the other hand, when the setting key is turned, the setting key is prevented from automatically returning, and the position of the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be maintained.

8. Original invention 8
(a) The problem that Original Invention 8 aims to solve is the same as Original Invention 7.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment) is as follows:
a door key insertion slot (160a) into which a door key (DK) can be inserted when opening the front door (12);
a setting key insertion port (151) into which a setting key (CK) can be inserted when changing or checking settings;
When the door key is inserted into the door key slot, the door key is turned to a predetermined position that allows the front door to be opened. When the door key is released from the predetermined position, the door key returns to the position it was in before it was turned.
When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port, the setting key is turned to a specific position where it can be shifted to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and then even if the setting key is released at the specific position, the setting key is configured to maintain the specific position;
After the cause of the detected error is removed, the error can be cleared by turning the door key in the opposite direction to the direction used to open the front door, while the door key is inserted into the door key slot, and turning the door key to the error clear position.
When the door key is inserted into the door key slot and turned to a predetermined position that allows the front door to be opened, the door key will not return to the error reset position even if the door key is released from the predetermined position (Figures 157, 163, and 164).
It is characterized by:
(c) Effect of the Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, even if the door key is turned, if the user releases his/her hand, the door key can be automatically returned to the position where it can be inserted or removed.
On the other hand, when the setting key is turned, the setting key is prevented from automatically returning, and the position of the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be maintained.
Furthermore, even if the door key is released after being turned, it will not return to the error reset position, so that it is possible to prevent an error reset operation from being performed unintentionally.

9. Original invention 9
(a) The problem that Original Invention 9 aims to solve is the same as Original Invention 7.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 9 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment) is as follows:
a door key insertion slot (160a) into which a door key (DK) can be inserted when opening the front door (12);
a setting key insertion port (151) into which a setting key (CK) can be inserted when changing or checking settings;
When the door key is inserted into the door key slot, the door key is turned to a predetermined position that allows the front door to be opened. When the door key is released from the predetermined position, the door key returns to the position it was in before it was turned.
When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port, the setting key is turned to a specific position where it can be shifted to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and then even if the setting key is released at the specific position, the setting key is configured to maintain the specific position;
When the front door is closed and the door key is inserted in the door key slot, the rotational torque required to turn the door key in the direction that opens the front door is greater than the rotational torque required to turn the door key in the opposite direction (Figure 164).
It is characterized by:
(c) Effect of the Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, even if the door key is turned, if the user releases his/her hand, the door key can be automatically returned to the position where it can be inserted or removed.
On the other hand, when the setting key is turned, the setting key is prevented from automatically returning, and the position of the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be maintained.
In addition, by creating a difference between the rotational torque of the door key when opening the front door and the rotational torque of the door key when performing the error release operation, the front door cannot be easily opened by inserting an unauthorized tool, while the error release operation can be performed with light force.

10. Original invention 10
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 10 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of outputting effects.
BACKGROUND ART Gaming machines that output effects consisting of one or more cuts have been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-061881).
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is how to appropriately set the number of cuts in a production.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 10 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
It has advantageous and non-advantageous sections,
The advantageous section includes an annunciation game state (AT) in which the operation information of the stop switch can be notified, and a non-announcement game state (non-AT) in which the operation information of the stop switch is not notified.
The number of presentation stages in the advantageous zone and non-announcement game state (numbers "001" to "006" in FIG. 165) is greater than the number of presentation stages in the advantageous zone and announcement game state (number "009" in FIG. 165),
The average number of cuts (referring to the number of cuts in one effect when a continuous, uninterrupted video image is considered as one cut; the same applies below) in a specific effect (confirmation effect) that notifies the player of a transition to a specific state that is advantageous to the player (in Figure 166, the number of cuts in effect 20 is "1") is less than the average number of cuts in effects other than the specific effect.
(c) Effects of the Original Invention 10 According to the original invention, it is possible to draw attention to a particular effect by intentionally reducing the number of cuts in that effect.

11. Original invention 11
(a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 11: Same as Original Invention 10.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The device has a pattern in which the effect branches when the first stop switch is operated, a pattern in which the effect branches when the second stop switch is operated, and a pattern in which the effect branches when the third stop switch is operated (for example, effect 01 in FIG. 167),
The number of patterns in which the effects branch when the third stop switch is operated (for example, in effect 01, there are five events: "0102,""0104,""0105,""0106," and "0107") is greater than the number of patterns in which the effects branch when the first stop switch is operated (for example, in effect 01, there are four events: "0102,""0103,""0104," and "0106").
The number of patterns in which the effect branches when the third stop switch is operated is greater than the number of patterns in which the effect branches when the second stop switch is operated (for example, one of the events "0102" in effect 01),
The average number of cuts (which refers to the number of cuts in one production when one cut is a continuous moving image without a break; the same applies below) of a production output in response to the operation of the third stop switch (for example, the number of cuts in event "0307" in production 03 of FIG. 167 is "2") is greater than the average number of cuts (the number of cuts in event "0308" in production 03 is "1") of a production output in response to the operation of the first stop switch,
The average number of cuts in the performance output in response to the operation of the third stop switch is greater than the average number of cuts in the performance output in response to the operation of the second stop switch.
(c) Effects of the Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, by increasing the number of cuts after all operations are completed, it is possible to show the player a presentation with a large number of cuts. Also, by reducing the number of cuts in the presentation during operations, it is possible to prevent the tempo of the game from being affected.

12. Original invention 12
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 12 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of outputting effects.
Gaming machines that output effects with multiple branches have been known (see, for example, JP 2018-033525 A).
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to appropriately set branching effects.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
Continuous effects (referring to a series of effects output over multiple consecutive games; the same applies below) are provided,
In a game during a continuous performance (a game in which a continuous performance is output, excluding a game in which a title is displayed and a final game), the average number of branches in a performance triggered by the operation of the first stop switch is greater than the average number of branches in a performance triggered by the operation of the third stop switch (for example, in performance 15 of FIG. 168, the number of branches at the first stop is "2", while the number of branches at the third stop is "1").
The number of effects that increase the expectation level among the effects that are output when the first stop switch is operated is greater than the number of effects that increase the expectation level among the effects that are output when the third stop switch is operated (for example, in effect 15 of FIG. 168, the number of chance-up effects at one stop is "1" (event "1504"), but there are no chance-up effects at three stops).
It is characterized by:
(c) Effects of the Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, a sense of expectation can be created by increasing the proportion of effects that increase the level of expectation during the game.

13. Original invention 13
(a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 13: Same as Original Invention 10.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
An announcing game state (AT) capable of announcing operation information of the stop switch is provided,
The first effect (effect 21 in FIG. 169) can be output when starting the notification game state, and the second effect (effect 25 in FIG. 170) can be output when ending the notification game state.
The average number of cuts in the first performance (referring to the number of cuts in one performance when a continuous moving image without a break is considered as one cut; the same applies below) (in performance 21, the number of cuts for event "2101" is "3") is greater than the average number of cuts in the second performance (in performance 25, the number of cuts for events "2501" and "2502" is "1").
(c) Effects of the Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, by increasing the number of cuts at the start of the notification game state (creating a presentation with a lot of movement), it is possible to create a presentation that will liven up the start of the notification game state. Also, at the end of the notification game state, it is possible to appropriately display the game result (for example, to prioritize the game result over the presentation).

14. Original invention 14
(a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 14: Same as Original Invention 10.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The present invention has a first effect (for example, event "1705" in effect 17 of FIG. 168) that notifies the player that a transition to an advantageous state will occur, and a second effect (for example, event "1704" in effect 17 of FIG. 168) that notifies the player that a transition to an advantageous state will not occur,
The average number of cuts in the first performance (referring to the number of cuts in one performance when a continuous moving image without a break is considered one cut; the same applies below) (the number of cuts in event "1705" is "4") is characterized by being greater than the average number of cuts in the second performance (the number of cuts in event "1704" is "2").
(c) Effects of the Original Invention 14 According to the original invention, the presentation when the player transitions to an advantageous state can be made more dynamic and create a sense of anticipation.

15. Original invention 15
(a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 15: Same as Original Invention 10.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 15 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
The present invention has a first effect (for example, event "1705" in effect 17 of FIG. 168) that notifies the player that a transition to an advantageous state will occur, and a second effect (for example, event "1704" in effect 17 of FIG. 168) that notifies the player that a transition to an advantageous state will not occur,
The average number of cuts in the first performance (which refers to the number of cuts in one performance when a continuous video image without a break is considered one cut; the same applies below) (the number of cuts in event “1705” is “4”) is greater than the average number of cuts in the second performance (the number of cuts in event “1704” is “2”).
The average values of brightness and saturation in the first rendering are higher than the average values of brightness and saturation in the second rendering.
(c) Effect of Original Invention 15 According to the original invention, the presentation when the player transitions to a favorable state can be made more dynamic and brighter, thereby creating a sense of anticipation.

10. Slot machines (gaming machines)
10a Lower panel 11 Power switch 12 Front door 12c Control panel 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c Top plate 13d Side plate 14 Pattern display device 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door switch 18 Display window 19 Medal tray 21 Performance lamp (decorative lamp section)
22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 (24A, 24B) Operation button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 35a Storage receiving port 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Token insertion port 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a Resistor 50b Mark number 50c Mark 50d Boundary line 50e DP mark 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU (main chip)
55a Pin 55b Recessed portion 55c Step portion 55d Step portion 55e Two-dimensional code 55f Model number sticker 55g Product name 55h Company name 55i Step portion 55j Hidden characters 56 Socket 56a Hollow portion 56b Step portion 56c Pin insertion port 56d Socket pin 56e Notch portion 57 Connector 57a Foot portion 57b Lead wire 61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Performance group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous period display LED
78 Obtained number display LED
79 Status indicator LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Loading display LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub-CPU
86 Push button 87 Cross key 91 Performance output control means 110 Medal selector 111 Medal passage 111a Vertical portion 111b Inclined portion 111c Entrance 111d Exit 112 Gap 113 Selector base 120 Chute member 121 Medal guide passage 122 Bottom portion 123 Inner wall portion 124 Outer wall portion 125 Step portion 126 Fixing portion 127 Screw 130 Return member 131 Return acceptance port 132 Medal return passage 133 Payout acceptance port 134 Medal payout passage 135 Upper edge portion 140 Closing member 151 Setting key insertion port 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 154 Setting key cylinder 160 Door key cylinder 160a Door key insertion slot 161 Outer cylinder 161a Notch 162 Inner cylinder 170 Locking device 171 Cam 171a Protrusion 171b Protrusion 172 Moving member 172a Follower member 172b Detection piece 172c Hook 173 Moving member 173a Follower member 173b Hook 173c Hook 173d Opening 173e Stopper 174 Follower part 175 Door sensor 176 Coil spring 177 Coil spring 178 Coil spring 179 Fixed member 200 Hall computer 301 Interrupt wait monitor register 302 Interrupt prohibition flag (IFF1 register, IFF2 register)
500 Timer circuit 501 (PTC) 8-bit counter 502 (PTC) Prescaler register 503 (PTC) Counter setting register 504 (PTC) Interrupt flag CK Setting key DK Door key DK1 Projection DK2 Keyway PP Power plug PP1 Cord PP2 Attachment plug PP3 Plug blade

Claims (1)

In the advantageous zone, a predetermined lottery can be executed regarding advantageous games that are advantageous to the player,
During the normal period, a predetermined lottery regarding advantageous games that are advantageous to the player is not executed,
The order in which the stop switches are pressed has a recommended order and a non-recommended order.
If the stop switch is operated in a non-recommended pressing order during a predetermined game in an advantageous zone ("prescribed game" excludes advantageous games that are advantageous to the player. The same applies below), the predetermined processing for advantageous games that are advantageous to the player will not be executed,
When the stop switch is operated in a non-recommended pressing order in a predetermined game in an advantageous zone, a recommended image regarding the recommended pressing order of the stop switch can be displayed based on the first operation of the stop switch,
When the stop switch is operated in a non-recommended pressing order in a specific game in the normal section, a recommended image regarding the recommended pressing order of the stop switch can be displayed based on the first operation of the stop switch,
The recommended image regarding the recommended pressing order of the stop switches can be displayed from the time when the first stop switch is pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after all reels have stopped,
In a situation where a recommended image regarding the recommended order of pressing the stop switches is displayed, the display of the recommended image regarding the recommended order of pressing the stop switches can be terminated based on the operation of the start switch of the next game of the game in which the recommended image regarding the recommended order of pressing the stop switches is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized in that the recommended image regarding the recommended order of pressing the stop switches is an image displayed in a partial display area of a specified display device .